Full Catalog - Steven Engineering

Copy and paste this link to your website, so they can see this document directly without any plugins.


Keywords

.020, .031, lever, inches, max., amps, with, .004, Fig., double-throw, vac;, Switches, Single-pole, 0,28, Amps, switch, 0,51, plunger, roller, application, amps,, amp,, Type, switches, .346, min., contacts, Series, .110, .047

Transcript

Basic Switches
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 1
Door Switches Standard Basic Switches
Sealed/High Temperature Switches Miniature/Subminiature Switches
SUBMINIATURE/MINIATURE BASIC SWITCHES
The U Series of subminiature basic switches are our newest line. The US is the
smallest snap-action switch available. The UX and UM are versatile, low cost,
full featured products with ample electrical capacity in a compact package.
SM subminiature basic switches are a versatile collection of small size and
ample electrical capacities, including 11 amp power load handling and 1⁄4 hp
motor load. SX subminiature basic switches are smaller than SM switches,
yet are big in performance and selection. They provide up to 7 amp power
load capacity. V3 miniature basic switches put a 25 amp power load capacity
and a choice of 11 other electrical ratings into a relatively small package with
many choices of actuators, contact materials, and terminal designs. V7 miniature basic switches have electrical ratings up to 15 amps. Both commercial
and European versions are UL recognized and CSA certified. The latter is also
designed to meet all leading European approval agency requirements. TB
miniature basic small double-break units can control 2, 3 or 4 isolated circuits.
STANDARD BASIC SWITCHES
Power load switching and motor handling capacity are among the attractions
of thumb-size BZ/BA standard basic switches. Double-pole double-throw
switching is added by DT switches. Where there’s a need for reliable switching of high capacity systems involving DC motors and solenoids, MT magnetic blow-out switches do the job. The 3MN has double-break switching. 6AS
assemblies have two tandem mounted standard basic switches under a common actuator.
SEALED AND HIGH TEMPERATURE BASIC SWITCHES
Specially adapted basic switches include: SE/XE environment-proof switches which protect subminiature SM/SX basic switches within a sealed housing; HM hermetically sealed switches are interchangeable in operating point
with the SM switches; HS hermetically sealed switches which parallel the size
and mounting scheme of the standard basic switches; and HT high temperature switches for use up to +1000°F.
DOOR SWITCHES
AC, WW and DM switches automatically cut power when a service door or
drawer is opened.
Typical Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p. 2
Index by Product Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p. 3
Selection Guides. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p. 4 to 7
Catalog Listings/Order Guides . . . . . . . . . p. 8 to 93
Reference Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p. 94
Catalog Listing/Page Number Index . . . . . . . p. 102
S
electio
n Basic Switches
Subminiature/Miniature
20 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
ELECTRICAL DATA AND UL CODES
MINIATURE/SUBMINIATURE BASIC SWITCHES
Most of the switches in this section are UL recognized and CSA
certified. The current and voltage values shown are based on
test conditions specified by these agencies. Electrical life of the
switch is influenced by each application condition as well as by
voltage and current.
Circuitry Electrical Data
Single-pole
double-throw
A 5 amps res., 3 amps ind., (sea level),
4 amps res., 2 amps ind., (50,000
feet), 28 vdc
5 amps res. or ind. 115 vac, 60 Hz.
UL/CSA rating: 5 amps, 250 vac.
Single-pole
double-throw
B 7 amps res., 4 amps ind., (sea level),
7 amps res., 2.5 amps ind., (50,000
feet), 28 vdc.
UL/CSA rating: 7 amps, 250 vac.
Single-pole
double-throw
C 3.5 amps res., 2 amps ind., (sea level),
3.5 amps res., 1.5 amps ind., (50,000
feet), 28 vdc.
UL rating: 7 amps, 250 vac.
Single-pole
double-throw
D 1 amp res., 0.5 amp ind., (sea level
and 50,000 feet), 28 vdc.
UL/CSA rating: 1 amp, 125 vac.
Single-pole
double-throw
E 3 amps res., 2 amps ind., (sea level),
28 vdc.
UL rating: 3 amps, 250 vac.
Single-pole
double-throw
F 7 amps res., 4 amps ind., 2.5 amps
lamp load, (sea level),
4 amps res., 2.5 amps ind., 2.5 amps
lamp load, (50,000 feet), 28 vdc.
7 amps res., 7 amps ind., 2 amps lamp
load, 115 vac, 60 Hz (sea level).
Single-pole
double-throw
G 2 amps res., lamp ind., (sea level)
28 vdc.
Single-pole
double-throw
H .010 amp res. and ind., (sea level).
28 vdc.
UL/CSA rating: 1 amp, 125 vac.
Single-pole
double-throw
I 7 amps res., 4 amps ind., (sea level),
28 vdc.
Single-pole
double-throw
J 5 amps res., 3 amps ind., (sea level),
5 amps res., 2.5 amps ind.,
(50,000 feet), 28 vdc.
UL rating: 5 amps, 250 vac.
Single-pole
double-throw
K UL rating:
5 amps, 125 or 250 vac.
Single-pole
double-throw
L 1 amp res., 1/2 amp ind.,
(sea level) 28 vdc.
Single-pole
double-throw
M UL rating:
11 amps and 1/4 hp, 125 or 250 vac.
Single-pole
double-throw
N 1 amp res., 0.5 amp ind., 30 vdc.
UL rating: 1 amp, 125 vac.
Single-pole
double-throw
P 1 amp res., 30 vdc.
UL rating: .1 amp, 125 vac.
Single-pole
double-throw
R 5 amps res., 3 amps ind., 2.4 amps
lamp load (sea level),
5 amps res., 2.5 amps ind., 2.4 amps
lamp load, (50,000 feet), 28 vdc.
5 amps res., 5 amps ind., 1.5 amps
lamp load, 115 vac. 60 Hz (sea level)
Circuitry Electrical Data
Single-pole
double-throw
S UL rating:
4 amps, 250 vac.
Single-pole
double-throw
T UL/CSA rating:
11 amps and 1/3 hp, 125, 250, or 277
vac;
1/2 amp, 125 vdc; 1/4 amp, 250 vdc;
4 amps, 125 vac ‘‘L’’ (lamp load).
TT UL/CSA rating:
10 amps and 1/3 hp, 125 or 250 vac;
1/2 amp, 125 vdc; 1/4 amp, 250 vdc;
4 amps, 125 vac ‘‘L’’ (lamp load).
Single-pole
double-throw
unless
otherwise
noted in
order guide
UU 10 amps res., 10 amps ind., (sea
level),
6 amps ind. (50,000 feet), 6 amps
motor load, 30 vdc.
U UL/CSA rating:
15.1 amps and 1/2 hp, 125 or 250 vac.
1/2 amp, 125 vdc; 1/4 amp, 250 vdc;
5 amps, 120 vac ‘‘L’’ (lamp load).
Single-pole
double-throw
VV UL/CSA rating:
3 amps-125, 250, 277 vac;
1/10 hp-250 vac
Single-pole
double-throw
V UL/CSA rating:
10 amps and 1/4 hp, 125 or 250 vac;
1/2 amp, 125 vdc; 1/4 amp, 250 vdc;
3 amps, 125 vac ‘‘L’’ (lamp load).
Single-pole
double-throw
W 10 amps, 250 vac or 28 vdc;
1/2 amp, 125 vdc; 1/4 amp, 250 vdc.
Single-pole
double-throw
X UL rating:
1 amp, 125 vac.
Single-pole
double-throw
Y 10 amps and 1/3 hp, 125 or 250 vac;
4 amps, 125 vac ‘‘L’’ (lamp load).
Single-pole
double-throw
YY UL/CSA rating:
5 amps-125, 250, 277 vac
1/10 hp-250 vac
Two-circuit
double-break
Z 10 amps, 125 or 250 vac, or 30 vdc.
UL/CSA rating:
10 amps, 125 or 250 vac; 1/2 hp, 125
vac.
Four-circuit
double-break
Single-pole
double-throw
ZZ UL rating:
5 amps and 1/10 hp.
125 or 250 vac.
Single-pole
double-throw
AA UL rating:
20 amps, 277 vac.
1 hp, 125 vac; 2 hp, 250 vac.
Single-pole
double-throw
BB UL rating:
25 amps, 277 vac.
1 hp, 125 vac; 2 hp, 250 vac.
Basic Switches
Standard
46 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
ELECTRICAL DATA AND UL CODES STANDARD BASIC
SWITCHES
Most of the switches in this section are UL recognized and CSA
certified. The current and voltage values shown are based on
test conditions specified by these agencies. Electrical life of the
switch is influenced by each application condition as well as by
voltage and current. For application assistance contact the 800
number.
Electrical Data and
Circuitry UL Codes
Single-pole
double-throw
unless
otherwise noted
in order guide
A 15 amps, 125, 250 or 480 vac;
1⁄8 hp, 125 vac; 1⁄4 hp, 250 vac;
1⁄2 amp, 125 vdc; 1⁄4 amp,
250 vdc.
UL Code L96
Single-pole
double-throw
unless
otherwise noted
in order guide
B 5 amps, 125, 250 or 480 vac;
1⁄2 amp, 125 vdc; 1⁄4 amp, 250 vdc.
UL Code L35
Single-pole
double-throw
unless
otherwise noted
in order guide
C 10 amps, 125, 250 or 480 vac;
UL Code L8
Single-pole
double-throw
unless
otherwise noted
in order guide
D 15 amps, 125, 250 or 480 vac;
1⁄8 hp, 125 vac; 1⁄4 hp, 250 vac.
UL Code L103
Single-pole
double-throw
unless
otherwise noted
in order guide
E 15 amps, 125, 250 or 480 vac;
1⁄4 hp, 125 vac, 1⁄2 hp, 250 vac;
1⁄2 amp, 125 vdc; 1⁄4 amp, 250 vdc.
UL Code L67
Single-pole
double-throw
unless
otherwise noted
in order guide
F 22 amps, 125, 250 or 480 vac;
1⁄2 hp, 125 vac, 1 hp, 250 vac.
UL Code L161
Single-pole
double-throw
unless
otherwise noted
in order guide
G 20 amps, 125, 250 or 480 vac;
10 amps, 125 vac ‘‘L’’ (tungsten
lamp load);
1 hp, 125 vac; 2 hp, 250 vac;
1⁄2 amp, 125 vdc; 1⁄4 amp,
250 vdc.
UL Code L23
Single-pole
double-throw
unless
otherwise noted
in order guide
H Motor Control
25 amps, 125, 250 or 480 vac;
1 hp, 125 vac; 2 hp, 250 vac;
Pilot Duty—750 VA, 125, 250,
or 277 vac.
Single-pole
double-throw
unless
otherwise noted
in order guide
I 10 amps, 125, 250 or 480 vac;
1⁄8 hp, 125 vac; 1⁄4 hp, 250 vac;
UL Code L95
Electrical Data and
Circuitry UL Codes
Double-pole
double-throw
J 10 amps, 125 or 250 vac;
0.3 amp, 125 vdc; 0.15 amp,
250 vdc.
UL Code L59
Single-pole
double-throw
unless
otherwise noted
in order guide
K Rating established with
switch non-polarized
10 amps, 125 vac or vdc;
1⁄4 hp, 125 vac or vdc.
UL Code L 168
Non-polarized:
10 amps res. or 1⁄4 hp, 125 vdc;
3 amps max. res. 250 vdc.
Polarized*:
10 amps res. or 1⁄2 hp, 125 vdc;
3 amps max. res., 250 vdc.
*To polarize, connect negative side of line to common terminal. To
achieve the same effect, mount switch with brass screws, using a
non-magnetic barrier (at least 1⁄4 N thick) between the switch and
mounting surface.
Two-circuit
double-break
M25 amps, 125, 250 or 480 vac;
3⁄4 hp, 125 vac; 11⁄4 amp, 250 vac.
1 amp, 125 vdc; 1⁄2 amp, 250 vdc.
UL Code L58
Single-pole
double-throw
P 1 amp, 125 VAC
UL Code L22
Single-pole
double-throw
R 10 amps, 125 or 250 vac;
1⁄3 hp, 125 vac; 3⁄4 hp, 250 vac;
1⁄2 amp, 125 vdc; 1⁄4 amp,
250 vdc.
UL Code L115
Single-pole
double-throw
S 10 amps, 125 or 250 vac;
1⁄3 hp, 125 or 250 vac.
UL Code L93
Two-circuit
double-break
T 15 amps, 125, 250 or 480 vac;
1 amp, 125 vdc; 1⁄2 amp, 250 vdc;
1⁄4 hp, 125 vac; 1⁄2 hp, 250 vac
UL Code L73
Single-pole
double-throw
U 5 amps, 250 vac.
UL Code L4
Two-circuit
double-break
V Motor Control
15 amps, 120, 240, 480 or 600
vac;
1⁄2 hp, 120 vac; 1 hp, 240 vac;
0.8 amp, 115 vdc; 0.4 amp,
230 vdc.
Single-pole
single-throw
(N.C.)
W 20 amps, 125, 250 or 277 vac;
3⁄4 hp, 125 vac; 1⁄2 hp, 250 vac
UL Code L178B
Single-pole
double-throw
X 15 amps, 125, 250 or 480 vac;
2 amps, 600 vac;
1⁄8 hp, 125 vac; 1⁄4 hp, 250 vac;
1⁄2 amp, 125 vdc; 1⁄4 amp,
250 vdc.
UL Code L74
Single-pole
double-throw
Y 20 amps, 125, 250 or 480 vac;
3⁄4 hp, 125 vac; 11⁄2 hp, 250 vac; UL
Code L17
Basic Switches
Operating Characteristics
94 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
ELECTROMECHANICAL SWITCHES
Definitions below explain the meaning of
operating characteristics. Characteristics
shown in tables throughout catalog were
chosen as most significant. They are taken at normal room temperature and humidity. These may vary as temperature
and humidity conditions differ. Sketches
show how characteristics are measured
for in-line plunger actuation.
Linear dimensions for in-line actuation
are from top of plunger to a reference line,
usually the center of the mounting holes.
Differential Travel (D.T.)—Plunger or actuator travel from point where contacts
‘‘snap-over’’ to point where they ‘‘snapback.’’
Free Position (F.P.)—Position of switch
plunger or actuator when no external
force is applied (other than gravity).
Full Overtravel Force—Force required
to attain full overtravel of actuator.
Operating Position (O.P.)—Position of
switch plunger or actuator at which point
contacts snap from normal to operated
position. Note that in the case of flexible or
adjustable actuators, the operating position is measured from the end of the lever
or its maximum length. Location of operating position measurement shown on
mounting dimension drawings.
Operating Force (O.F.)—Amount of
force applied to switch plunger or actuator to cause contact ‘‘snap-over.’’ Note in
the case of adjustable actuators, the force
is measured from the maximum length
position of the lever.
Overtravel (O.T.)—Plunger or actuator
travel safely available beyond operating
position.
Pretravel (P.T.)—Distance or angle traveled in moving plunger or actuator from
free position to operating position.
Release Force (R.F.)—Amount of force
still applied to switch plunger or actuator
at moment contacts snap from operated
position to unoperated position.
Total Travel (T.T.)—Distance from actuator free position to overtravel limit position.
IN-LINE PLUNGER ACTUATION
Basic Switches
Operating Characteristics
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 95
FULL LOAD AND LOCKED ROTOR CURRENTS FOR SINGLE PHASE AND DC MOTORS
Alternating Current Direct Current
115 Volts 230 Volts 115 Volts 230 Volts
Full Locked Full Locked Full Locked Full Locked
HP Load Rotor Load Rotor Load Rotor Load Rotor
2 24.0 144.0 12.0 72.0 17.0 170.0 8.5 85.0
11⁄2 20.0 120.0 10.0 60.0 13.2 132.0 6.6 66.0
1 16.0 96.0 8.0 48.0 9.6 96.0 4.8 48.0
3⁄4 13.8 82.8 6.9 41.4 7.4 74.0 3.7 37.0
1⁄2 9.8 58.8 4.9 29.4 5.4 54.0 2.7 27.0
1⁄3 7.2 43.2 3.6 21.6 3.8 38.0 1.9 19.0
1⁄4 5.8 34.8 2.9 17.4 3.0 30.0 1.5 15.0
1⁄6 4.4 26.4 2.2 13.2 2.4 24.0 1.2 12.0
1⁄8 3.8 22.8 1.9 11.4 2.2 22.0 1.1 11.0
1⁄10 3.0 18.0 1.5 9.0 2.0 20.0 1.0 10.0
1⁄20 1.5 9.0 — — — — — —
R
eference/Ind
ex Basic Switches
B Type Switches Performance Information
96 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
ELECTRICAL DATA CHART
Amperes
Inrush Motor Lamp Inductive2
N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. Sea 50,000
Catalog
Listing
(contact
gap) Voltage
Current
Carrying
Capacity
Max.1 Resistive Ckt. Ckt. Ckt. Ckt. Ckt. Ckt. Level Feet
VDC
BZ-3YT* 8 5 10 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 10 10
.036 in. 14 5 10 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 10 10
0,91 mm 30 5 10 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 10 5
125 5 1 10 10 2 2 1 1 0.6 0.4
250 5 0.6 6 6 1.2 1.2 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.3
VAC
BZ-3YT* 120 5 5 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 5 5
.036 in. 240 5 5 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 5 5
0,91 mm 277 5 5 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 5 5
VDC
BM-2R 8 22 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 8 7
.020 in. 14 22 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 5 5
0,50 mm 30 22 2 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 1 1
125 22 0.4 4 4 0.8 0.4 0.4 0.4 .03 .02
230 22 0.2 2 2 0.4 0.2 0.2 0.2 .02 .01
VAC
BM-2R 125 22 22 35 20 5.8 3.4 3.5 2.0 22 22
.020 in. 250 22 22 35 20 5.8 3.4 3.5 2.0 22 22
0,50 mm 277 22 22 35 20 5.8 3.4 3.5 2.0 22 22
460 22 22 35 20 5.8 3.4 3.5 2.0 22 22
VDC
BA-2R 8 20 20 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
.020 in. 14 20 20 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 10 8
0,50 mm 30 20 5 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 5 2
125 20 0.5 4 4 0.8 0.4 0.4 0.4 .05 .03
230 20 0.25 2 2 0.4 0.2 0.2 0.2 .03 .02
VAC
BA-2R 120 20 20 75 75 12.5 12.5 7.5 7.5 20 20
.020 in. 240 20 20 75 75 12.5 12.5 7.5 7.5 20 20
0,50 mm 277 20 20 75 75 12.5 12.5 7.5 7.5 20 20
460 20 20 75 75 12.5 12.5 7.5 7.5 20 20
VDC
BE-2R 8 25 25 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
.020 in. 14 25 25 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 10 8
0,50 mm 30 25 5 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 5 2
125 25 0.5 4 4 0.8 0.8 0.4 0.4 .05 .03
250 25 0.25 2 2 0.4 0.4 0.2 0.2 .03 .02
VAC
BE-2R 120 25 25 96 96 16 16 10 10 25
.020 in. 240 25 25 96 96 16 16 10 10 25
0,50 mm 277 25 25 96 96 16 16 10 10 25
460 25 25 96 96 16 16 10 10 25
VAC
BZ-R 125 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
.006 in. 250 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
0,15 mm 277 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
VDC
BZ-1R 8 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 8 7
.010 in. 14 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 5 5
0,25 mm 30 15 2 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 1 1
125 15 0.4 4 4 0.8 0.8 0.4 0.4 0.03 0.01
230 15 0.2 2 2 0.4 0.4 0.2 0.2 0.02 0.01
VAC
BZ-1R 125 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
.010 in. 250 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
0,25 mm 277 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
460 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
*Ampere levels for BZ-3YT applicable only if common terminal is not used and switch is used as a shorting bar switch.
Basic Switches
B Type Switches Performance Information
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 97
ELECTRICAL DATA CHART, cont.
Amperes
Inrush Motor Lamp Inductive2
N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. Sea 50,000
Catalog
Listing
(contact
gap) Voltage
Current
Carrying
Capacity
Max.1 Resistive Ckt. Ckt. Ckt. Ckt. Ckt. Ckt. Level Feet
VDC
BZ-2R 8 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
.020 in. 14 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 10 8
0.50 mm 30 15 6 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 5 2
125 15 0.4 4 4 0.8 0.8 0.4 0.4 0.05 0.03
230 15 0.2 2 2 0.4 0.4 0.2 0.2 0.03 0.02
VAC
BZ-2R 125 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
.020 in. 250 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
0,50 mm 277 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
460 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
VDC
BZ-3R 8 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
.036 in. 14 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
0,91 mm 30 15 10 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 10 5
125 15 0.6 6 6 1.2 1.2 0.6 0.6 0.1 0.05
250 15 0.3 3 3 0.6 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.05 0.03
VAC
BZ-3R 125 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
.036 in. 250 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
0,91 mm 277 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
460 15 15 30 15 4 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
VDC
BZ-7R 8 30 15 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15 —
.070 in. 14 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
1,78 mm 30 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 10 7.5
125 15 0.75 7.5 7.5 1.5 1.5 0.75 0.75 0.4 0.2
250 15 0.3 3 3 0.6 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.2 0.1
VAC
BZ-7R 120 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
.070 in. 240 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
1,78 mm 277 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
460 15 15 30 15 5 2.5 3 1.5 15 15
1 For a 86−F (30−C) max. temperature rise at terminals, not opening or closing the load (at sea level).
2 Data established with a 75% power factor on AC loads.
TEST CONDITIONS
Switch contact life is affected by electrical conditions and other
factors, such as: temperature, humidity, airborne contamination, vibration, amount and rate of plunger travel, and cycling
rate. Our Evaluation Laboratory tests are conducted using procedures and practices common to UL and Military Specifications. The following conditions generally apply.
Temperature: Room Ambient (70−F, 21−C).
Humidity: Room Ambient (50%).
AC Cycle Rate: 60 operations/minute.
DC Cycle Rate: 20 operations/minute.
On-off Time: Equal and compatible with above cycling rates.
Power Factor (AC): Approximately 75%.
Inductance (DC): MIL-I-81023 Inductor.
Circuit Loading: One throw only on a SPDT switch during any test procedure. Both throws are evaluated separately.
Travel Plunger: Full switch travel is used.
Actuation: Linear motion.
Overtravel Force: 1 to 3 lbs. from spring-loaded actuators.
MICRO SWITCH believes that with the following voltage and
current values and under the test conditions set forth below
switch life of100,000 closures, 95% survival can be expected. It
is a starting point for user evaluation and provides guidelines
on the switches identified. Because of the numerous electrical
conditions listed, not every current and voltage level has actually been tested on every switch and certain figures have
been extrapolated. For specific switch selection, customers
should evaluate switches under actual application conditions
or by simulating all application conditions and requirements.
The information set forth cannot substitute for the customer’s
own product evaulation. It should never be published by a customer as a rating on their product.
R
eference/Ind
ex Basic Switches
Definitions of Terms
98 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
Actuator – Mechanism of the switch or
switch enclosure which operates the contacts.
Auxiliary Actuator – A mechanism, sold
separately, to provide basic switches with
easier means of operation and adjustment and adapt switches to different operating motions by supplying supplemental overtravel.
Basic Switch – A self-contained switching unit. It can be used alone, gangmounted, built into assemblies or enclosed in metal housings.
Bifurcated Contacts – A movable contact, generally gold plated, which is
forked to provide two contact mating surfaces in a parallel, for more reliable contact.
Break – To open an electrical circuit.
Break Distance – The minimum open
gap distance between stationary and
movable objects.
Characteristics – This term is used by
MICRO SWITCH in a restricted sense and
refers only to switch operating characteristics such as pretravel, operating force,
etc.
Circuit – The contact arrangement with
switch actuator and contacts in their normal position.
Dead break – Exists in all mechanical
switches. Definition: When the switch
plunger is being depressed, dead break
is non-contact immediately before the
plunger reaches the operating point.
When the switch plunger is being released, dead break is non-contact immediately before the plunger reaches the release point. Dead break is expressed in
distance of plunger travel during which
the non-contact occurs. Manufacturing
specifications for most BZ/BA basic
switches allow a maximum dead break of
0.00005 in. (0,001 mm) measured at the
switch plunger. Switches are evaluated
while moving the plunger with the switch
installed in a 10 VDC, 0.100 ampere circuit. This specifiction does not apply to
switches that have been in service or have
not received proper handling or storage.
For applications sensitive to dead break,
call Freeport for information on applicable electrical and mechanical conditions.
Dead make – When the switch plunger is
being depressed, dead make is non-contact immediately after the plunger reaches the release point. Dead make is expressed as the distance of plunger travel
during which the non-contact occurs.
Non contact is a failure of open contacts
to close (that is, the switch resistance exceeds the specified value) within the
specified range of plunger positions. If a
plunger position is specified with respect
to time, a non-contact is a contact miss.
Double Break Contacts – (Twin break).
This breaks the circuit in two places. Referred to as form Z circuitry also.
Form Z
Double-Pole Double-Throw (DPDT) –
Switches which make and break two separate circuits. This circuit provides a normally open and normally closed contact
for each pole.
Enclosed Switch – A basic switch unit
(contact block) enclosed in a durable
metal housing. The enclosure protects
the switching unit, provides mounting
means, and fitting for conduit connection.
Environment-Proof Switch – A switch
which is completely sealed to ensure constant operating characteristics. Sealing
normally includes an ‘‘O’’ ring on actuator
shaft and fused glass-to-metal terminal
seals or complete potting and an elastomer plunger-case seal.
Explosion-Proof Switch – A UL listed
switch capable of withstanding an internal explosion of a specified gas without
igniting surrounding gases.
Hermetically Sealed Switch – A switch
completely sealed to provide constant
operating characteristics. All junctures
made with metal-to-metal or glass-tometal fusion.
Magnetic Blow-Out Switch – Contains a
small permanent magnet which provides
a means of switching high d-c loads. The
magnet deflects arc to quench it.
Maintained Contact Switch – Designed
for applications requiring sustained contact after plunger has been released, but
with provision for resetting.
Make – To close or establish an electrical
circuit.
Momentary Switch – A switch with contacts that return from operated condition
to normal condition when actuating force
is removed. Unless otherwise stated, all
switches in this catalog are momentary.
Mounting Dimensions – All dimensions
on the mounting dimension drawings in
this catalog are subject to change without
notice. Request current drawings from
the nearest MICRO SWITCH Sales Office
or write to Freeport.
Normally Closed Contacts (N.C.) – Provide a normally closed circuit when actuator is in free position.
Normally Open Contacts (N.O.) – Provide a normally open circuit when actuator is in free position.
Precision Snap-Acting Switch – An
electromechanical switch having predetermined and accurately controlled characteristics, and having a spring loaded
quick make and break contact action.
Projection Contacts – A design in which
one or more truncated projections are arranged on the stationary contacts. When
closed on the smooth, spherical surface
of the opposing contact this configuration
tends to break thru oxides and other film
contaminants to avoid the particulate
contaminants. Used with silver contacts,
this design can be a useful substitute for
the more expensive gold or gold alloy
contact material.
Pulse Switch – Provides a single pulse of
current for each cycle of operation.
Quick Connect Terminal – A plug-in type
terminal designed for quick switch wiring.
Repeatability – Ability of a switch to repeat its characteristics precisely from one
operation to the next operation.
Single-Pole Double-Throw (SPDT) –
Switch which may either make or break a
circuit, depending on how it is wired. Also
referred to as form C circuitry.
Form C
Single-Pole Single-Throw (SPST) –
Switch with only one moving and one stationary contact. Available either normally
open (N.O.) also referred to as form A circuitry; or normally closed (N.C.) also referred to as form B circuitry.
Form A
Form B
Terminal Enclosure – A housing that fits
over switch terminals to protect against
electrical shock and accidental shorting,
and facilitate wiring.
Two Circuit Switch – In one position,
moving contacts complete one circuit, in
the other position, contacts complete another separate circuit.
Basic Switches US Series
Subminiature
8 HoneywelSensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
PC Terminal Version C NO
NC
FEATURES
1 MICRO SWITCH’S smallest snap-action switch
1 Choice of low energy or power duty electrical ratings
1 Variety of integral actuators
1 Temperature Range: −25° to +80°C (−13° to +176°F)
1 Weight: 0.2 grams (.007 oz.) – PC terminal type
0.3 grams (.011 oz.) – solder terminal type
1 Form C single-pole double-throw (SPDT) circuitry
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
Resistive Load
Gold Contacts Silver Contacts
Voltage US10 Type US20 Type
30 VDC 0.1 A 0.5 A
125 VAC 0.1 A 0.1 A
ORDER GUIDE SOLDER TERMINALS
O.F. max. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P
grams g mm mm mm mm
Contact Type Actuator oz. Solder ounces inches inches inches inches
Gold, 0.1 Amp A pin plunger 100 US10D10A00 10 0,3 0,1 0,1 5,4 ± 0,15
3.527 .353 .012 .004 .004 .213 ± .006
C flat lever 25 US10D10C00 2,0 2,4 0,4 0,7 6,4 ± 0,6
.88 .071 .094 .016 .028 .252 ± .024
E simulated 30 US10D10E00 2,0 2,2 0,3 0,7 6,7 ± 0,5
roller lever 1.058 .071 .087 .012 .028 .264 ± .020
Silver, 0.5 Amp A pin plunger 100 US20D10A00 10 0,3 0,1 0,1 5,4 ± 0,15
3.527 .353 .012 .004 .004 .213 ± .006
C flat lever 25 US20D10C00 2,0 2,4 0,4 0,7 6,4 ± 0,6
.88 .071 .094 .016 .028 .252 ± .024
E simulated 30 US20D10E00 2,0 2,2 0,3 0,7 6,7 ± 0,5
roller lever 1.058 .071 .087 .012 .028 .264 ± .020
ORDER GUIDE PC STRAIGHT TERMINALS
O.F. max. PC R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P
grams Straight g mm mm mm mm
Contact Type Actuator oz. Cross-Line ounces inches inches inches inches
Gold, 0.1 Amp A pin plunger 100 US10D20A00 10 0,3 0,1 0,1 4,8 ± 0,15
3.527 .353 .012 .004 .004 .189 ± .006
C flat lever 25 US10D20C00 1,0 2,4 0,4 0,7 5,8 ± 0,7
.88 .035 .094 .016 .028 .228 ± .028
E simulated 30 US10D20E00 1,0 2,2 0,3 0,7 6,1 ± 0,7
roller lever 1.058 .035 .087 .012 .028 .240 ± .028
Silver, 0.5 Amp A pin plunger 100 US20D20A00 10 0,3 0,1 0,1 4,8 ± 0,15
3.527 .353 .012 .004 .004 .189 ± .006
C flat lever 25 US20D20C00 1,0 2,4 0,4 0,7 5,8 ± 0,7
.88 .035 .094 .016 .028 .228 ± .028
E simulated 30 US20D20E00 1,0 2,2 0,3 0,7 6,1 ± 0,7
roller lever 1.058 .035 .087 .012 .028 .240 ± .028
OTHER TERMINATION TYPES ARE AVAILABLE
For PC right angle, change 2nd set of numbers to 50 (Example: US10D50A00)
For PC left angle, change 2nd set of numbers to 60 (Example: US10D60A00)
Basic Switches US Series
Subminiature
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 9
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS mm (for reference only)
in.
Solder Terminal Switches (with mounting holes)
Pin plunger (Type A) Flat lever (Type C) Simulated roller (Type E)
PC Board Terminals Switches
Pin plunger (Type A) Right angle terminal (Type 50)
Left angle terminal (Type 60) Flat lever (Type C) Simulated roller (Type E)
Mounting screw size is m 1,4.
Maximum tightening torque is 1 kg-cm.
M
iniature/
S
ub m iniature
Basic Switches UX Series
Subminiature
10 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
C NO
NC
FEATURES
1 Compact size – helps minimize equipment size
1 Choice of low energy or power duty electrical ratings
1 Variety of integral actuators
1 Temperature Range: –25° to +85°C (–13 to 185°F)
1 Weight: 0.5 grams (.018 oz.)
1 UL/CSA marking designations
1 Form C single-pole double-throw (SPDT) circuitry
ELECTRICAL RATINGS (in amps)
Silver Contacts Gold Contacts
Voltage UX40 Type UX30 Type UX10 Type
125 VAC* 3 A 1 A 0.1 A
30 VDC 2 A 1 A 0.1 A
6 VDC – – 5 mA
12 VDC – – 2 mA
24 VDC – – 1 mA
*UL/CSA rating. UL File No. E12252. UL Standard 1054.CSA file LR23413M167
ORDER GUIDE
Terminals
O.F. max. PC Straight R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P
grams Self- g mm mm mm mm
Rating Actuator oz. Solder Supporting ounces inches inches inches inches
Gold,
0.1 Amp 125 VAC
A pin plunger 75 UX10C10A01 UX10C30A01 10 0,5 0,25 0,12 5,5 ± 0,2
2.65 .353 .020 .010 .005 .217 ± .008
150 UX10E10A01 UX10E30A01 20 0,5 0,25 0,12 5,5 ± 0,2
5.3 .705 .020 .010 .005 .217 ± .008
C flat lever 25 UX10C10C01 UX10C30C01 2,5 2,1 0,55 0,50 6,8 ± 1,0
.88 .088 .083 .022 .020 .268 ± .039
50 UX10E10C01 UX10E30C01 5,0 2,1 0,55 0,50 6,8 ± 1,0
1.76 .176 .083 .022 .020 .268 ± .039
E roller lever 27 UX10C10E01 UX10C30E01 2,0 2,1 0,50 0,50 9,5 ± 1,0
simulated .95 .071 .083 .020 .020 .374 ± .039
55 UX10E10E01 UX10E30E01 4,0 2,1 0,50 0,50 9,5 ± 1,0
1.94 .141 .083 .020 .020 .374 ± .039
Silver,
1 Amp 125 VAC
A pin plunger 75 UX30C10A01 UX30C30A01 10 0,5 0,25 0,12 5,5 ± 0,2
2.65 .353 .020 .010 .005 .217 ± .008
C flat lever 25 UX30C10C01 UX30C30C01 2,5 2,1 0,55 0,50 6,8 ± 1,0
.88 .088 .083 .022 .020 .268 ± .039
E roller lever 27 UX30C10E01 UX30C30E01 2,0 2,1 0,50 0,50 9,5 ± 1,0
simulated .95 .071 .083 .020 .020 .374 ± .039
Silver,
3 Amp 125 VAC
A pin plunger 150 UX40E10A01 UX40E30A01 20 0,5 0,25 0,12 5,5 ± 0,2
5.3 .705 .020 .010 .005 .217 ± .008
C flat lever 50 UX40E10C01 UX40E30C01 5,0 2,1 0,55 0,50 6,8 ± 1,0
1.76 .176 .083 .022 .020 .268 ± .039
E roller lever 55 UX40E10E01 UX40E30E01 4,0 2,1 0,50 0,50 9,5 ± 1,0
simulated 1.94 .141 .083 .020 .020 .374 ± .039
OTHER TERMINATION TYPES ARE AVAILABLE
For PC right angle, change 2nd set of numbers to 50 (Example: UX10C50A01)
For PC left angle, change 2nd set of numbers to 60 (Example: UX10C60A01)
Basic Switches UX Series
Subminiature
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 11
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (for reference only) mm
in.
Pin plunger (Type A)
Solder terminals – Type 10 PC board terminals – Type 30
PC board mounting
Type 50 Type 60
LEVER ACTUATORS
UX Series switches with lever actuators can be operated by
cams or slides. They require lower operating forces than pin
plunger switches.
Flat levers are .520 in. (13,2 mm) long and simulated roller levers are .480 in. (12,2 mm) long.
Flat lever (Type C) Simulated Roller Lever (Type E)
Mounting screw size is 2 mm.
Maximum tightening torque is 1 kg-cm.
M
iniature/
S
ub m iniature
Basic Switches UM Series
Subminiature
12 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
C NO NC
FEATURES
1 Choice of low energy or power duty electrical
ratings
1 Variety of integral actuators
1 Temperature Range: −25° to +85°C (−13° to
185°F)
1 Weight: 2 grams (.07 oz.)
1 UL/CSA/VDE/SEMKO marking designations
1 Form C single-pole double-throw (SPDT) circuitry
ELECTRICAL RATINGS (in amps)
UM50E UM40B/D UM10A/B/D/E
Silver Contacts Silver Contacts Gold Contacts
Voltage Resistive Inductive Resistive Inductive Resistive
125 VAC 5 3 3 2 0.1
250 VAC 5 3 3 2 0.1
30 VDC 5 3* 3 2* 0.1
*Time constant for DC inductive loads: less than 7 msec.
UL File No. E12252, CSA File LR23413M167
ORDER GUIDE 0.1 AMP TYPE GOLD CONTACTS
O.F. max. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P
Actuator grams Terminals g mm mm mm mm
Rating Length oz. Solder .110 QC ounces inches inches inches inches
A pin plunger 25 UM10A10A01 UM10A70A01 2 0,6 0,4 0,1 8,4 ± 0,3
.88 .071 .024 .016 .004 .331 ± .012
0.1 Amp 50 UM10B10A01 UM10B70A01 7,5 0,6 0,4 0,1 8,4 ± 0,3
250 VAC 1.76 .265 .024 .016 .004 .331 ± .012
100 UM10D10A01 UM10D70A01 15 0,6 0,4 0,1 8,4 ± 0,3
3.57 .529 .024 .016 .004 .331 ± .012
150 UM10E10A01 UM10E70A01 20 0,6 0,4 0,1 8,4 ± 0,3
5.3 .705 .024 .016 .004 .331 ± .012
B flat lever 10 UM10A10B01 UM10A70B01 0,4 2,5 0,8 0,5 8,8 ± 0,8
18mm .35 .014 .098 .031 .020 .346 ± .031
20 UM10B10B01 UM10B70B01 1,7 2,5 0,8 0,5 8,8 ± 0,8
.7 .060 .098 .031 .020 .346 ± .031
40 UM10D10B01 UM10D70B01 3,5 2,5 0,8 0,5 8,8 ± 0,8
1.4 .123 .098 .031 .020 .346 ± .031
60 UM10E10B01 UM10E70B01 4,0 2,5 0,8 0,5 8,8 ± 0,8
2.1 .141 .098 .031 .020 .346 ± .031
C flat lever 8 UM10A10C01 UM10A70C01 0,35 2,8 1,2 0,8 8,8 ± 0,8
20mm .28 .012 .110 .047 .031 .346 ± .031
16 UM10B10C01 UM10B70C01 1,5 2,8 1,2 0,8 8,8 ± 0,8
.56 .053 .110 .047 .031 .346 ± .031
35 UM10D10C01 UM10D70C01 3,0 2,8 1,2 0,8 8,8 ± 0,8
1.23 .106 .110 .047 .031 .346 ± .031
55 UM10E10C01 UM10E70C01 3,5 2,8 1,2 0,8 8,8 ± 0,8
2 .123 .110 .047 .031 .346 ± .031
D flat lever 12 UM10B10D01 UM10B70D01 1,2 3,5 1,6 1,0 8,8 ± 1,2
26mm .4 .042 .138 .063 .039 .346 ± .047
25 UM10D10D01 UM10D70D01 2,5 3,5 1,6 1,0 8,8 ± 1,2
.88 .088 .138 .063 .039 .346 ± .047
45 UM10E10D01 UM10E70D01 3,0 3,5 1,6 1,0 8,8 ± 1,2
1.6 .106 .138 .063 .039 .346 ± .047
Basic Switches UM Series
Subminiature
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 13
ORDER GUIDE 0.1 AMP TYPE GOLD CONTACTS cont.
O.F. max. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P
Actuator grams Terminals g mm mm mm mm
Rating Length oz. Solder .110 QC ounces inches inches inches inches
0.1 Amp J flat lever 6 UM10B10J01 UM10B70J01 0,5 8,5 2,2 2,5 8,8 ± 2,4
250 VAC 60mm .2 .018 .335 .087 .098 .346 ± .094
15 UM10D10J01 UM10D70J01 1,0 8,5 2,2 2,5 8,8 ± 2,4
.52 .035 .335 .087 .098 .346 ± .094
20 UM10E10J01 UM10E70J01 1,0 8,5 2,2 2,5 8,8 ± 2,4
.7 .035 .335 .087 .098 .346 ± .094
0.1 Amp E simulated 16 UM10B10E01 UM10B70E01 1,5 2,8 1,2 0,8 11,65 ± 0,8
250 VAC roller lever, radius .56 .053 .110 .047 .031 .459 ± .031
2,5mm,
19mm
35 UM10D10E01 UM10D70E01 3,0 2,8 1,2 0,8 11,65 ± 0,8
1.23 .106 .110 .047 .031 .459 ± .031
55 UM10E10E01 UM10E70E01 3,5 2,8 1,2 0,8 11,65 ± 0,8
2 .123 .110 .047 .031 .459 ± .031
H simulated 16 UM10B10H01 UM10B70H01 1,5 2,8 1,2 0,8 10,7 ± 0,8
roller lever, radius .56 .053 .110 .047 .031 .421 ± .031
1,3mm,
19mm
35 UM10D10H01 UM10D70H01 3,0 2,8 1,2 0,8 10,7 ± 0,8
1.23 .106 .110 .047 .031 .421 ± .031
55 UM10E10H01 UM10E70H01 3,5 2,8 1,2 0,8 10,7 ± 0,8
2 .123 .110 .047 .031 .421 ± .031
0.1 Amp F roller lever 20 UM10B10F01 UM10B70F01 1,7 2,5 0,8 0,5 14,50 ± 0,8
250 VAC 18,00mm .7 .060 .098 .031 .020 .571 ± .031
40 UM10D10F01 UM10D70F01 3,5 2,5 0,8 0,5 14,50 ± 0,8
1.4 .123 .098 .031 .020 .571 ± .031
60 UM10E10F01 UM10E70F01 4,0 2,5 0,8 0,5 14,50 ± 0,8
2.1 .141 .098 .031 .020 .571 ± .031
OTHER TERMINATION TYPES ARE AVAILABLE
For PC Straight cross-line, change 2nd set of numbers to 20 (Example: UM10A20A01)
For PC Straight international, change 2nd set of numbers to 40 (Example: UM10A40A01)
For PC Straight right angle, change 2nd set of numbers to 50 (Example: UM10A50A01)
For PC Straight left angle, change 2nd set of numbers to 60 (Example: UM10A60A01)
M
iniature/
S
ub m iniature
Basic Switches UM Series
Subminiature
14 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
ORDER GUIDE 3 AND 5 AMP TYPE SILVER CONTACTS
O.F. max. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P
Actuator grams Terminals g mm mm mm mm
Rating Length oz. Solder .110 QC ounces inches inches inches inches
3 Amp A pin plunger 50 UM40B10A01 UM40B70A01 7,5 0,6 0,4 0,1 8,4 ± 0,3
250 VAC 1.76 .265 .024 .016 .004 .331 ± .012
100 UM40D10A01 UM40D70A01 15,0 0,6 0,4 0,1 8,4 ± 0,3
3.527 .529 .024 .016 .004 .331 ± .012
3 Amp B flat lever 20 UM40B10B01 UM40B70B01 1,7 2,5 0,8 0,5 8,8 ± 0,8
250 VAC 18mm .7 .060 .098 .031 .020 .346 ± .031
40 UM40D10B01 UM40D70B01 3,5 2,5 0,8 0,5 8,8 ± 0,8
1.4 .123 .098 .031 .020 .346 ± .031
C flat lever 16 UM40B10C01 UM40B70C01 1,5 2,8 1,2 0,8 8,8 ± 0,8
20mm .56 .053 .110 .047 .031 .346 ± .031
35 UM40D10C01 UM40D70C01 3,0 2,8 1,2 0,8 8,8 ± 0,8
1.23 .106 .110 .047 .031 .346 ± .031
D flat lever 12 UM40B10D01 UM40B70D01 1,2 3,5 1,6 1,0 8,8 ± 1,2
26mm .4 .042 .138 .063 .039 .346 ± .047
25 UM40D10D01 UM40D70D01 2,5 3,5 1,6 1,0 8,8 ± 1,2
.88 .088 .138 .063 .039 .346 ± .047
J flat lever 6 UM40B10J01 UM40B70J01 0,5 8,5 2,2 2,5 8,8 ± 2,4
60mm .2 .018 .335 .087 .098 .346 ± .094
15 UM40D10J01 UM40D70J01 1,0 8,5 2,2 2,5 8,8 ± 2,4
.52 .035 .335 .087 .098 .346 ± .094
3 Amp E simulated 16 UM40B10E01 UM40B70E01 1,5 2,8 1,2 0,8 11,65 ± 0,8
250 VAC roller lever, radius .56 .053 .110 .047 .031 .459 ± .031
2,5mm
19mm
35 UM40D10E01 UM40D70E01 3,0 2,8 1,2 0,8 11,65 ± 0,8
1.23 .106 .110 .047 .031 .459 ± .031
H simulated 16 UM40B10H01 UM40B70H01 1,5 2,8 1,2 0,8 10,7 ± 0,8
roller lever, radius .56 .053 .110 .047 .021 .421 ± .031
1,3mm
19,15mm
35 UM40D10H01 UM40D70H01 3,0 2,8 1,2 0,8 10,7 ± 0,8
1.23 .106 .110 .047 .031 .421 ± .031
F roller lever 20 UM40B10F01 UM40B70F01 1,7 2,5 0,8 0,5 14,50 ± 0,8
18mm .7 .060 .098 .031 .020 .571 ± .031
40 UM40D10F01 UM40D70F01 3,5 2,5 0,8 0,5 14,50 ± 0,8
1.4 .123 .098 .031 .020 .571 ± .031
5 Amp A pin plunger 150 UM50E10A01 UM50E70A01 20 0,6 0,4 0,1 8,4 ± 0,3
250 VAC 5.3 .705 .024 .016 .004 .331 ± .012
B flat lever 60 UM50E10B01 UM50E70B01 4,0 2,5 0,8 0,5 8,8 ± 0,8
18mm 2.1 .141 .098 .031 .020 .346 ± .031
C flat lever 55 UM50E10C01 UM50E70C01 3,5 2,8 1,2 0,8 8,8 ± 0,8
20mm 2 .123 .110 .047 .031 .346 ± .031
D flat lever 45 UM50E10D01 UM50E70D01 3,0 3,5 1,6 1,0 8,8 ± 1,2
26mm 1.6 .106 .138 .063 .039 .346 ± .047
J flat lever UM50E10J01 UM50E70J01 1,0 8,5 2,2 2,5 8,8 ± 2,4
60mm .035 .335 .087 .098 .346 ± .094
E simulated 55 UM50E10E01 UM50E70E01 3,5 2,8 1,2 0,8 11,65 ± 0,8
roller lever, radius 2 .123 .110 .047 .031 .459 ± .031
2,5mm
19mm
H simulated 55 UM50E10H01 UM50E70H01 3,5 2,8 1,2 0,8 10,7 ± 0,8
roller lever, radius 2 .123 .110 .047 .031 .421 ± .031
1,3mm
19mm
F roller lever 60 UM50E10F01 UM50E70F01 4,0 2,5 0,8 0,5 14,50 ± 0,8
18mm 2.1 .141 .098 .031 .020 .571 ± .031
OTHER TERMINATION TYPES ARE AVAILABLE
For PC Straight cross-line, change 2nd set of numbers to 20 (Example: UM40B20A01)
For PC Straight international, change 2nd set of numbers to 40 (Example: UM40B40A01)
For PC Straight right angle, change 2nd set of numbers to 50 (Example: UM40B50A01)
For PC Straight left angle, change 2nd set of numbers to 60 (Example: UM40B60A01)
Basic Switches UM Series
Subminiature
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 15
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (for reference only) mm
in.
Pin Plunger Type A
Solder Cross-line Terminals – Type 10 PC Straight Cross-Line – Type 20 PC Straight In-line – Type 40
PC Right Angle In-line – Type 50 PC Left Angle In-line – Type 60 QC Quick Connect – Type 70
Lever Actuators 4mm (.158) wide
18mm Flat Lever Type B 20mm Flat Lever Type C 26mm Flat Lever Type D
60mm Type J
19mm Simulated Roller Type E/H 18mm Roller Lever Type F
Type H has 1,3mm radius 5mm (.197 in.) dia. x 3,2mm (.126 in.)
Type E has 2,5mm radius thick roller
Mounting screw size is m 2,3.
Maximum tightening torque is 3 kg-cm.
M
iniature/
S
ub m iniature
Basic Switches UM Series
Sealed Subminiature
16 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
IP50-SEALED IP67-SEALED
FEATURES
1 Silver or gold contacts
1 Variety of integral actuator styles including pin
plunger, flat lever, roller lever, and simulated
roller lever
1 IP50 or IP67 type sealing
1 Choice of quick-connect, printed circuit board,
solder or leadwire termination
1 Form C single-pole double-throw
1 Temperature range: −40° to 85°C (−40° to
185°F)
1 Weight, approx.: .07 oz. (2g.) for IP50-sealed
switches; and .14 oz. (4g.) for IP67-sealed
switches, not including leadwires
1 UL, CSA, VDE, and SEMKO marking
designations
ELECTRICAL RATINGS (in amps)
Silver Contacts Gold Contacts
Voltage Resistive Inductive Resistive
125 VAC 2.0 2.0 0.1A
250 VAC 2.0 2.0 0.1A
30 VDC 2.0 2.0 0.1A
125 VDC 0.4 0.05 —
UL File No. E12252, CSA File LR23413M167
IP50-sealed UM switches are the same size as non-sealed UM switches on
pages 12-15. There is an elastomer seal on the switch plunger and a cover-tocase seal. They provide a degree of protection against the entry of dust.
IP67-sealed UM switches have the plunger seal and cover-to-case seal. In
addition, their AWG #20 leadwires are molded in epoxy resin. They provide a
degree of protection against water entry during temporary immersion.
Basic Switches UM Series
IP50-Sealed Subminiature
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 17
C NO NC
ORDER GUIDE IP50 SEALED 0.1-AMP GOLD CONTACTS
O.F. max. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P
grams Termination grams mm mm mm mm
Actuators oz. Solder .110 QC ounces inches inches inches inches
A pin plunger 150 UM10E11AS1 UM10E71AS1 20 0,6 0,4 0,1 8,4 ± 0,3
5.3 .705 .024 .016 .004 .331 ± .012
B flat lever 60 UM10E11BS1 UM10E71BS1 4,0 2,5 0,8 0,5 8,8 ± 0,8
2.1 .141 .098 .031 .020 .346 ± .031
C flat lever 55 UM10E11CS1 UM10E71CS1 3,5 2,8 1,2 0,8 8,8 ± 0,8
1.9 .123 .110 .047 .031 .346 ± .031
D flat lever 45 UM10E11DS1 UM10E71DS1 3,0 3,5 1,6 1,0 8,8 ± 1,2
1.6 .106 .138 .063 .039 .346 ± .047
E simulated 55 UM10E11ES1 UM10E71ES1 3,5 2,8 1,2 0,8 11,65 ± 0,8
roller lever 1.9 .123 .110 .047 .031 .459 ± .031
F roller 60 UM10E11FS1 UM10E71FS1 4,0 2,5 0,8 0,5 14,5 ± 0,8
lever 2.1 .141 .098 .031 .020 .571 ± .031
ORDER GUIDE IP50 SEALED 2.0-AMP SILVER CONTACTS
O.F. max. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P
grams Termination grams mm mm mm mm
Actuators oz. Solder .110 QC ounces inches inches inches inches
A pin plunger 150 UM35E11AS1 UM35E71AS1 20 0,6 0,4 0,1 8,4 ± 0,3
5.3 .705 .024 .016 .004 .331 ± .012
B flat lever 60 UM35E11BS1 UM35E71BS1 4,0 2,5 0,8 0,5 8,8 ± 0,8
2.1 .141 .098 .031 .020 .346 ± .031
C flat lever 55 UM35E11CS1 UM35E71CS1 3,5 2,8 1,2 0,8 8,8 ± 0,8
1.9 .123 .110 .047 .031 .346 ± .031
D flat lever 45 UM35E11DS1 UM35E71DS1 3,0 3,5 1,6 1,0 8,8 ± 1,2
1.6 .106 .138 .063 .039 .346 ± .047
E simulated 55 UM35E11ES1 UM35E71ES1 3,5 2,8 1,2 0,8 11,65 ± 0,8
roller lever 1.9 .123 .110 .047 .031 .459 ± .031
F roller 60 UM35E11FS1 UM35E71FS1 4,0 2,5 0,8 0,5 14,5 ± 0,8
lever 2.1 .141 .098 .031 .020 .571 ± .031
TO SPECIFY PC TERMINALS:
In the order guides above, change the 2nd set of numbers to 21. Example: UM10E11AS1 converts to UM10E21AS1 with PC terminals
M
iniature/
S
ub m iniature
Basic Switches UM Series
IP67-Sealed Subminiature
18 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
C NO NC
ORDER GUIDE IP67 SEALED 0.1-AMP GOLD AND 2.0-AMP SILVER CONTACTS
O.F. max. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P
grams Leadwire Termination grams mm mm mm mm
Actuators oz. Gold Contacts Silver Contacts ounces inches inches inches inches
A pin plunger 150 UM10E90AS1 UM35E90AS1 20 0,6 0,4 0,1 8,4 ± 0,3
5.3 .705 .024 .016 .004 .331 ± .012
B flat lever 60 UM10E90BS1 UM35E90BS1 4,0 2,5 0,8 0,5 8,8 ± 0,8
2.1 .141 .098 .031 .020 .346 ± .031
C flat lever 55 UM10E90CS1 UM35E90CS1 3,5 2,8 1,2 0,8 8,8 ± 0,8
1.9 .123 .110 .047 .031 .346 ± .031
D flat lever 45 UM10E90DS1 UM35E90DS1 3,0 3,5 1,6 1,0 8,8 ± 1,2
1.6 .106 .138 .063 .039 .346 ± .047
E simulated 55 UM10E90ES1 UM35E90ES1 3,5 2,8 1,2 0,8 11,65 ± 0,8
roller lever 1.9 .123 .110 .047 .031 .459 ± .031
F roller 60 UM10E90FS1 UM35E90FS1 4,0 2,5 0,8 0,5 14,5 ± 0,8
lever 2.1 .141 .098 .031 .020 .571 ± .031
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
(For reference only)
Pin Plunger Type A
mm in.
Mounting screw size is m 2,3
Maximum torque is 3 kg/cm.
PC Terminals Solder In-line Terminals
Basic Switches UM Series
IP50-Sealed Subminiature
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 19
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
(For reference only)
Pin Plunger Type A
mm in.
Mounting screw size is m 2,3
Maximum torque is 3 kg/cm.
QC In-line Terminals Leadwires
Lever Actuators 4 mm/.158 in. wide
18 mm Flat Lever Type B 19 mm Simulated Roller Lever Type E
2,5 mm radius
20 mm Flat Lever Type C
26 mm Flat Lever Type D
18 mm Roller Lever Type F
5 mm/.197 in. dia. x 3,2 mm/.126 in.
Thick Roller
M
iniature/
S
ub m iniature
Basic Switches SX Series
Subminiature
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 21
CUT-A-WAY 1SX SUBMINIATURE BASIC SWITCH
AVAILABLE TERMINALS
SX switches are available with several
types of terminations. The T and T2 terminals provide easy solder lead wire attachment. The H58 terminal offers the simplicity of quick-connect and mate with AMP
.058-inch receptacles. Pin terminals allow
easy attachment to printed circuit boards.
GENERAL INFORMATION
SX subminiature basic switches are small
size precision snap-action switches from
MICRO SWITCH. These switches are ideal where savings in space and weight are
important. Unless otherwise noted, all
listings have silver contacts.
FEATURES
1 Low operating force to 3 oz. (85 grams)
maximum
1 Sensitive differential travel as low as
.001 inch maximum
1 Power load switching capability up to 7
amperes—silver contacts
1 Optional gold contacts for low energy
applications
1 Optional bifurcated gold contacts for
maximum reliability
1 Long mechanical life up to 10,000,000
cycles—95% survival for 11SX series
1,000,000 cycles—95% survival for1SX
series
1 Temperature tolerance −65° to
+250°F (−54 to 121°C) on standard
construction
1 High temperature designs for up to
+400°F (204°C) for 100 hours
1 Variety of integral and auxiliary
actuators
1 Choice of several terminal styles
1 MIL-S-8805 qualified products
available
1 UL recognized File #E12252, CSA certified file # LR41372
T T2
H391, H392
H58 STRAIGHT PIN 90° FORMED PIN
Mate with Amp Inc. Part No.
640024-1 Std.
Mounting torque Round
head 2-56 UNC 438
screws—
2 inch pounds max.
Dimensions shown are for reference only
This section covers only 40 of our most popular SX Series catalog listings. If you don’t find what you’re looking for, it’s
likely one of the approximately 200 other active SX listings will meet your needs. Contact the 800 number.
M
iniature/
S
ub m iniature
Basic Switches SX Series
Subminiature
22 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
ORDER GUIDE by ascending electrical capability
PIN PLUNGER
Electrical
Data and O.F. max. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P.*
Catalog UL Code newtons newtons mm mm mm mm
Listing Recommended for Page 20 ounces ounces inches inches inches inches
11SX91-T Logic level loads At 1,39 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,1 8,13
5VDC, 2mA; SPNO Left 5 1 .020 .004 .004 .320
12SX2-T Best reliability .010 Amp 0,7 to 1.39 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,051 8,13
(Bifurcated gold contacts) H 2.5 to 5 1 .020 .004 .002 .320
3SX1-T Applications requiring gold 1 Amp 1,39 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,13 8,13
contacts (1SX type) D 5 1 .020 .004 .005 .320
12SX1-T Best reliability with 1 Amp 1,39 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,076 8,13
higher current rating D 5 1 .020 .004 .003 .320
(Bifurcated gold contacts)
12SX3-T Lowest differential travel 1 Amp 1,39 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,025 8,13
with bifurcated gold contacts H 5 1 .020 .004 .001 .320
13SX21-T Applications requiring gold 1 Amp 1,39 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,051 8,13
contacts. 11SX type. D 5 1 .020 .004 .002 .320
23SX39-T MIL-S-8805 applications 1 Amp 1,39 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,13 8,13
(MS24547-2) requiring gold contacts D 5 1 .020 .004 .005 .320
+180°F (82°C) max. use
23SX39-T2 As above, with 1 Amp 1,39 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,13 8,13
(MS24547-5) T2 terminals D 5 1 .020 .004 .005 .320
93SX39-T .156N wide, with gold
contacts +180°F (82°C)
1 Amp 1,39 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,13 8,13
M8805/109-03 D 5 1 .020 .004 .005 .320
411SX21-T +400°F (204°C) G 1,39 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,13 8,13M8805/106-01 for 100 hours 5 1 .020 .004 .005 .220
413SX21-T +400°F (204°C) L 1,39 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,051 8,13M8805/106-02 for 100 hours 5 1 .020 .004 .002 .220
11SX1-T Lowest differential travel 3 Amps 0,97 0,21 0,51 0,1 0,025 8,13
E 3.5 0.75 .020 .004 .001 .320
11SX21-T Most applications 5 Amps 0,7 to 1,39 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,051 8,13
A 2.5 to 5 1 .020 .004 .002 .320
11SX22-T For use in sealed 5 Amps 1,39 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,076 8,13
enclosures. A 5 1 .020 .004 .003 .320
17SX21-T Best stability under varying 5 Amps 1,39 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,051 8,13
humidity. 11SX type. A 5 1 .020 .004 .002 .320
1SX1-T Up to 7 amps load handling 7 Amps 1,39 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,13 8,13
B 5 1 .020 .004 .005 .320
1SX12-T Low differential travel 7 Amps 1,39 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,051 8,13
C 5 1 .020 .004 .002 .320
1SX48-T Added overtravel 7 Amps 1,39 0,28 0,51 0,25 0,13 8,13
B 5 1 .020 .010 .005 .320
2SX1-T Lower force 7 Amps 0,83 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,13 8,13
B 3 1 .020 .004 .005 .320
4SX1-T Operating in temperature 7 Amps 1,39 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,13 8,13
to +400°F (204°C)
for 100 hours
I 5 1 .020 .004 .005 .320
21SX1-T Best stability under varying 7 Amps 1,39 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,13 8,13
humidity (1SX type) B 5 1 .020 .004 .005 .320
21SX39-T MIL-S-8805 application 7 Amps 1,39 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,13 8,13
(MS24547-1) requirements +180°F (82°C) F 5 1 .020 .004 .005 .320
21SX39-T2 MIL-S-8805 application 7 Amps 1,39 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,13 8,13
(MS24547-4) requirements +180°F (82°C) F 5 1 .020 .004 .005 .320
91SX39-T .156N wide version 7 Amps 1,39 0,28 0,51 0,1 0,13 8,13
M8805/109-01 of standard SX +180°F
(82°C)
F 5 1 .020 .004 .005 .320
*±0,38 mm
±.015 in.
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 1
(Except Fig. 2
for 91SX39-T
and 93SX34-T)
Basic Switches SX Series
Subminiature
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 23
Characteristics: O.F. – Operating Force; R.F. – Release Force; P.T. –
Pretravel; O.T. – Overtravel; D.T. – Differential Travel; O.P. – Operating
PositionORDER GUIDE
INTEGRAL LEVERS
Electrical
Data And O.F. max. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P.
Catalog UL Code newtons newtons mm mm mm mm
Listing Description Page 20 ounces ounces inches inches inches inches
311SX1-T .135 inch (3,43 mm)
straight lever
5 Amps 0,49 0,09 1,65 0,36 0,51 8,43±1,14
A 1.76 .32 .065 .014 .020 .332±.045
313SX1-T As above with gold
contacts
1 Amp 0,49 0,09 1,65 0,36 0,51 8,43±1,14
D 1.76 .32 .065 .014 .020 .332±.045
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 3
311SX2-T .505 inch (12,8 mm)
straight lever
5 Amps 0,31 0,05 2,92 0,64 0,89 8,26±1,91
A 1.1 .18 .115 .025 .035 .325±.075
313SX2-T As above with gold
contacts
1 Amp 0,31 0,05 2,92 0,64 0,89 8,26±1,91
D 1.1 .18 .115 .025 .035 .325±.075Dim. Dwg. Fig. 3
311SX3-T .965 inch (24,5 mm)
straight lever
5 Amps 0,20 0,03 4,70 0,61 1,52 7,75±2,92
A .71 .11 .185 .024 .060 .305±.115
313SX3-T As above with gold
contacts
1 Amp 0,20 0,03 4,70 0,61 1,52 7,75±2,92
D .71 .11 .185 .024 .060 .305±.115Dim. Dwg. Fig. 4
311SX4-T .042 inch (1,1 mm)
simulated roller lever
5 Amps 0,58 0,11 1,27 0,25 0,38 14,15±0,91
A 2.1 .39 .050 .010 .015 .557±.036
313SX4-T As above with gold
contacts
1 Amp 0,58 0,11 1,27 0,25 0,38 14,15±0,91
D 2.1 .39 .050 .010 .015 .557±.036Dim. Dwg. Fig. 5
311SX5-T .459 inch (11,7 mm)
simulated roller lever
5 Amps 0,31 0,05 2,67 0,56 0,89 14,86±1,65
A 1.1 .18 .105 .022 .035 .585±.065
313SX5-T As above, with gold
contacts
1 Amp 0,31 0,05 2,67 0,56 0,89 14,86±1,65
D 1.1 .18 .105 .022 .035 .585±.065Dim. Dwg. Fig. 6
M
iniature/
S
ub m iniature
Basic Switches SX
Subminiature
24 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
Characteristics: O.F. – Operating Force; R.F. – Release Force; P.T. –
Pretravel; O.T. – Overtravel; D.T. – Differential Travel; O.P. – Operating
Position; F.P. – Free Position.
*All characteristics are taken with actuator assembled on Catalog Listing 1SX1-T as shown.
ORDER GUIDE
AUXILIARY
ACTUATORS
Switches are not
included with
actuators.
Actuator
Length
‘‘A’’ O.F. max. R.F. min. P.T. O.T. D.T. max. O.P.†† F.P.
Catalog mm newtons newtons mm mm mm mm mm
Listing Description inches ounces ounces inches inches inches inches inches
JX-20 Straight lever 18.3 0,28 0,04 — 0,76 0,76 10,8 12,3
.72 1 .14 .030 .030 .425 .485
approx. approx. approx. approx. approx.
JX-219 Straight lever 18,3 0,28 0,04 — 0,76 0,76 10,8 12,3
(For higher temp.) .72 1 .14 .030 .030 .425 .485
approx. approx. approx. approx.
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 7
JX-25 Roller lever 16,5 0,42 0,04 — 0,51 0,76 14,9J1,14 168
.65 1.5 1.4 .020 .030 .585J.045 .660
max.
JX-220 Roller lever 16,5 0,42 0,04 — 0,51 0,76 14,9J1,14 16,8
(For higher temp.) .65 1.5 .14 .020 .030 .585J.045 .660
max.Dim. Dwg. Fig. 8
JX-40 Straight leaf 9,4 1,95 0,56 .225 0,38 0,64 7,5 12,3
.37† 7 2 approx. .015 .025 .295 .485
ref.
JX-95 Straight leaf 9,4 1,95 0,56 .225 0,38 0,64 7,5 12,3
(For higher temp.) .37† 7 2 approx. .015 .025 .295 .485
ref.
JX-41** Reverse leaf 9,4 1,67 0,28 .110 0,38 0,64 7,5 9,4
.37† 6 1 approx. .015 .025 .295 .370
ref.
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 9
JX-45 Roller leaf 6,1 1,95 0,28 .225 0,38 0,64 12,2 16,5
.24† 7 1 approx. .015 .025 .480 .650
ref.
JX-96 Roller leaf 6,1 1,95 0,28 .225 0,38 0,64 12,2 16,5
(For higher temp.) .24† 7 1 approx. .015 .025 .480 .650
ref.
JX-51** Reverse roller leaf 7,6 1,67 0,56 .110 0,38 0,64 12,8 14,7
.30† 6 2 approx. .015 .025 .505 .580
ref.
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 9
JX-4 Tandem leaf 7,9 4,17 0,83 .065 0,20 0,76 7,6 9,40
.31 15 3 approx. .008 .030 .300 .370
ref.
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 10
**Switch is mounted with plunger end reversed
from JX-40.
†‘‘A’’ measurement is from center of mounting
hole nearest tip of lever to the point indicated on
drawing.
NOTE: Above actuators should be used at temperatures below +300°F (149°C); except listings
JX-95, JX-96, JX-219 and JX-220 are for use with
the 4SX1-T to 400°F. (204°C).
Except where stated †† ±0,76 mm
±.030 in.
Basic Switches SX Series
Subminiature
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 25
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (for reference only)
PIN PLUNGER INTEGRAL LEVERS
Dim. ‘‘A’’
311SX1-T 3,6/.14
311SX2-T 13,0/.51
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3
INTEGRAL LEVERS
Interchangeable with 1SX-1T switch with
JX-25 actuator.
Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6
AUXILIARY ACTUATORS
Fig. 7 Fig. 8 Fig. 9 Fig. 10
Switches are not included with actuator. Mounting holes accept pins or screws of
.087 diameter (2,21 mm).
M
iniature/
S
ub m iniature
Basic Switches SM Series
Subminiature
26 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
CUT-A-WAY SM SUBMINIATURE BASIC SWITCH
AVAILABLE TERMINALS
Various terminals are available for most
listings. These include: the T and T2 for
wrap-around soldering of leadwires; solder terminals for solder connections; H58
terminals and H4 series terminals provide
easy quick-connect installation; H2 type,
round wire wrap or PC terminals; H6 rectangular wire wrap terminals are also available. Other quick-connect terminals of
the Series H types are available. Contact
the 800 number for ordering information.
GENERAL INFORMATION
SM subminiature switches are slightly
larger than the SX switches. These
switches combine small size and light
weight with ample electrical capacity, precision operation and long life. Unless otherwise noted, all listings have silver contacts.
T SOLDER T2
H4 H58 H2
Mates with Amp Inc. Part
No. 640024-1 Std.
Dimensions shown are for reference only
FEATURES
1 Low operating force to 2 ounces
maximum
1 Sensitive differential travel as low as
.001 inch (0,025 mm) maximum
1 Power load switching capability
available to 11 amps (VAC) – silver
contacts
1 Motor load handling capacity to 1/4
hp (VAC)
1 Optional gold contacts for low energy
applications
1 Optional bifurcated gold contacts for
maximum reliability
1 Long mechanical life
– 11SM Series 10,000,000
operations
– 1SM/41SM Series 80,000
operations
– Bifurcated contacts 1,000,000
operations
All at 95% survival
1 Standard temperature range −65° to
+185°F (−54 to 85°C)
1 High temperature construction
available for use to +400°F (204°C)
for 100 hours
1 Variety of integral and auxiliary
actuators
1 Choice of several terminal styles
1 Military Standard construction
available with three listings on the
MIL-S-8805 qualified products list
1 UL recognized File #E12252, CSA
certified File #LR41372
Mounting Torque:
2.3 inch pounds max.
This section covers only 38 of our most popular SM Series catalog listings. If you don’t find what you’re looking for, it’s
likely one of the approximately 500 other active SM listings will meet your needs. Contact the 800 number.
Basic Switches SM Series
Subminiature
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 27
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; R.F. — Release
Force; P.T. — Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. —
Differential Travel; O.P. — Operating Position.
ORDER GUIDE by ascending electrical capability
PIN PLUNGERS
Electrical
Data And O.F. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P.*
Catalog UL Code newtons newtons mm mm mm mm
Listing Recommended For Page 20 ounces ounces inches inches inches inches
11SM1077-T Gold alloy contacts .1 Amp 0,83-1,39 0,28 0,51 0,13 0,1 8,38
P 3-5 1 .020 .005 .004 .330
12SM604-T Bifurcated gold contacts, .1 Amp 0,83-1,39 0,28 0,51 0,076 0,1 8,38
reduced rating P 3-5 1 .020 .003 .004 .330
11SM23-T Application requiring gold 1 Amp 0,83-1,39 0,28 0,51 0,13 0,1 8,38
contacts N 3-5 1 .020 .005 .004 .330
12SM4-T Best reliability 1 Amp 0,83-1,39 0,28 0,51 0,076 0,1 8,38
(Bifurcated gold contacts) N 3-5 1 .020 .003 .004 .330
11SM701-T Lower force 4 Amps 0,56 0,14 0,51 0,13 0,051 8,38
S 2 .5 .020 .005 .002 .330
11SM1-T Most applications 5 Amps 0,83-1,39 0,28 0,51 0,13 0,1 8,38
J 3-5 1 .020 .005 .004 .330
11SM3-T Operating in temperatures 5 Amps 0,83-1,39 0,28 0,51 0,13 0,1 8,38
to +250°F (121°C) J 3-5 1 .020 .005 .004 .330
11SM244-T Operating in temperatures 5 Amps 0,83-1,39 0,28 0,51 0,13 0,1 8,38
to +400°F (204°C) 100 hrs. * 3-5 1 .020 .005 .004 .330
11SM401-T Less differential travel 5 Amps 0,97 0,28 0,51 0,13 0,025 8,38
K 3.5 1 .020 .005 .001 .330
max.
21SM284-T2 MIL-S-8805 application 5 Amps 0,83-1,39 0,28 0,76 0,13 0,1 8,38
(MS25085-2) requirements R 3-5 1 .030 .005 .004 .330
21SM284 MIL-S-8805 application 5 Amps 0,83-1,39 0,28 0,76 0,13 0,1 8,38
(MS25085-1) requirements, R 3-5 1 .030 .005 .004 .330
solder terminals
22SM1-T Best stability under 5 Amps 0,83-1,39 0,28 0,51 0,13 0,1 8,38
varying humidity J 3-5 1 .020 .005 .004 .330
41SM1-T Up to 11 ampere 1/4 hp 11 Amps 0,83-1,39 0,28 0,76 0,13 0,1 8,38
(AC) load handling M 3-5 1 .030 .005 .004 .330
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 1
*For electrical data call 1-800-537-6945
411SM1 Sealed plunger
construction
5 Amps 0,83-2,09 0,28 0,51 0,13 0,1 8,38
K 3-7.5 1 .020 .005 .004 .330
411SM23 As above with gold
contacts
1 Amp 0,83-2,09 0,28 0,51 0,13 0,1 8,38
N 3-7.5 1 .020 .005 .004 .330
Except where stated * ±0,38mm
±.015 in.
M
iniature/
S
ub m iniature
Basic Switches SM Series
Subminiature
28 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; R.F. — Release
Force; P.T. — Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential
Travel; O.P. — Operating Position.
ORDER GUIDE
INTEGRAL LEVERS
Electrical
Data And O.F. max. R.F. max. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P.
Catalog UL Code newtons newtons mm mm mm mm
Listing Description Page 20 ounces ounces inches inches inches inches
311SM1-T .285 inch (7,24mm) 5 Amps 0,39 0,07 2,16 0,51 0,48 8,64±1,5
straight lever J 1.4 .25 .085 .020 .019 .340±.060
311SM23-T As above with gold 1 Amp 0,39 0,07 2,16 0,51 0,48 8,64±1,5
contacts N 1.4 .25 .085 .020 .019 .340±.060
311SM701-T .285 inch (7,24mm) 4 Amps 0,16 0,03 2,16 0,51 0,36 8,64±1,5
straight lever.
Lower force
S .57 .11 .085 .020 .014 .340±.060
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 4
311SM2-T .565 inch (14,35mm) 5 Amps 0,31 0,05 3,05 0,66 0,69 8,51±2
straight lever J 1.1 .18 .120 .026 .027 .335±.080
311SM43-T As above with gold 1 Amp 0,31 0,05 3,05 0,66 0,69 8,51±2
contacts N 1.1 .18 .120 .026 .027 .335±.080
311SM702-T .565 inch (14,35mm) 4 Amps 0,11 0,02 3,05 0,66 0,38 8,51±2
straight lever.
Lower force
S .4 .07 .120 .026 .015 .335±.080
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 5
311SM3-T 1.765 inch (44,8mm) 5 Amps 0,15 0,02 7,87 1,45 2,8 7,11±4,3
straight lever J .53 .07 .310 .057 .110 .280±.170
311SM17-H58 As above with gold 1 Amp 0,15 0,02 7,87 1,45 2,8 7,11±4,3
contacts N .53 .07 .310 .057 .110 .280±.170
311SM703-T 1.765 inch (44,8mm) 4 Amps 0,06 0,01 7,87 1,45 1,78 7,11±4,3
straight lever.
Lower force
S .2 .04 .310 .057 .070 .280±170
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 6
311SM4-T .251 inch (6,38mm) 5 Amps 0,39 0,07 2,16 0,46 0,48 11,7±1,5
simulated roller lever J 1.4 .25 .085 .018 .019 .460±.060
311SM25-T As above with gold 1 Amp 0,39 0,07 2,16 0,46 0,48 11,7±1,5
contacts N 1.4 .25 .085 .018 .019 .460±.060
311SM704-T .251 inch (6,38mm) 4 Amps 0,16 0,03 2,16 0,46 0,33 11,7±1,5
simulated roller lever. S .57 .11 .085 .018 .013 .460±.060
Lower force
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 7
311SM5-T .535 inch (13,6mm) 5 Amps 0,31 0,05 3,05 0,66 0,69 11,56±2
simulated roller lever J 1.1 .18 .120 .026 .027 .455±.080
311SM705-T .535 inch (13,6mm) 4 Amps 0,11 0,02 3,05 0,66 0,38 11,56±2
simulated roller lever. S .4 .07 .120 .026 .015 .455±.080
Lower forceDim. Dwg. Fig. 8
311SM6-T .251 inch (6,38mm) 5 Amps 0,39 0,07 2,16 0,46 0,48 14,2±1,5
roller lever J 1.4 .25 .085 .018 .019 .560±.060
311SM68-T As above with gold 1 Amp 0,39 0,07 2,16 0,46 0,48 14,2±1,5
contacts N 1.4 .25 .085 .018 .019 .560±.060
311SM706-T .251 inch (6,38mm) 4 Amps 0,16 0,03 2,16 0,46 0,33 14,2±1,5
roller lever.
Lower force
S .57 .11 .085 .018 .013 .560±.060
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 9
311SM7-T .535 inch (13,6mm) 5 Amps 0,31 0,05 3,05 0,66 0,69 14,1±2
roller lever J 1.1 .18 .120 .026 .027 .555±.080
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 10
Basic Switches SM Series
Subminiature
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 29
ORDER GUIDE
INTEGRAL LEAF
Electrical
Data And O.F. max. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P.
Catalog UL Code newtons newtons mm mm mm mm
Listing Recommended For Page 20 ounces ounces inches inches inches inches
111SM1-T Force and stability of 5 Amps 1,95 0,56 5,54 0,76 0,76 8,89±0,76
flexible leaf actuator J 7 2 .218 .030 .030 .350±.030
111SM17-T As above with gold 1 Amp 1,95 0,56 5,54 0,76 0,76 8,89±0,76
contacts N 7 2 .218 .030 .030 .350±.030
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 11
111SM2-T Flexible leaf with roller 5 Amps 1,95 0,56 5,56 0,76 0,64 14,3±0,76
J 7 2 .219 .030 .025 .562±.030
111SM23-T As above with gold 1 Amp 1,95 0,56 5,56 0,76 0,64 14,3±0,76
contacts N 7 2 .219 .030 .025 .562±.030
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 12
M
iniature/
S
ub m iniature
Basic Switches SM Series
Subminiature
30 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; R.F. — Release Force;
P.T. — Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential Travel; O.P.
— Operating Position; F.P. — Free Position
* All characteristics are taken with actuator assembled to Catalog Listing 11SM3-T as
shown.
ORDER GUIDE
AUXILIARY
ACTUATORS
Switches are not
included with the
actuators.
Actuator
Length
‘‘A’’ O.F. max. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P. F.P. max.
Catalog mm newtons newtons mm mm mm mm mm
Listing Description inches ounces ounces inches inches inches inches inches
JS-2 Straight leaf 16,8 2,78 0,56 1,98 0,38 0,38 8,89±0,38 11,3
.66 10 2 .078 .015 .015 .350±.015 .445
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 14
JS-5 Roller leaf 15 2,78 0,83 1,98 0,38 0,38 14,2±0,38 16,9
(Bronze roller) .59 10 3 .078 .015 .015 .580±.015 .665
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 14
JS-7 Formed leaf 14,7 2,78 0,56 2,39 0,79 0,38 9,65±0,38 12,1
(Simulated
roller)
.58 10 2 .094 .031 .015 .380±.015 .475
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 14
JS-220 Straight lever 26,2† 0,28 0,04 3,18 0,76 0,76 10,3 —
1.03 1 .14 .125 approx. .030 .030 .406 approx.
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 16
JS-246 Roller lever 25,4† 0,28 0,04 3,18 0,76 0,76 14,3 —
(Steel roller) 1.00 1 .14 .125 approx. .030 .030 .562 approx.
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 16
JS-221 Formed lever 25,4† 0,28 0,04 3,18 0,76 0,76 11,6 —
(Simulated
roller)
1.00 1 .14 .125 approx. .030 .030 .455 approx.
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 16
JS-33** Tandem leaf 5,3 5,00 2,78 2,36 0,15 0,38 8,89±0,38 10,5
.21 18 10 .093 .006 .015 .350±.015 .415
JS-31** Tandem
roller leaf
4,3 11,1 4,45 2,36 0,13 0,38 14,5±0,38 16,1
(Bronze roller)
.17 40 16 .093 .005 .015 .570±.015 .635
**Travel characteristics on tandem actuators vary with actual basic switch characteristics.
NOTE: Above actuators should be used below +300°F.
See page 79 for other actuators that may be used with SM Switches at higher temperatures.
†‘‘A’’ measurement is from the pivot point of lever to the point indicated on drawing.
Basic Switches SM Series
Subminiature
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 31
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (for reference only)
PIN PLUNGER
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
INTEGRAL LEVERS
Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7
Fig. 8 Fig. 9 Fig. 10
INTEGRAL LEAFS
Fig. 11 Fig. 12
AUXILIARY ACTUATORS
Fig. 14 Fig. 16
Switches are not included with the actuators.
Mounting holes accept pins or screws of
.087 inch (2,21 mm) max. diameter
M
iniature/
S
ub m iniature
MICRO SWITCH™ Standard
Subminiature Snap-Action
Z Series
Snap-Action Switches
0BDESCRIPTION
The industry-defining name in snap-action switches, Honeywell
MICRO SWITCH™ standard subminiatures are designed for
repeatability and enhanced product life. The MICRO
SWITCH™ Z Series combines small size and light weight with
ample electrical capacity, low cost, and enhanced life.
The MICRO SWITCH™ Z Series consists of six product
families with unique features that can drop right into an
application.
These reliable and rugged switches offer a variety of actuators,
terminations, circuitry configurations, electrical ratings, contact
materials, operating characteristics, and sealing allows them to
be utilized in numerous potential applications.
Carefully manufactured and thoroughly inspected, the MICRO
SWITCH™ Z Series standard subminiatures are a great value
for applications requiring sensing presence or absence of an
object.
FEATURES
• Small size and light weight switches lend themselves to
numerous potential applications
• Choice of low energy or power-duty electrical ratings allow
the switch to be specified in more types of applications
• Broad range of amp ratings (from 0.1 A to 10.1 A)
• Watertight IP67 sealing available on some listings allows
the switch to be used where sealing and presence/absence
detection is required
• UL/CSA, cUL, ENEC, and CE approvals
POTENTIAL APPLICATIONS
• Industrial: Appliances, communication equipment,
computers, electromechanical timers, mechanical cam
assemblies (timers), office equipment, electric tools, HVAC
wall controls, instrumentation, valves, vending machines
• Transportation: Automotive, truck, and boat wire
harnesses; sub-assemblies for convertible roofs; lock
modules for tail-gate/trunk; tank and hood latch detection
• Medical: Medical and hospital beds, foot pedal controls,
and chair lifts
• Applications where a pre-wired sealed on/off switch is
required
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™ Standard Subminiature Snap-Action Z Series
2 www.honeywell.com/sensing
SPECIFICATIONS
SERIES ZM (coil internal spring) ZM1 (flat internal spring) ZV (coil spring)
Differentiator Integral lever, no ENEC, and an
internal coil spring
Integral lever, ENEC, and a flat
internal spring
Snap-on lever, ENEC, and coil
spring
Use Use when ENEC is not required
and the lever needs to be better
secured to the switch
Used when added forces of a flat
snap spring, ENEC, and a
secured lever are required
Use when ENEC and a snap-on
lever are required
Potential
applications
alarms, computers, food
processors, gas detectors,
humidifiers, joysticks, money
sorters, water pumps
air conditioners, consumer
electronics, gas detectors,
humidifiers, telephones, time
recorders, toys
air conditioners, computers,
consumer appliances, gas
detectors, joysticks, money
sorters, telephones, toys
Ampere rating 0.1 A, 5 A, 10.1 A 0.1 A, 3 A, 6 A, 10.1 A 0.1 A, 6 A, 10.1 A
Circuitry SPDT, SPNO SPDT, SPNO, SPNC SPDT, SPNO, SPNC
Operating force 0.18 oz to 8.78 oz 12 gf to 355 gf 0.78 oz to 11.01 oz
Termination Quick connect, solder, pcb Quick connect, solder, pcb quick connect, solder, pcb
Actuator Pin plunger, straight, roller, sim.
roller, L-shaped
Pin plunger, straight, roller, sim.
roller, L-shaped
pin plunger, straight, roller, sim.
roller
Voltage 125 Vac, 250 Vac, 30 Vdc 125 Vac, 250 Vac 125 Vac/125 Vdc
6(2) A 250 Vac
Agency approvals UL, CE, CSA UL, cUL, ENEC UL, CE, CSA, ENEC
Agency file info CE: 61058-1; UL: E12252;
CSA: LR212438
UL: E12252; c-UL: E12252 CE: 61058-1; UL:12252;
c-UL: E12252
Operating
temperature
-40 °C to 120 °C
[-40 °F to 248 °F]
-40 °C to 120 °C
[-40 °F to 248 °F]
-40 °C to 120 °C
[-40 °F to 248 °F]
Contacts Silver, gold-plated silver, goldplated brass, silver-tin-indium
oxide
Silver, gold-plated silver, goldplated brass, silver-tin-indium
oxide
Silver, gold-plated silver, silvertin-indium oxide
Housing Polyamide (nylon) Polyamide (nylon) Polyamide (nylon)
Sealing None
Storage humidity 85 % RH max. at 40 °C [104 °F]
Dielectric strength 1000 Vac (50 Hz to 60 Hz)
between contacts, between
terminals and ground, for one
minute
1000 Vac (50 Hz to 60 Hz)/min 1000 Vac (50 Hz to 60 Hz)
between contacts, between
terminals and ground, for one
minute
Contact resistance 300 mOhm max. 300 mOhm max. 300 mOhm max.
Insulation resistance 100 mOhm min.
(at 500 Vdc/min)
100 mOhm min.
(at 250 Vdc/min)
100 mOhm min. (at 500
Vdc/min)
Vibration 10 Hz to 55 Hz, displacement 0,75 mm (p-p)
Expected
mechanical life
10 million min. 10 million min. @ <10 A;
1 million min. @ 10 A
10 million min.
Electrical service life Min. 1,000,000 operations on
resistive load current 0.1 A at
125 Vac; 0.1 A at 30 Vdc; Min.
6,000 operations on resistive
load 5 A at 125/250 Vac
Min. 10,000 operations Min. 1,000,000 operations @
0.1 A; Min 10,000 operations on
resistive and motor load current
6(2) A 250 Vac
Electrical operating
frequency
0.1 A – 120 operations/min
other – 10 to 30 operations/min
10 to 30 operations/min 0.1 A – 120 operations/min;
Other – 10 to 30 operations/min
Mechanical
operation frequency
120 operations/min.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Snap-Action Switches
Honeywell Sensing and Control 3
SERIES ZW (water-tight) ZD (water-tight) ZX
Differentiator IP67 rating with lead wires;
snap-on lever, coil spring, and
ENEC
Smaller sized (like the ZX),
sealed to IP67 (with leadwires
only); plunger travel can be
restricted, offers side-post quick
mounting
Two-thirds the size of the ZM
Series; unsealed, integral lever,
and coil spring
Use Use when a sealed position
switch in a small and costeffective package is required
Use for automotive applications
due to sealing and quick
mounting option
Use when a much smaller
unsealed position switch is
required
Potential
applications
air conditioners, computers,
consumer appliances, gas
detectors, joysticks, money
sorters, telephones, toys
automotive (operation systems
and engine area interior), air
conditioners, communication,
electric toothbrushes, toys
calculators, computer mouse,
cordless phones, electric knife &
stapler, tester machines, walkietalkies
Ampere rating 0.1 A. 5 A 0.1 A, 3 A 0.1 A. 3 A
Circuitry SPDT, SPNO, SPNC SPDT SPDT
Operating force 1.94 oz to 7.16 oz 130 gf to 195 gf 0.53 oz to 5.3 oz
Termination quick connect, solder, cable
bottom exit, cable side exit
Solder, pcb straight, pcb left
angle, pcb right angle, pre-wired
solder, pcb snap-in, pcb left
angle, pcb right angle
Actuator pin plunger, straight, roller, sim.
roller
Pin plunger, straight, sim. roller pin plunger, straight, roller,
special
Voltage 125 Vac, 250 Vac 125 Vac, 12 Vdc 125 Vac , 48 Vdc
Agency approvals UL, cUL, CE, ENEC UL, cUL, CE, ENEC UL, CE, CSA
Agency file info CE: 61058-1; UL: E12252;
c-UL: E12252
UL: E12252; c-UL: E12252 CE: 61058-1; UL:12252;
CSA: LR212438
Operating
temperature
-40 °C to 120 °C
[-40 °F to 248 °F] (w/o wires)
-40 °C to 105 °C
[-40 °F to 221 °F] (w/ wires)
-40 °C to 120 °C
[-40 °F to 248 °F]
-40 °C to 120 °C
[-40 °F to 248 °F]
Contacts silver, gold-plated silver Silver, gold-plated silver silver, gold-plated silver
Housing PBT polyester thermoplastic PBT polyester thermoplastic Polyamide (nylon)
Sealing IP67 (with leadwires only) IP67 (with leadwires only) None
Storage humidity 85 % RH max. at 40 °C [104 °F]
Dielectric strength 1000 Vac (50 Hz to 60 Hz)
between contacts and 1250 Vac
(50 Hz to 60 Hz), between
terminals and ground, for one
minute
150 Vac (50 Hz to 60
Hz)/minute between contacts,
500 Vac (50 Hz to 60
Hz)/minute between live parts
and dead metal parts
1000 Vac (50 Hz to 60 Hz)
between contacts, between
terminals and ground, for one
minute
Contact resistance 30 mOhm max. 100 mOhm max. 100 mOhm max.
Insulation resistance 100 mOhm min. (at 500
Vdc/min)
100 mOhm min.
(at 250 Vdc/min)
100 mOhm min. (at 500 Vdc/min)
Vibration 10 Hz to 55 Hz, displacement 0,75 mm (p-p)
Expected
mechanical life
2 million min. 500,000 min. 1 million min.
Electrical service life Min. 10,000 operations Min. 500,000 operations on
resistive load current 10 mA;
Min. 6000 operations on
resistive load current 3 A
Min. 1,000,000 operations on
resistive load current 0.1 A at 48
Vdc; Min. 10,000 operations on
resistive load current 3 A at 125
Vac
Electrical operating
frequency
10 to 30 operations/min 10 mA – 120 operations/min
3 A – 10 to 30 operations/min
0.1 A – 120 operations/min
3 A – 10 to 30 operations/min
Mechanical
operation frequency
120 operations/min.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™ Standard Subminiature Snap-Action Z Series
4 www.honeywell.com/sensing
ZM AND ZM1 STANDARD LEVER OPTIONS & DIMENSIONS mm/in
Lever/
Terminals
Dimensions Lever/
Terminals
Dimensions
Pin plunger/
solder
OP: 11,4 mm ±0,3 mm [0.449 in ± 0.012 in]
DT: 0,2 mm [0.008 in max.]
Pin plunger/
quick connect
OP: 11,4 mm ±0,3 mm [0.449 in ± 0.012 in]
DT: 0,2 mm [0.008 in max.]
Pin plunger/
PCB right
OP: 11,4 mm ±0,3 mm [0.449 in ± 0.012 in]
DT: 0,2 mm [0.008 in max.]
Pin
plunger/PCB
OP: 11,4 mm ±0,3 mm [0.449 in ± 0.012 in]
DT: 0,2 mm [0.008 in max.]
Simulated
roller/quick
connect
OP: 15,1 mm ±1,5 mm [0.591 in ± 0.059 in]
DT: 0,9 mm [0.035 in max.]
Simulated
roller/solder
OP: 15,1 mm ±1,5 mm [0.591 in ± 0.059 in]
DT: 0,9 mm [0.035 in max.]
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Snap-Action Switches
Honeywell Sensing and Control 5
Continued – ZM AND ZM1 STANDARD LEVER OPTIONS & DIMENSIONS mm/in
Lever/
Terminals
Dimensions Lever/
Terminals
Dimensions
Roller/solder
OP: 17,5 mm ±0,8 mm [0.689 in ± 0.032 in]
DT: 0,81 mm [0.032 in max.]
Straight/
solder
OP: 11,8 mm ±0,89 mm [0.465 in ± 0.035 in]
DT: 0,81 mm [0.032 in max.]
Roller/
quick connect
OP: 17,5 mm ±0,8 mm [0.689 in ± 0.032 in]
DT: 0,81 mm [0.032 in max.]
Roller/PCB
OP: 17,5 mm ±0,8 mm [0.689 in ± 0.032 in]
DT: 0,81 mm [0.032 in max.]
Straight/PCB
right
OP: 11,8 mm ±0,89 mm [0.465 in ± 0.035 in]
DT: 0,81 mm [0.032 in max.]
Straight/PCB
left
OP: 11,8 mm ±0,89 mm [0.465 in ± 0.035 in]
DT: 0,81 mm [0.032 in max.]
Straight/
quick connect
OP: 11,8 mm ±0,89 mm [0.465 in ± 0.035 in]
DT: 0,81 mm [0.032 in max.]
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™ Standard Subminiature Snap-Action Z Series
6 www.honeywell.com/sensing
ZV STANDARD LEVER OPTIONS & DIMENSIONS mm/in
Lever/
Terminals
Dimensions Lever/
Terminals
Dimensions
Pin plunger/
quick connect
OP: 11,4 mm ±0,3 mm [0.449 in ± 0.012 in]
DT: 0,2 mm [0.008 in max.]
Pin plunger/
solder
OP: 11,4 mm ±0,3 mm [0.449 in ± 0.012 in]
DT: 0,2 mm [0.008 in max.]
Straight/
solder
OP: 11,8 mm ±1,6 mm [0.465 in ± 0.063 in]
DT: 0,81 mm [0.032 in max.]
Roller/solder
OP: 17,5 mm ±1,1 mm [0.689 in ± 0.043 in]
DT: 0,81 mm [0.032 in max.]
Straight/
quick connect
OP: 11,8 mm ±1,2 mm [0.465 in ± 0.047 in]
DT: 0,81 mm [0.032 in max.]
Roller/
quick connect
OP: 17,5 mm ±1,1 mm [0.689 in ± 0.043 in]
DT: 0,81 mm [0.032 in max.]
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Snap-Action Switches
Honeywell Sensing and Control 7
ZW STANDARD LEVER OPTIONS & DIMENSIONS mm/in
Lever/Term. Dimensions
Straight/
solder angled
OP: 8,8 mm ±1,2 mm [0.347 in ± 0.047 in]
DT: 0,71 mm [0.028 in max.]
Roller/cable
bottom exit
OP: 14,5 mm ±1,1 mm [0.571 in ± 0.043 in]
DT: 0,6 mm [0.024 in max.]
Pin plunger/
solder angled
OP: 8,4 mm ±0,3 mm [0.331 in ± 0.012 in]
DT: 0,2 mm [0.008 in max.]
Roller/quick
connect
OP: 14,5 mm ±1,1 mm [0.571 in ± 0.043 in]
DT: 0,6 mm [0.024 in max.]
ZD STANDARD LEVER OPTIONS & DIMENSIONS mm/in
Lever/
Terminals
Dimensions
Pin plunger/
solder
terminals
OP: 3,05 mm ±0,2 mm [0.12 in ± 0.008 in]
DT: 0,30 mm [0.012 in max.]
Pin
plunger/PCB
straight
terminals
OP: 3,05 mm ±0,2 mm [0.12 in ± 0.008 in]
DT: 0,30 mm [0.012 in max.]
Pin
plunger/wire
leads
OP: 3,05 mm ±0,2 mm [0.12 in ± 0.008 in]
DT: 0,30 mm [0.012 in max.]
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™ Standard Subminiature Snap-Action Z Series
8 www.honeywell.com/sensing
ZX STANDARD LEVER OPTIONS & DIMENSIONS mm/in
Lever/
Terminals
Dimensions Lever/
Terminals
Dimensions
Pin plunger/
solder
OP: 7,0 mm ±0,3 mm [0.276 in ± 0.012 in]
DT: 0,30 mm [0.012 in max.]
Straight/
Solder
OP: 8,4 mm ±0,8 mm [0.331 in ± 0.032 in]
DT: 1,3 mm [0.051 in max.]
Pin
plunger/PCB
OP: 7,0 mm ±0,3 mm [0.276 in ± 0.012 in]
DT: 0,30 mm [0.012 in max.]
Straight/PCB
OP: 8,4 mm ±0,8 mm [0.331 in ± 0.032 in]
DT: 1,3 mm [0.051 in max.]
Simulated
roller/solder
OP: 11,1 mm ±0,8 mm [0.437 in ± 0.032 in]
DT: 1,3 mm [0.051 in max.]
Simulated
roller/PCB
OP: 11,1 mm ±0,8 mm [0.437 in ± 0.032 in]
DT: 1,3 mm [0.051 in max.]
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Snap-Action Switches
Honeywell Sensing and Control 9
ZM SERIES NOMENCLATURE TREE
ZM1 SERIES NOMENCLATURE TREE
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™ Standard Subminiature Snap-Action Z Series
10 www.honeywell.com/sensing
ZV SERIES NOMENCLATURE TREE
ZW SERIES NOMENCLATURE TREE
ZD SERIES (NO WIRES) NOMENCLATURE TREE
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Snap-Action Switches
Honeywell Sensing and Control 11
ZD SERIES (WITH WIRES) NOMENCLATURE TREE
ZX SERIES NOMENCLATURE TREE
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Sensing and Control
Honeywell
1985 Douglas Drive North
Golden Valley, MN 55422
www.honeywell.com/sensing
004954-1-EN IL50 GLO Printed in USA
July 2010
Copyright © 2010 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.
WARNING
PERSONAL INJURY
DO NOT USE these products as safety or emergency stop
devices or in any other application where failure of the
product could result in personal injury.
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in
death or serious injury.
WARNING
MISUSE OF DOCUMENTATION
• The information presented in this product sheet is for
reference only. Do not use this document as a product
installation guide.
• Complete installation, operation, and maintenance
information is provided in the instructions supplied with
each product.
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in
death or serious injury.
1BWARRANTY/REMEDY
Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as being free of defective
materials and faulty workmanship. Honeywell’s standard product
warranty applies unless agreed to otherwise by Honeywell in writing;
please refer to your order acknowledgement or consult your local sales
office for specific warranty details. If warranted goods are returned to
Honeywell during the period of coverage, Honeywell will repair or
replace, at its option, without charge those items it finds defective. The
foregoing is buyer’s sole remedy and is in lieu of all other
warranties, expressed or implied, including those of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. In no event
shall Honeywell be liable for consequential, special, or indirect
damages.
While we provide application assistance personally, through our
literature and the Honeywell web site, it is up to the customer to
determine the suitability of the product in the application.
Specifications may change without notice. The information we supply
is believed to be accurate and reliable as of this printing. However, we
assume no responsibility for its use.
SALES AND SERVICE
Honeywell serves its customers through a worldwide network of sales
offices, representatives and distributors. For application assistance,
current specifications, pricing or name of the nearest Authorized
Distributor, contact your local sales office or:
E-mail: info.sc@honeywell.com
Internet: www.honeywell.com/sensing
Phone and Fax:
Asia Pacific +65 6355-2828
+65 6445-3033 Fax
Europe +44 (0) 1698 481481
+44 (0) 1698 481676 Fax
Latin America +1-305-805-8188
+1-305-883-8257 Fax
USA/Canada +1-800-537-6945
+1-815-235-6847
+1-815-235-6545 Fax
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Position Sensors HT Series
High Temperature Basic Switches
24 Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada
FEATURES
1 Temperature tolerance up to +1000°F
(538°C)
1 Designed to meet military applications
1 Side and panel mount
1 UL recognized
GENERAL INFORMATION
HT switches will withstand temperatures
up to +1000F. The switching element is
mounted on a ceramic base within a
stainless steel enclosure. HT switches are
not classified as sealed switches.
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
Circuitry Electrical Rating
Single-Pole
Double-Throw
UL Ratings:
3 amps, 1/10 HP, 125 vac.
3 amps, 1/6 HP, 250 vac.
Characteristics: O.F. – Operating Force; R.F. – Release Force;
P.T. – Pretravel; O.T. – Overtravel; O.P. – Operating PositionHT ORDER GUIDE
O.F. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. O.P.
newtons newtons mm mm mm
Catalog Listing Description ounces ounces inches inches inches
1HT1 Straight plunger panel
mount
2,78-5,56
10-20
1,67
6
1,65
.065
4,78
.188
23,7
.935
approx.
Fig. 1
3HT1 Roller plunger panel
mount
8,34
30 max.
1,67
6
1,65
.065
4,78
.188
35,9
1.413
approx.
Fig. 2
2HT1 Pin plunger side mount 2,78-5,56
10-20
1,67
6
1,27
.050
0,25
.010
16,8
.66
approx.
Fig. 3
HT MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3
Mounting holes will accept pins or
screws of .139N (3,53 mm) dia.
Basic Switches V3 Series
Miniature
32 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
CUT-A-WAY V3 MINIATURE BASIC SWITCH
GENERAL INFORMATION
V3 miniature basic switches feature high
electrical capacity and long life. Their size
and shape meet design requirements in
all types of applications.
There is a choice of SPDT, SPNC, and
SPNO circuitry. Many lever styles, contact
materials, and terminal variations can be
furnished. Contact the 800 number for ordering information.
FEATURES
1 Low operating force to .53 ounce
maximum
1 Sensitive differential travel as low as
.006 inch maximum
1 Power load switching capability up to
25 amperes–silver contacts
1 Gold alloy crosspoint, silver cadmium,
and other contact material for special
applications
1 Long mechanical life of 10,000,000 cycles—95% survival for V3-100, V3-1100,
V3-2100, V3-3000 Series
1 Temperature tolerance up to +180°F
(82°C) on standard construction
1 High temperature construction for use
up to +600°F (316°C)
1 3,1 mm mounting holes available
1 UL recognized File #E12252, CSA certified File #LR41370
AVAILABLE TERMINALS
SOLDER SHORT SOLDER SCREW
D8 D9QUICK CONNECT
.188 wide × .020 thick terminals .250 wide × .032 thick terminals
Dimensions shown are for reference only
Mounting torque:
2 inch pounds min.
5 inch pounds max.
This section covers only 60 of our most popular V3 Series catalog listings. If you don’t find what you’re looking for, it’s likely
one of the approximately 850 other active V3 listings will meet your needs. Contact the 800 number.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Basic Switches V3 Series
Miniature
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 33
PIN PLUNGERS
ORDER GUIDE by ascending electrical capability
Characteristics: O.F. – Operating Force; R.F. – Release Force; P.T. –
Pretravel; O.T. – Overtravel; D.T. – Differential Travel; O.P. – Operating
Position.
Electrical R.F. P.T. O.T.
Data And O.F. min. max. min. D.T. O.P.**
Catalog UL Code newtons newtons mm mm mm mm
Listing Recommended For Page 20 ounces ounces inches inches inches inches
V3-343-D8 General use. Gold
alloy crosspoint
contacts.
1 Amp 2,22 0,56 1,2 1,02 0,15-0,41 14,7
X 8 max. 2 .047 .040 .006-.016 .578
V3-2451-D8 Lowest force. 3 Amps 0,15 — 1,2 1,27 0,051-0,25 14,7
VV .53 .047 .050 .002-.010 .578
V3-2401-D8 Lower force. 5 Amps 0,24 — 1,2 1,27 0,051-0,25 14,7
YY .9 .047 .050 .002-.010 .578
V3-70101-D8 Most 5 amp
applications.
5 Amps 2,22 0,56 1,2 1,02 0,15-0,41 14,7
ZZ 8 2 .047 .040 .006-.016 .578
V3-1101-D8 General use. 10 Amps 0,72 max. 0,10 1,2 1,27 0,051-0,25 14,7
TT 2.6 .35 .047 .050 .002-.010 .578
V3-2101-D8 Low force. 10 Amps 0,50 max. 0,05 1,2 1,27 0,051-0,25 14,7
V 1.8 .18 .047 .050 .002-.010 .578
V3-101-D8 Higher force. Most
applications.
11 Amps 2,22 0,56 1,2 1,02 0,15-0,41 14,7
T 8 max. 2 .047 .040 .006-.016 .578
V3-1-D8 Highest force. Up to
15.1 amps load
handling with reduced
life.
15.1 Amps 1,67-3,89 1,11 1,21 1,0 0,15-0,4 14,7
U 6-14 4 .047 .040 .006-.016 .578
V3-3001-D8 High force. Up to 15.1
amps load handling.
15,1 Amps 1,47 max. 0,15 1,2 1,27 0,051-0,25 14,7
U 5.3 .53 .047 .050 .002-.010 .578
V3-2800-D9 Up to 20 amps load
handling
20 Amps 0,63 - 1,22 0,20 1,2 1,27 0,25 14,7
AA 2.3 - 4.4 0.7 .047 .050 .010 max. .578
V3-2900-D9 Up to 25 amps load
handling
25 Amps 1,22 - 2,20 0,31 1,2 1,27 0,25 14,7
BB 4.4 - 7.9 1.1 .047 .050 .010 max .578
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 1
V3-1001
(MS25253-1)
MIL-S-8805 application
requirements (SPDT)
10 Amps 1,67-3,89 1,11 1,2 1,02 0,15-0,41 14,7
UU 6-14 4 .047 .040 .006-.016 .578
V3-1002
(MS25253-3)
MIL-S-8805 application
requirements (SPNC)
10 Amps 1,67-3,89 1,11 1,2 1,02 0,15-0,41 14,7
UU 6-14 4 .047 .040 .006-.016 .578
V3-1003
(MS25253-2)
MIL-S-8805 application
requirements (SPNO)
10 Amps 1,67-3,89 1,11 1,2 1,02 0,15-0,41 14,7
UU 6-14 4 .047 .040 .006-.016 .578
V3-129* Operating in
temperature to
+302°F (150°C)
11 Amps 2,22 0,56 1,2 1,02 0,15-0,41 14,7
T 8 max. 2 .047 .040 .006-.016 .578
V3-245* Operating in
temperature to
+400°F (204°C)
10 Amps 2,78-6,95 1,67 1,2 1,02 0,15-0,41 14,7
W 10-25 6 .047 .040 .006-.016 .578
*For actuators, contact MICRO SWITCH Sales Office. **Tolerances ±0.38
±0.15
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 2
SIMULATED
ROLLER
ORDER GUIDE
Electrical Length of O.F. R.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
Data And Lever ‘‘A’’ max. min. max. min. max. O.P.*
Catalog UL Code mm newtons newtons mm mm mm mm
Listing Recommended For Page 20 inches ounces ounces inches inches inches inches
V3L-1123-D8 General use. 10 Amps 32,6 0,39 0,05 2,54 2,03 0,76 18,5
TT 1.285 1.4 .18 .100 .080 .030 .730
V3L-2105-D8 Low force. 10 Amps 32,6 0,33 0,02 2,54 2,03 0,76 18,5
V 1.285 1.2 .07 .100 .080 .030 .730
V3L-121-D8 High force. Most
applications.
11 Amps 32,6 1,11 0,14 3,18 1,57 0,81 18,5
T 1.285 4 .5 .125 .062 .032 .730
V3L-5-D8 Highest force. Up to
15.1 amps load
handling with
reduced life.
15.1 Amps 32,6 2,22 0,28 3,18 1,57 0,81 18,5
U 1.285 8 1 .125 .062 .032 .730
V3L-3014-D8 High force. Up to
15.1 amps load
handling.
15.1 Amps 32,6 0,94 0,07 2,54 1,90 0,76 18,5
U 1.285 3.4 .25 .100 .075 .030 .730
*±1.5 mm
±.060 in.
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 3
M
iniature/
S
ub m iniature
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Basic Switches V3 Series
Miniature
34 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
Characteristics: O.F. – Operating Force; R.F. – Release Force; P.T. – Pretravel; O.T. – Overtravel; D.T. – Differential Travel; O.P. – Operating Position.
STRAIGHT LEVERS
ORDER GUIDE
Electrical Length of O.F. R.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
Data And Lever ‘‘A’’ max. min. max. min. max. O.P.
Catalog UL Code mm newtons newtons mm mm mm mm
Listing Recommended For Page 20 inches ounces ounces inches inches inches inches
V3L-1105-D8 General use. 10 Amps 21,3 0,72 0,10 1,5 1,14 0,33 15,2±0,51
TT .860 2.6 .35 .060 .045 .013 .600±.020
V3L-2101-D8 Low force. Added
overtravel.
10 Amps 21,3 0,50 0,50 1,5 1,14 0,33 15,2±0,51
V .860 1.8 .18 .060 .045 .013 .600±.020
V3L-101-D8 Higher force. Most
applications.
11 Amps 21,3 2,50 0,56 1,5 1,02 0,41 15,2±0,51
T .860 9 2 .060 .040 .016 .600±.020
V3L-1-D8 Highest force. Up to
15.1 amps load
handling with
reduced life.
15.1 Amps 21,3 3,89 0,83 1,5 1,02 0,41 15,2±0,51
U .860 14 3 .060 .040 .016 .600±.020
V3L-3001-D8 High force. Up to
15.1 amps load
handling.
15.1 Amps 21,3 1,47 0,15 1,5 1,02 0,28 15,2±0,51
U .860 5.3 .53 .060 .040 .011 .600±.020
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 4
V3L-1108-D8 General use. 10 Amps 35,6 0,39 0,04 2,79 2,29 0,76 15,2±1,5
TT 1.40 1.4 .14 .110 .090 .030 .600±.060
V3L-2102-D8 Low force. 10 Amps 35,6 0,31 0,02 2,79 2,29 0,76 15,2±1,5
V 1.40 1.1 .07 .110 .090 .030 .600±.060
V3L-104-D8 Higher force. Most
applications.
11 Amps 35,6 1,11 0,14 3,18 2,29 1,27 15,2±1,5
T 1.40 4 .5 .125 .090 .050 .600±.060
V3L-2-D8 Highest force. Up to
15.1 amps load
handling with
reduced life.
15.1 Amps 35,6 2,22 0,28 3,18 2,29 1,27 15,2±1,5
U 1.40 8 1 .125 .090 .050 .600±.060
V3L-3005-D8 High force. Up to
15.1 amps load
handling.
15.1 Amps 35,6 .86 0,06 3,05 2,29 0,81 15,2±1,5
U 1.40 3.1 .21 .120 .090 .032 .600±.060
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 4
V3L-2425-D8 Lower force. 5 Amps 59,4 0,07 — 5,08 4,06 1,4 15,2±2
YY 2.34 .25 .200 .160 .055 .600±.080
V3L-1122-D8 General use. 10 Amps 59,4 0,22 0,02 5,08 4,06 1,4 15,2±1,8
TT 2.34 .81 .07 .200 .160 .055 .600±.070
V3L-2106-D8 Low force. 10 Amps 59,4 0,16 0,01 5,08 4,06 1,4 15,2±1,8
V 2.34 .56 .04 .200 .160 .055 .600±.070
V3L-131-D8 Higher force. Most
applications.
11 Amps 59,4 0,58 0,12 6,6 3,81 2,29 14,7±2
T 2.34 2.1 .42 .260 .150 .090 .580±.080
V3L-6-D8 Highest force. Up to
15.1 amps load
handling with
reduced life.
15.1 Amps 59,4 1,11 0,14 6,95 3,81 2,29 14,35±1,5
U 2.34 4 .50 2.60 .150 .090 .565±.060
V3L-3013-D8 High force. Up to
15.1 amps load
handling.
15.1 Amps 59,4 0,39 0,03 5,33 4,06 1,52 15,2±1,9
U 2.34 1.4 .11 .210 .160 .060 .600±.075
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 4
V3L-2472-D8 Lowest force. 3 Amps 69,45 0,03 — 5,97 5,08 1,60 15,2±2,54
VV 2.75 .11 — .235 .200 .063 .600±.100
V3L-1124-D8 General use. 10 Amps 69,45 0,19 0,01 7,74 3,68 1,65 15,31±2,54
TT 2.75 .70 .04 .305 .145 .065 .603±.100
V3L-145-D8 Most applications. 11 Amps 69,45 0,54 0,10 0,76 4,57 2,54 14,48±2,03
T 2.75 1.93 .36 .300 .180 .100 .570±.080
V3L-14-D8 Highest force. Up to
15.1 amps load
handling with
reduced life.
15.1 Amps 69,45 0,83 0,14 8,38 4,32 2,54 13,72±2,03
U 2.75 3 .50 .330 .170 .100 .540±.080
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 4
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Basic Switches V3 Series
Miniature
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 35
ORDER GUIDE
ROLLER LEVERS
Electrical Length of
Data And Lever ‘‘A’’ O.F. max. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P.
Catalog Recommended UL Codes mm newtons newtons mm mm mm mm
Listing For Page 20 inches ounces ounces inches inches inches inches
V3L-1117-D8 General use. 10 Amps 20,6 0,89 0,10 1,2 1,14 0,33 20,6±0,76
TT .81 3.2 .35 .047 .045 .013 .810±.030
V3L-2103-D8 Low force. 10 Amps 20,6 0,58 0,03 1,42 0,86 0,33 20,6±0,76
V .81 2.1 .11 .056 .034 .013 .810±.030
V3L-139-D8 Higher force. 11 Amps 20,6 2,22 0,56 1,5 1,02 0,41 20,6±0,76
Most applications. T .81 8 2 .060 .040 .016 .810±.030
V3L-3-D8 Highest force. 15.1 Amps 20,6 3,89 0,83 1,52 1,02 0,41 20,6±0,76
Up to 15.1 amps U .81 14 3 .060 .040 .016 .810±.030
load handling with
reduced life.
V3L-3003-D8 High force. 15.1 Amps 20,6 1,89 0,15 1,2 1,02 0,05 - 0,25 20,6±0,76
Up to 15.1 amps U .81 6.8 .53 .047 .040 .002 - .010 .810±.030
load handling.
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 7
V3L-1101-D8 General use. 10 Amps 34 0,44 0,04 3,18 2,16 0,76 20,6±1,5
TT 1.34 1.6 .14 .125 .085 .030 .810±.060
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 7
V3L-2104-D8 Low force. 10 Amps 34 0,31 0,02 3,18 2,16 0,76 20,6±1,5
V 1.34 1.1 .07 .125 .085 .030 .810±.060
V3L-111-D8 Higher force. 11 Amps 34 1,11 0,14 3,18 2,16 1,27 20,6±1,5
Most applications. T 1.34 4 .5 .125 .085 .050 .810±.060
V3L-4-D8 Highest force. 15.1 Amps 34 2,22 0,28 3,18 2,16 1,27 20,6±1,5
Up to 15.1 amps U 1.34 8 1 .125 .085 .050 .810±.060
load handling with
reduced life.
V3L-3004-D8 Higher force. 15.1 Amps 34 0,89 0,14 3,18 2,16 0,76 20,6±1,5
Up to 15.1 amps U 1.34 3.2 .5 .125 .085 .030 .810±.060
load handling.
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential Travel; R.F. — Release
Force; P.T. — Pretravel; O.P. — Operating Position; F.P. — Free Position.
* Characteristics taken with actuator assembled on Catalog Listing V3-1 switch as shown.
AUXILIARY ORDER GUIDE - SWITCHES ARE NOT INCLUDED WITH ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Actuator
Length ‘‘A’’ O.F. max R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P. F.P. max.
Catalog mm newtons newtons mm mm mm mm mm
Listing Description inches ounces ounces inches inches inches inches inches
JV-1 Leaf type 21,3 3,34 1,11 1,19 0,79 0,41 15±0,38 16,4
.84 12 4 .047 .031 .016 .590±.015 .645
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 11
JV-7 Long leaf 32,3 2,50 1,11 1,57 1,27 0,64 14,5±0,76 17,4
1.27 9 4 .062 .050 .025 .570±.030 .685
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 11
JV-5 Roller leaf 20,6 3,34 1,11 1,52 0,79 0,41 20,3±0,64 22,1
.81 12 4 .060 .031 .016 .800±.025 .870
NOTE: Contact a MICRO SWITCH Sales Office for application assistance when actuators will be used at temperatures above 300°F (149°C).
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 11
M
iniature/
S
ub m iniature
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Basic Switches V3 Series
Miniature
36 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force;
R.F. — Release Force; P.T. — Pretravel;
O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential Travel;
O.P. — Operating Positon; F.P. — Free Position
* Characteristics taken with actuator assembled on Catalog Listing V3100 switch as shown.
ORDER GUIDE - SWITCHES ARE NOT INCLUDED WITH ACTUATORS
AUXILIARY
ACTUATORS
Switches are not included
with actuators Actuator
Length ‘‘A’’ O.F. max. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P. F.P. max.
Catalog mm newtons newtons mm mm mm mm mm
Listing Description inches ounces ounces inches inches inches inches inches
JV-26 Long lever 44,5† 0,39 0,06 8,33 3,58 4,75 12,7±3,18 —
1.75 1.4 .21 .328 .141 .187 .500±.125
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 14
JV-20 Roller lever 19,1† 0,83 0,14 4,78 1,57 1,98 19,5±1,4 23,8
.750 3 .5 .188 .062 .078 .766±.055 .936
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 14
JV-220 Roller lever 17,7† 0,83 0,14 4,78 1,57 1,98 19,5±1,1 23,8
.695 3 .5 .188 .062 .078 .766±.045 .936
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 14
JV-30 One-way roller
lever
20,6 3,34 1,11 2,03 0,51 0,38 25,7±0,76 27,7
.81 12 4 .080 .020 .015 1.010±.030 1.09
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 11
JV-91** Tandem leaf 20,6 5,00 1,67 1,57 0,89 – 14,9±0,76 16,5
.81 18 6 .062 .035 .588±.030 .650
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 17
JV-82** Tandem roller
leaf
20,6 5,00 1,67 1,57 0,89 – 20,5±0,76 21,8
.81 18 6 .062 .035 .806±.030 .860
NOTE: Contact the 800 number for application assistance when actuators will be used at temperatures above 300°F (149°C).
** Travel characteristics on tandem actuators vary with actual basic switch characteristics. These shown are typical for the
assembly.
† ‘‘A’’ measurement is from the pivot point of lever to the point indicated on drawing.
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 17
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Basic Switches V3 Series
Miniature
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 37
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (for reference only)
PIN PLUNGERS
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
SIMULATED ROLLER STRAIGHT LEVER ROLLER LEVER
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 7
AUXILIARY ACTUATORS
Fig. 11 Fig. 14
Fig. 17
NOTE: Operate point dimensions taken
at top of lever/roller.
M
iniature/
S
ub m iniature
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
V5 Series
Miniature Basic Switches
Straight /ever
Typ e
BASIC SWITCHES
H
TI
I
APPROVALS
CE, CSA, ENEC, U L
V5 Series Basic Switches are used for simple or
1, 6
precision on/off, end of limit, presence/absence,
(P .T .)
pressure, temperature and manual operato r
interface application needs .
A
Voltage :
Operating temperature :
Standard
-55 °C to 85 ° C
-67 °F to 185 ° F
High temperature
-55 °C to 150 ° C
-67 °F to 302 ° F
Termination :
6,3 mm x 0,8 mm Quick connect
(QC )
Contact type :
Silver/silver cadmium oxid e
Electrical rating :
Switching options :
OPTIONS
Top pin plunger
s.1 ►
►i2,8r
-14,1-,
APPROVALS
REFERENC E
CE ENEC
V5A010C B
CE, CSA, ENEC, UL
V5BO10C8 3
CE, CSA, UL
4,8 mm x 0,5 mm OC
V5BO10FB3
CE, ENEC
Solder terminals
V5BO10T 0
CE, ENEC
High temperature
V5B210C B
CE, ENEC
V5CO10B B
CE, CSA . ENEC . UL
4,8 mm x 0,5 mm OC
V5C010EB 3
CE, CSA . ENEC . UL
Solder terminals
V5CO10TB 3
CE, ENEC
V5PO10CB
APPROVALS
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
CE, CSA, ENEC. UL
High temperature
V5B210CB3 D
V5CO10BB3B
CE, CSA . ENEC. UL
V5C010BB3 D
APPROVALS
REFERENC E
CE. CSA, ENEC . UL
Lever position 2
V5A010CB4 E
CE. ENEC
High temperature
V5B210CB1 E
20, 6
20, 6
(O .P. )15, 3
(O .P.)
250 Vac
2 2
20 A
16 A Type C
10 A
22 A
3 .2
SPDT
P I
Single Pole Double Throw
15, 3
(O .P .)
V5 A
V5B/P/ R
V5C/ D
V5S
Type E
3 4
3, 2
(P.T .)
(Th35,6
a 20 .6
(O .P .)
APPROVAL S
CE, ENE C
Type
REFERENC E
High temperature
V5B210CB1 C
APPROVAL S
CE, ENEC
REFERENC E
V5CO10BB1 G
59, 5
APPROVALS
SWITCHING OPTIONS
REFERENC E
CE ENEC
SPNO
V5DO30B B
CE . ENEC
SPNO
V5R030C B
CE, BEAB
SPNC
V5S020C B
CE, BEAB
SPNO
V5SO30CB
Honeywel l
www.honeywell .com/sensing
Basic Switches V7 Series
Miniature
38 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
FEATURES
1 Quick-connect and printed wiring
board termination
1 Proven V3 switching mechanism
1 Physically interchangeable with existing V3 switches
1 All existing V3 lever options available
1 UL recognized File # E12252; CSA certified File # LR41370
1 International listings carry VDE
approval
1 Power load switching capability up to
21 amps
1 Temperature tolerance –40° to 185°F
(–40° to 85°C)
1 High temperature construction
available—350°F
APPLICABLE EUROPEAN SYMBOLS
µ = microgap construction. (The
measurement between open
contacts is less than 3mm).**
` = alternating current (used with
value of voltage source:
250V `).
T = maximum rated use
temperature; followed by the
temperature value in °C
(example T 85).
+++ = switch is rated for at least
50,000 cycles at its rated
current. (Sometimes referred
to as ‘‘frequent’’ operation.)
10(3) = first number represents
resistive rating. Second
number represents inductive
(motor) rating.
CUTAWAY V7 MINIATURE BASIC SWITCH
GENERAL INFORMATION
The V7 Series is available in two versions,
the Timesaver series and the International
series. The Timesaver series is UL recognized and CSA certified. Timesaver series
switches use readily available high-volume components to provide especially
responsive delivery performance. The International V7 provides VDE approval in
addition to UL recognition and CSA certification.
The V7 offers a choice of four quick-connect and two printed wiring board terminal types. Three quick-connect types are
offset to meet international 3mm spacing
requirements and one is designed for use
with molded connectors. Contact material choice includes gold alloy, silver alloy
or silver for handling various electrical
loads. There are two mounting hole sizes
available. Standard .114 N or 3mm to meet
European design requirements.
Terminal variations and switch dimensions of the European designed version
conform to applicable DIN standards.
These V7s mate with both standard domestic and international industry standard receptacles and connectors. The
plastic enclosure meets VDE KC250 arc
tracking requirement and is approvable
under the Refrigeration Industry Taste
and Odor test.
OPERATING FORCES
175 grams (V rating only)
150 grams (Not applicable to Electrical
Rating V)
75 grams (Not applicable to Electrical
Rating C or V)
50 grams (Not applicable to Electrical
Rating B, C, V)
25 grams (Not applicable to Electrical
Rating B, C, E, V)
15 grams (Not applicable to Electrical Rating A, B, C, E, S, V)
Mounting Torque:
2 inch pounds min.
5 inch pounds max.
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
A B C* D E F S V
5 amps, 125,
250 or 277
VAC; 1⁄10 hp,
250 VAC
11 amps and 1⁄3
hp, 125, 250 or
277 VAC; 1⁄2
amp, 125 VDC;
1⁄4 amp, 250
VDC; 4 amps,
125 VAC ‘‘L’’
15.1 amps and
1⁄2 hp, 125, 250
or 277 VAC; 1⁄2
amp, 125 VDC;
1⁄4 amp, 250
VDC; 5 amps,
120 VAC ‘‘L’’
1 amp, 125
VAC
10 amps and 1⁄3
hp 125 or 250
VAC; 1⁄2 amp,
125 VDC; 1⁄4
amp, 250 VDC;
4 amps, 125
VAC ‘‘L’’
3 amps, 125,
250 or 277
VAC; 1⁄10 hp,
250 VAC
.1 amp,
125 VAC
21 amps 125,
250 or 277
VAC, 1 HP 125,
250, 277 VAC;
2 HP, 250, 277
VAC
W X
15.1 amps,
125, 250 or 277
VAC
6 amps; 1⁄8 HP
125, 250 or 277
VAC
International Series Only
10 (3) +++
250V`
T 85 µ
5 (2) +++
250V`
T 85 µ
+++ 16 (4)
250V`
T 85 µ
50E3 SPNO only
* Available only when specifying 150 gram operating force.
NOTE: ‘‘L’’ denotes lamp load.
**The microgap construction (M) means contact gap is less than 3mm. Therefore, these products are suitable for secondary circuit use but not
primary circuit use which requires a 3mm gap.
Basic Switches V7 Series
Miniature
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 39
AVAILABLE TERMINALS
Quick-connect
D8* E8 E9
.187 Wide H .187 Wide H .250 Wide H
.020 Thick .020 Thick .032 Thick
NOTE: D8 and E8 terminals are European approved when used with electrical ratings B, D,
or E. E9 terminals are European approved
when used with electrical ratings B, C, D, or E.
* International approving agencies will require that
switches with these terminals have insulated receptacles or connector.
Printed Wiring Board PO1
Printed wiring board terminals interface
with snap-on receptacles and other components from AMPMODU interconnection system.
Dimensions shown are for reference
only.
PO2 PO7
This section covers only 48 of our most popular V7 Series catalog listings. If you don’t find what you’re looking for, it’s likely
one of the approximately 300 other active V7 listings will meet your needs. Contact the 800 number.
M
iniature/
S
ub m iniature
Basic Switches V7 Series
Miniature
40 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
TIMERSAVER SERIES
PIN PLUNGERS ORDER GUIDE - SPDT*
Characteristics: O.F. – Operating Force; R.F. – Release Force; P.T. –
Pretravel; O.T. – Overtravel; D.T. – Differential Travel.
Elect. O.F. max. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T.
Catalog Rating grams grams mm mm mm
Listing P. 38 ounces ounces inches inches inches
V7-1S17D8 1 Amp 150 25 1,19 1,27 0,05-0,25
S 5.3 .88 .047 .050 .002-.010
V7-3S17E9 1 Amp 50 5 1,19 1,27 0,05-0,25
S 1.75 .175 .047 .050 .002-.010
V7-3A17E9 5 Amps 50 5 1,19 1,27 0,05-0,25
A 1.75 .175 .047 .050 .002-.010
V7-2B17D8 11 Amps 75 10 1,19 1,27 0,05-0,25
B 2.63 .35 .047 .050 .002-.010
V7-2B17E9 11 Amps 75 10 1,19 1,27 0,05-0,25
B 2.63 .35 .047 .050 .002-.010
V7-1C17D8 15.1 Amps 150 25 1,19 1,27 0,05-0,25
C 5.3 .88 .047 .050 .002-.010
V7-9W1AE9 15.1 Amps 300 25 1,19 1,27 0,25
W (350°F) 10.6 .88 .047 .050 .010 max.
V7-1V19E9 21 Amps 175 20 1,19 1,27 0,05-0,25
V 6.1 .70 .047 .050 .002-.010
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 1
STRAIGHT LEVERS
ORDER GUIDE - SPDT* .87N LEVER TIMESAVER SERIES
V7-3S17D8-002 1 Amp 54 3 1,52 0,89 0,33
S 1.9 .11 .060 .035 .013
V7-1A17D8-002 5 Amps 160 7 1,52 0.89 0,38
A 5.6 .25 .060 .035 .015
V7-2B17D8-002 11 Amps 80 5 1,52 0,89 0,38
B 2.8 1.76 .060 .035 .015
V7-1C17E9-002 15.1 Amps 160 17 1,52 0,89 0,36
C 5.6 .60 .060 .35 .014
V7-1V19E9-002 21 Amps 185 13 1,65 0,89 0,38
V 6.5 .5 .065 .035 .015
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 2
1.40N LEVER TIMESAVER SERIES
V7-3S17D8-022 1 Amp 30 1 3,04 2,16 0,76
S 1.05 0.035 .120 .085 .030
V7-1A17E9-022 5 Amps 85 8 3,04 1,52 0,76
A 3 .28 .120 .060 .030
V7-1X2AD8-022 6 Amps 185 15 1,40 0,76 0,38
X (350°F) 6.5 .53 .055 .030 .015
V7-1B17D8-022 11 Amps 82 8 3,04 1,7 0,68
B 2.9 .28 .120 .067 .027
V7-1C17E9-022 15.1 Amps 82 8 3,04 1,7 0,76
C 2.9 .28 .120 .067 .030
V7-1V19E9-022 21 Amps 95 5 3,3 1,78 0,76
V 3.3 .18 .130 .070 .030
2.34N LEVER TIMESAVER SERIES
V7-3S17D8-048 1 Amp 16 .5 5,97 3,0 1,27
S .56 .018 .235 .118 .050
V7-2B17D8-048 11 Amps 20 1 5,97 2.92 1,27
B .7 .035 .235 .115 .050
V7-1C17E9-048 15.1 Amps 85 4 5,97 1,65 1,29
C 3 .14 .235 .065 .051
V7-9W1AE9-048 15.1 Amps 90 4 6,35 3,15 1,37
W (350°F) 3.2 .14 .250 .124 .054
* For SPST (N.O. & N.C.) circuitry, contact the 800 number.
NOTE: Catalog listings in V7 Order Guides have standard .114N mounting holes. For 3mm size holes, contact the 800
number.
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 5
Basic Switches V7 Series
Miniature
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 41
SIMULATED
ROLLER LEVERS
ORDER GUIDE - SPDT*
1.29N LEVER TIMESAVER SERIES
Characteristics: O.F. – Operating Force; R.F. –
Release Force; P.T. – Pretravel; O.T. – Overtravel; D.T.
– Differential Travel.
Elect. O.F. max. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max.
Catalog Rating grams grams mm mm mm
Listing P. 38 ounces ounces inches inches inches
1.29N LEVER TIMESAVER SERIES
V7-1S17D8-263 1 Amp 90 9 2,79 1,9 0,76
S 3.15 .32 .110 .075 .030
V7-1B17D8-263 11 Amps 90 9 2,79 1,52 0,76
B 3.15 .32 .110 .060 .030
V7-1C17D8-263 15.1 Amps 91 9 2,79 1,54 0,61
C 3.19 .32 .110 .061 .024Dim. Dwg. Fig. 3
.81N ROLLER LEVER TIMERSAVER SERIES
V7-2S17D8-201 1 Amp 90 7 1,19 1,02 0,38
S 3.15 .25 .047 .040 .015
V7-2B17D8-201 11 Amps 88 7 1,3 1,04 0,3
B 3.1 .25 .052 .041 .012
V7-1C17E9-201 15.1 Amps 176 19 1,3 0,81 0,3
C 6.16 .67 .052 .032 .012
V7-1V19E9-201 21 Amps 205 15 1,42 0,81 0,33
V 7.2 .5 .056 .032 .013
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 4
1.34N ROLLER LEVER TIMESAVER SERIES
V7-3S17D8-207 1 Amp 35 2 2,79 2,03 0,76
S 1.23 .07 .110 .080 .030
V7-2A17D8-207 5 Amps 43 3 2,92 1,52 0,64
A 1.51 .105 .115 .060 .025
V7-1C17E9-207 15.1 Amps 86 9 2,84 1,63 0,64
C 3 .32 .112 .064 .025
V7-1V19E9-207 21 Amps 100 7 3,07 1,65 0,76
V 3.5 .25 .121 .065 .030
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 7
* For SPST (N.O. & N.C.) circuitry, contact the 800 number.
NOTE: Catalog listing in V7 Order Guides have standard .114N mounting holes. For 3mm size holes, contact the 800 number.
ORDER GUIDE – ACCESSORIES
Catalog Listing Description Catalog Listing Description
15PA176-V7 Connector/Receptacle packet - Includes 25
connectors and 75 receptacles with 18 N, blue 16
gauge PVC insulated, stranded wire. (To be used
with D8 terminals only).
15PA177-V7 Insulator packet (500 pcs.) .018N thick
varnished fiberglass.
15PA260 Plunger boot seal. Elastomer dust and splash
resistant plunger seal.
Dimensions shown are for reference only.
M
iniature/
S
ub m iniature
Basic Switches V7 Series
Miniature
42 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
INTERNATIONAL SERIES
PIN PLUNGER
ORDER GUIDE - SPDT*
Characteristics: O.F. – Operating Force; R.F. – Release Force; P.T. – Pretravel; O.T. – Overtravel; D.T. – Differential Travel.INTERNATIONAL SERIES
Elect. O.F. max. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T.
Catalog Rating grams grams mm mm mm
Listing P. 38 ounces ounces inches inches inches
V7-1B11E9 11 Amps 150 25 1,19 1,27 0,05-0,25
B 5.3 .88 .047 .050 .002-.010
V7-2B11D8 11 Amps 75 10 1,19 1,27 0,05-0,25
B 2.63 .35 .047 .050 .002-.010
V7-2B11PO2 11 Amps 75 10 1,19 1,27 0,05-0,25
B 2.63 .35 .047 .050 .002-.010
V7-3E11D8 10 Amps 50 5 1,19 1,27 0,05-0,25
E 1.75 .175 .047 .050 .002-.010
V7-3E11E9 10 Amps 50 5 1,19 1,27 0,05-0,25
E 1.75 .175 .047 .050 .002-.010
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 1
STRAIGHT LEVERS 1.40 N LEVER INTERNATIONAL SERIES
V7-1B11E9-022 11 Amps 80 8 2,79 2,28 0,76
B 2.8 .28 .110 .090 .030
V7-2B11E9-022 11 Amps 45 4 2,79 2,28 0,76
B 1.58 .14 .110 .090 .030
V7-3E11D8-022 10 Amps 30 2 2,79 2,28 0,76
E 1.05 .070 .110 .090 .030Dim. Dwg. Fig. 5
SIMULATED
ROLLER LEVERS 1.29N LEVER INTERNATIONAL SERIES
V7-2B11D8-263 11 Amps 50 5 2,54 1,9 0,76
B 1.75 .175 .100 .075 .030
V7-3E11E9-263 10 Amps 33 2 2,54 1,9 0,76
E 1.16 .070 .100 .075 .030
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 3
ROLLER LEVERS ORDER GUIDE - SPDT* .81N LEVER INTERNATIONAL SERIES
V7-2B11D8-201 11 Amps 90 10 1,19 1,02 0,38
B 3.15 .35 .047 .040 .015
V7-3E11D8-201 10 Amps 62 5 1,19 1,02 0,38
E 2.17 .175 .047 .040 .015
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 4
1.34 N LEVER INTERNATIONAL SERIES
V7-2B11E9-207 11 Amps 45 5 2,54 2,16 0,76
B 1.58 .175 .100 .085 .030
NOTE: Catalog listings in V7 Order Guides have standard .114N mounting holes. For 3mm size holes, contact the 800
number.
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 7
Basic Switches V7 Series
Miniature
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 43
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (for reference only)
PIN PLUNGER
Fig. 1
Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4Straight Lever Simulated Roller Roller Lever
(Style-002) (Style-263) (Style-201)
Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7Straight Lever Straight Lever Roller Lever
(Style-022) (Style-048) (Style-207)
NOTE: All levers are 0.17 N (4,31 mm) wide. Rollers are 0.19 N (4,82 mm) wide.
NOTE: Operate point dimensions taken at top of lever/roller.
M
iniature/
S
ub m iniature

Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
ENEC/CQC: 5 (2.5) A, 125 Vac/250 Vac (50000 cycles)
UL/cUL: 10 A 1½ HP, 125 Vac/250 Vac (100000 cycles)
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™ V15 Series Ordering Instructions
V15 XX
Switch type Special designator
T T125 5
ENEC/CQC:
5 (2.5) A,
125 Vac/250 Vac
(50000 cycles)
C
Quick connect
6,35 mm x 0,80
mm [0.250 in x 0.032
in]
Z SPDT 100 100 gf0.98 N
No lever
pin plunger
No lever
pin plunger
A special designator
letter is used only
when Terminal Type is
"X" or Actuator/Lever
Type is "99" to specify
that the terminals or
the actuator of the
switch is special.
Review Product
Specification to
determine the exact
differences.
Metric
Ø3,1 mm
H T150 10
UL/cUL:
10 A 1½ HP,
125 Vac/250 Vac
(100000 cycles)
D
Quick connect
4,80 mm x 0,8 mm
[0.187 in x 0.032
in]
P SPST-NO 200
200 gf
1.96N A
Far from pin
plunger 01
Short straight
lever K
USA
Ø2,9 mm
S T85 11
ENEC/CQC:
11(3) A, 125/150 Vac
25T85 5E4
UL/cUL:
11(3) A, 125/150 Vac
25T85 5E4
E
Quick connect
4,80 mm x 0,5 mm
[0.187 in x 0.020
in]
C SPST- NC 300
300 gf
2.94 N B Near pin plunger 02
Std. straight
lever
16
ENEC/CQC:
16(4)A 250 Vac
UL/cUL:
16 1/2HP
125/250 Vac
H Push-in terminals 400 400 gf3.92 N 03
Long straight
lever
22
ENEC/CQC:
22(8) A, 250 Vac
UL/cUL:
22 A 1HP,
125/250 Vac
04 Simulated roller lever
26
ENEC:
26(10) A, 250 Vac 05 Roller lever
06 Long roller lever
Disclaimer: Not all configurations are immediately available. 99 Special lever
Lever position Lever type
Temp.
grade °C Terminal style Circuit code
Operating force
at pin plunger, max.
Electrical
rating Mounting holes
K16
MICRO
SWITCH™ V-
Basic Switch
Standard (V15
Series)
T C Z 200 A 01
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
+1-815-235-6545 Fax
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Basic Switches TB Series
Miniature Double-break
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 45
AUXILIARY ACTUATORS
For use with 1TB1-1 and 1TB1-2 switches
JT-1
JT-5
Switches are not included with the actuators.
ORDER GUIDE
Catalog Listing Description
JT-1 Leaf actuator
JT-5 Roller leaf actuator
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Fig. 3 Fig. 4
M
iniature/
S
ub m iniature
MICRO SWITCH™ Premium
Large Snap-Action Series
Snap-Action Switches & Accessories
DESCRIPTION
MICRO SWITCH™ premium large snap-action series are
designed for repeatability and enhanced life. These series of
precision switches feature application-specific characteristics.
From double-break circuitry to handling very high loads,
MICRO SWITCH™ premium large snap-action series are
suitable for a variety of applications.
DT Series switches consist of two independent single-pole
double throw circuits in one housing actuated by one actuator.
The terminals are separated by a non-conductive shield to
reduce shorting.
MT Series magnetic blow-out switches are designed to switch
high-capacity (125 Vdc/250 Vdc) systems. An integral magnet
around the contact gap protects the contacts by deflecting the
arc. Vents between the cover and housing allow the hot gas to
escape.
Easy to gang mount, MN Series twin-break circuit type
switches are for use with limit or control mechanisms on
machine tools, presses, or other industrial equipment.
MICRO SWITCH™ TB Series miniature double-break basic
switches are basic double-break units that offer a means of
controlling isolated circuits. Each circuit may be driven by an
independent voltage source.
FEATURES
• Broad and deep array of product options and
characteristics
• SPDT circuits
• High capacity Vdc
• Broad range of accessories, including brackets and
actuators
• Rugged construction
• Reliable performance with enhanced mechanical life
• Various international agency approvals
POTENTIAL APPLICATIONS
• Building controls and fire suppression systems
• dc motors
• Door latches
• HVAC
• Industrial equipment
• Irrigation systems
• Machine tools
• Manually operated devices
• Medical/dental equipment
• Office equipment
• Presses
• Solenoids
• Semi-trailer trucks
• Test instruments
• Timing devices
• Valves
• Welders
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™ Premium Large Snap-Action Series
2 www.honeywell.com/sensing
SPECIFICATIONS
SERIES DT MT MN
Differentiator same size as the MICRO
SWITCH™ BZ Series, but with
two circuits
contains a magnet for very high
dc loads
double-break circuitry
Use design permits several different
wiring configurations
designed to switch high capacity
(125 Vdc and 250 Vdc) systems
limit or control mechanisms
Potential
applications
HVAC, irrigation systems,
manually operated devices,
medical/dental equipment, office
equipment, semi-trailer trucks,
test instruments, timing devices,
valves
dc motors, solenoids machine tools, presses, other
industrial equipment
Ampere rating 10 A 10 A 15 A
Circuitry DPDT SPDT 2 CKT DB
Operating force 3,34 N to 5,56 N
[12.0 oz to 20.0 oz] max.
3,34 N to 5,00 N
[12 oz to 18 oz] max.
1,95 N to 3,1 N
[7.0 oz to 11.0 oz]
Termination screw solder, screw screw
Actuator pin plunger, straight plunger,
straight lever, reversed lever,
roller lever
pin plunger, straight lever, roller
lever, flexible leaf, flexible leaf
with roller
pin plunger
Voltage 125 Vac, 250 Vac, 28 Vdc 125 Vdc, 250 Vdc 480 Vac
Agency approvals UL recognized; CSA certified UL recognized UL recognized; CSA certified
Operating
temperature
-55 °C to 85 °C
[-67 °F to 185 °F]
-55 °C to 82 °C
[-67 °F to 180 °F]
-55 °C to 85 °C
[-67 °F to 185 °F]
Contacts silver silver silver
Housing general purpose phenolic arc resistant melamine general purpose phenolic
Sealing no no no
Expected
mechanical life
– 100,000 operations 10,000,000 cycles
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Snap-Action Switches & Accessories
Honeywell Sensing and Control 3
SERIES TB WZ/WA/WM/WE YZ/YA/YM/YE
Differentiator smaller double-break switch SPNC contacts SPNO contacts
Use offer a means of controlling isolated circuits ideal for high cost-of-failure applications
Potential applications control systems, industrial equipment, and
welders
communication systems, elevators/lifts, HVAC,
irrigation systems, semi-trailer trucks, and valves
Ampere rating 10 A 15 A (WZ/YZ), 20 A (WA/YA), 22 A (WM/YM),
25 A (WE/YE)
Circuitry 2 CKT DB SPNC SPNO
Operating force 1,95 N to 3,89 N
[7 oz to 14 oz] max.
1.0 oz to 28 oz
Termination screw, solder quick connect, solder, screw
Actuator pin plunger pin plunger, overtravel plunger, straight, roller,
flexible leaf roller, flexible leaf
Voltage 250 Vac 115 Vac, 125 Vac, 250 Vac
Agency approvals UL recognized, CSA certified UL, CSA, ENEC, CE (varies by specific model)
Operating temperature -55 °C to 125 °C [-67 °F to 257 °F] -55 °C to 85 °C [-67 °F to 185 °F]
Contacts silver silver, silver cadmium oxide
Housing general purpose phenolic general purpose phenolic
Sealing none environment sealing option available
Expected mechanical
life
– up to 20,000,000 cycles at 95% survival
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™ Premium Large Snap-Action Series
4 www.honeywell.com/sensing
DT SERIES LEVER OPTIONS & DIMENSIONS mm/in
Lever/
Terminals
Dimensions Lever/
Terminals
Dimensions
Pin plunger/
Screw
Straight/ Screw
Straight/ Screw
Roller lever/
Screw
Roller lever/
Screw
Roller lever/
Screw
Roller lever/
Screw
Roller lever/
Screw
Straight
plunger/ Screw
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Snap-Action Switches & Accessories
Honeywell Sensing and Control 5
MT SERIES LEVER OPTIONS & DIMENSIONS mm/in
Lever/
Terminals
Dimensions Lever/
Terminals
Dimensions
Pin plunger/
Screw
Straight lever/
Screw
Roller lever/
Screw
Flexible leaf/
Screw
Flexible leaf
roller/ Screw
3MN SERIES LEVER OPTIONS & DIMENSIONS mm/in
Lever/
Terminals
Dimensions
Pin plunger/
Screw
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™ Premium Large Snap-Action Series
6 www.honeywell.com/sensing
TB SERIES LEVER OPTIONS & DIMENSIONS mm/in
Lever/
Terminals
Dimensions Lever/
Terminals
Dimensions
Pin plunger/
Screw
Pin Plunger/
Solder
Pin plunger/
Solder front
Pin plunger/
Solder front
four circuit
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Snap-Action Switches & Accessories
Honeywell Sensing and Control 7
WZ/WA/WM/WE SERIES LEVER OPTIONS & DIMENSIONS mm/in
All products shown with screw terminals. See next page for available terminal options.
Lever Dimensions Lever Dimensions
Pin plunger
Pin plunger
Overtravel
plunger
Overtravel
plunger
Bushing
mount
overtravel
plunger
Bushing
mount
overtravel
plunger
Flexible leaf
actuator
Flexible leaf
actuator
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™ Premium Large Snap-Action Series
8 www.honeywell.com/sensing
Continued - WZ/WA/WM/WE SERIES LEVER OPTIONS & DIMENSIONS mm/in
Straight lever
with external
return spring
Straight lever
Roller lever
Pin plunger
with manual
reset
WZ/WA/WM/WE SERIES AVAILABLE TERMINALS
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™ Premium Large Snap-Action Series
10 www.honeywell.com/sensing
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
Differential Travel-DT Plunger or actuator travel from point where contacts “snap-over” to point where they “snap-back.”
Free Position-FP Position of switch plunger or actuator when no external force is applied.
Full Overtravel Force Force required to attain full overtravel of actuator.
Operating PositionOP
Position of switch plunger or actuator at which point contacts snap from normal to operated
position. With flexible or adjustable actuators, the operating position is measured from the end of
the lever or its maximum length. Location of operating position measurement shown on mounting
dimension drawings.
Operating Force-OF
Amount of force applied to switch plunger or actuator to cause the contact “snap-over.” Note in the
case of adjustable actuators, the force is measured from the maximum length position of the lever.
Overtravel-OT Plunger or actuator travel safely available beyond operating position.
Pretravel-PT Distance or angle traveled in moving plunger or actuator from free position to operating position.
Release Force-RF
Amount of force still applied to switch plunger or actuator at the moment contacts snap from
operated position to non-operated position.
Total Travel Distance from actuator free position to overtravel limit position.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Snap-Action Switches & Accessories
Honeywell Sensing and Control 11
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Sensing and Control
Honeywell
1985 Douglas Drive North
Golden Valley, MN 55422
www.honeywell.com/sensing
004956-1-EN IL50 GLO Printed in USA
June 2010
Copyright © 2010 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.
WARNING
PERSONAL INJURY
DO NOT USE these products as safety or emergency stop
devices or in any other application where failure of the
product could result in personal injury.
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in
death or serious injury.
WARNING
MISUSE OF DOCUMENTATION
• The information presented in this product sheet is for
reference only. Do not use this document as a product
installation guide.
• Complete installation, operation, and maintenance
information is provided in the instructions supplied with
each product.
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in
death or serious injury.
WARRANTY/REMEDY
Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as being free of defective
materials and faulty workmanship. Honeywell’s standard product
warranty applies unless agreed to otherwise by Honeywell in writing;
please refer to your order acknowledgement or consult your local sales
office for specific warranty details. If warranted goods are returned to
Honeywell during the period of coverage, Honeywell will repair or
replace, at its option, without charge those items it finds defective. The
foregoing is buyer’s sole remedy and is in lieu of all other
warranties, expressed or implied, including those of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. In no event
shall Honeywell be liable for consequential, special, or indirect
damages.
While we provide application assistance personally, through our
literature and the Honeywell web site, it is up to the customer to
determine the suitability of the product in the application.
Specifications may change without notice. The information we supply
is believed to be accurate and reliable as of this printing. However, we
assume no responsibility for its use.
SALES AND SERVICE
Honeywell serves its customers through a worldwide network of sales
offices, representatives and distributors. For application assistance,
current specifications, pricing or name of the nearest Authorized
Distributor, contact your local sales office or:
E-mail: info.sc@honeywell.com
Internet: www.honeywell.com/sensing
Phone and Fax:
Asia Pacific +65 6355-2828
+65 6445-3033 Fax
Europe +44 (0) 1698 481481
+44 (0) 1698 481676 Fax
Latin America +1-305-805-8188
+1-305-883-8257 Fax
USA/Canada +1-800-537-6945
+1-815-235-6847
+1-815-235-6545 Fax
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Basic Switches DT Series
Double-pole Double-throw
66 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
FEATURES
1 Two independent single-pole doublethrow circuits on one housing
1 Design permitting several wiring
combinations
1 Savings in space and weight
1 Mounting interchangeability with type
Z switches
1 Temperature tolerance to +180°F
(82°C)
1 UL recognized, CSA certified
AVAILABLE TERMINALS
B6
6-32 UNC H .188 N
(No. 5 pan head screws)
A7
4-40 UNC H .125 N
Screws with lockwashers.
Fiberglas insulator isolates
terminals and prevents
accidental shorting.
ELECTRICAL RATING
Electrical Data and
Circuitry UL Codes
Double-pole
double-throw
J 10 amps, 125 or 250 vac;
0.3 amp, 125 vdc; 0.15 amp,
250 vdc.
UL Code L59
DOUBLE-POLE
DOUBLE THROW
ORDER GUIDE
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; R.F. — Release Force;
P.T. — Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential Travel;
O.P. — Operating Position.
O.F. R.F. P.T. D.T. max.
Electrical max. min. max. O.T. min. O.P.*
Data and newtons newtons mm mm mm mm
Catalog Listing Description UL Code ounces ounces inches inches inches inches
DT-2R-A7
MS25008-1
Pin plunger 10 Amps 3,34-5,56 0,56 1,91 0,13 1,02-1,52 15,6
J 12-20 2 .075 .005 .040-.060 .615±.015
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 1
DT-2RS1-A7 Straight plunger 10 Amps 3,34-5,56 0,28 1,91 0,51 1,02-1,52 28,2±0,38
J 12-20 1 .075 .020 .040-.060 1.11±.015
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 9
DT-2RV3-A7 Straight lever
Reversed lever
position
10 Amps 1,11-1,95 0,14 6,86 0,25 2,92-4,83 18,3
J 4-7 0.5 .270 .010 .115-.190 .719
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 3
DT-2RV-A7 Straight lever 10 Amps 0,97-1,67 0,28 25,4 1,57 12,4-19,2 21,8
J 3.5-6 1 1 .062 .490-.755 .859
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 2
Except where stated * ±0,76 mm
±.030 in.
Basic Switches DT Series
Double-pole Double-throw
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 67
ORDER GUIDE
Electrical O.F. max. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P.*
Data and newtons newtons mm mm mm mm
Catalog Listing Recommended For UL Codes ounces ounces inches inches inches inches
DT-2RV216-A7 Roller lever
(centered steel roller)
10 Amps
J
11,1
2.5 lbs.
1,11
4
1,02
.040
0,13
.005
0,51-0,76
.020-.030
31
1.219
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 8
DT-2RV22-A7 1.03 inch (26,2mm) roller
lever (steel roller)
10 Amps
J
2,5-3,89
9-14
0,83
3 –
0,79
.031
4,95-7,75
.195-.305
30,2±0,38
1.188±.015
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 5
DT-2RV212-A7 Roller lever
Reversed lever position
10 Amps
J
2,5-4,17
9-15
0,42
1.5
3,3
.130
0,13
.005
1,27-2,16
.050-.085
29,4
1.156
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 7
DT-2RV23-A7 Roller lever
Reversed lever position
10 Amps
J
1,53-2,64
5.5-9.5
0,21
.75
4,45
.175
0,25
.010
2,16-3,43
.085-.135
29,4
1.156
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 6
DT-2RV2-A7 1.90 inch (48,3 mm) roller
lever (steel roller)
10 Amps
J
1,25-2,09
4.5-7.5
0,42
1.5


1,19
.047
9,27-14,4
.365-.565
31,8
1.250
Except where stated * ±0,76 mm
±.030 in.
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 4 Auxiliary actuators see page 68-69.
S
tand
ard
B
asic
S
w itch
es Basic Switches DT Series
Double-pole Double-throw
68 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
PIN PLUNGER STRAIGHT LEVER
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
STRAIGHT LEVER ROLLER LEVER
Fig. 3 Fig. 4
Basic Switches DT Series
Double-pole Double-throw
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 69
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
ROLLER LEVER ROLLER LEVER
Fig. 5 Fig. 6
ROLLER LEVER ROLLER LEVER
Fig. 7 Fig. 8
STRAIGHT PLUNGER
Fig. 9
S
tand
ard
B
asic
S
w itch
es Basic Switches MT Series
Magnetic Blow-out
70 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
FEATURES
1 Arc resistant case
1 Mechanical life of 100,000 operations
— 95% survival
1 Temperature tolerance to +180°F
(82°C)
1 Mounting interchangeability with Z
switches
1 UL recognized
GENERAL INFORMATION
MT (single-pole double-throw) magnetic
blow-out switches are designed to switch
high capacity (125 and 250 VDC) systems. An integral magnet around the contact gap protects the contacts by deflecting the arc. Vents between the cover and
housing allow the hot gas to escape.
These switches are designed for the control of DC motors, solenoids, etc.
AVAILABLE TERMINALS
Solder (No listing designation) A28
6-32NC H .218 N Screws
will accept up to #12 wire.
ELECTRICAL RATING
Electrical Data and
Circuitry UL Codes
Single-pole
double-throw
unless
otherwise noted
in order guide
K Rating established with
switch non-polarized
10 amps, 125 vac or vdc;
1/4 hp, 125 vac or vdc.
UL Code L 168
Non-polarized:
10 amps res. or 1/4 hp, 125 vdc;
3 amps max. res. 250 vdc.
Polarized*:
10 amps res. or 1/2 hp, 125 vdc;
3 amps max. res., 250 vdc.
*To polarize, connect negative side of line to common terminal. To
achieve the same effect, mount switch with brass screws, using a
non-magnetic barrier (at least 1⁄4 N thick) between the switch and
mounting surface.
Characteristics: O.F. – Operating Force;
R.F. – Release Force; P.T. – Pretravel;
O.T. – Overtravel; D.T. – Differential Travel;
O.P. – Operating Position.
ORDER GUIDE
Electrical O.F. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P.
Data and newtons newtons mm mm mm mm
Catalog Listing Recommended For UL Codes ounces ounces inches inches inches inches
MT-4R-A28 Pin plunger
SPDT
10 Amps
K
3,34-5,0
12-18
1,39
5
1,02
.04
0,13
.005
0,1-0,18
.004-.007
15,9±0,38
.625±.015
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 1
Basic Switches MT Series
Magnetic Blow-out
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 71
ORDER GUIDE
Electrical O.F. max. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P.*
Data and newtons newtons mm mm mm mm
Catalog Listing Description UL Codes ounces ounces inches inches inches inches
MT-4RV-A28 Straight lever 10 Amps
K
0,56
2
0,14
0.5
12,7
0.5
1,19
.047
2,16
.085
19,1
.750
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 2
MT-4RV2-A28 1.90 inch (48,3mm) lever
with hardened steel roller
10 Amps
K
0,76
2.75
0,07
0.25
8,89
0.35
0,79
.031
1,65
.065
30,2
1.188
MT-4RV22-A28 1.03 inch (26,2mm) lever
with hardened steel roller
10 Amps
K
1,25
4.5
0,28
1
5,08
.200
0,38
.015
0,89
.035
31,3
1.234
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 3
MT-4RL-A28 1.95 inch (49,5mm)
flexible leaf
10 Amps
K
3,34
12
0,28
1 —
1,52
.060
max.

19,1
.750
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 4
MT-4RL2-A28 1.82 inch (46,2mm)
flexible leaf with hardened
steel roller
10 Amps
K
3,34
12
0,28
1 —
1,52
.060
max.

30,2
1.188
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 5
Except where stated * ±0,76 mm
±.030 in.
S
tand
ard
B
asic
S
w itch
es Basic Switches MT Series
Magnetic Blow-out
72 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
PIN PLUNGER STRAIGHT LEVER
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
ROLLER LEVER FLEXIBLE LEAF
Fig. 3 Fig. 4
FLEXIBLE ROLLER LEAF
Fig. 5
Mounting holes accept pins or screws of
.139 N (3,53 mm) diameter.
Basic Switches 3MN Series
Double-break
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 73
FEATURES
1 .080 inch minimum overtravel
1 Power load switching capability up to
15 amperes
1 Motor handling capacity of 1 horsepower at 240 vac.
1 Long mechanical life of 10,000,000 cycles—95% survival
1 Arc resistant plastic
1 More space between terminals to reduce possibility of shorting
1 #8 Terminal screws
1 UL recognized, CSA certified
GENERAL INFORMATION
3MN switches are for use with limit or control mechanisms on machine tools,
presses or other industrial equipment.
These switches provide easy gang
mounting.
The terminals of double-break switches
must be wired to identical voltage sources and the same polarity. The loads
should be on the same sides of the lines.
ELECTRICAL RATING
Electrical Data and
Circuitry UL Codes
Two-circuit
double-break
V Motor Control
15 amps, 120, 240, 480 or 600 vac;
1/2 hp, 120 vac; 1 hp, 240 vac;
0.8 amp, 115 vdc; 0.4 amp,
230 vdc.
ORDER GUIDE
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; R.F. — Release Force; P.T.
— Pretravel; O.T. – Overtravel; D.T. — Differential Travel; O.P. — Operating
Position.
R.F. P.T. O.T.
Electrical O.F. min. max. min. D.T. O.P.* max.
Catalog Data and newtons newtons mm mm mm mm
Listing Description UL Codes ounces ounces inches inches inches inches
3MN1 For most
applications
15 Amps 3,34-5,56 1,67 1,52 2,03 0,38-0,63 2,16
V 12-20 6 .060 .080 .015-.025 .085
3MN6 Lower force 15 Amps 1,95-3,1 1,11 1,52 2,03 0,38-0,63 2,16
V 7-11 4 .060 .080 .015-.025 .085
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 1 * ±0,38 mm
±.015 in.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
Fig. 1
S
tand
ard
B
asic
S
w itch
es Basic Switches TB Series
Miniature Double-break
44 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
FEATURES
1 Power load switching capability up to
10 amperes
1 Motor handling capacity of 1⁄2 horsepower, 125 VAC
1 Two- and four-circuit double-break
1 Several auxiliary actuators
1 Choice of terminal styles
1 UL recognized, CSA certified
1 Momentary action
GENERAL INFORMATION
TB miniature switches are basic doublebreak units which offer a means of controlling isolated circuits. Each circuit can
be driven by independent voltage sources. These switches find many uses in
modern control systems because of their
circuitry.
The terminals of two- and four-circuit double break switches must be wired to identical voltage sources and the same polarity so that a voltage potential is not set up
between adjacent terminals. A voltage
potential between adjacent terminals
could promote dielectric breakdown at
high energy levels. The loads should be
on the same sides of the line.
ORDER GUIDE
Characteristics: O.F. – Operating Force; R.F. – Release Force;
P.T. – Pretravel; O.T. – Overtravel; D.T. – Differential Travel; O.P.
– Operating Position.
Electrical
Data And O.F. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. O.P.**
Catalog UL Code newtons newtons mm mm mm mm
Listing Description Page 20 ounces ounces inches inches inches inches
1TB1-1 Two-circuit, doublebreak end screw
terminals
10 Amps 1,95-3,61 1,11 1,52 0,25 0,25-0,64 11,7
Z 7-13 4 .060 .010 .010-.025 .460
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 1
1TB1-2 Two-circuit, doublebreak end solder
terminals
10 Amps 1,95-3,61 1,11 1,52 0,25 0,25-0,64 11,7
Z 7-13 4 .060 .010 .010-.025 .460
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 2
1TB1-3 Two-circuit, doublebreak front solder
terminals
10 Amps 1,95-3,61 1,11 1,52 0,25 0,25-0,64 11,7
Z 7-13 4 .060 .010 .010-0.25 .460
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 3
41TB5-3 Four-circuit, doublebreak front solder
terminals
10 Amps 5,56-10,0 2,22 1,78 0,25 0,64-1,14 4,70
Z 20-36 8 .070 .010 .025-.045 .185
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 4 * ±0,38 mm
±.015 in
MICRO SWITCH™
Premium Large Snap-Action
BZ/BA/BM/BE & 6AS Series
Snap-Action Switches & Accessories
DESCRIPTION
Accurate, reliable, and repeatable, MICRO SWITCH™
BZ/BA/BM/BE Series feature wide operating characteristics
and enhanced life. These premium, large snap-action switches
offer precision operation and sensitive differential travel.
Utilizing state-of-the-art manufacturing processes and quality
controls, Honeywell has engineered premium, large snapaction switches that meet all international agency
requirements. Some models have military qualifications.
FEATURES
• Accepted world-wide with international agency
approvals
• Various operating force and differential travel options
• Momentary or maintained contact action
• Watertight IP64 option
• Enhanced mechanical life up to 20,000,000 cycles
• Elongated mounting hole for easier, more accurate
mounting
• Current rating ranges from 15 A to 25 A
• Choice of actuation, termination and operating
characteristics
• Gold contacts available
• Precision operation – sensitive differential travel from
0,005 mm to 0,008 mm
• Internal flat spring design for improved performance and
contact wiping ability
• High temperature options to 204 °C [400 °F]
• UL508 ratings offered
• Military standard construction – listings available with
MIL-S-8805 qualification
MICRO SWITCH™ BZ/BA/BM/BE Series are often used for
precision on/off applications, as well as end of limit,
presence/absence, and manual operator interface functions.
Their engineering design meets most applications needs.
Configuration options with BM, BA and BE switches give a
broader range of operating and interface characteristics.
The MICRO SWITCH™ 6AS Series consists of two large
premium BZ/BA/BM/BE snap-action switches ganged together
and actuated by a single actuator. Field adjustable operating
point is an option for one or both switches.
POTENTIAL APPLICATIONS
• Building controls and fire suppression systems
• Communication systems
• Door latching mechanisms
• Elevators/lifts
• Foot pedals
• HVAC
• Industrial kitchen equipment
• Irrigation systems
• Machine tools
• Manually operated devices
• Medical/dental equipment
• Semi-trailer trucks
• Surtran
• Test instruments
• Timing devices
• Valves
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™ Premium Large Snap-Action BZ/BA/BM/BE Series
2 www.honeywell.com/sensing
SPECIFICATIONS
SERIES BZ BA BM BE
Potential applications brake assemblies, building controls (sprinkler systems), communication systems, door latches,
elevators/lifts, foot pedals, HVAC, industrial kitchen equipment, irrigation systems, timing devices,
and valve positioning,
Ampere rating 15 A 20 A 22 A 25 A
Circuitry SPDT
Operating force 1.0 oz to 28 oz
Termination quick connect, solder, screw
Actuator pin plunger, overtravel plunger, straight, roller, flexible leaf roller, flexible leaf
Voltage 115 Vac, 125 Vac, 250 Vac
Agency approvals UL, CSA, ENEC, CE (varies by specific model)
Operating temperature -55 °C to 85 °C [-67 °F to 185 °F]
Contacts silver, silver cadmium oxide
Housing general purpose phenolic (options for IP64 watertight version)
Sealing Environment sealing option available
Dielectric strength 2000 V between each terminal and ground
Contact resistance 15 mOhm max.
Insulation resistance 100 mOhm min.
Vibration 1,5 mm peak-to-peak amplitude, frequency 10 Hz to 55 Hz, for two continuous hours
Expected mechanical life up to 20,000,000 cycles at 95% survival
Expected electrical
service life
100K operations at full load
Rated frequency 45 Hz to 65 Hz
AVAILABLE TERMINALS
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Snap-Action Switches & Accessories
Honeywell Sensing and Control 3
STANDARD LEVER OPTIONS & DIMENSIONS mm/in
All products shown with screw terminals. See page 2 for available terminal options.
Lever Dimensions Lever Dimensions
Pin plunger
Pin plunger
Overtravel
plunger
Overtravel
plunger
Bushing
mount
overtravel
plunger
Bushing
mount
overtravel
plunger
Flexible leaf
actuator
Flexible leaf
actuator
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™ Premium Large Snap-Action BZ/BA/BM/BE Series
4 www.honeywell.com/sensing
STANDARD LEVER OPTIONS & DIMENSIONS mm/in
Straight lever
with external
return spring
Straight lever
Roller lever
Pin plunger
with manual
reset
6AS SERIES – PREMIUM LARGE SNAP-ACTION TANDEM SWITCH ASSEMBLY
The MICRO SWITCH™ 6AS Series consists of two large premium BZ/BA/BM/BE snapaction switches ganged together and actuated by a single actuator. Operating
characteristics are dependent upon the type of individual switches and actuators
chosen. Field adjustable operating point on one or both basic switches.
Solder, A2, and T-type terminations available, along with straight, roller, and leaf levers.
Mounting holes accept pins or screws of 3,53 mm [0.139 in] diameter.
Often used for boiler controls or anywhere two circuits need to be controlled by one
actuator.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Snap-Action Switches & Accessories
Honeywell Sensing and Control 5
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
Differential Travel-DT Plunger or actuator travel from point where contacts “snap-over” to point where they “snap-back.”
Free Position-FP Position of switch plunger or actuator when no external force is applied.
Full Overtravel Force Force required to attain full overtravel of actuator.
Operating PositionOP
Position of switch plunger or actuator at which point contacts snap from normal to operated
position. With flexible or adjustable actuators, the operating position is measured from the end of
the lever or its maximum length. Location of operating position measurement shown on mounting
dimension drawings.
Operating Force-OF
Amount of force applied to switch plunger or actuator to cause the contact “snap-over.” Note in the
case of adjustable actuators, the force is measured from the maximum length position of the lever.
Overtravel-OT Plunger or actuator travel safely available beyond operating position.
Pretravel-PT Distance or angle traveled in moving plunger or actuator from free position to operating position.
Release Force-RF
Amount of force still applied to switch plunger or actuator at the moment contacts snap from
operated position to non-operated position.
Total Travel Distance from actuator free position to overtravel limit position.
ACTUATORS BA, BE, BM, and BZ standard snap-action switches use the actuators described:
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™ Premium Large Snap-Action BZ/BA/BM/BE Series
6 www.honeywell.com/sensing
LARGE PREMIUM SWITCH SERIES NOMENCLATURE TREE (not all configurations available)
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Basic Switches 6AS Series
Tandem Switch Assemblies
74 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
FEATURES
1 Variety of actuators
1 Choice of circuitries and electrical
ratings
1 Choice of terminations
1 Field adjustable operating point on one
or both basic switches
GENERAL INFORMATION
6AS switches are two standard basic
switches ganged together and actuated
by a single actuator. Operating characteristics will depend on the type of individual
switches and actuators.
ELECTRICAL RATING
Electrical Data and
Circuitry UL Codes
Single-pole
double-throw
unless
otherwise noted
in order guide
A 15 amps, 125, 250 or 480 vac;
1/8 hp, 125 vac; 1/4 hp, 250 vac;
1/2 amp, 125 vdc; 1/4 amp,
250 vdc.
UL Code L96
Single-pole
double-throw
unless
otherwise noted
in order guide
G 20 amps, 125, 250 or 480 vac;
10 amps, 125 vac ‘‘L’’ (tungsten
lamp load);
1 hp, 125 vac; 2 hp, 250 vac;
1/2 amp, 125 vdc; 1/4 amp,
250 vdc.
UL Code L23
ORDER GUIDE
Characteristics: O.F. – Operating Force; R.F. – Release Force; P.T. – Pretravel; O.T. – Overtravel; D.T. – Differential Travel; O.P. – Operating Position.
Lever O.F. R.F. O.T. D.T.
Length Electrical max. min. min. max. O.P.*
Catalog mm Type Data and newtons newtons mm mm mm
Listing Description inches Terminals UL Codes ounces ounces inches inches inches
6AS32 Centered lever. Adjustment over
both switches.
58,72 15 Amps 2,22 0,14 0,51 2,77 18,29
2.312 Solder A 8 0.5 .020 .109 .720 adj.
6AS54 Short lever. Adjustment over
switch D.
20,47 15 Amps 3,34 0,83 0,25 3,96 18,24
.806 Solder A 12 3 .010 .156 .718 max.
6AS25 Centered lever. Adjustment over
switch D.
32,26 20 Amps 3,89 1,11 1,02 18,67
1.270 A2 G 14 4 .040 — .735Dim. Dwg. Fig. 1
Unless otherwise noted * ±0,76 mm
±.030 in.
Basic Switches 6 AS Series
Tandem Switch Assemblies
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 75
ORDER GUIDE
Lever O.F. R.F. O.T. D.T.
Length Electrical max. min. min. max. O.P.*
Catalog mm Type Data and newtons newtons mm mm mm
Listing Description inches Terminals UL Codes ounces ounces inches inches inches
6AS13 Centered lever.
Adjustment over
switch D.
30,56 15 Amps 2,22 0,14 0,51 2,77 29,77
1.203 Solder A 8 0.5 .020 .109 1.172
6AS18 Centered lever.
Adjustment over both
switches.
30,56 15 Amps 2,22 0,14 0,51 2,77 29,77
1.203 Solder A 8 0.5 .020 .109 1.172 adj.
6AS36 Lever over switch C.
Adjustment over
switch D.
30,56 15 Amps 2,22 0,14 0,51 2,77 29,77
1.203 A2 A 8 0.5 .020 .109 1.172
6AS35 Lever and adjustment
over switch D.
30,56 15 Amps 2,22 0,14 0,51 2,77 29,77
1.203 A2 A 8 0.5 .020 .109 1.172
6AS16 Centered lever.
Adjustment over
switch D.
30,56 20 Amps 3,89 1,11 1,02 3,96 30,96±1,14
1.203 A2 G 14 4 .040 .156 1.219±.045
6AS69 Centered lever.
Adjustment over
switch D.
27,25 25 Amps 30,96±1,14
1.073 T M — — — — 1.219±.045
6AS112 Centered lever.
Adjustment over
switch D.
30,56 25 Amps 3,89 1,11 1,02 3,96 30,96±1,14
1.203 A2 H 14 4 .040 .156 1.219±.045
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 2
6AS5 Centered leaf. No
adjustment. Switches
operate within .030 N
of each other.
38,35 15 Amps 0,76-1,52
1.51 A2 A — — .030-.060 —
Dim. Dwg. Fig. 3
Unless otherwise noted * ±0,76 mm
±.030 in.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
STRAIGHT LEVER ROLLER LEVER LEAF
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3
Mounting holes accept pins or screws of
.139 N (3,53 mm) diameter.
S
tand
ard
B
asic
S
w itch
es Snap-Action Switches & Accessories
Honeywell Sensing and Control 7
LARGE SNAP-ACTION SWITCH ACCESSORIES
Brackets
8MA1 8MA2 17MA1-B
Description Adjustable mounting bracket with
adjustment slot on left
Adjustable mounting bracket with
adjustment slot on right
Conversion mounting bracket
Housing material Steel Steel Corrosion-resistant metal
Measurements
60,2 mm W x 21,3 mm H x 7,4 mm D [2.37 in W x 0.84 in H x 0.29 in D]
66,8 mm W x 19,0 mm D
[2.63 in W x 0.75 in D]
Features
sturdy plated steel construction; fast, easy screwdriver adjustment; can be used
with all standard basic switches
converts standard basic switches from
side to top mount; corrosion resistant;
snaps into switch mounting holes
without tools
Die-cast zinc enclosures
3PA1 3PA28 3PA2
Description mounted from either side through 3,55
mm [0.140 in] dia. holes on 25,4 mm
[1.0 in] centers
mounted from either side through 3,55
mm [0.140 in] dia. holes on 25,4 mm
[1.0 in] centers. 1/2-14 NPSM internal
thread conduit hub
switch secured in enclosure; two 4,37
mm [0.172 in] dia. holes in flange
accept #8 screws for mounting on 41,3
mm [1.625 in] centers
Housing material die-cast zinc enclosure (side mount) die-cast zinc enclosure (side mount) die-cast zinc enclosure (flange mount)
Measurements 74,8 mm W x 42,9 mm H x 25,4 mm D
[2.95 in W x 1.69 in H x 1.00 in D]
74,8 mm W x 42,9 mm H x 25,4 mm D
[2.95 in W x 1.69 in H x 1.00 in D]
74,8 mm W x 42,9 mm H x 25,4 mm D
[2.95 in W x 1.69 in H x 1.00 in D]
Features protects the switch from physical abuse and personnel from contact with exposed terminals
Plastic thermal enclosures
5PA1 5PA2 5PA3
Description
Plastic terminal enclosure used with
solder terminal switches
Plastic terminal enclosure use with
screw terminal switches
Plastic terminal enclosure used with
either solder or screw terminal
switches with auxiliary actuators
assembled
Housing material plastic plastic plastic
Measurements 52,8 mm W x 16,1 mm H
[2.08 in W x 0.64 in H]
52,8 mm W x 20,2 mm H x 21,0 mm D
[2.08 in W x 0.80 in H x 0.83 in D]
52,8 mm W x 20,2 mm H x 21,0 mm D
[2.08 in W x 0.80 in H x 0.83 in D]
Features easy to use; screw and solder terminal versions; protect personnel from contact with exposed terminals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Sensing and Control
Honeywell
1985 Douglas Drive North
Golden Valley, MN 55422
www.honeywell.com/sensing
004955-1-EN IL50 GLO Printed in USA
June 2010
Copyright © 2010 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.
WARNING
PERSONAL INJURY
DO NOT USE these products as safety or emergency stop
devices or in any other application where failure of the
product could result in personal injury.
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in
death or serious injury.
WARNING
MISUSE OF DOCUMENTATION
• The information presented in this product sheet is for
reference only. Do not use this document as a product
installation guide.
• Complete installation, operation, and maintenance
information is provided in the instructions supplied with
each product.
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in
death or serious injury.
WARRANTY/REMEDY
Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as being free of defective
materials and faulty workmanship. Honeywell’s standard product
warranty applies unless agreed to otherwise by Honeywell in writing;
please refer to your order acknowledgement or consult your local sales
office for specific warranty details. If warranted goods are returned to
Honeywell during the period of coverage, Honeywell will repair or
replace, at its option, without charge those items it finds defective. The
foregoing is buyer’s sole remedy and is in lieu of all other
warranties, expressed or implied, including those of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. In no event
shall Honeywell be liable for consequential, special, or indirect
damages.
While we provide application assistance personally, through our
literature and the Honeywell web site, it is up to the customer to
determine the suitability of the product in the application.
Specifications may change without notice. The information we supply
is believed to be accurate and reliable as of this printing. However, we
assume no responsibility for its use.
SALES AND SERVICE
Honeywell serves its customers through a worldwide network of sales
offices, representatives and distributors. For application assistance,
current specifications, pricing or name of the nearest Authorized
Distributor, contact your local sales office or:
E-mail: info.sc@honeywell.com
Internet: www.honeywell.com/sensing
Phone and Fax:
Asia Pacific +65 6355-2828
+65 6445-3033 Fax
Europe +44 (0) 1698 481481
+44 (0) 1698 481676 Fax
Latin America +1-305-805-8188
+1-305-883-8257 Fax
USA/Canada +1-800-537-6945
+1-815-235-6847
+1-815-235-6545 Fax
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Basic Switches
Auxiliary Actuators Standard Basic
62 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
FEATURES
1 Additional overtravel
1 Quick, easy installation
1 Corrosion resistance
1 MIL-S-8805 listed units
NOTE: Switches shown are not included with the actuator. All actuators are
for use with pin plunger types only except catalog listing JR.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Auxiliary actuators adapt the plungertype standard basic switches to many application needs. Auxiliary actuators minimize the need for a large inventory of
switch types. Actuators and switches are
sold as separate items and must be ordered separately. Mounting hardware is
furnished with the actuator.
Characteristics:
O.T. — Overtravel;
O.P. — Operating Position;
F.P. — Free Position.
ORDER GUIDE
Description
Catalog
Listing
Use
Only
With
O.T. min.
mm inches
O.P.*
mm inches
F.P. max.
mm inches
Roller lever for ‘‘S’’ plunger type
BZ and DT switches only.
Permits cam operation.
JR BZ 11.1 44,45±3,18
DT .437 1.75±.125
Adjustable roller lever. Tang on
top of actuator can be bent to
adjust O.P. and F.P.
AD5721R
(8805/59)
AN3169-1
BZ
BM
11,1
.437
approx.
31,75-41,15
1.25-1.62
39,6-43,7
1.56-1.72
ADA3721R BA
BE
9,53
.375
approx.
40,48
1.594
approx.
43,03
1.812
ADD3721R DT
MT
9,53
.375
approx.
39,6
1.562
approx.
46,03
1.812
Straight plunger. Panel mount. MC2711
(8805/59)
AN3168-2
BZ
BM
4,78
.188
27,79
.188
29,4
1.156
MCA2711 BA
BE
3,96
.156
28,17
1.109
30,18
1.188
MCD2711 DT
MT
3,58
.141
27,79
1.094
30,18
1.188
Dimensions shown are for reference only. Except where stated * ±1,14 mm±.045 in.
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Basic Switches
Auxiliary Actuators Standard Basics
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell nsing and Control 63
ORDER GUIDE
Use O.T. min. O.P.* F.P. max.
Catalog Only mm mm mm
Description Listing With Inches Inches Inches
MC2711H BZ 4,78 28,98 29,4
BM .188 1.141 1.156
MCA2711H BA 4,37 27,38±0,76 29,56
BE .172 1.078±.030 1.156
MCD2711H DT 3.58 27,79 30,18
MT .141 1.094 1.188
Sealed straight plunger.
Panel mount. Elastomer seal
boot keeps out liquid splash
and dirt. Furnished
unassembled.
Fig. 4
MD3211Q BZ 3,18 35,7 37,69
BM .125 1.406 1.484
approx.
MDA3711Q BA 3,18 36,12 37,69
BE .125 1.422 1.484
MD3211Q DT 3,18 35,7 37,69
MT .125 1.406 1.484
Roller plunger. Panel mount.
Roller parallel to long axis of
the switch.
Fig. 5
MD3211Q1 BZ 3,18 35,7 37,69
BM .125 1.406 1.484
approx.
MDA3711Q1 BA 3,18 36,12 37,69
BE .125 1.422 1.484
MD3211Q1 DT 3,18 35,7 37,69
MT .125 1.406 1.484
Cross roller plunger. Panel
mount. Roller perpendicular
to long axis of the switch.
Fig. 6
MC7711 BZ 20,62 69,1 70,64
(8805/58) BM .812 2.719 2.781
AN3167-1
MCA7711 BA 19,84 69,44 71,42
BE .781 2.734 2.812
MCD7711 DT 18,26 69,1 71,42
MT .719 2.719 2.812
High overtravel plunger.
Panel mount.
Fig. 7
Except where stated* ±1,14 mm
±.045 in.
S
tand
ard
B
asic
S
w itch
es Sensing and Control
! WARNING
MISUSE OF DOCUMENTATION
• The information presented in this product sheet (or
catalogue) is for reference only. DO NOT USE this
document as product installation information.
• Complete installation, operation and maintenance
information is provided in the instructions supplied
with each product.
Failure to comply with these instructions could
result in death or serious injury.
EVN2000 Series Limit Switch
Features
• Innovative wiring system featuring insulation
displacement termination (IDT)
• Integrated cable gland/cord grip
• EN 50047 mounting compatible
• Designed to meet switch requirement within EN 81-1
• Snap action basic switch with 4 mm air gap
• IP 66/67 Enclosure rating, EN 60529. NEMA 1, 12, 13
• Direct opening of Normally Closed contacts
conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 annex K
• Double insulated switch element
• Compact plastic housing
Description
The EVN2000 series limit switch is an innovative
product which has been developed to address a need
highlighted by Original Equipment Manufacturers
(OEM), where “Ease of Wiring” is required. With the
new design there is no need for access to the inside of
the housing and therefore the housing cover, cover
screws and gasket become obsolete. Furthermore, the
integrated cable gland eliminates the need for additional
conduit or cable gland hardware.
Benefits
• Reduced wiring time, up to 50 % savings can be
achieved
• Provides a truly global product by removing the need
for conduit or cable gland hardware
• Meets globally accepted mounting standard
• Meets switch requirements within “Safety rules for the
construction and installation of elevators/lifts”
• 1 Normally Closed, 1 Normally Open circuit
conforming to EN 81-1
• Suitable for wet applications
• Forced opening of the normally closed circuit in the
event of contacts welding
• No earth connection required, internal or external
• Suitable where space is at a premium
Typical applications
• Elevators and moving stairs
• Scissor/platform lifts
• Overhead doors
• Material handling
• Packaging machinery
• Agricultural equipment
! WARNING
IF USED IN APPLICATIONS CONCERNING HUMAN
SAFETY
• Only use NC direct opening (“positive opening”/ “positive break”) contacts, identified by the symbol .
• Do NOT use flexible / adjustable actuators. Only use
actuators designed for safety applications.
• Do NOT defeat, tamper, remove, or bypass this switch.
• Hazardous voltage, disconnect power before servicing.
• Strictly adhere to all installation instructions.
• Consult with local safety agencies and their requirements when designing a machine-control link, interface
and all control elements that affect safety.
Failure to comply with these instructions could
result in death or serious injury.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
2 Honeywell • Sensing and Control
EVN2000 Series Limit Switch
Technical information
Specifications
Mechanical life: up to 10 million operations
Degree of protection: IP 66/67, EN 60529
NEMA/UL type 1, 12, 13
Operating temperature: -25 °C to 85 °C
(-13 °F to 185 °F)
Storage temperature: -40 °C to 85 °C
(-40 °F to 185 °F)
Standards/approvals: IEC/EN 60947-5-1 - European standard for electromechanical industrial control equipment
EN 50047 - European standard for designing limit switches
UL 508 - US standard for industrial control equipment
UL 746C - US standard for plastic enclosures
EN 60529 - European standard for IP codes
EN 81-1 - European standard for electrical lifts
Electrical rating: Rated operational current Ie (A) VA
IEC/EN 60947-5-1 at rated operational voltage Ue rating
120 V 240 V Make Break
AC15, A300 6 3 7200 720
125 V 250 V
DC13, Q300 0.55 0.27 69 69
Rated insulation voltage :
(Dielectric) 320 V
Rated impulse withstand: 2500 V
Polution degree: 3
Thermal current: 10 A
Short circuit withstand: SCPD 10 A quick acting fuse (IEC 269.1 gG-type)
Contact material: Silver
Circuit type: 1NO/1NC Direct opening
Single pole, single throw, double break
Contact type Zb - the 2 contact elements are electrically separated
Cable/leadwire: Outside cable Ø 6.0 mm to 9.0 mm (0.24 in to 0.35 in)
Leadwire 0,75 mm² to 1,5 mm² (16-18 AWG)
Shock: 50 g conforming to IEC 68-2-27 (BS 2011, Part 2.1 Ea) (actuator not fitted)
Vibration: 10 g conforming to IEC 68-2-6 (BS 2011, Part 2.1 Fc) (actuator not fitted)
Bump: 40 g conforming to IEC 68-2-29 (BS 2011, Part 2 LeB)
Order guide
Description Catalogue Listing
Side Rotary Lever EVN2000A
Top Pin Plunger EVN2000B
Top Roller Plunger, Parallel EVN2000C
Top Roller Plunger, Perpendicular EVN2000D
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Honeywell • Sensing and Control 3
EVN2000 Series Limit Switch
Mounting drawings in mm and (inches)
EVN2000CEVN2000A
EVN2000B
EVN2000D
0˚ 25˚ 45˚ 70˚
12˚
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Warranty/Remedy
Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as being free of defective material
and faulty workmanship. Contact your local sales office for warranty information.
If warranted goods are returned to Honeywell during that period of coverage,
Honeywell will repair or replace without charge those items it finds defective.
The foregoing is Buyer’s sole remedy and is in lieu of all other warranties,
expressed or implied, including those of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose.
While we provide application assistance, personally, through our literature
and the Honeywell web site, it is up to the customer to determine the suitability of
the product in the application.
Specifications may change at any time without notice. The information we
supply is believed to be accurate and reliable as of this printing. However, we
assume no responsibility for its use.
This publication does not constitute a contract between Honeywell and its customers. The contents may be changed at any time without notice. It is the customer’s
responsibility to ensure safe installation and operation of the products. Detailed mounting drawings of all products illustrated are available on request.
© 2003 Honeywell International Inc.
Sensing and Control
www.honeywell.com/sensing
Honeywell Control Systems Ltd
Newhouse Industrial Estate
Motherwell, Lanarkshire ML1 5SB
Scotland, UK
100444-EN Issue 2 09/03 UK07 GLO Printed in the United Kingdom on environmentally friendly paper
Sales and Service
Honeywell serves its customers through a worldwide network of sales offices
and distributors. For application assistance, current specifications, pricing or
name of the nearest Authorised Distributor, contact your local sales office or:
INTERNET: www.honeywell.com/sensing
E-mail: info.sc@honeywell.com
ASIA PACIFIC
Control Products
Asia Pacific Headquarters
Phone: +(65) 6355-2828
Fax: +(65) 6445-3033
Australia
Honeywell Limited
Phone: +(61) 2-9370-4500
FAX: +(61) 2-9370-4525
Toll Free 1300-36-39-36
Toll Free Fax: 1300-36-04-70
China – PRC - Beijing
Honeywell China Inc.
Phone: +(86-10) 8458-3280
Fax: +(86-10) 8458-3102
China – PRC - Shanghai
Honeywell China Inc.
Phone: (86-21) 6237-0237
Fax: (86-21) 6237-1237
China - Hong Kong S.A.R.
Honeywell Ltd.
Phone: +(852) 2953-6412
Fax: +(852) 2953-6767
Indonesia
Honeywell Indonesia Pte Ltd.
Phone: +(62) 21-535-8833
FAX: +(62) 21-5367 1008
India
TATA Honeywell Ltd.
Phone: +(91) 20 6870 445/
446
Fax: +(91) 20 681 2243/ 687
5992
Japan
Honeywell Inc
Phone: +(81) 3 5440 1425
Fax: +(81) 3 5440 1368
South Korea
Honeywell Korea Co Ltd
Phone: +(822) 799-6167
Fax: +(822) 792-9013
Malaysia
Honeywell Engineering Sdn
Bhd
Phone: +(60-3) 7958-4988
Fax: +(60-3) 7958-8922
New Zealand
Honeywell Limited
Phone: +(64-9) 623-5050
Fax: +(64-9) 623-5060
Toll Free (0800) 202-088
Philippines
Honeywell Systems
(Philippines) Inc.
Phone: +(63-2) 636-1661 /
1662
Fax: +(63-2) 638-4013
Singapore
Honeywell South East Asia
Phone: +(65) 6355-2828
Fax: +(65) 6445-3033
Thailand
Honeywell Systems (Thailand)
Ltd.
Phone: +(662) 693-3099
FAX: +(662) 693-3085
Taiwan R.O.C.
Honeywell Taiwan Ltd.
Phone: +(886-2) 2245-1000
FAX: +(886-2) 2245-3241
EUROPE
Austria
Honeywell Austria GmbH
Phone: +(43) 1 727 80 366/
246
FAX: +(43) 1 727 80 337
Belgium
Honeywell SA/NV
Phone: +(32) 2 728 2522
FAX: +(32) 2 728 2502
Bulgaria
Honeywell EOOD
Phone: +(359) 2 979 00 23
FAX: +(359) 2 979 00 24
Czech Republic
Honeywell spol. s.r.o.
Phone: +(420) 261 123 457
FAX: +(420) 261 123 461
Denmark
Honeywell A/S
Phone: +(45) 39 55 55 55
FAX: +(45) 39 55 55 58
Finland
Honeywell OY
Phone: +(358) 9 3480101
FAX: +(358) 9 34801375
France
Honeywell SA
Phone: +(33) 1 60 19 80 40
FAX: +(33) 1 60 19 81 73
Germany
Honeywell AG
Phone: +(49) 69 8064 444
FAX: +(49) 69 8064 442
Hungary
Honeywell Kft.
Phone: +(361) 451 43 00
FAX: +(361) 451 43 43
Italy
Honeywell S.p.A.
Phone: +(39) 02 92146 450/
456
FAX: +(39) 02 92146 490
The Netherlands
Honeywell B.V.
Phone: +(31) 20 565 69 11
FAX: +(31) 20 565 66 00
Norway
Honeywell A/S
Phone: +(47) 66 76 20 00
FAX: +(47) 66 76 20 90
Poland
Honeywell Sp. zo.o
Phone: +(48) 606 09 64
FAX: +(48) 606 09 01
Portugal
Honeywell Portugal Lda
Phone: +(351 21) 424 50 00
FAX: +(351 21) 424 50 99
Romania
Honeywell Bucharest
Phone: +(40) 1 2110076
FAX: +(40) 1 2103375
Commonwealth of
Independent States (CIS)
Z.A.O. Honeywell
Phone: +(7 095) 796 98 36
FAX: +(7 095) 797 99 06
Slovak Republic
Honeywell s.r.o.
Phone: +(421 2) 58 247 403
FAX: +(421 2) 58 247 415
South Africa (Republic of)
Honeywell Southern Africa
Honeywell S.A. Pty. Ltd
Phone: +(27) 11 695 8000
FAX +(27) 11 805 1504
Spain
Honeywell S.A.
Phone: +(34) 91 313 6100
FAX: +(34) 91 313 6129
Sweden
Honeywell AB
Phone: +(46) 8 775 55 00
FAX: +(46) 8 775 56 00
Switzerland
Honeywell AG
Phone: +(41) 1 855 24 40
FAX: +(41) 1 855 24 45
Turkey
Honeywell Turkey A.S.
Phone: +(90) 216 5756620
FAX: +(90) 216 5756637
Ukraine
Honeywell
Phone: +(380) 44 201 44 74
FAX: +(380) 44 201 44 75
United Kingdom
Honeywell Control Systems
Ltd
Phone: +(44) 1698 481481
FAX: +(44) 1698 481276
Mediterranean & African
Distributors
Honeywell SpA
Phone: +(39) 2 921 46 232
FAX: +(39) 2 921 46 233
Middle East Headquarters
Honeywell Middle East Ltd.
Phone: +(9712) 443 2119
FAX +(9712) 443 2536
NORTH AMERICA
Canada
Honeywell LTD
Phone: 1-800-737-3360
FAX: 1-800-565-4130
USA
Honeywell
Sensing and Control
Phone: 1-800-537-6945
1-815-235-6847
FAX: 1-815-235-6545
E-mail:
info.sc@honeywell.com
LATIN AMERICA
Argentina
Honeywell S.A.I.C.
Phone: +(54-11) 4383-3637
FAX: +(54-11) 4325-6470
Brazil
Honeywell do Brasil & Cia
Phone: +(55-11) 7266-1900
FAX: +(55-11) 7266-1905
Chile
Honeywell Chile, S.A.
Phone: +(56-2) 233-0688
FAX: +(56-2) 231-6679
Columbia
Honeywell Columbia, S.A.
Phone: +(57-1) 623-3239/
3051
FAX: +(57-1) 623-3395
Ecuador
Honeywell S.A.
Phone: +(593-2) 981-560/1
FAX: +(593-2) 981-562
Mexico
Honeywell S.A. de C.V.
Phone: +(52) 55 5259-1966
FAX: +(52) 55 5570-2985
Puerto Rico
Honeywell Inc.
Phone: +(809) 792-7075
FAX: +(809) 792-0053
Venezuela
Honeywell CA
Phone: +(58-2) 238-0211
FAX: +(58-2) 238-3391
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH ™
GLL Series
Limit Switches
DESCRIPTION
Honeywell MICRO SWITCH™ GLL Series limit switches are
part of the OEM set of miniature limit switches. They combine
and enhance MICRO SWITCH™ GLS and SZL-VL switches
into one common family, competitively priced for OEM
applications.
The double insulated compact housing conforms to EN500047
and makes GLL Series switches often ideal for mounting
where space is at a premium. These products feature direct
opening normally closed circuits.
The MICRO SWITCH™ GLL Series is available in a variety of
actuator styles required for OEM applications. Designed to the
IEC electrical standard, GLL is suitable for world-wide use and
also meets globally accepted mounting standards.
The GLL Series provides a cost-effective solution for OEM high
volume applications and enables manufacturers to be
competitive in today’s demanding business environment.
FEATURES
• Double break, direct-opening snap action contacts conform
to IEC 60947-5-1-3
• EN50047 mounting
• 20 mm and 1/2 in NPT conduit options
• Galvanically isolated contacts
• Double insulated plastic housing
• Snap action and slow action circuitry
• Contact block integral to switch housing
• Hinge cover for easy wiring access
• 50 mm rubber rollers ideal for elevator applications
• Sealing IP66; NEMA 1, 12, 13
• c-UL-US, CE, CCC
• rOhs compliant
POTENTIAL APPLICATIONS
• Elevators
• Escalators
• Aerial/platform lifts
• Industrial doors
• Packaging equipment
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™ GLL Series
2 www.honeywell.com/sensing
SPECIFICATION DATA
Circuitry 1 NO 1 NC direct opening snap action, slow action (BBM), slow action (MBB); 2NC slow action
Ampere rating 10 A (Thermal)
Supply voltage 300 Vac and 250 Vdc max.
Housing material Plastic
Termination type 12,7 mm [0.5 in] conduit; 20 mm [0.79 in] conduit
Housing type EN 50047
Shock 50 g per PEC 68-2-27c (w/o actuator)
Vibration 10 g per IEC 68-2-6 (w/o actuator)
Sealing IP66; NEMA 1, 12, 13
Approvals c-UL-US, CE, CCC
Mechanical life 5 million operations
Operating
temperature range
-10 °C to 80 °C [14 °F to 176 °F]
GLLA**B, GLLC**B
GLLA**C, GLLC**C
GLLA**D, GLLC**D
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit Switches
Honeywell Sensing and Control 3
GLLA**F, GLLC**F
GLLA**A1B, GLLC**A1B
GLLA**A2B, GLLC**A2B
GLLA**A1Y, GLLC**A1Y
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™ GLL Series
4 www.honeywell.com/sensing
GLLA**A2Y, GLLC**A2Y
GLLA**A4J, GLLC**A4J
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit Switches
Honeywell Sensing and Control 5
MICRO SWITCH™ GLL MIN-DIN (EN500047) PLASTIC
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Sensing and Control
Honeywell
1985 Douglas Drive North
Golden Valley, Minnesota 55422
www.honeywell.com
002310-3-EN IL50 GLO Printed in USA
January 2011
© 2011 Honeywell International Inc. All Rights Reserved
WARNING
PERSONAL INJURY
DO NOT USE these products as safety or emergency stop
devices or in any other application where failure of the
product could result in personal injury.
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in
death or serious injury.
WARRANTY/REMEDY
Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as being free of
defective materials and faulty workmanship. Honeywell’s
standard product warranty applies unless agreed to otherwise
by Honeywell in writing; please refer to your order
acknowledgement or consult your local sales office for specific
warranty details. If warranted goods are returned to Honeywell
during the period of coverage, Honeywell will repair or replace,
at its option, without charge those items it finds defective. The
foregoing is buyer’s sole remedy and is in lieu of all other
warranties, expressed or implied, including those of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. In no
event shall Honeywell be liable for consequential, special,
or indirect damages.
While we provide application assistance personally, through
our literature and the Honeywell web site, it is up to the
customer to determine the suitability of the product in the
application.
WARNING
MISUSE OF DOCUMENTATION
• The information presented in this product sheet is for
reference only. Do not use this document as a product
installation guide.
• Complete installation, operation, and maintenance
information is provided in the instructions supplied with
each product.
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in
death or serious injury.
Specifications may change without notice. The information we
supply is believed to be accurate and reliable as of this
printing. However, we assume no responsibility for its use.
SALES AND SERVICE
Honeywell serves its customers through a worldwide network
of sales offices, representatives and distributors. For
application assistance, current specifications, pricing or name
of the nearest Authorized Distributor, contact your local sales
office or:
E-mail: info.sc@honeywell.com
Internet: www.honeywell.com/sensing
Phone and Fax:
Asia Pacific +65 6355-2828
+65 6445-3033 Fax
Europe +44 (0) 1698 481481
+44 (0) 1698 481676 Fax
Latin America +1-305-805-8188
+1-305-883-8257 Fax
USA/Canada +1-800-537-6945
+1-815-235-6847
+1-815-235-6545 Fax
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Miniature Global Limit Switch
MICRO SWITCH™ GLS Series
DESCRIPTION
GLS miniature limit switches are designed to provide a complete
range of globally approved products. These rugged and reliable
limit switches are often suitable for most industrial applications.
Side rotary versions offer a unique dual-bearing design which
prevents side loading durring application. The compact housing
size makes them often ideal for mounting where space is at a
premium. The extensive product range offers the user a choice
of plastic, metal, and three conduit version housing, which are all
mounting compatible to EN50047. A wide range of actuator and
circuitry options makes it easy for the user to customize a switch
to the particular application.
LOW-ENERGY SWITCHING
In today’s demanding age of low-energy controls, electromechanical switches are frequently used to interface directly with
PLCs and other low-energy devices. To accommodate this
requirement, GLS offers a gold-plated version of the standard
basic switch. This improves reliability of switching at low currents
and voltages by protecting the contact surfaces from contamination during operation or storage prior to use. Standard silver
contacts have the disadvantage in that the contact surface may
tarnish under certain environmental conditions (e.g., presence of
moisture). Low energy basic switches are rated as follows:
Operating Voltage Ue 1 Vac/Vdc to 50 Vac/Vdc
Operating Current Ie 1 microamp to 100 mA
FEATURES
• Double break, direct-opening contacts conform to IEC
60947-5-1-3 (except on 2NO models)
• Dual bearing design on side rotary shaft
• Choice of rugged metal or double-insulated plastic housings
• Full range of actuator heads and levers
• Snap action, slow action basic switches
• Goid contact versions available
• Galvanically isolated contacts (Form Zb)
• Sealing up to IP67/NEMA 4
• CE, UL, CSA, CCC
• -40 °C [-40 °F] standard construction for side rotary and
plunger styles
POTENTIAL APPLICATIONS
• Elevators and moving stairs
• Scissor/platform lifts
• Material handing
• Packaging machinery
• Agricultural and machine tool equipment
BENEFITS
• Forced opening of the normally closed circuity in the event
of contacts welding (on all models except 2NO)
• Meets globally accepted mounting standards
• Prevents side loading
• Design flexibility
• Can be applied for both logic level and power-duty loads
• Each contact throw can accept a different voltage (SPDT
versions)
• Suitable for outdoor environments
• Designed to IEC electrical standard for world-wide use
Electrical Ratings
IEC 947-5-1 / EN 90947-5-1
Designation &
Utilization
Category
Rated operational current Ie (A) at rated
operational voltage Ue VA Rating
120 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 500 V 600 V Make Break
AC15 A600 6 3 1.9 1.5 1.4 1.2 7200 720
AC15 A300 6 3 – – – – 7200 720
AC15 B300 3 1.5 – – – – 3600 360
AC14 D300 0.6 0.3 – – – – 432 72
125 V 250 V
DC13 Q300 0.55 0.27 69 69
DC13 R300 0.22 0.1 28 28

Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
2 Honeywell • Sensing and Control
24,75
(0.97)
14,5
(.57)
30
(1.18)
conduit thread
PG 13,5
22
(.87)
20
(.78)
3
(.12)
2,15
(.08)
R
55
(2.16)
30,5
(1.20)
3,5
(0.138)
15,25
(.600)
33
Snap-Action Contacts Slow-Action Contacts Slow-Action Slow-Action Slow-Action Actuator Types
1 normally closed / 1 normally open BreaK‑BeFore‑maKe Contacts Contacts Contacts
1 normally closed / maKe BeFore BreaK 2 normally open 2 normally closed
1 normally open 1 normally closed/
1 normally open
GLC
EN 50047
Metal standard
Technical data
Mechanical life up to 15 million operations
Degree of protection IP67 (wobble IP66)
NEMA/UL type 1, 4, 12, 13
Temperature range Operating : -40 °C to 85 °C
Operating : [-40 °F to 185 °F]
Storage : -40 °C to 85 °C
Storage : -40 °F to 185 °F
Approvals IEC 60947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
AC15 A300
DC13 Q300
UL & CSA
Vibration 10 g conforming to IEC 68-2-6
Shock 50 g conforming to IEC 68-2-27
Terminal marking to EN 50013
0° 26° 54° 70°
min.
TT
DT = 11,5°
RP = 14,5°
31 mm FP
28,9 RP
OP 28
DT=
0,9
26
25 OT
(max.)
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
OP 35,8
39,25
37,1
FP
DT=
1,3
TT
Ordering :
= 1/2 in NPT adaptor
Conduit thread
= PG 13,5
= 20 mm
Circuit closed
* Positive opening to IEC/EN 60947-5-1-3
* Point from which the positive opening is assured
07
(F.P.) 0°
(O.P.) 26°
(R.P.) 14,5°
(D.T.) 11,5°
(*) 54°
(T.T.) 70° min.
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
FP
OT
(max.)
21 mm
18 mm
17 mm
15 mm
0° 26° 39° 70°
min.
21-22
13-14
FP OP OP2 TT
Note: See page 9
03
XXGLC
A
B
C
X
01
Low Energy Contacts
(F.P.) 0°
(O.P.) 26°
(R.P.)
(D.T.)
(O.P.2) 39°
(T.T.) 70° min.
13
21
14
22
Zb Zb 21
13
22
14
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
31 mm
OP 28
27
25
FP
* 27,2
OT (max.)
21
-2
2
35,8
34,2
OP
39,25 FP
*
13
-1
4
34,5
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Honeywell • Sensing and Control 3
Snap-Action Contacts Slow-Action Contacts Slow-Action Slow-Action Slow-Action Actuator Types
1 normally closed / 1 normally open BreaK‑BeFore‑maKe Contacts Contacts Contacts
1 normally closed / maKe BeFore BreaK 2 normally open 2 normally closed
1 normally open 1 normally closed/
1 normally open
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
FP
OT
(max.)
21 mm
18 mm
17 mm
15 mm

16° ±5°
(2.37)
OT
35° (max)
OP
DT
10°
100
(3.92)
0° 26° 39° 50,5° 70°
min.
21-22
13-14
FP OP OP2 * TT
34
OT
(max)
21
(.827)
FP
OP
DT
15
(.591)
18±0,5
(.709)
Ø 9.9
(.390)
36

26° 46,5° 70°
(min.)
FP
*
TT
21-22
11-12
21mm
18mm
16,5mm
15mm
(max.)
FP
*
OT
21
-2
2
11
-1
2
0° 16° 35°
FP TT
(MAX)
21-22
11-12
Side Rotary, Metal Roller
Top Pin Plunger
Top Roller Plunger
Top Roller Lever
Coil Wobble Stick
A1B
B
C
D
E7B
04
(F.P.) 0°
(O.P.) 26°
(R.P.)
(*) 50,5
(D.T.)
(O.P.2) 39°
(T.T.) 70° min.
(F.P.) 0°
(O.P.) 26°
(R.P.)
(D.T.)
(*) 46.5°
(O.T.) 70° min.
06
21
11
22
12
2YZb
21
13
22
14
(F.P.) 0°
(O.P.) 36°
(O.T.) 61° to 75°
-4,4
24,6mm
53,5
FP OT
13-14
23-24
OP
21mm
OP 17mm
15mm
(max.)
FP
OT
13
-1
4
23
-2
4
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
FP
OT
(max.)
31 mm
28 mm
27 mm
25 mm
*26,2 mm
2
1
-2
2
35,8
32,8 *
OP
39,25 FP
1
3
-1
4
34,2
31 mm
28 mm
26,5mm
25mm
(max.)
FP
*
OT
21
-2
2
11
-1
2
39,25mm
35,8mm
33,1mm
FP
*
21
-2
2
11
-1
2
OP
OP2
OP
RP
DT
FP TT
31
(1.22)
FP OPRP
DT
OT
max. 28±1
(1.102)25(.984)
35,8±0
(1.409
RP
FP
O
DT
13
23
14
24
2X
31mm
27mm
25mm
(max.)
FP
OT
13
-1
4
23
-2
4
OP
34,2 mm
FP
OT
13
-1
4
23
-2
4
OP
35
05
0° 27° 35°
FP OT
(MAX)
13-14
23-24
OP
O
p er at in g To rq u e 0,330 Nm
[2.90 lb]
16,0 Nm
[3.60 lb]
16,0 Nm
[3.60 lb]
9,5 Nm
[2.10 lb]
0,1 Nm
[0.90 lb]
XXX
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
4 Honeywell • Sensing and Control
33
Snap-Action Contacts Slow-Action Contacts Slow-Action Slow-Action Slow-Action Actuator Types
1 normally closed / 1 normally open BreaK‑BeFore‑maKe Contacts Contacts Contacts
1 normally closed / maKe BeFore BreaK 2 normally open 2 normally closed
1 normally open 1 normally closed/
1 normally open
GLD
EN 50047
Double insulated standard
Technical data
Mechanical life up to 15 million operations
Degree of protection IP66, IP67
NEMA/UL type 1, 4X (indoor use), 12, 13
Temperature range Operating : -40 °C to 85 °C
Operating : [-40 °F to 185 °F]
Storage : -40 °C to 85 °C
Storage : -40 °F to 185 °F
Approvals IEC/EN 60947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
AC15 A300
DC13 Q300
UL & CSA
Vibration 10 g conforming to IEC 68-2-6
Shock 50 g conforming to IEC 68-2-27
Terminal marking to EN 50013
0° 26° 54° 70°
min.
TT
DT = 11,5°
RP = 14,5°
31 mm FP
28,9 RP
OP 28
DT=
0,9
26
25 OT
(max.)
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
OP 35,8
39,25
37,1
FP
DT=
1,3
TT
Ordering :
= 1/2 in NPT adaptor
Conduit thread
= PG 13,5
= 20 mm
Circuit closed
* Positive opening to IEC/EN 60947-5-1-3
* Point from which the positive opening is assured
07
(F.P.) 0°
(O.P.) 26°
(R.P.) 14,5°
(D.T.) 11,5°
(*) 54°
(T.T.) 70° min.
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
FP
OT
(max.)
21 mm
18 mm
17 mm
15 mm
0° 26° 39° 70°
min.
21-22
13-14
FP OP OP2 TT
Note: See page 9
03
XXGLD
A
B
C
X
01
Low Energy Contacts
(F.P.) 0°
(O.P.) 26°
(R.P.)
(D.T.)
(O.P.2) 39°
(T.T.) 70° min.
13
21
14
22
Zb Zb 21
13
22
14
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
31 mm
OP 28
27
25
FP
* 27,2
OT (max.)
21
-2
2
35,8
34,2
OP
39,25 FP
*
13
-1
4
34,5
24,75
(0.97)
14,5
(.57)
30
(1.18)
conduit
thread
23
(0.9)
19,8
(.78)
22
(.87)
20
(.78)
3
(.12)
2,15
(.08)
R
55
(2.16)
30,5
(1.20)
3,5
(0.138)
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Honeywell • Sensing and Control 5
Snap-Action Contacts Slow-Action Contacts Slow-Action Slow-Action Slow-Action Actuator Types
1 normally closed / 1 normally open BreaK‑BeFore‑maKe Contacts Contacts Contacts
1 normally closed / maKe BeFore BreaK 2 normally open 2 normally closed
1 normally open 1 normally closed/
1 normally open
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
FP
OT
(max.)
21 mm
18 mm
17 mm
15 mm

16° ±5°
(2.37)
OT
35° (max)
OP
DT
10°
100
(3.92)
0° 26° 39° 50,5° 70°
min.
21-22
13-14
FP OP OP2 * TT
34
OT
(max)
21
(.827)
FP
OP
DT
15
(.591)
18±0,5
(.709)
Ø 9.9
(.390)
36

26° 46,5° 70°
(min.)
FP
*
TT
21-22
11-12
21mm
18mm
16,5mm
15mm
(max.)
FP
*
OT
21
-2
2
11
-1
2
0° 16° 35°
FP TT
(MAX)
21-22
11-12
Plastic Lever & Roller
Top Pin Plunger
Top Roller Plunger
Top Roller Lever
Coil Wobble Stick
XXX
A1A
B
C
D
E7B
04
(F.P.) 0°
(O.P.) 26°
(R.P.)
(*) 50,5
(D.T.)
(O.P.2) 39°
(T.T.) 70° min.
(F.P.) 0°
(O.P.) 26°
(R.P.)
(D.T.)
(*) 46.5°
(O.T.) 70° min.
06
21
11
22
12
2YZb
21
13
22
14
(F.P.) 0°
(O.P.) 36°
(O.T.) 61° to 75°
-4,4
24,6mm
53,5
FP OT
13-14
23-24
OP
21mm
OP 17mm
15mm
(max.)
FP
OT
13
-1
4
23
-2
4
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
FP
OT
(max.)
31 mm
28 mm
27 mm
25 mm
*26,2 mm
2
1
-2
2
35,8
32,8 *
OP
39,25 FP
1
3
-1
4
34,2
31 mm
28 mm
26,5mm
25mm
(max.)
FP
*
OT
21
-2
2
11
-1
2
39,25mm
35,8mm
33,1mm
FP
*
21
-2
2
11
-1
2
OP
OP2
OP
RP
DT
FP TT
31
(1.22)
FP OPRP
DT
OT
max. 28±1
(1.102)25(.984)
35,8±0
(1.409
RP
FP
O
DT
13
23
14
24
2X
31mm
27mm
25mm
(max.)
FP
OT
13
-1
4
23
-2
4
OP
34,2 mm
FP
OT
13
-1
4
23
-2
4
OP
35
05
0° 27° 35°
FP OT
(MAX)
13-14
23-24
OP
O
p er at in g To rq u e 0,330 Nm
[2.90 lb]
16,0 Nm
[3.60 lb]
16,0 Nm
[3.60 lb]
9,5 Nm
[2.10 lb]
0,1 Nm
[0.90 lb]
A1BMetal Lever & Roller
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6 Honeywell • Sensing and Control
Zb 21
13
22
14
13
21
14
22
Zb 26° 39°
70°
min.
33
Snap-Action Contacts Slow-Action Contacts Slow-Action Slow-Action Slow-Action Snap-Action Operating Actuator Types
1 normally closed/ BreaK‑BeFore‑maKe Contacts Contacts Contacts Contacts torque/force
1 normally open 1 normally closed / maKe BeFore BreaK 2 normally open 2 normally closed doUBle pole 2
1 normally open 1 normally closed/ 2 normally closed/
1 normally open 2 normally open
GLE
EN 50047 Compatible
3 conduit metal
standard
Technical data
Mechanical life up to 15 million operations
Degree of protection IP67 (wobble IP66)
NEMA/UL type 1, 4, 12, 13
Temperature range Operating : -40 °C to 85 °C
Operating : [-40 °F to 185 °F]
Storage : -40 °C to 85 °C
Storage : -40 °F to 185 °F
Approvals IEC 60947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
AC15 A300
DC13 Q300
UL & CSA
Vibration 10 g conforming to IEC 68-2-6
Shock 50 g conforming to IEC 68-2-27
Terminal marking to EN 50013
0° 26° 54° 70°
min.
TT
DT = 11,5°
RP = 14,5°
31 mm FP
28,9 RP
OP 28
DT=
0,9
26
25 OT
(max.)
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
OP 35,8
39,25
37,1
FP
DT=
1,3
TT
Ordering :
= 1/2 in NPT adaptor
Conduit thread
= PG 13,5
= 20 mm
Circuit closed
* Positive opening to IEC/EN 60947-5-1-3
* Point from which the positive opening is assured
07
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
FP
OT
(max.)
21 mm
18 mm
17 mm
15 mm
0° 26° 39° 70°
min.
21-22
13-14
FP OP OP2 TT
Note: See page 9
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
FP
OT
(max.)
21 mm
18 mm
17 mm
15 mm
0° 26° 39° 50,5° 70°
min.
21-22
13-14
FP OP OP2 * TT
34
03
XXGLE
A
B
C
X
01 Low Energy Contacts
(F.P.) 0°
(O.P.) 26°
(R.P.)
(D.T.)
(O.P.2) 39°
(T.T.) 70° min.
04
(F.P.) 0°
(O.P.) 26°
(R.P.)
(*) 50,5
(D.T.)
(O.P.2) 39°
(T.T.) 70° min.
Zb 21
13
22
14
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
31 mm
OP 28
27
25
FP
* 27,2
OT (max.)
21
-2
2
35,8
34,2
OP
39,25 FP
*
13
-1
4
34,5
21
-2
2
13
-1
4
FP
OT
(max.)
31 mm
28 mm
27 mm
25 mm
*26,2 mm
2
1
-2
2
35,8
32,8 *
OP
39,25 FP
1
3
-1
4
34,2
conduit
thread
60
(2.37)
4
(.16)
52
(2.05)
57
(2.24)
65
(2.56)
13,75
(.54)
2,5
(.1)
R 2,15
(.08)
3
(.12)
20
(.79)
22
(.87)
40
(1.57)
42
(1.65)
23,8
(.94)
Ø 23
Ø (.9)
30
(1.18)
12
(.47)
12,5
(.49)
24,75
(.97)
(F.P.) 0°
(O.P.) 26°
(R.P.) 14,5°
(D.T.) 11,5°
(*) 54°
(T.T.) 70° min.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Honeywell • Sensing and Control 7
Snap-Action Contacts Slow-Action Contacts Slow-Action Slow-Action Slow-Action Snap-Action Operating Actuator Types
1 normally closed/ BreaK‑BeFore‑maKe Contacts Contacts Contacts Contacts torque/force
1 normally open 1 normally closed / maKe BeFore BreaK 2 normally open 2 normally closed doUBle pole 2
1 normally open 1 normally closed/ 2 normally closed/
1 normally open 2 normally open
36

26° 46,5° 70°
(min.)
FP
*
TT
21-22
11-12
21mm
18mm
16,5mm
15mm
(max.)
FP
*
OT
21
-2
2
11
-1
2
0° 16° 35°
FP TT
(MAX)
21-22
11-12
Side Rotary, Metal Roller
Top Pin Plunger
Top Roller Plunger
Top Roller Lever
Coil Wobble Stick
A1B
B
C
D
E7B
(F.P.) 0°
(O.P.) 26°
(R.P.)
(D.T.)
(*) 46.5°
(O.T.) 70° min.
06
21
11
22
12
2Y
(F.P.) 0°
(O.P.) 36°
(O.T.) 61° to 75°
-4,4
24,6mm
53,5
FP OT
13-14
23-24
OP
21mm
OP 17mm
15mm
(max.)
FP
OT
13
-1
4
23
-2
4
31 mm
28 mm
26,5mm
25mm
(max.)
FP
*
OT
21
-2
2
11
-1
2
39,25mm
35,8mm
33,1mm
FP
*
21
-2
2
11
-1
2
OP
13
23
14
24
2X
31mm
27mm
25mm
(max.)
FP
OT
13
-1
4
23
-2
4
OP
34,2 mm
FP
OT
13
-1
4
23
-2
4
OP
35
05
0° 27° 35°
FP OT
(MAX)
13-14
23-24
OP
0,330 Nm
[2.90 lb]
XXX
32
24
18,6 mm
RP
DT =
0,6 mm
11
-1
2
13
-1
4
21
-2
2
23
-2
4
FP
OT
(max.)
21 mm
OP 18 mm
15 mm
11
-1
2
13
-1
4
21
-2
2
23
-2
4
*16 mm
0° 16° 35°
DT = 7°
FP OP OT
(max.)
9° RP
11-12
13-14
21-22
23-24
11-12
13-14
21-22
23-24
13 14
21 22
11
23
12
2 4
(F.P.) 0°
(O.P.) 26°
(R.P.) 180°
(D.T.) 8°
(*) 54°
(O.T.) 61° to 75°
28,6 mm
DT =
0,6 mm
11
-1
2
13
-1
4
21
-2
2
23
-2
4
FP31 mm
OP 28 mm
25 mm
11
-1
2
13
-1
4
21
-2
2
23
-2
4
*26 mm
DT =
0,9
11
-1
2
13
-1
4
21
-2
2
23
-2
4
FP
OP
35,8 mm
11
-1
2
13
-1
4
21
-2
2
23
-2
4
36,7
RP
39,25
SPDT DPDT
OT
35° (max)
DT
10°
16° ±5°
(2.37)
OP
100
(3.92)
OP
FP
RP35.8 ±0.8(1.4094)
OT
(max)
FP OP
RP
25
(.98)
28±1
1.50
(1.10)
31
(1.23)
OT
(max)
FP
OP
DT
21
(.82)
15
(.59)
15 ±0,5
(.71 ±02)
RP
OP2
OP
DT
FP TT
Ø19,0
(.748)
0,120 Nm
[1.10 lb]
0,165 Nm
[1.50 lb]
GLE only
16,0 Nm
[3.60 lb]
16,0 Nm
[3.60 lb]
13,0 Nm
[2.90 lb]
GLE only
16,0 Nm
[3.60 lb]
16,0 Nm
[3.60 lb]
13,0 Nm
[2.90 lb]
GLE only
9,5 Nm
[2.10 lb]
11,0 Nm
[2.4 lb]
9,0 Nm
[1.9 lb]
GLE only
0,1 Nm
[0.90 lb]
1,3 Nm
[0.29 lb]
1,1 Nm
[0.25 lb]
GLE only
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Additional lever types
For use with all Side Rotary Head Styles.
Figure 1 illustrates miniature product lever types conforming to EN 50047 while Figure 2 illustrates standard product
lever types with conform to EN 50041. All dimensions are in mm/inches).
GLC, GLD, GLE (EN 50047)
34
(1.34)
41
(1.61)
Ø 3,2
(.13)
75°75°
15
(.6)
32 - 134
(1.26 - 5,28)
4,5
(.17)
Side Rotary Roller Lever; A1A Plastic Roller
A1B Metal Roller
Side Rotary Adjustable Lever; A2A Plastic
Roller; A2B Metal Roller
Side Rotary Adjustable Rod
A4J Metal Rod Head
17,1
(.67)
50
(1.97)
40
(1.57)
73,9
(2.91)
12
(.47)
A1Y Large Fixed Plastic Roller
(Suitable for Elevator Applications)
Offset Side Rotary Roller Lever; A5A Plastic
Roller; A5B Metal Roller Head
Side Rotary Conveyor Lever
A9A Ceramic Roller
Sensing and Control
Honeywell
1985 Douglas Drive North
Golden Valley, MN 55422 USA
+1-815-235-6847
www.honeywell.com/sensing
107147-12-EN IL50 GLO
October 2009
Copyright © 2009 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.
GLS Series Miniature Global Limit Switch
Replacement Parts - basic switches
Body
type
Basic Switch
01 02 03 04 05 06 12 13 20 24
GLC GLZ301 GLZ303 GLZ304 GLZ306
GLD GLZ301 GLZ303 GLZ304 GLZ306
GLE GLZ301 GLZ303 GLZ304 GLZ306 GLZ324
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Heavy Duty Limit Switches
A30 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
ADDITIONAL FEATURES AND OPTIONS
1 Wide variety of operating heads
1 Field adjustable operating modes, for
reduced inventory
1 Convenience of on-the-spot adjustment
instructions
1 Complete choice of circuitry and
electrical rating options, including solid
state switching
1 Plug-in and non plug-in versions have
identical operating characteristics and
are dimensionally interchangeable
1 Manifold (rear-wire) version
1 NEMA 1, 3, 4, 4X, 6, 6P, and 13*
1 UL Listed, file #E37138
1 CSA Certified, file #LR57326
1 Explosion-proof version page A113
1 Low temperature versions to –40°F
(–40°C) page A42
1 Captive head and body screws
1 Designed to withstand seismic shock
1 Stainless steel (NEMA 4X) version page
A47
1 Preleaded cable or prewired connector
types page A42
1 Epoxy filled wash down (NEMA 6P)
types page A44
1 Completely fluorocarbon (FC) sealed
versions page A42
* Depending on operating head, prewired connector or cable, enclosure ratings may vary. For enclosure rating information on specific
catalog listings, contact the 800 number.
Sintered bronze
bearings on 303
stainless steel
operating shaft for
long mechanical
life and operational
reliability.
Boss-and-socket
head design for
secure head-tobody retention.
Unique all-metal
drive train for
consistent operating characteristics even at high
temperature; lasts
longer (without the
need for frequent
adjustment) than
drive trains with
plastic parts.
Self-lifting pressure
plate terminals
save wiring time.
Easily identified
grounding terminal
(inside) for
compliance with
OSHA and other
regulatory agency
standards.
One piece flat
gasket: seals
better than gaskets
that go around
curves and
corners. Does not
contact terminal
pins to reduce
chances of fluid
migration.
Front mounting and interchangeability
of single- and double-pole switches,
plug-in and non plug-in with one another
and with other switch brands.
Tracking
interchangeability of actuator
levers for single- and doublepole switches, plug-in and
non plug-in.
Twin shaft seals for an extra measure
of protection. Inner FC O-ring
seal, outer Buna-N seal, all FC available.
FC shaft and
diaphragm seals on
side rotary
switches.
Rugged corrosionresistant zinc head
and body are
phosphate treated
and epoxy finished.
Exclusive teller tab assures
proper torque. When it cannot
be moved the lever is tight
enough to prevent slippage.
Domestic and international
conduit taps.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Heavy Duty Limit Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A31
ROTARY OPERATING HEADS
The head type is designated by the first
three letters in the catalog listing, i.e.,
LSA1A-1A has an LSA standard side rotary
head. See order guides for details. All are
momentary action, except the maintained
contact LSN head.
Side rotary Top rotary
SIDE ROTARY
LSA — Standard
Overtravel 60° minimum, pretravel 15°
maximum, differential travel 5° (singlepole) and 7° (double-pole) maximum.
LSP — Low Differential Travel
Overtravel 68° minimum, pretravel 9°
maximum, differential travel 3° (singlepole) and 4° (double-pole) maximum.
LSR — Low Operating Torque
Overtravel 60° minimum, pretravel 15°
maximum, operating torque 1.7 in. lbs.
(0,19 Nm) maximum.
LSH — Low Torque, Low Differential
Travel
Overtravel 68° minimum, operating
torque 1.7 in. lbs. (0,19 Nm) maximum,
differential travel 3° (single-pole) and 4°
(double-pole) maximum.
LSS — Gravity Return
Operating torque 5 in.-oz.
LST — Extra Low Torque
Operating torque 12 in.-oz.
LSL — Sequence Action
Delayed action between operation of two
poles, in each direction. Overtravel 48°
minimum.
LSM — Center Neutral
One set of contacts operates on clockwise rotation, another set on counterclockwise rotation. Overtravel 53°
minimum.
LSN — Maintained Contact
Operation is maintained on counterclockwise rotation, reset on clockwise rotation,
and vice versa. Overtravel 20° minimum.
TOP ROTARY
LSB – High Overtravel
Top rotary actuation is ideal when increased overtravel is required (100° minimum.) Uses same levers as side rotary
switches.
ROTARY LEVERS
Shown below are typical lever series for side
and top rotary switches. Additional versions
are described in the lever order guides.
LSZ51 — Standard Roller Lever (1.5N)
LSZ55 — Offset Roller Lever
LSZ53 — Yoke Roller Lever
For use with LSN maintained contact
switches.
LSZ52 — Adjustable Length Roller
Lever
LSZ54 — Rod Lever
May be cut or formed by user. Available in
flexible versions.
LSZ61 — Adjustable Loop Lever
LSZ51 LSZ55 LSZ53
LSZ54 LSZ52 LSZ61
Field adjustable to match application needs
Actuation is adjustable for operation clockwise, counterclockwise, or in both directions. Adjusting instructions are cast into the
internal lid of side rotatary heads for convenient reference.
Head may be positioned
Levers lock in any position, and locked in any
360° around the shaft. of four 90° positions.
CW CW and CCW CCW
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Heavy Duty Limit Switches
A32 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
PLUNGER OPERATING HEADS
All plungers are momentary action, except
the LSG maintained contact version. Overtravel is .190 inch (4,83 mm) minimum. The
plungers are sealed with an oiltight boot. A
gasket seal is between the head and housing. Plungers are corrosion resistant steel.
TOP PLUNGERS
LSC — Top Plain Plunger
For in-line operating motion.
LSD — Top Roller Plunger
Can be set at 90° increments to accept
cam or slide actuation.
LSV — Adjustable Top Plain Plunger
Simplifies installation, since switch operating point can be adjusted from 2.085 to
2.335 inch.
SIDE PLUNGERS
Side plungers fit in close quarters. The
heads may be positioned to accept actuation from any of four directions, 90° apart.
LSE — Side Plain Plunger
For in-line actuating motion
LSF — Side Roller Plunger
Roller may be set in vertical or horizontal
position for cam or slide actuation.
LSW — Adjustable Side Plain Plunger
Adjustable operating point, 1.615 to 1.865
inch.
LSG — Maintained Contact Side Plain
Plunger
Transfer of switch contacts is maintained
after either of the two plungers is operated. Operation of other plunger resets
switch for next cycle.
WOBBLE LEVER OPERATING HEAD
Switches with wobble lever heads are operated by any movement, except direct pull.
LSJ1A-7M — Spring Wire Lever
May be formed by user to meet special
needs.
LSJ1A-7A — Plastic Rod Lever
Use to avoid scratching or marring by
actuator.
LSJ1A-7N — Flexible Cable Lever
LSK1A-8C — Stainless Steel Coil
Spring Lever
LSK1A-8A — Cat Whisker
For low operating force applications
CONDUIT OPENINGS
For conduit openings other than 1/2-NPT
and 3/4-NPT, substitute the following for LS
in the catalog listing:
PG13,5 — LS3
2mm — LS4
PF1/2 — LS5
LSC LSD LSV
LSE LSF LSW LSG
LSJ1A-7M LSJ1A-7N LSK1A-8C LSJ1A-7A LSK1A-8A
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Rotary Actuated Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A33
Side Rotary Top Rotary
Order guides below and on page A35 provide specification and pricing information
for side and top rotary switches.
Plug-in body style catalog listings consist of
the complete plug-in base receptacle.
Levers are ordered separately. See pages
A37-A39 for lever selection.
For rapid response – off the shelf service,
all bold face listings are normally stocked
items.
For low temperature, high
temperature or preleading see page
A42.
ASSEMBLED CONDITIONS
Catalog listings in order guide below are
factory assembled with:
1 Shaft of side rotary heads facing front of
switch (label side).
1 Head adjusted for both clockwise and
counterclockwise operation.
1 Light on indicator versions wired to N.O.
circuit.
Refer to facing page to specify modifications to these assembled conditions.
PRELEADED OR CONNECTORIZED
VERSIONS
Refer to page A42.
ORDER GUIDE (Momentary action. UL listed, CSA certified, CE approved. Levers not included. Order separately pages A37-A39.)
Catalog Listings
Side Rotary Top Rotary
Low
Electrical Body** Low 5° Low Differential High
Circuitry Rating Style Standard Differential Pretravel Torque Low Torque Overtravel
Silver contacts A Plug-in LSA1A LSP1A LSU1A LSR1A LSH1A LSB1A
1⁄2N Conduit
Gold cross point contacts C Plug-in
1⁄2N Conduit
LSA1J LSU1J — — LSB1J
Gold plated contacts C LSA1E LSP1E — LSR1E LSH1E —
Silver contacts A* 120 V Ind. lite LSA5A LSP5A LSU5A LSR5A LSH5A LSB5A
Plug-In*
1⁄2N Conduit
A* 240 V Ind. lite LSA8A LSP8A LSU8A LSR8A LSH8A LSB8A
Plug-In
1⁄2N Conduit
A* 24 V LED lite LSA9A LSP9A LSU9A LSR9A LSH9A LSB9A
1.5mA max.
Auto polarity
Plug-in
1⁄2 N Conduit
A Non plug-in LSA3K LSP3K LSU3K LSR3K LSH3K LSB3K
SPDT Double Break 1⁄2N Conduit
Silver contacts B Plug-in LSA2B LSP2B LSU2B LSR2B LSH2B LSB2B
3⁄4N Conduit
B Plug-in LSA6B LSP6B LSU6B LSR6B LSH6B LSB6B
1⁄2N Conduit
B 120 V Ind. lite
Plug-in
3⁄4N Conduit
LSA2R LSP2R LSU2R LSR2R LSH2R LSB2R
B Non plug-in LSA4L LSP4L LSU4L LSR4L LSH4L LSB4L
3⁄4N Conduit
B Non plug-in LSA7L LSP7L LSU7L LSR7L LSH7L LSB7L
1⁄2N Conduit
DPDT Double Break
D Non plug-in LSA3N LSR3N LSB3N
SPNC Direct Acting 1⁄2N Conduit
*Use at voltage indicated for light. Wired to N.O. circuit. Upper temperature limit for lighted units is 200°F (93°C). **Plug-in listings include base receptacle.
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
Pretravel (degrees max.) 15 9 5 15 9 25
SPDT 5 3 3 5 3 10Differential Travel
(degrees max.) DPDT 7 4 4 7 4 12
Overtravel (degrees min.) 60 66 70 60 66 110
Operating Torque 0,45 Nm 0,45 Nm 0,45 Nm 0,19 Nm 0,19 Nm 0,28 Nm
(max.) NMJNewton meters 4 in. lbs. 4 in. lbs. 4 in. lbs. 1.7 in. lbs. 1.7 in. lbs. 2.5 in. lbs.
Operating Temperature Range*** 10°F to 250°F 30°F to 250°F
–12° to 121°C –1° to 121°C
***Completely fluorocarbon-sealed switches are preferred for use in temperatures above 200°F (93°C). Refer to page A42.
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Rotary Actuated Switches
A34 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
ACTUATION DIRECTION
(Drawings apply to listings on facing page only).
CW & CCW CW CCW
(Normal) Mod. 1 Mod. 2
HEAD ORIENTATION
Mod. 5
Mod. 4
Mod. 3
Front
(Normal)
ASSEMBLY MODIFICATIONS
How to order
Momentary action rotary switches can be
furnished in other than the normal assembled conditions described on the facing
page. To specify modifications, add the
number(s) shown below to the catalog listings. Prices are the same as their counterparts shown in the order guide.
Modification number suffixes are:
1 Clockwise operation only
2 Counterclockwise operation only
3 Shaft to right of switch front
4 Shaft to left of switch front
5 Shaft to back of switch
7 Indicator light wired to N.C. circuit
Examples:
Catalog Listing LSA1A23 is an LSA1A switch
adjusted for counterclockwise operation
only. The operating shaft is to the right side
of the switch when viewing it from the front
(label side). No lever.
Catalog Listing LSA8A7 is an LSA8A switch
with the 240 volt indicator light wired to the
N.C. circuit. No lever.
Switches with assembly modifications are
not normally stocked and may extend delivery leadtimes.
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
10 amps continuous carry (except for electrical rating ‘‘C’’). Circuits on any one pole
must be the same polarity.
AC Volts
Pilot duty: 600 VAC, 720VA
Electical Amps at 0.35 Power Factor
Rating Circuitry VAC Make Break
A* Single-Pole 120 60 6
Double-Throw 240 30 3
480 15 1.5
600 12 1.2
B Double-Pole 120 30 3
Double-Throw 240 15 1.5
480 7.5 0.75
600 6 0.60
D Single-Pole 120 60 6
Single-Throw 240 30 3
Normally Closed 480 15 1.5
600 12 1.2
C** Single-Pole 250 VAC or 60 VDC, .050 amp max.
Double-Throw
DC Volts
Pilot duty: 240 VDC, 30 watts
Electrical Make and Break Amps
Rating Circuitry VDC Inductive Resistive
A* Single-Pole 120 0.25 0.8
Double-Throw 240 0.15 0.4
B Double-Pole 120 0.25 0.8
Double-Throw 240 0.15 0.4
D Single-Pole 30 4.3 4.3
Single-Throw 120 1.1 1.1
Normally Closed
C** Single-Pole 250 VAC or 60 VDC, .050 amp max.
Double-Throw
*For switches with indicator light, use only at voltage stated for indicator light.
**These switches have either gold plated or gold cross point contacts. Cross point contacts improve high
reliability of contact make when particle contamination is a problem or low energy loads must be carried.
LEVERS
Levers for rotary actuated switches are normally ordered as separate catalog listings.
They also may be ordered by including a
suffix to the switch catalog listing and adding the lever price. See pages A34-A39.
SWITCHES FOR SPECIAL
APPLICATIONS
HDLS limit switches for special application
needs are described on pages A42 and A43.
They include: manifold mount, low temperature, complete fluorocarbon-sealed, gravity return, extra low torque and 20 Amp
switches.
Adapter plates for interchanging HDLS with
LS/200LS limit switches are described on
page A49.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Rotary Actuated Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A35
ADDITIONAL CIRCUITRY/ACTION OPTIONS
ORDER GUIDE
Maintained, center neutral, or sequential action. UL listed, CSA certified. Levers not included (see pages A36-A39).
ASSEMBLY MODIFICATIONS
Switches in the order guide, below, have the
operating shaft facing front. If another orientation is desired, add a number from the
drawing to the catalog listing.
To specify the indicator light wired to the
N.C. circuit, add 7 to the catalog listing.
Example:
Catalog Listing LSN5A37 is an LSN5A
switch with the shaft facing right and the
indicator light wired to the N.C. circuit.
HEAD ORIENTATION
(Drawing applies to this page only.)
Mod. 5
Mod. 4
Mod. 3
Front
(Normal)
Lever ordering information is shown on
pages A36-A39.
For low temperature, all Viton or preleaded versions see page A42.
Elec. Maintained† Center Neutral Sequential
Rating Body** 360° Alternate 2 Position (Pole 1 operates CCW (Pole 1 operates before Pole 2,
Circuitry Page A23 Style Action Standard Pole 2 operates CW) either CW or CCW or both)
SPDT Double Break
Maintained
CENTER NEUTRAL
SPDT Double Break
each direction
Electrical rating B
SEQUENCE
(2) SPDT Double Break
with 10° between operation
Electrical rating B
A Plug-in LSQ300 LSN1A
1⁄2N Conduit
A* 120V Ind. Lite LSN5A
Plug-in
1⁄2N Conduit
A* 240V Ind. Lite LSN8A
Plug-in
1⁄2N Conduit
A Non plug-in LSQ310 LSN3K
1⁄2N Conduit
B Plug-in LSN2B LSM2D LSL2C
3⁄4N Conduit
B Plug-in LSN6B LSM6D LSL6C
1⁄2N Conduit
B Non plug-in LSQ320 LSN4L LSM4N LSL4M
3⁄4N Conduit
B Non plug-in LSN7L LSM7N LSL7M
1⁄2N Conduit
DPDT Double Break
Maintained
D Non plug-in LSN3N
1⁄2 N Conduit
SP Normally Closed
Direct Acting
* Use at voltage indicated for light. Wired to N.O.
circuit.
Upper temperature for lighted units is 200°F (93°C).
** Plug-in listings include base receptacle. † Total travel is approximately 80° max. Maintained
contact switch normally used with LSZ53 yoke actuator.
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
Pretravel (degrees max.) SPDT 65 Not Applicable Not Applicable
Note: Mechanical trip DPDT 65 18 1st Pole 15
before electrical trip 2nd Pole 10 additional (max.)
SPDT 40 Not Applicable Not ApplicableDifferential Travel
(degrees max.) DPDT 40 10 For each pole — 5 degrees
Overtravel (degrees min.) 20 57 48
Operating Torque Nm J Newton meters 0,45 Nm 0,45 0,45
(max.) 4 in. lbs. 4 in. lbs. 4 in. lbs.
Operating Temperature
Range***
30°F to 250°F 10°F to 250°F
–1 to 121°C –12 to 121°C
*** Completely fluorocarbon-sealed switches are preferred for temperatures above 200°F (93°C). Refer to page A42.
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Levers for Rotary Actuated Switches
A36 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
LSZ51 LSZ55 LSZ53
Type Type Type
LSZ52 LSZ54 LSZ61
Type Type Type
CAM TRACKING LSZ51 TYPE LEVERS LSZ52 TYPE LEVER
Open mounted roller Close mounted roller
LSZ54 TYPE LEVER LSZ55 TYPE LEVERS
Open mounted roller Close mounted roller
NOTE: Shaft dia. is .29 in.
Levers for use with side or top rotary actuated switches are available in a wide choice of
sizes and materials, as shown in the order
guides on the following pages. Rollers may
be on either side of the lever to best match
the external actuating mechanism. They
permit a wide range of cam tracking possibilities (see drawings below).
LSZ51 standard rollers and LSZ55 offset
roller levers have a fixed 1.5 inch (38,1 mm)
radius.
LSZ53 yoke roller levers are used with side
rotary maintained switches, where a reciprocating actuator operates the switch in
one direction and reverses it when moving
in the other direction.
LSZ52 adjustable length roller levers are
universally adaptable to many application
needs.
LSZ54 rod levers may be formed by the
user. The hub permits adjusting of lever
length. Also available in flexible versions.
LSZ61 is an adjustable loop lever.
For lever order guides, refer to the following
pages.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Levers for Rotary Actuated Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A37
Rollers may be mounted on the front or back side of the lever. (See below).
FRONT MOUNT BACK MOUNT
Levers shown in the order guides are furnished with cap screws which accommodate a 9⁄64-inch allen wrench.
TO ORDER LEVERS SEPARATELY
Catalog listings in the shaded column of the
order guides are used when ordering levers
as separate items, i.e., LSZ51A, LSZ53B,
etc.
TO ORDER LEVERS WITH SWITCHES
Refer to the lefthand shaded column with
dash-number suffixes to order lever and
switches together. Add the appropriate suffix to the switch catalog listing.
Example:
Catalog Listing LSA1A-1B is an LSA1A
switch with a standard lever which has the
steel roller mounted on the front side.
ORDER GUIDE
Roller To Order Lever Use These
Mounted On With Switch, Add Catalog Listings
Radius This Side Dia. Width Suffix To Switch To Order Levers
Type (in.) Of Lever in. in. Material Catalog Listing Separately
LSZ51 Series 1.5 Front .75 .25 Nylon –1A LSZ51A
Std. 1.5 Front .75 .25 Steel –1B LSZ51B
Roller 1.5 Back .75 .25 Nylon –1C LSZ51C
Lever 1.5 Back .75 .25 Steel –1D LSZ51D
1.5 Front 1.0 .50 Nylon –1F LSZ51F
1.5 Front 1.5 .25 Nylon –1G LSZ51G
1.5 Back 1.0 .50 Nylon –1J LSZ51J
1.5 Back .75 .25 Ball Bearing –1L LSZ51L
1.5 Back .75 1.30 Nylon –1M LSZ51M
1.5 Back .75 .375 Stainless –1T LSZ51T
1.5 Front .75 .50 Nylon –1P LSZ51P
1.5 Front 1.59 .25 Nylon –1R LSZ51R
1.5 — — — Less Roller — LSZ51
LSZ53 Series 1.5 Front-Back .75 .25 Nylon –3A LSZ53A
Yoke 1.5 Front-Back .75 .25 Steel –3B LSZ53B
1.5 Front-Front .75 .25 Steel –3D LSZ53D
1.5 Back-Front .75 .25 Nylon –3E LSZ53E
1.5 Back-Back .75 .25 Nylon –3S LSZ53S
1.5 Back-Back .75 .25 Steel –3P LSZ53P
1.5 Back-Front .75 .25 Steel –3U LSZ53U
1.5 Back-Front .75 1.25 Nylon –3M LSZ53M
1.5 — — — Less Rollers — LSZ53
Back view of LSZ53E
LSZ55 Series 1.5 — — — Less Roller — LSZ55
Offset 1.5 Back .75 .25 Nylon –5A LSZ55A
1.5 Back .75 .25 Steel –5B LSZ55B
1.5 Front .75 .25 Nylon –5C LSZ55C
1.5 Front .75 .25 Steel –5D LSZ55D
1.5 Front .75 .50 Nylon –5E LSZ55E
1.5 Front 1.5 .25 Nylon –5K LSZ55K
1.5 Front 1.0 .50 Nylon –5F LSZ55F
LSZ69 Series* — 6.0 — Stainless (fixed) — LSZ69AA
Spoke — 6.0 — Stainless LSZ69BA
(spokes
replaceable)
*For use with LSQ300 Series. Hub is aluminum. See page A59 for dimensions.
Teller Tab
Teller tab assures proper torque.
When it cannot be moved, the lever is
tight enough to prevent slippage.
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Levers for Rotary Actuated Switches
A38 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
METRIC CONVERSION
.25 in. J 6,35 mm
.5 in. J 12,7 mm
.625 in. J 15,9 mm
.75 in. J 19,1 mm
1.0 in. J 25,4 mm
1.5 in. J 38,1 mm
2.0 in. J 50,8 mm
2.5 in. J 63,5 mm
3.0 in. J 76,2 mm
4.8 in. J 122 mm
5.0 in. J 127 mm
6.0 in. J 152 mm
12.0 in. J 305 mm
LOW TORQUE APPLICATION
CONSIDERATION
When heavier levers (such as LSZ52 series
and LSZ54 series, below), are used with low
torque LSH, LSR, LSS and LST switches, it is
desirable to mount the switch with the lever
down. In this way, gravity will assist in restoring levers to the free position.
Conversely, when these switches are
mounted with the lever upright, gravity
tends to work to prevent lever return after
switching actuation. By counterbalancing
the lever or adding an auxiliary extension
spring, this problem may be overcome.
Contact the 800 number for application assistance.
ORDER GUIDE
Roller To Order Lever Use These
Mounted On With Switch, Add Catalog Listings
Radius This Side Dia. Width Suffix To Switch To Order Levers
Type (in.) Of Lever in. in. Material Catalog Listing Separately
LSZ52 Series 1.5-3.5 Back .75 .25 Nylon –2A LSZ52A
Adjustable 1.5-3.5 Back .75 .25 Steel –2B LSZ52B
Radius 1.5-3.5 Front .75 .25 Nylon –2C LSZ52C
1.5-3.5 Front .75 .25 Steel –2D LSZ52D
1.5-3.5 Front .75 1.30 Nylon –2E LSZ52E
1.5-3.5 Front 1.0 .5 Nylon –2J LSZ52J
1.5-3.5 Front 1.5 .25 Nylon –2K LSZ52K
1.5-3.5 Front .75 .25 Ball Bearing –2L LSZ52L
1.5-3.5 Front 2.0 .25 Nylon –2M LSZ52M
1.5-3.5 Front .75 .5 Nylon –2N LSZ52N
Less Roller — LSZ52
Hub Only — LSZ54
LSZ68 Series 12.0 — .25 — Delrin Rod
w/Spring — LSZ68
Spring/Rod 16.0 — .25 — Delrin Rod
w/Spring — LSZ617
LSZ54 Series 5.5 — — — Aluminum –4M LSZ54M
Rod 13.0 — — — Stainless Steel –4N LSZ54N
20.0 — — — Delrin Rod –4P LSZ54P
12.0 — — — Spring Wire –4R LSZ54R
4.8 — — — Flexible Cable –4V LSZ54V*
Hub Only — LSZ54
LSZ61 Series
Flexible Loop
Nylatron — LSZ616 N Flexible Loop/Cap Screw
— LSZ6189.5 N Flexible Loop/Cap Screw
Hub Only — LSZ54
(measured from center line of shaft
hole to tip of actuator)
LSZ60 Series Front .75 .25 Nylon — LSZ60A
One Way Front .75 .25 Steel — LSZ60B
Roller Lever
See page A60 for dimensions. *Hub not available separately.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Levers for Rotary Actuated Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A39
FIXED LENGTH LEVERS ORDER GUIDE
For a complete listing add your choice of roller suffix
Fixed Length Levers
LSZ65 Series
Lever
Length (in.)
Lever
Listing
Roller
Suffix
Dia.
in.
Width
in. Material
.88 LSZ65A A .75 .25 Nylon
1.38 LSZ65B B .75 .25 Steel
1.25 LSZ65L
1.50 LSZ65C C .75 .50 Nylon
1.75 LSZ65D D .75 1.30 Nylon
2.00 LSZ65E E 1.00 .50 Nylon
2.50 LSZ65F F 1.50 .25 Nylon
3.00 LSZ65G
4.00 LSZ65H
5.00 LSZ65J
6.00 LSZ65K
Example:
LSZ65AB is a .88N long lever with a steel .75N diameter, .25N wide roller.
RUBBER ROLLER LEVERS
Ideal for elevator or conveyor applications
requiring quiet operation or protection of
delicate surfaces.
ORDER GUIDE
Roller
Mounted On
Radius This Side Dia. Width Catalog
Type (in.) Of Lever in. in. Material Listing
LSZ51 Series
Std.
Roller
Lever
1.5 Front 1.6 .5 Rubber LSZ51W
1.5 Front 2.0 .5 Rubber LSZ51Y
LSZ55 Series
Offset
1.5 Front 1.6 .50 Rubber LSZ55W
1.5 Front 2.0 .50 Rubber LSZ55Y
LSZ52 Series
Adjustable
Radius
1.5 to 3.5 Front 1.6 .50 Rubber LSZ52W
1.5 to 3.5 Front 2.0 .50 Rubber LSZ52Y
LSZ67 Series
Conveyor
Roller
— — 1.5 3.8 Plastic LSZ67AA
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Plunger Actuated Switches
A40 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
ASSEMBLED CONDITIONS
Catalog listings in order guide below are
factory assembled with:
1 Side plungers facing front (label side) of
switch. Rollers on side plungers are in
horizontal position.
ORDER GUIDE
Momentary action, except for maintained
contact LSG version. UL listed, CSA
certified.
1 Roller on top plungers are parallel to
mounting surface.
1 Lights on indicator versions are wired to
N.O. circuit.
Refer to facing page to specify modifications to these assembled conditions.
For low temperature, high temperature
or preleaded versions see page A42.
Circuitry For Maintained Plunger
SPDT Double Break DPDT Double Break
(Electrical rating A) (Electrical rating B)
Circuits on any one pole must be the same polarity.
Catalog Listings
Top Plungers Side Plungers
Catalog listings in this chart
are complete switches.
Elec. Maintained(Circuitry
Shown
Above)
Rating Body**
Circuitry Page A34 Style Plain Roller Adjustable Plain Roller Adjustable
Silver contacts A Plug-in LSC1A LSD1A LSV1A LSE1A LSF1A LSW1A LSG1A
1⁄2N Conduit
Gold cross pt.
Gold plated C
C Plug-in LSC1J LSD1J LSV1J LSE1J LSF1J LSW1J —
1⁄2N Conduit — LSD1E — — LSF1E LSW1E —
Silver contacts A* 120 V. Ind. Lite LSC5A LSD5A LSV5A LSE5A LSF5A LSW5A LSG5A
Plug-in
1⁄2N Conduit*
A* 240 V. Ind. Lite LSC8A LSD8A LSV8A LSE8A LSF8A LSW8A LSG8A
Plug-in
1⁄2N Conduit*
A Non plug-in LSC3K LSD3K LSV3K LSE3K LSF3K LSW3K LSG3K
1⁄2N Conduit
SPDT
Double Break
Silver contacts B Plug-in LSC2B LSD2B LSV2B LSE2B LSF2B LSW2B LSG2B
3⁄4N Conduit
B 120 V Ind. Lite LSC2R LSD2R LSV2R LSE2R LSF2R LSW2R LSG2R
Plug-in
3⁄4N Conduit
B Plug-in LSC6B LSD6B LSV6B LSE6B LSF6B LSW6B LSG6B
1⁄2N Conduit
B Non plug-in LSC4L LSD4L LSV4L LSE4L LSF4L LSW4L LSG4L
3⁄4N Conduit
B Non plug-in LSC7L LSD7L LSV7L LSE7L LSF7L LSW7L LSG7L
1⁄2N Conduit
DPDT
Double Break
D Non plug-in — — — LSE3N LSF3N LSW3N LSG3N
1⁄2N Conduit
SPNC
Direct Acting
*Use at voltage indicated for light. Upper operating temperature limit for lighted units is 200°F. Wired to N.O. circuit. **Plug-in listings include base receptacle.
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
mm 1,78 1,78 1,78 2,54 2,54 2,54 4,32
Pretravel (in. max.) .070 .070 .070 .100 .100 .100 .170
0,38 0,38 0,38 0,64 0,64 0,64 2,29
SPDT .015 .015 .015 .025 .025 .025 .090
Differential mm 0,51 0,51 0,51 0,89 0,89 0,89 2,29
Travel (in. max.) DPDT .020 .020 .020 .035 .035 .035 .090
mm 4,83 4,83 4,83 4,83 4,83 4,83 2,0
Overtravel (in. min.) .190 .190 .190 .190 .190 .190 .080
Newton 17,8 17,8 17,8 26,7 26,7 26,7 44,5
Operating Force (lb. max.) 4 4 4 6 6 6 10
Operating Point mm
(in.)
45,8 ±0,76 55,9 ±1,02 53,0 to 59,3 33,0 ±0,76 44,1 ±1,02 41,0 to 47,4 37,6 ±0,76
1.805 ±.030 2.200 ±.040 2.085 to 2.335 1.300 ±.030 1.735 ±.040 1.615 to 1.865 1.480 ±.030
Operating Temperature
Range
10°F to 200°F 10°F to 200°F 10°F to 200°F 30°F to 200°F
–12 to 93°C –12 to 93°C –12 to 93°C –1 to 93°C
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Plunger Actuated Switches/Assembly Modifications
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A41
ASSEMBLY MODIFICATIONS
How to order
To specify other than the normal assembled
conditions described on facing page, add
the following modification numbers to the
catalog listing in the plunger switch order
guide.
Mod.
3 Side plunger to right of switch front
4 Side plunger to left of switch front
5 Side plunger to back of switch
6 Roller on top plungers perpendicular to
mounting surface
7 Light on indicator versions wired to N.C.
circuit
8 Roller on side plungers in vertical position.
Example:
LSF1A3 is an LSF1A with the side roller plunger to the right side.
Wobble Actuated Switches
Wobble actuated switches have flexible levers which may be operated with any movement, except direct pull.
ORDER GUIDE
Momentary action. UL listed, CSA certified
Catalog Listings
Catalog listings in this chart
are complete switches.
Lever lengths measured from top mounting hole 5.5N 13N 5.5N 5.5N 5.5N
Elec.
Rating Body** Delrin Spring Cat*** Coil
Circuitry Page A34 Style Rod Wire Whisker Cable Spring
Silver contacts A Plug-in LSJ1A-7A LSJ1A-7M LSK1A-8A LSJ1A-7N LSK1A-8C
1⁄2N Conduit
Gold cross point C Plug-in LSJ1J-7A LSJ1J-7M LSK1J-8A LSJ1J-7N LSK1J-8C
1⁄2N Conduit — LSJ1E-7M — — —Gold plated contacts C
Silver contacts A* 120 V. Ind. Lite LSJ5A-7A LSJ5A-7M LSK5A-8A LSJ5A-7N LSK5A-8C
Plug-in
1⁄2N Conduit*
A* 240 V. Ind. Lite LSJ8A-7A LSJ8A-7M LSK8A-8A LSJ8A-7N LSK8A-8C
Plug-in
1⁄2N Conduit*
A Non plug-in LSJ3K-7A LSJ3K-7M LSK3K-8A LSJ3K-7N LSK3K-8C
1⁄2N ConduitSPDT Double Break
Silver contacts B Plug-in LSJ2B-7A LSJ2B-7M LSK2B-8A LSJ2B-7N LSK2B-8C
3⁄4N Conduit
B 120 V Ind. Lite LSJ2R-7A LSJ2R-7M LSK2R-8A LSJ2R-7N LSK2R-8C
Plug-In
3⁄4N Conduit
B Plug-in LSJ6B-7A LSJ6B-7M LSK6B-8A LSJ6B-7N LSK6B-8C
1⁄2N Conduit
B Non plug-in LSJ4L-7A LSJ4L-7M LSK4L-8A LSJ4L-7N LSK4L-8C
3⁄4N Conduit
B Non plug-in LSJ7L-7A LSJ7L-7M LSK7L-8A LSJ7L-7N LSK7L-8C
1⁄2N ConduitDPDT Double Break
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
mm 25,4 102 51 38 51
Pretravel (approx. in. radius) 1 4 2 1.5 2
Newton 2,78 1,39 1,39 1,95 1,95
Operating Force (oz. max.) 10 5 5 7 7
Operating Temperature Range 10°F to 200°F 12 to 93°C
* Use at voltage indicated for light. Upper operating temperature limit for lighted units is 200°F.
** Plug-in listings include base receptacle.
*** These cat whiskers have 51⁄2 inch long levers. To specify
71⁄2 inch length, substitute -8B for -8A.
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Switches for Special Applications
A42 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
NOTE: LSS1H and LST1H switches are
usually mounted with the lever down.
Heavier levers, such as the LSZ54N
(shown) and LSZ52D, should be used to
enable gravity to help restore them to the
free position. These levers are described
on page A38.
GRAVITY RETURN SIDE ROTARY SWITCHES
LSS1H gravity return side rotary limit
switches have no return spring mechanism. The weight of the actuating lever
must provide the force to restore it to the
free position.
The extremely light 5 in. oz. max. operating torque is useful in conveyor applications, since it enables operation by small
or lightweight objects. Because the head
is unsealed, the LSS1H is classed as
NEMA 1. However, the switch cavity is
sealed to protect the contacts.
The LSS1H has the plug-in body style,
with a 1⁄2 in. conduit opening.
Circuitry is SPDT double break. Refer to
electrical rating B, page A34.
ORDER GUIDE (Momentary action)
Operating Differential Total Travel Catalog
Torque Max. Travel Max. No Stop Listing
0,035 Nm 12° 360° LSS1H
5 in. oz.
Nm J Newton meters
EXTRA LOW TORQUE SIDE ROTARY SWITCHES
LST1H extra low torque side rotary limit
switches have a low force return spring
and a maximum operating torque of 12 in.
oz. It is NEMA 1, because of an unsealed
head. But, as with the LSS1H, the switch
cavity is sealed.
The LST1H has a plug-in body style, with a
1⁄2 in. conduit opening.
Circuitry is SPDT double break. Refer to
electrical rating B, page A34.
ORDER GUIDE (Momentary action)
Operating Pre-Travel Over-Travel Differential Total Catalog
Torque max. max. min. Travel max. Travel ref. Listing
0,085 Nm 15° 60° 5° 85° nom. LST1H
12 in. oz.
Nm J Newton meters
SPECIFYING GUIDE FOR:
HIGH TEMPERATURE-CHEMICAL
RESISTANT SWITCHES
Completely fluorocarbon (FC)-sealed
HDLS limit switches have a full FC body
gasket covering the switch cavity. Rotary
types have an extra FC seal on the operating shaft, while plunger versions have
FC boot seals.
They are for use in applications where the
environment includes fire-resistant synthetic fluids. In addition to most all fluids,
the FC sealed switches may be used with
such industrial fluids as Cellulube, Fyrquell, Houghto-Safe, Pydraul, and other
special cutting and hydraulic oils. For
seal performance chart see page A56.
The additional FC seals also promote
longer operating life for rotary actuated
HDLS switches in applications where the
temperatures are normally 10° to 250°F
(–12 to 121°C). If prewired with cable, then
temperature limits are 221°F (105°C) dry
and 140°F (60°C) wet.
How to order
Insert the additional letters Y and C in the
appropriate places in the standard catalog listing as shown in the example below.
Example:
LSA1A — standard side rotary plug-in
switch
LSYAC1A — Completely FC-sealed version of LSA1A
LOW TEMPERATURE SWITCHES
All forms of HDLS limit switches are also
available in low temperature construction.
Design changes include fluorosilicone
diaphragm, shaft seals, and external boot
seal (where applicable) plus a low temperature lubricant. If prewired with cable,
temperature limits are 14°F (–10°C) flex
and 22°F (–30°C) no flex. The temperature ranges for specific switches see
page A56.
How to order
A low temperature version of any HDLS
limit switch shown in the order guide can
be specified by inserting the additional
letters Y and B into the appropriate place
in the standard switch listing as shown in
the example below.
Example:
LSA1A — standard side rotary plug-in
switch
LSYAB1A — low temperature version of
LSA1A
FACTORY SEALED PRE-WIRED LIMIT
SWITCHES
FEATURES
1 Prewired with 6 ft STOOW-A cable or
4, 5 or 9-pin connectors (other
lengths available)
1 Wire entry area completely factory
sealed
1 (Cable version) NEMA 1, 6, 6P, 12
1 (Connector version) NEMA 1, 6, 6P, 12
13
How to order
To order fatory sealed switches, add the
modification codes shown below to
standard HDLS listings:
Circuitry Cable 1⁄2N Connector
SPDT C
A (4 pin mini)
B (5 pin mini)
DD (4 pin micro)
DPDT M R (9 pin)
Example: LSA1AC — LSA1A with 6 ft of
5 conductor STOOW-A cable.
LSJ2BM-7N — LSJ2B-7N with 6 ft of 9
conductor STOOW-A cable.
LSA1AB — LSA1A with 5 pin receptacle.
LSA1ADD — 4 pin micro-change
connector.
NOTE: Connector versions available
with 1⁄2 in. conduit tap only.
Refer to page A46 for pin-out and
mating connector. Refer to page A58 for
dimensions.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Switches for Special Applications
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A43
HIGH CAPACITY LIMIT SWITCH
FEATURES
1 High DC current ratings
1 20 amp rating at 120 VAC (single pole)
1 Plug in or non-plug in
1 Positive retention lever arm
The need for precise operation, coupled
with severe environmental conditions places rigid demands on any control. MICRO
SWITCH satisfies these demands with its
high capacity Heavy Duty Limit Switch,
which is designed to perform reliably under
these conditions.
This series has a wide gap contact block
that handles a higher make/break DC load.
In addition, a special lever arm has a serrated shaft hole and a capscrew with locking
nut for attaching the lever to the rotary shaft.
(See inset.) This assures a firm grip on the
operating shaft and positive retention of the
lever adjustment.
ORDER GUIDE INCLUDING LEVER
Catalog
Listing Description
LSQ051 Double pole, non-plug-in
3⁄4N Conduit opening
LSQ052 Double pole, plug-in
3⁄4N Conduit opening
LSQ053 Single pole, non-plug-in
1⁄2N Conduit opening
LSQ054 Single pole, plug-in 1⁄2N Conduit
opening
LSZ616 Replacement lever for above
listings
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
Circuitry Voltage Single Pole Double Pole
Resistive Inductive Resistive Inductive
Load Load Load Load
125 VDC 2.0A 1.0A 1.0A 0.4A
250 VDC 0.7A 0.4A 0.4A 0.2A
120 VAC 20A 20A 10A 10A
240 VAC 15A 15A 7.5A 7.5A
480 VAC 10A 10A 5A 5A
600 VAC 5A 5A 2.5A 2.5A
DPDT Double
Break
SPDT Double
Break
Maximum operating rate - 15 operations per minute
MANIFOLD MOUNT SWITCHES
Manifold mount HDLS limit switches have
an opening for the lead wires through the
gasketed mounting base. The gasket maintains the oil tightness when the switch is
surface mounted.
The manifold mount switches are available
in either single-pole or double-pole forms of
the plug-in types only. Mounting and wiring
of the single-pole and double-pole forms is
completely interchangeable. Any operating
head type can be provided.
Catalog listings of plug-in HDLS switches in
the order guides can be converted to specify manifold mount versions.
SINGLE-POLE CATALOG LISTINGS
Convert a single-pole, standard duty rated
switch listing to specify manifold mount by
changing the fifth character in the catalog
listing to F.
Example:
LSA1A — standard side rotary plug-in
switch
LSA1F — above switch in manifold mount
Convert a single-pole, electronic duty
switch listing by changing the fifth character
in the catalog listing to G.
Example:
LSA1J — standard side rotary plug-in switch
LSA1G — above switch in manifold mount
LSZ4015 — plug-in base only.
DOUBLE-POLE CATALOG LISTINGS
Convert double-pole catalog listings (except LSL sequential action and LSM center
neutral types) to specify manifold mount by
changing the fourth and fifth characters in
the catalog listing to 2F.
Example:
LSA2B — standard side rotary plug-in
switch
LSA2F — above switch in manifold mount
Change the fourth and fifth characters of
LSM listings to 2H.
Example:
LSM2D — center neutral switch
LSM2H — above switch in manifold mount
Change the fourth and fifth characters of
LSL listings to 2G.
Example:
LSL2C — sequential action switch
LSL2G — above switch in manifold mount
LSZ4016 — plug-in base only.
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Harsh Duty Epoxied Limit Switch
A44 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
No adjustment required over life of
switch
All metal drive train
Superior sealing, keeps shaft moving
freely
Twin fluorocarbon shaft seals
Superior corrosion resistance
Type 303 stainless steel shaft
Anti-corrosion
Phosphate sealed epoxy finish
Valuable trouble shooting tool
120 VAC neon or 24 V LED
indicators available
Replacement head part number
is metal stamped; won’t wash off
Fulfills your actuation criteria
Wide variety of operating heads
Fluorocarbon diaphragm seal
Eliminate fluid infiltration
Epoxied construction
Try your ‘‘step test’’
Zinc diecast housing, head & body
Additional body seal
Fluorocarbon sealed cover
High compression ridge
Your choice of termination
options
Exceeds NEMA 6P
Machine processes and their associated
fluids demand more than the standard
NEMA 6P switch provides.
The Harsh Duty Limit Switch meets the environmental challenges found in actual automotive production facilities and food and
beverage lines.
The MICRO SWITCH Harsh Duty Limit
Switch is made for environments that surpass NEMA 6P test criteria.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Fully Potted Limit Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A45
FEATURES
1 Excellent sealing capability for
withstanding Harsh Duty food and
beverage wash downs and severe
machine tool environments.
1 Switch cavity epoxy filled
1 Extra diaphragm sealing
1 12 ′ STOOW-A cable or connector
version (other lengths available)
1 (Cable versions) NEMA 1, 6, 6P, 12
1 (Connector versions) NEMA 1, 6, 6P,
12, 13
1 All fluorocarbon seals (low temp.
available)
1 Exceeds NEMA 6P
1 UL Listed, file #E37138
1 CSA Certified, file #LR57326
The Totally Potted HDLS provides an extra
degree of protection in harsh environments
by sealing the basic switch cavity with
epoxy. These switches are the same as the
non plug-in HDLS except that the entire
switch cavity is filled with epoxy in addition
to the conduit entrance, and the switches
are preleaded, either with cable or connectors.
HOW TO ORDER
Only the non plug-in HDLS switches can be
converted to a Fully-Potted HDLS.
All indicators are wired to the N.O. terminals.
(N.C. indicator available page A34.)
ORDER GUIDE – ROTARY ACTUATED SWITCHES
Catalog Listing
Side Rotary
Low D.T. Top Rotary
Circuitry Body Style Standard Low D.T. 5° P.T. Low Torque Low Torque Maintained High O.T. (1)
SPDT DoubleBreak Elect.
Rating: A
Preleaded
w/cable
LSYAC3KP-FP LSYPC3KP-FP LSYUC3KP-FP LSYRC3KP-FP LSYHC3KP-FP LSYNC3KP-FP LSYBC3KP-FP
Pre-wired w/
connector
LSYAC3KQ-FP LSYPC3KQ-FP LSYUC3KQ-FP LSYRC3KQ-FP LSYHC3KQ-FP LSYNC3KQ-FP LSYBC3KQ-FP
Preleaded
w/cable 120 VAC
Neon
LSYAC5KP-FP LSYPC5KP-FP LSYUC5KP-FP LSYRC5KP-FP LSYHC5KP-FP LSYNC5KP-FP LSYBC5KP-FP
Pre-wired w/
connector 120
VAC Neon
LSYAC5KQ-FP LSYPC5KQ-FP LSYUC5KQ-FP LSYRC5KQ-FP LSYHC5KQ-FP LSYNC5KQ-FP LSYBC5KQ-FP
DPDT DoubleBreak Elect.
Rating: B
Preleaded
w/cable
LSYAC4LX-FP LSYPC4LX-FP LSYUC4LX-FP LSYRC4LX-FP LSYHC4LX-FP LSYNC4LX-FP LSYBC4LX-FP
Pre-wired w/
connector
LSYAC7LR-FP LSYPC7LR-FP LSYUC7LR-FP LSYRC7LR-FP LSYHC7LR-FP LSYNC7LR-FP LSYBC7LR-FP
(1) Top rotary version
ORDER GUIDE – SIDE ROTARY (Continued)
Catalog Listing
Circuitry Body Style Center Neutral
SPDT Double Break
each direction
Electrical Rating: B
Preleaded w/cable LSYMC4NX-FP
Pre-wired w/connector LSYMC7NR-FP
ORDER GUIDE – SIDE ROTARY (Continued)
Catalog Listing
Circuitry Body Style Sequential
(2) SPDT Double Break
with 10° between
operation
Electrical Rating: B
Preleaded w/cable LSYLC4MX-FP
Pre-wired w/connector LSYLC7MR-FP
For low temperature applications, substitute ‘‘Y B’’ for the ‘‘Y C’’.
See page A42 for temperature ratings. See pages A57-A63 for drawings. See pages A33 and A35 for operating characteristics.
Other styles of fully potted limit switches are available than shown in this catalog. Consult the 800 number for further information.
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Fully Potted Limit Switches
A46 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
ORDER GUIDE – TOP PLUNGERS AND WOBBLE ACTUATORS
Catalog Listing
Top Plungers
Circuitry Body Style Plain Roller Adjustable
Wobble
Actuators
SPDT DoubleBreak Elect.
Rating: A
Preleaded w/cable LSYCC3KP-FP LSYDC3KP-FP LSYVC3KP-FP LSYJC3KP-**FP
Pre-wired
w/connector
LSYCC3KQ-FP LSYDC3KQ-FP LSYVC3KQ-FP LSYJC3KQ-**FP
Preleaded w/cable
120 VAC Neon
LSYCC5KP-FP LSYDC5KP-FP LSYVC5KP-FP LSYJC5KP-**FP
Pre-wired w/
connector 120
VAC Neon
LSYCC5KQ-FP LSYDC5KQ-FP LSYVC5KQ-FP LSYJC5KQ-**FP
DPDT DoubleBreak Elect.
Rating: B
Preleaded w/cable LSYCC4LX-FP LSYDC4LX-FP LSYVC4LX-FP LSYJC4LX-**FP
Pre-wired w/
connector
LSYCC7LR-FP LSYDC7LR-FP LSYVC7LR-FP LSYJC7LR-**FP
ORDER GUIDE – SIDE PLUNGERS
Catalog Listing
Side Plungers
Circuitry Body Style Plain Roller Adjustable Maintained
SPDT DoubleBreak Elect.
Rating: A
Preleaded w/cable LSYEC3KP-FP LSYFC3KP-FP LSYWC3KP-FP LSYGC3KP-FP
Pre-wired
w/connector
LSYEC3KQ-FP LSYFC3KQ-FP LSYWC3KQ-FP LSYGC3KQ-FP
Preleaded w/cable
120 VAC Neon
LSYEC5KP-FP LSYFC5KP-FP LSYWC5KP-FP LSYGC5KP-FP
Pre-wired w/
connector 120
VAC Neon
LSYEC5KQ-FP LSYFC5KQ-FP LSYWC5KQ-FP LSYGC5KQ-FP
DPDT DoubleBreak Elect.
Rating: B
Preleaded w/cable LSYEC4LX-FP LSYFC4LX-FP LSYWC4LX-FP LSYGC4LX-FP
Pre-wired w/
connector
LSYEC7LR-FP LSYFC7LR-FP LSYWC7LR-FP LSYGC7LR-FP
(2) All indicators wired to N.O. terminals.
Temperature Ratings:
Dry Wet
Connector
version: 250° F (121° C) 212° F (100° C)
Cable version: 221° F (105° C) 140° F (60° C)
Mating Female Connectors
5 Pin 9 Pin
41306 3′ cable 47001
41307 6′ cable 47002
41308 12′ cable 47003
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only) see page A58
**WOBBLE ACTUATOR CODE:
Head
Style
7A Delrin Rod J
7M Spring Wire J
8A Cat Whisker K
7N Cable J
8C Coil Spring K
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Connectors J Numbers
Cables J Colors
Single-Pole
Double-Pole
Pin numbers in wiring diagrams correspond
to terminal numbers in circuitry diagrams
on pages A45 and A46 only.
Electrical Ratings:
Connector Versions
Mini 600 VAC, 7A
Micro 300 VAC, 3A
For cable versions see page A34.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Stainless Steel
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A47
ORDER GUIDE STAINLESS STEEL SWITCHES
Head Type Action Circuitry Catalog Listing*
Side rotary Momentary SPDT LS2A4K
standard (1 N.O.-1 N.C.)
Side rotary Momentary SPDT LS2YAB4K
standard (1 N.O.-1 N.C.) (Low Temp)
Side rotary Momentary SPDT LS2H4K
low torque (1 N.O.-1 N.C.)
Side rotary Momentary DPDT LS2A4L
standard (2 N.O.-2 N.C.)
Side rotary Momentary DPDT LS2H4L
low torque (2 N.O.-2 N.C.)
Side rotary Momentary SPNC LS2A3N
standard (1 N.C. Direct Acting)
Side rotary Momentary SPNC LS2H3N
low torque (1 N.C. Direct Acting)
Side rotary Momentary SPDT each dir. LS2M4N
Center neutral (1 N.O.-1 N.C.) CW
standard (1 N.O.-1 N.C.) CCW
Side rotary Maintained SPDT LS2N3K
(1 N.O.-1 N.C.) (1⁄2N conduit)
Side plunger Momentary SPDT LS2E4K
(1 N.O.-1 N.C.)
Side plunger Momentary DPDT LS2E4L
(2 N.O.-2 N.C.)
Side roller Momentary SPDT LS2F4K
plunger (1 N.O.-1 N.C.)
Side roller Momentary DPDT LS2F4L
plunger (2 N.O.-2 N.C.)
Top roller Momentary SPNC LS2D3N
plunger (1 N.C. Direct Acting)
Top roller Momentary SPDT LS2D4K
plunger (1 N.O.-1 N.C.)
Top roller Momentary DPDT LS2D4L
plunger (2 N.O.-2 N.C.)
*SPDT 6 foot preleaded versions: add a C to the catalog listing. DPDT 6 foot preleaded versions; add M
to the catalog listing. Example: LS2A4KC. For custom lead lengths, contact the 800 number.
ORDER GUIDE STAINLESS STEEL LEVERS
Radius (In.) Dia. (In.) Width (In.) Catalog Listing
Std. Roller Lever 1.5 .75 .25 LS2Z51B
Adjustable Radius 1.5-3.5 .75 .25 LS2Z52B
Rod 13.0 — — LS2Z54N
FEATURES
1 Corrosion-resistant stainless steel non-plug in
body, head and rotary shaft
1 Stainless steel levers
1 Fluorocarbon seals
1 –12°C to +121°C (10°F to +250°F)
1 UL Listed, file #E37138
1 CSA Certified, file #LR57326
1 NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4 4X, 6, 6P, and 13
The HDLS is available in all stainless steel versions.
These switches are designed for use in highly corrosive environments such as petrochemical plants,
food processing plants, shipboard, and dockside
locations. The type 316 cast stainless steel body is
designed to minimize crevices where food particles
could become trapped. The actuator, operating
head, and screws are also stainless steel. All seals
are fluorocarbon to provide excellent chemical resistance and to withstand operating temperatures
up to 121°C (250°F) and pressurized steam cleaning. Preleaded and epoxy filled versions are also
available. Contact Freeport or nearest branch office
for details. Interchangeable with standard HDLS
mounting.
Front mounting Back mounting
LS2Z52B
LS2Z54N
For rapid response – off the shelf service, all bold
face listings are normally stocked items.
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Stainless Steel
A48 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
Head Type
Side Rotary Side Plunger Top Roller
Standard Low Torque Plain Roller Plunger
Pretravel (max.) 15° — 2,54 mm 2,54 mm 1,78 mm
1.00 in. 1.00 in. 0.70 in.
Differential Travel (max.) SPDT DPDT SPDT DPDT 0,64 mm 0,64 mm 0,38 mm
5° 7° 3° 4° .025 in. .025 in. .015 in.
Overtravel (min.) 60° 68° 4,83 mm 4,83 mm 4,83 mm
.190 in. .190 in. .190 in.
Operating Force (max.) — — 26,7 Nm 26,7 Nm 17,8 Nm
6.0 lb. 6.0 lb. 4.0 lb.
Operating Torque (max.) ,45 Nm ,19 Nm — — —
4 in.lb. 1.7 in.lb.
Operating Point — — 33 ± 76 mm 44,1 ± 1,02 mm 55,9 ± 1,02 mm
1.3 ± .03 in. 1.73 ± .04 in. 2.20 ± .04 in.
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
10 amps continuous carry
AC Volts
Pilot duty: 600 VAC, 720 VA
Amps at 0.35
Power FactorElectrical
Rating Circuitry VAC Make Break
A Single-Pole 120 60 6
DoubleThrow
240 30 3
480 15 1.5
600 12 1.2
B Double-Pole 120 30 3
DoubleThrow
240 15 1.5
480 7.5 0.75
600 6 0.60
D Single-Pole 120 60 6
Single-Throw 240 30 3
Normally
Closed
480 15 1.5
600 12 1.2
DC Volts
Pilot duty: 240 VDC, 30 watts
Make and Break AmpsElectrical
Rating Circuitry VDC Inductive Resistive
A Single-Pole 120 0.25 0.8
DoubleThrow
240 0.15 0.4
B Double-Pole 120 0.25 0.8
DoubleThrow
240 0.15 0.4
D Single-Pole 30 4.3 4.3
SingleThrow
120 1.1 1.1
Normally
Closed
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
1/2-14 NPT
available
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Modification and Replacement Parts
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A49
Non plug-in type Plug-in type
REPLACEMENT WOBBLE ACTUATORS
Catalog Listing
Delrin Spring Cat Coil
Rod Wire Cable Whisker Spring
LSZ4009 LSZ4010 LSZ4011 LSZ4012* LSZ4014
*51⁄2 inch long. For 71⁄2N length, order LSZ4013.
MICRO SWITCH conduit sealing packets
can be used with limit or enclosed switches.
This includes the HDLS, Compact LS, ML,
E6, V6, BAF1 or OP series switches.
The conduit sealing packets are not suitable
for use with explosion-proof switches.
PLUG IN RECEPTACLES
Type Catalog Listing
Single-Pole LSZ4001
Double-Pole LSZ4002
3⁄4 in. Conduit
Double-Pole LSZ4006
1⁄2 in. Conduit
Single-Pole LSZ4015
Manifold Mount
Double-Pole LSZ4016
Manifold Mount
ADAPTER PLATES
These adapter plates enable HDLS plug-in
switches to retrofit 200LS series (singlepole) and 300LS series (double-pole) plugin switches.
Catalog
Type Listing
Adapts 200LS series LSZ4003
mounting to accept HDLS
Adapts 300LS series LSZ4004
mounting to accept HDLS
INDICATOR LIGHTS/SEAL RING
Type Catalog Listing
120V LSZ4007
240V LSZ4008
ADJUSTING TOOL KIT
This tool kit is used if readjustment of switches is necessary when heads and/or contact
blocks are replaced.
Catalog Listing
LSZ4005
REPLACEMENT LEVERS
To order replacement levers, specify the
same part number that is metal stamped on
either the lever or lever hub.
For a complete list of HDLS replacment
parts, refer to the charts on the following
pages.
CONDUIT SEALING PACKETS
Catalog
Listing
Packet Cable O.D. Inches
2PA6 .400N - .435N
2PA16 .435N - .470N
2PA1 .530N - .570N
LIQUID TIGHT CONDUIT FITTING
2PA17 .200N - .345N 1⁄2 NPT
2PA18 .270N - .460N 1⁄2 NPT
2PA19 .455N - .625N 3⁄4 NPT
2PA20 .545N - .705N 3⁄4 NPT
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Replacement Parts
A50 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
For low temperature or high temperature options, refer to example in LSA1A block.
PLUG-IN TYPE 1 2 3 4 5
Catalog Complete Plug-in
Listing* Plug-in Unit Base Operating Contact
On Switch Less Base Receptacle Head Block Actuator
Nameplate Receptacle Only Only† Only Only
Std. LSA1A LSZ7A1A LSZ4001 LSZ1A LSZ3A
Low Temp. LSYAB1A LSZ7YAB1A LSZ4001 LSZ1AB LSZ3A
High Temp. LSYAC1A LSZ7YAC1A LSZ4001 LSZ1AC LSZ3A
LSA5A LSZ7A5A LSZ4001 LSZ1A LSZ3A
LSA8A LSZ7A8A LSZ4001 LSZ1A LSZ3A
LSA1J LSZ7A1J LSZ4001 LSZ1A LSZ3J
LSA2B LSZ7A2B LSZ4002 LSZ1A LSZ3B
LSA6B LSZ7A6B LSZ4006 LSZ1A LSZ3B
LSB1A LSZ7B1A LSZ4001 LSZ1B LSZ3A
LSB1J LSZ7B1J LSZ4001 LSZ1B LSZ3J
LSB5A LSZ7B5A LSZ4001 LSZ1B LSZ3A
LSB8A LSZ7B8A LSZ4001 LSZ1B LSZ3A
LSB2B LSZ7B2B LSZ4002 LSZ1B LSZ3B
LSB6B LSZ7B6B LSZ4006 LSZ1B LSZ3B
LSC1A LSZ7C1A LSZ4001 LSZ1C LSZ3A
LSC1J LSZ7C3J LSZ4001 LSZ1C LSZ3J
LSC5A LSZ7C5A LSZ4001 LSZ1C LSZ3A
LSC8A LSZ7C8A LSZ4001 LSZ1C LSZ3A
LSC2B LSZ7C2B LSZ4002 LSZ1C LSZ3B
LSC6B LSZ7C6B LSZ4006 LSZ1C LSZ3B
LSD1A LSZ7D1A LSZ4001 LSZ1D LSZ3A
LSD1J LSZ7D1J LSZ4001 LSZ1D LSZ3J
LSD2B LSZ7D2B LSZ4002 LSZ1D LSZ3B
LSD5A LSZ7D5A LSZ4001 LSZ1D LSZ3A
LSD8A LSZ7D8A LSZ4001 LSZ1D LSZ3A
LSD6B LSZ7D6B LSZ4006 LSZ1D LSZ3B
LSE1A LSZ7E1A LSZ4001 LSZ1E LSZ3A
*Only partial listings are shown and necessary to
determine replacement parts catalog listing. The listings with -7A, -7M, -7N, -8A, -8B and -8C are complete
catalog listings.
Note: Complete units consist of Columns 1 and 2. †For low temperature replacement heads add
B. Example LSZ1AB. For fluorocarbon seal
replacement heads add C. Example LSZ1AC.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Replacement Parts
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A51
PLUG-IN TYPE (Continued) 1 2 3 4 5
Catalog Complete Plug-in
Listing* Plug-in Unit Base Operating Contact
On Switch Less Base Receptacle Head Block Actuator
Nameplate Receptacle Only Only† Only Only
LSE1J LSZ7E1J LSZ4001 LSZ1E LSZ3J
LSE2B LSZ7E2B LSZ4002 LSZ1E LSZ3B
LSE5A LSZ7E5A LSZ4001 LSZ1E LSZ3A
LSE8A LSZ7E8A LSZ4001 LSZ1E LSZ3A
LSE6B LSZ7E6B LSZ4006 LSZ1E LSZ3B
LSF1A LSZ7F1A LSZ4001 LSZ1F LSZ3A
LSF1J LSZ7F1J LSZ4001 LSZ1F LSZ3J
LSF2B LSZ7F2B LSZ4002 LSZ1F LSZ3B
LSF5A LSZ7F5A LSZ4001 LSZ1F LSZ3A
LSF8A LSZ7F8A LSZ4001 LSZ1F LSZ3A
LSF6B LSZ7F6B LSZ4006 LSZ1F LSZ3B
LSG1A LSZ7G1A LSZ4001 LSZ1G
LSG5A LSZ7G5A LSZ4001 LSZ1G
LSG8A LSZ7G8A LSZ4001 LSZ1G
LSG2B LSZ7G2B LSZ4002 LSZ1G
LSG6B LSZ7G6B LSZ4006 LSZ1G
LSH1A LSZ7H1A LSZ4001 LSZ1H LSZ3A
LSH2B LSZ7H2B LSZ4002 LSZ1H LSZ3B
LSH6B LSZ7H6B LSZ4006 LSZ1H LSZ3B
LSH5A LSZ7H5A LSZ4001 LSZ1H LSZ3A
LSH8A LSZ7H8A LSZ4001 LSZ1H LSZ3A
LSJ1A-7A LSZ7J1A-7A LSZ4001 LSZ1JGA** LSZ3A LSZ4009
LSJ1A-7M LSZ7J1A-7M LSZ4001 LSZ1JGM** LSZ3A LSZ4010
*Only partial listings are shown and necessary to
determine replacement parts catalog listing. The listings with -7A, -7M, -7N, -8A, -8B and -8C are complete
catalog listings.
**Includes actuator
Note: Complete units consist of Columns 1 and 2. † For low temperature replacement heads add
B. Example LSZ1AB. For fluorocarbon seal
replacement heads add C. Example LSZ1AC.
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Replacement Parts
A52 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
PLUG-IN TYPE (Continued) 1 2 3 4 5
Catalog Complete Plug-in
Listing* Plug-in Unit Base Operating Contact
On Switch Less Base Receptacle Head and Block Actuator
Nameplate Receptacle Only Actuator‡ Only Only
LSJ5A-7M LSZ7J5A-7M LSZ4001 LSZ1JGM LSZ3A LSZ4010
LSJ8A-7M LSZ7J8A-7M LSZ4001 LSZ1JGM LSZ3A LSZ4010
LSJ2B-7A LSZ7J2B-7A LSZ4002 LSZ1JGM LSZ3B LSZ4009
LSJ2B-7M LSZ7J2B-7M LSZ4002 LSZ1JGM LSZ3B LSZ4010
LSJ6B-7M LSZ7J6B-7M LSZ4006 LSZ1JGM LSZ3B LSZ4010
LSJ5A-7A LSZ7J5A-7A LSZ4001 LSZ1JGA LSZ3A LSZ4009
LSJ8A-7A LSZ7J8A-7A LSZ4001 LSZ1JGA LSZ3A LSZ4009
LSJ6B-7A LSZ7J6B-7A LSZ4006 LSZ1JGA LSZ3B LSZ4009
LSJ1A-7N LSZJ1A-7N LSZ4001 LSZ1JGN LSZ3A LSZ4011
LSJ1J-7N LSZ7J1J-7N LSZ4001 LSZ1JGN LSZ3J LSZ4011
LSJ5A-7N LSZ7J5A-7N LSZ4001 LSZ1JGN LSZ3A LSZ4011
LSJ8A-7N LSZ7J8A-7N LSZ4001 LSZ1JGN LSZ3A LSZ4011
LSJ2B-7N LSZ7J2B-7N LSZ4002 LSZ1JGN LSZ3B LSZ4011
LSJ6B-7N LSZ7J6B-7N LSZ4006 LSZ1JGN LSZ3B LSZ4011
LSK1A-8A LSZ7K1A-8A LSZ4001 LSZ1KHA LSZ3A LSZ4012
LSK1J-8A LSZ7K1J-8A LSZ4001 LSZ1KHA LSZ3J LSZ4012
LSK2B-8A LSZ7K2B-8A LSZ4002 LSZ1KHA LSZ3B LSZ4012
LSK5A-8A LSZ7K5A-8A LSZ4001 LSZ1KHA LSZ3A LSZ4012
LSK8A-8A LSZ7K8A-8A LSZ4001 LSZ1KHA LSZ3A LSZ4012
LSK6B-8A LSZ7K6B-8A LSZ4006 LSZ1KHA LSZ3B LSZ4012
LSK1A-8C LSZ7K1A-8C LSZ4001 LSZ1KHC LSZ3A LSZ4014
LSK1A-8B LSZ7K1A-8B LSZ4001 LSZ1KHB LSZ3A LSZ4013
LSK5A-8C LSZ7K5A-8C LSZ4001 LSZ1KHC LSZ3A LSZ4014
LSK8A-8C LSZ7K8A-8C LSZ4001 LSZ1KHC LSZ3A LSZ4014
LSK2B-8C LSZ7K2B-8C LSZ4002 LSZ1KHC LSZ3B LSZ4014
LSK6B-8C LSZ7K6B-8C LSZ4006 LSZ1KHC LSZ3B LSZ4014
*Only partial listings are shown and necessary to
determine replacement parts catalog listing. The listings with -7A, -7M, -7N, -8A, -8B and -8C are complete
catalog listings.
Note: Complete units consist of Columns 1 and 2. ‡ For low temperature replacement head and actuators add B between the fifth and sixth characters.
Example: LSZ1KBHA. For fluorocarbon seals add
C. Example LSZ1KCHA.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Replacement Parts
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A53
PLUG-IN TYPE (Continued) 1 2 3 4 5
Catalog Complete Plug-in
Listing* Plug-in Unit Base Operating Contact
On Switch Less Base Receptacle Head Block Actuator
Nameplate Receptacle Only Only† Only Only
LSL2C LSZ7L2C LSZ4002 LSZ1L LSZ3C
LSL6C LSZ7L6C LSZ4006 LSZ1L LSZ3C
LSM2D LSZ7M2D LSZ4002 LSZ1M LSZ3C
LSM6D LSZ7M6D LSZ4006 LSZ1M LSZ3C
LSN1A LSZ7N1A LSZ4001 LSZ1N
LSN2B LSZ7N2B LSZ4002 LSZ1N
LSN5A LSZ7N5A LSZ4001 LSZ1N
LSN8A LSZ7N8A LSZ4001 LSZ1N
LSN6B LSZ7N6B LSZ4006 LSZ1N
LSP1A LSZ7P1A LSZ4001 LSZ1P LSZ3A
LSP1J LSZ7P1J LSZ4001 LSZ1P LSZ3J
LSP2B LSZ7P2B LSZ4002 LSZ1P LSZ3B
LSP5A LSZ7P5A LSZ4001 LSZ1P LSZ3A
LSP8A LSZ7P8A LSZ4001 LSZ1P LSZ3A
LSP6B LSZ7P6B LSZ4006 LSZ1P LSZ3B
LSR1A LSZ7R1A LSZ4001 LSZ1R LSZ3A
LSR2B LSZ7R2B LSZ4002 LSZ1R LSZ3B
LSR6B LSZ7R6B LSZ4006 LSZ1R LSZ3B
LSR5A LSZ7R5A LSZ4001 LSZ1R LSZ3A
*Only partial listings are shown and necessary to
determine replacement parts catalog listing. The listings with -7A, -7M, -7N, -8A, -8B and -8C are complete
catalog listings.
Note: Complete units consist of Columns 1 and 2. † For low temperature replacement heads add B.
Example LSZ1AB. For fluorocarbon seal replacement heads add C. Example LSZ1AC.
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Replacement Parts
A54 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
PLUG-IN TYPE (Continued) 1 2 3 4 5
Catalog Complete Plug-in
Listing* Plug-in Unit Base Operating Contact
On Switch Less Base Receptacle Head Block Actuator
Nameplate Receptacle Only Only† Only Only
LSR8A LSZ7R8A LSZ4001 LSZ1R LSZ3A
LSS1H LSZ7S1H LSZ4001 LSZ1S LSZ3H
LSU1A LSZ7U1A LSZ4001 LSZ1U LSZ3A
LST1H LSZ7T1H LSZ4001 LSZ1T LSZ3H
LSU5A LSZ7U5A LSZ4001 LSZ1U LSZ3A
LSV1A LSZ7V1A LSZ4001 LSZ1V LSZ3A
LSV1J LSZ7V1J LSZ4001 LSZ1V LSZ3J
LSV5A LSZ7V5A LSZ4001 LSZ1V LSZ3A
LSV8A LSZ7V8A LSZ4001 LSZ1V LSZ3A
LSV2B LSZ7V2B LSZ4002 LSZ1V LSZ3B
LSV6B LSZ7V6B LSZ4006 LSZ1V LSZ3B
LSW1A LSZ7W1A LSZ4001 LSZ1W LSZ3A
LSW1J LSZ7W1J LSZ4001 LSZ1W LSZ3J
LSW5A LSZ7W5A LSZ4001 LSZ1W LSZ3A
LSW8A LSZ7W8A LSZ4001 LSZ1W LSZ3A
LSW2B LSZ7W2B LSZ4002 LSZ1W LSZ3B
LSW6B LSZ7W6B LSZ4006 LSZ1W LSZ3B
NON PLUG-IN TYPE (These parts will not form a complete switch)
Catalog
Listing* Operating Contact
On Switch Head Block Actuator
Nameplate Only† Only Only
LSA3K LSZ1A LSZ3K
LSA4L LSZ1A LSZ3L
LSA7L LSZ1A LSZ3L
LSB3K LSZ1B LSZ3K
LSB4L LSZ1B LSZ3L
LSB7L LSZ1B LSZ3L
LSC3K LSZ1C LSZ3K
LSC4L LSZ1C LSZ3L
Catalog
Listing* Operating Contact
On Switch Head and Block Actuator
Nameplate Actuator‡ Only Only
LSJ7L-7A LSZ1JGA LSZ3L LSZ4009
LSJ7L-7M LSZ1JGM LSZ3L LSZ4010
LSJ4L-7N LSZ1JGN LSZ3L LSZ4011
LSJ7L-7N LSZ1JGN LSZ3L LSZ4011
LSK3K-8A LSZ1KHA LSZ3K LSZ4012
LSK4L-8A LSZ1KHA LSZ3L LSZ4012
LSK7L-8A LSZ1KHA LSZ3L LSZ4012
LSK3K-8C LSZ1KHC LSZ3K LSZ4014
*Only partial listings are shown and necessary to
determine replacement parts catalog listing. The listings with -7A, -7M, -7N, -8A, -8B and -8C are complete
catalog listings.
Note: Complete units consist of Columns 1 and 2. ‡ For low temperature replacement head and actuators add B between the fifth and sixth characters.
Example LSZ1KBHA. For fluorocarbon seals add C.
Example LSZ1KCHA.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Replacement Parts
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A55
NON PLUG-IN TYPE
Catalog
Listing* Operating Contact
On Switch Head Block Actuator
Nameplate Only† Only Only
LSC7L LSZ1C LSZ3L
LSD3K LSZ1D LSZ3K
LSD4L LSZ1D LSZ3L
LSD7L LSZ1D LSZ3L
LSE3K LSZ1E LSZ3K
LSE4L LSZ1E LSZ3L
LSE7L LSZ1E LSZ3L
LSF3K LSZ1F LSZ3K
LSF4L LSZ1F LSZ3L
LSF7L LSZ1F LSZ3L
LSG3K LSZ1G
LSG4L LSZ1G
LSG7L LSZ1G
LSH3K LSZ1H LSZ3K
LSH4L LSZ1H LSZ3L
LSH7L LSZ1H LSZ3L
Catalog
Listing* Operating Contact
On Switch Head and Block Actuator
Nameplate Actuator‡ Only Only
LSJ3K-7A LSZ1JGA LSZ3K LSZ4009
LSJ3K-7M LSZ1JGM LSZ3K LSZ4010
LSJ3K-7N LSZ1JGN LSZ3K LSZ4011
LSJ4L-7A LSZ1JGA LSZ3L LSZ4009
LSJ4L-7M LSZ1JGM LSZ3L LSZ4010
LSK4L-8C LSZ1KHC LSZ3L LSZ4014
LSK7L-8C LSZ1KHC LSZ3L LSZ4014
‡ For low temperature replacement head and actuators add B between the fifth
and sixth characters. Example: LSZ1KBHA. For fluorocarbon seals add C.
Example LSZ1KCHA.
Catalog
Listing* Operating Contact
On Switch Head Block Actuator
Nameplate Only† Only Only
LSL4M LSZ1L LSZ3M
LSL7M LSZ1L LSZ3M
LSM4N LSZ1M LSZ3M
LSM7N LSZ1M LSZ3M
LSN3K LSZ1N
LSN4L LSZ1N
LSN7L LSZ1N
LSP3K LSZ1P LSZ3K
LSP4L LSZ1P LSZ3L
LSP7L LSZ1P LSZ3L
LSR3K LSZ1R LSZ3K
LSR4L LSZ1R LSZ3L
LSR7L LSZ1R LSZ3L
LSV3K LSZ1V LSZ3K
LSV4L LSZ1V LSZ3L
LSV7L LSZ1V LSZ3L
LSW3K LSZ1W LSZ3K
LSW4L LSZ1W LSZ3L
LSW7L LSZ1W LSZ3L
REPLACEMENT PARTS FOR STAINLESS STEEL HDLS
Listing Operating Head Contact Block
LS2A3N LS2Z1A N/A
LS2A4K LS2Z1A LSZ3K
LS2A4L LS2Z1A LSZ3L
LS2D4K LS2Z1D LSZ3K
LS2D4L LS2Z1D LSZ3L
LS2E4K LS2Z1E LSZ3K
LS2E4L LS2Z1E LSZ3L
LS2F4K LS2Z1F LSZ3K
LS2F4L LS2Z1F LSZ3L
LS2H3K LS2Z1H LSZ3K
LS2H4K LS2Z1H LSZ3K
LS2H4L LS2Z1H LSZ3L
LS2M4N LS2Z1M LSZ3M
LS2N3K LS2Z1N LSZ3K
*Only partial listings are shown and necessary to determine replacement parts
catalog listing. The listings with -7A, -7M, -7N, -8A, -8B and -8C are complete
catalog listings.
† For low temperature replacement heads add B. Example LSZ1AB. For fluorocarbon seal replacement heads add C. Example LSZ1AC.
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Temperature and Performance Data
A56 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
TABLE 1—TEMPERATURE LIMITS
Standard HDLS Low Temperature HDLS
High Temperature HDLS
(Fluorocarbon Sealed*)
Low Limit High Limit Low Limit High Limit Low Limit High Limit
10°F 30°F 200°F 250°F –40°F –20°F 200°F 250°F 10°F 30°F 250°F
–12°C –1°C 93°C 121°C –40°C –29°C 93°C 121°C –12°C –1°C 121°C
LSA—Side Rotary Momentary X X X X X X
LSB—Top Rotary X X X X X X
LSC—Top Plain Plunger X X X X X X
LSD—Top Roller Plunger X X X X X X
LSE—Side Plain Plunger X X X X X X
LSF—Side Roller Plunger X X X X X X
LSG—Side Plunger Maintained X X X X X X
LSH—Side Rotary, Low P.T., Low Torque X X X X X X
LSJ—Wobble Stick X X X X X X
LSK—Cat Whisker X X X X X X
LSL—Side Rotary Sequence X X X X X X
LSM—Side Rotary Center Neutral X X X X X X
LSN—Side Rotary Maintained X X X X X X
LSP—Side Rotary, Low Pretravel X X X X X X
LSR—Side Rotary, Low Torque X X X X X X
LSV—Top Adjustable Plunger X X X X X X
LSW—Side Adjustable Plunger X X X X X X
*For HDLS application wherein the upper
temperature limit is normally above 200°F (93°C),
much longer switch life can be obtained by using
completely fluorocarbon-sealed switches rather than
the standard HDLS.
TABLE 2—ENVIRONMENTAL SEAL PERFORMANCE
Std. Seals C
el lu lu b e D
et er g en t 5
S
ta r A
S
TM
#
1
A
S
TM
#
2
A
S
TM
#
3
A
S
TM
#
4
H
o ug h to S
af e 26
0,
2
71
H
o ug h to S
af e 10
10
, 1
05
5,
1
12
0
M
in er al O
il P
et r. O
il C
ru d e S
ili
co n G
r. &
O
il S
un sa fe B
ee r S
to d d ar d S
o lv .
C
h lo ri na te d S
o lv en ts C
itr
ic A
ci d s D
ies te r S
yn .
Lu b ri ca nt O
zo ne P
yd ra ul P
yr o g ua rd P
et r. B
as e H
yd ra ul ic O
il La rd O
il S
ili
ca te E
st er s LSA 4 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 4 4 4 1 1 2
LSB 4 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 4 4 4 1 1 2
LSC 4 2 2 1 2 4 4 2 4 2 2 1 2 1 2 4 1 4 3 4 4 2 2 2
LSD 4 2 2 1 2 4 4 2 4 2 2 1 2 1 2 4 1 4 3 4 4 2 2 2
LSE 4 2 2 1 2 4 4 2 4 2 2 1 2 1 2 4 1 4 3 4 4 2 2 2
LSF 4 2 2 1 2 4 4 2 4 2 2 1 2 1 2 4 1 4 3 4 4 2 2 2
LSG 4 2 2 1 2 4 4 2 4 2 2 1 2 1 2 4 1 4 3 4 4 2 2 2
LSH 4 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 4 4 4 1 1 2
LSJ 4 2 2 1 2 4 4 2 4 2 2 1 2 1 2 4 1 4 3 4 4 2 2 2
LSK 4 2 2 1 2 4 4 2 4 2 2 1 2 1 2 4 1 4 3 4 4 2 2 2
LSL 4 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 4 4 4 1 1 2
LSM 4 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 4 4 4 1 1 2
LSN 4 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 4 4 4 1 1 2
LSP 4 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 4 4 4 1 1 2
LSR 4 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 4 4 4 1 1 2
LSV 4 2 2 1 2 4 4 2 4 2 2 1 2 1 2 4 1 4 3 4 4 2 2 2
LSW 4 2 2 1 2 4 4 2 4 2 2 1 2 1 2 4 1 4 3 4 4 2 2 2
All HDLS with seals of:
Fluorisilicone
(Low Temp. HDLS) 4 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 4 4 1 1 1
Fluorocarbon (High
Temp. HDLS) 1* 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
*Fluorocarbon seals good for all Cellulubes Except A60.CODE:
1 J Satisfactory 3 J Doubtful
2 J Fair 4 J Unsatisfactory
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Mounting Dimensions (For reference only)
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A57
SIDE ROTARY
Single-pole
Double-pole
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Mounting Dimensions (For reference only)
A58 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
TOP ROTARY
Single-pole
Single-Pole
Double-Pole Dimension
MANIFOLD MOUNT (Plug-in only)
Single-pole and double-pole
NEMA 6P PRE-WIRED SIDE ROTARY
Single-pole
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Mounting Dimensions (For reference only)
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A59
ROTARY LEVERS
LSZ51
Front
mounting
Back
mounting
LSZ55
Front
mounting
Back
LSZ53
Front
mounting
LSZ69BA
LSZ52LSZ67AA
See order guides for roller dimensions.
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Mounting Dimensions (For reference only)
A60 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
ROTARY LEVERS
LSZ54
V N
M
R
LSZ60 LSZ68 LSZ61
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Mounting Dimensions (For reference only)
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A61
TOP PLUNGERS
Single-pole and double-pole
LSD LSC LSV
SIDE PLUNGERS
Single-pole and double-pole
LSW LSF
LSE LSG
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Mounting Dimensions (For reference only)
A62 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
WOBBLE LEVERS
LSJ Plastic LSJ — Stainless steel
spring wire
LSJ Cable LSK Cat whisker* LSK Coil spring
* Also available with 71⁄2N actuator.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
Mounting Dimensions (For reference only)
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A63
CONVERSION BASES
SINGLE-POLE TOP PLUNGER
LSZ4003
SINGLE-POLE SIDE ROTARY DOUBLE-POLE SIDE ROTARY
LSZ4003 LSZ4004
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches HDLS Series
LS/200LS Cross-Reference
A64 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
The following cross-reference between
compact LS/plug-in 200LS switches and
HDLS switches applies to style, but not necessarily operating characteristics. When replacing LS/200LS with HDLS switches, the
new characteristics should be considered.
The HDLS requires an adapter plate to interchange with 200LS (see page A41).
NON PLUG-IN
LS HDLS (Consisting Of)
1LS1 LSA3K-1D (LSA3K + LSZ51D)
1LS1-L LSA3K-1D (LSA3K + LSZ51D)
1LS1-N LSA3K-1C (LSA3K1 + LSZ51C)
1LS1-NA LSA3K1-1C (LSA3K1 + LSZ51C)
1LS2 LSA3K —
1LS3 LSA3K-2C (LSA3K + LSZ52C)
1LS3-L LSA3K-2C (LSA3K + LSZ52C)
1LS5 LSR3K-1C (LSR3K + LSZ51C)
1LS6 LSR3K-1D (LSR3K + LSZ51D)
1LS9 LSP3K —
1LS10 LSR3K-4M (LSR3K + LSZ54M)
1LS10-L LSR3K-4M (LSR3K + LSZ54M)
1LS19 LSR3K-1D (LSP3K + LSZ51D)
1LS23 LSR3K —
1LS27 LSP3K5 —
1LS34 LSR3K-1C (LSR3K + LSZ51C)
1LS47 LSH3K-4M (LSH3K + LSZ54M)
1LS58 LSP3K-2C (LSP3K + LSZ52C)
1LS59 LSH3K-2C (LSH3K + LSZ52C)
1LS128 LSA3K-2K (LSA3K + LSZ52K)
1LS131 LSH3K-1D (LSH3K + LSZ51D)
1LS139 LSR3K-4M (LSR3K + LSZ54M)
1LS145 LSH3K-2M (LSH3K + LSZ52M)
1LS156 LSA3K-1C (LSA3K + LSZ51C)
1LS165-L LSA3K4-2C (LSA3K4 + LSZ52C)
1LS212 LSH3K —
1LS213 LSH3K —
2LS1 LSC3K —
2LS1-L LSC3K —
2LS7 LSC3K —
PLUG-IN
200LS* HDLS (Consisting Of)
201LS1 LSA1A-1D (LSA1A + LSZ51D)
201LS1-N LSA1A1-1C (LSA1A1 + LSZ51C)
201LS2 LSA1A —
201LS3 LSA1A-2C (LSA1A + LSZ52C)
201LS6 LSR1A-1D (LSR1A + LSZ51D)
201LS9 LSP1A —
201LS10 LSR1A-4M (LSR1A + LSZ54M)
201LS19 LSP1A-1D (LSP1A + LSZ51D)
201LS23 LSR1A —
201LS47 LSH1A-4M (LSH1A + LSZ54M)
201LS143 LSA1A-2D (LSA1A + LSZ52D)
201LS501 LSA5A-1D (LSA5A + LSZ51D)
201LS501-A1 LSA8A-1D (LSA8A + LSZ51D)
201LS502 LSA5A —
201LS503 LSA5A-2C (LSA5A + LSZ52C)
201LS503-A1 LSA8A-2C (LSA8A + LSZ52C)
201LS510 LSR5A-4M (LSR5A + LSZ54M)
202LS1 LSC1A —
202LS7 LSC1A —
202LS8 — —
* Require terminal block (18PA1 for 200 series, 18PA3 for 300 series), which
must be ordered separately.
LS HDLS (Consisting Of)
3LS1 LSF3K —
3LS1-L LSF3K —
3LS5 LSF3K4 —
4LS1 LSE3K —
4LS1-L LSE3K —
5LS1 LSD3K —
5LS1-L LSD3K —
5LS6 LSD3K6 —
5LS6-L LSD3K6 —
5LS7 LSD3K6 —
5LS8 LSD3K —
6LS1 LSN3K-3B (LSN3K + LSZ53B)
6LS1-L — —
6LS2 LSN3K —
6LS2-L LSN3K —
6LS3 LSN3K-3S (LSN3K + LSZ53S)
8LS1 LSJ3K-7N
8LS1-L LSJ3K-7N
8LS4 LSK3K-8B
8LS125 LSK3K-8B
11LS1 LSA7L-1D (LSA7L + LSZ51D)
11LS2 LSA7L —
11LS3 LSA7L-2C (LSA7L + LSZ52C)
11LS10 LSR7L-4M (LSR7L + LSZ54M)
11LS156 LSA7L-1D (LSA7L + LSZ51D)
12LS1 LSC7L —
13LS1 LSF7L —
14LS1 LSE7L —
14LS3 LSE7L5 —
15LS1 LSD7L —
15LS8 LSD7L —
200LS/300LS* HDLS (Consisting Of)
203LS1 LSF1A —
203LS501 LSF5A —
204LS1 LSE1A —
204LS501 LSE5A —
205LS1 LSD1A —
205LS7 LSD1A3 —
205LS8 LSD1A —
205LS501 LSD5A —
206LS1 LSN1A-3B (LSN1A + LSZ53B)
206LS2 LSN1A —
208LS1 LSJ1A-7N —
208LS125 LSK1A-8B
208LS501 LSJ5A-7N
208LS525 LSK5A-8B
301LS1 LSM2D-1D (LSM2D + LSZ51D)
301LS2 LSM2D —
301LS3 LSM2D-2C (LSM2D + LSZ52C)
301LS5 LSM2D-4N (LSM2D + LSZ54N)
301LS8 LSA2B-1D (LSA2B + LSZ51D)
301LS28 LSA2B —
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches CLS Series
Momentary Cable Pull Limit Switches: For Signaling Applications
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A65
MOMENTARY (CONTACT SWITCH) OPERATING HEAD
Momentary CLS Series Cable Pull Limit Switches are designed for signaling applications;
they are not to be used as emergency stop devices. (For emergency stop applications, see
the Maintained Cable Pull Limit Switches in the Safety Products catalog.)
When using direct acting contacts, Momentary Cable Pull Limit Switches provide a means to
manually force disconnection of a normally closed control circuit by pulling on an attached
cable. Momentary switches cause contact transfer if the cable is manually pulled and held.
When the cable is released, switch contacts return to their original state. Momentary
switches have either direct-acting contacts or snap-action contacts.
Cable length may be up to 200 ft. in a straight line for Single Head switches, and up to 400 ft.
(200 ft. in each direction) for Duplex Head switches.
TYPICAL DUPLEX HEAD SWITCH INSTALLATION
FEATURES
1 Offered in Single Head and Duplex
Head versions
1 Optional direct acting contacts enhance
reliability
1 Duplex Head switches cover up to 400
ft. cable spans (200 ft. in each direction)
1 Single Head switches have one normally
open auxiliary contact, while Duplex
Head switches have up to three
normally open and two normally closed
auxiliary contacts
1 Four conduit opening thread size
options: 1/2-14 NPT, 20mm, PF1/2 and
PG13.5
1 Compact size of Single Head switches
fits into tight spaces
1 Sealed to NEMA 1, 3, 4 and 13
1 Smart Distributed System output
available on Duplex version for
monitoring only
1 UL listed
1 CSA certified
1 CE certified
1 Temperature range: –1° to 70°C (30° to
158°F)
1 Available with indicators
1 Duplex versions available with high
visibility pilot light
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
1 Conveyors
1 Packaging machinery
1 Assembly lines
1 Process equipment
1 Transfer lines
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches CLS Series
Momentary Cable Pull Limit Switches: For Signaling Applications
A66 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
TECHNICAL DATA CLS SERIES SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical
Rate thermal current Ith = 10 A
Rate insulation voltage Ui = 660 VAC/660 VDC
Impulse voltage Uimp = 2.5 kV
Contact resistance < 25 milliohms
Operating rating AC15 U = 600 V: I = 1.2 A
U = 240 V: I = 3 A
U = 120 V: I = 6 A
DC13 U = 250 V: I = 0.27 A
U = 24 V: I = 2.8 A
UL/CSA A600/Q300
Mechanical
Protection class NEMA 1, 3, 4 and 13
Mechanical life 105 operations maximum
Temperature Range –1° to 70°C (30° to 158°F)
Terminal identification Numbering to EN50013
Head/housing material Zinc die cast
CABLE PULL SWITCH
CHARACTERISTICS
Momentary Cable Pull Limit Switches are
offered with a black operating head and a
blue body. There is a choice of four different
conduit openings: 1/2-14 NPT, 20mm, PF
1/2, and PG13.5. Duplex switches have 3
standard conduit openings with two conduit
plugs provided.
All switches come with a 1NO auxiliary contact as standard.
An additional auxiliary switch is also available in the Duplex. This auxiliary switch may
be configured as 1NO - 1NC direct acting,
2NO - 2NC snap action (monitoring only) or
1NO - 1NC with Smart Distributed System
output (monitoring only).
Neon and LED indicators are available. A
6 watt incandescent pilot light is available
on the Duplex for high visibility at long
distances.
SMART DISTRIBUTED SYSTEM OUTPUT
VERSION
The Smart Distributed System Output Version provides Smart Distributed System
compatible switch status messaging. The
primary contact block (NC) must be wired to
the control current. The auxiliary contact
block has been replaced with the Smart
Distributed System circuitry.
Snap action contact blocks and the Smart
Distributed Output Version should be used
for monitoring only. These types of switches
should not be used in control circuits.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches CLS Series
Momentary Cable Pull Limit Switches: For Signaling Applications
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A67
SINGLE HEAD CLS ORDER GUIDE
CLS –
BODY CODE MODIFICATION CODES
A BLUE BODY – PG13.5 1 HEAD ASSEMBLED WITH ACTUATOR TO THE LEFT
B BLUE BODY – 1/2 NPT 2 HEAD ASSEMBLED WITH ACTUATOR TO THE FRONT
C BLUE BODY – 20MM 3 HEAD ASSEMBLED WITH ACTUATOR TO THE
MOUNTING SURFACED BLUE BODY – PF1/2
BASIC SWITCH CODE HEAD CODES
3 1NO-1NC SNAP ACTION (Monitoring Only) B MOMENTARY
4 1NO-1NC DIRECT ACTING
5 1NO-1NC DIRECT ACTING 240V NEON INDICATOR
6 1NO-1NC DIRECT ACTING 120V NEON INDICATOR
7 1NO-1NC DIRECT ACTING 24V LED INDICATOR
Notes:
1 Leave the MODIFICATION CODE blank if a modification is not required.
1 Standard head orientation is with actuator to the right.
1 Unit may be field modified.
EXAMPLE CATALOG LISTING
Catalog Listing Description
CLSD4B-1 Single Head Cable Pull Limit Switch, Blue Body – PF 1/2, 1NO - 1NC
Direct Acting, Momentary, Head assembled with actuator to the left
DUPLEX HEAD 2CLS ORDER GUIDE
2CLS –
BODY CODE MODIFICATION CODES
A BLUE BODY – PG13.5
B BLUE BODY – 1/2 NPT
C BLUE BODY – 20MM
D BLUE BODY – PF1/2
(See chart below for numbered
modification codes.)
PRIMARY BASIC SWITCH CODE – LEFT
1 1NO – 1NC DIRECT ACTING
OPERATING HEAD
B MOMENTARY, BOTH SIDES
INDICATOR – PILOT LIGHT CODE
A 120V – 6W RED PILOT LIGHT
B 120V NEON INDICATOR
C 240V NEON INDICATOR
D 24V LED INDICATOR
AUXILIARY BASIC SWITCH CODE – RIGHT
1 1NO – 1NC DIRECT ACTING
3 2NO – 2NC (DPDT) SNAP ACTION (Monitoring Only)
4 1NO – 1NC WITH SDS OUTPUT (Monitoring Only)
9 NO SWITCH
Notes:
1 No numbered modification code indicates both heads oriented to side (Duplex Head).
1 Standard Conduit openings are left, center, and right with two conduit plugs furnished.
1 Leave the INDICATOR – PILOT LIGHT CODE blank if a pilot light is not required.
1 Leave the HEAD ORIENTATION NUMBERED MODIFICATION CODE blank if not required. Do not enter zero.
EXAMPLE CATALOG LISTING
Catalog Listing Description
2CLSB1B1-3 Duplex Head Cable Limit Switch, Blue Body – 1/2 NPT, 1NO – 1NC
Direct Acting, Momentary – Both Sides, 1NO – 1NC Direct Acting, No
Pilot Light, Left Head Front – Right Head Side
HEAD ORIENTATION
NUMBERED MOD CODES
MOD CODE LEFT HEAD RIGHT HEAD
1 FRONT FRONT
2 FRONT REAR
3 FRONT SIDE
4 REAR FRONT
5 REAR REAR
6 REAR SIDE
7 SIDE FRONT
8 SIDE REAR
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches CLS Series
Momentary Cable Pull Limit Switches: For Signaling Applications
A68 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
(For reference only) Courtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches CLS Series
Momentary Cable Pull Limit Switches: For Signaling Applications
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A69
INSTALLATION HARDWARE
1 Aircraft cable precut to 25, 50, 100, 150
and 200 feet lengths
1 Lockout attachment
1 End springs for long cable spans to
compensate for temperature variations
1 Installation hardware kit supports cable
installations of 25 ft. and 50 ft.
INSTALLATION HARDWARE ORDER GUIDE
Catalog Listings Description
CLSZC1 25 ft. Red Aircraft Cable, finished cable dia. 0.187 in
CLSZC2 50 ft. Red Aircraft Cable, finished cable dia. 0.187 in
CLSZC3 100 ft. Red Aircraft Cable, finished cable dia. 0.187 in
CLSZC4 150 ft. Red Aircraft Cable, finished cable dia. 0.187 in
CLSZC5 200 ft. Red Aircraft Cable, finished cable dia. 0.187 in
CLSZ1S End Spring
CLSZ00 Installation Kit includes: 4 thimbles, 8 wire rope clamps, 1 turnbuckle (w/lock nuts), 9 eyebolts (w/hardware),
1 endspring, 1 conduit fitting
Notes:
1. Eyebolts should be spaced 1.8 to 2.4 m (6 to 8 ft.) apart.
2. One used for each 7.5 m (25 ft.) of cable span.
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches LS/200LS Series
Compact Limit Switches
A70 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
FEATURES
1 Mode of operation is field adjustable.
1 NEMA 1, 3, 4, 6 and 13.
1 Wide choice of heads and actuators.
1 Variety of operating characteristics.
1 Optional indicator light.
1 Captive screws.
1 UL Recognized, file #E12252
1 CSA Certified, file #LR57325
FIELD ADJUSTABLE
Rotary motion roller lever and rod actuators
are adjustable through 360°. They may be
set for operation clockwise, counter-clockwise, or in both directions.
Operating heads may be positioned in any
of four 90° positions.
UL/CSA LS SWITCHES
Several UL recognized and CSA certified LS
compact limit switches are in the order
guides.
Other listings can be furnished in the UL
version. Contact the 800 number for information.
For rapid response – off the shelf service,
all bold face listings are normally stocked
items.
Compact LS and plug-in 200LS limit switches have a long record of successful performance in industrial applications.
The LS fits in many places too small for any
other fully adjustable limit switch.
The 200LS switches are the original plug-in
concept for reducing downtime by making
changeover simple and fast.
CIRCUITRY
Two-circuit
Double-break
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
A 10 amps, 120, 240 or 480 VAC;
1⁄3 hp, 120 VAC; 3⁄4 hp, 240 VAC;
0.8 amp, 115 VDC**; 0.4 amp, 230 VDC;**
0.1 amp, 550 VDC;**
Pilot Duty, 600 VAC max.
APPLICATION NOTE:
Silver Cadmium Oxide Contacts –
Designed for use with inductive loads
such as relays, contactors, motors and
solenoids. Honeywell MICRO SWITCH
does not recommend the use of silver
cadmium oxide switch contacts in nonarcing loads. Non-arcing loads are generally loads less than 12 volts and/or 0.5
amp.
B 10 amps, 120, 240 or 480 VAC;
1⁄4 hp, 120 VAC; 1⁄2 hp, 240 VAC.
Pilot Duty, 600 VAC max.
C 10 amps, 120 VAC;
1⁄3 hp, 120 VAC.
D 10 amps, 120, 240, 480 VAC;
1⁄4 hp, 120 VAC; 1⁄2 hp, 240 VAC;
0.8 amp, 115 VDC**; 0.4 amp, 230 VDC**;
0.1 amp, 550 VDC**;
Pilot Duty, 600 VAC max.
E 10 amps, 120, 240 or 480 VAC;
1⁄3 hp, 120 VAC; 3⁄4 hp, 240 VAC.
Pilot Duty, 600 VAC max.
F UL Rating:
10 amps, 125, 250, or 480 VAC; 1⁄3 hp,
125 VAC; 3⁄4 hp, 250 VAC;
0.8 amp, 125 VDC**; 0.4 amp, 250 VDC**
Fine Silver Contacts
G UL Rating:
10 amps, 125, 250 or 480 VAC;
1⁄4 hp, 125 VAC; 1⁄2 hp, 250 VAC;
0.8 amp, 125 VDC**; 0.4 amp, 250 VDC**
** Resistive Rating
NOTE: The terminals of two-circuit double-break switches must be wired to equal voltage sources and
the same polarity. The loads should be on the same side of the line.
ROLLER LEVER ROTARY ACTUATED SWITCHES
(To order switches and levers separately,
refer to pages A73 and A74 or A37 and A38.)
Compact Plug-in*
ORDER GUIDE
Momentary action. Steel rollers.
Catalog Listing O.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
Description Rating Compact Plug-in max. max. min. max.
Standard A 1LS1 201LS1* 13,3 N 20° 30° 12°
3 lb.
20° Pretravel UL/CSA F 1LS1-L — 13,3 N 20° 30° 12°
3 lb.
Low Pretravel 5° B 1LS19 201LS19* 13,3 N 5° 30° 4°
3 lb.
Low Operating Force B 1LS131 — 5,0 N 5° 30° 4°
5° Pretravel 18 oz.
Standard with indicator C 1LS501 201LS501* 13,3 N 20° 30° 12°
light 120 VAC only 3 lb.
Low Operating Force A 1LS6 201LS6* 5,0 N 20° 30° 12°
18 oz.
Cavity Mount version A 7LS1 — 13,3 N 20° 30° 12°
of 1LS1 3 lb.
*Require Terminal Block (18PA1 for 200LS switches)
which must be ordered separately. Unless damaged,
it is not necessary to replace terminal block when
replacing switch.
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; P.T. —
Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential
Travel.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches LS/200LS Series
Compact Limit Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A71
MAINTAINED CONTACT YOKE ROLLER LEVER ROTARY ACTUATED SWITCHES
Compact
ORDER GUIDE
Maintained contact
Electrical Catalog ListingRating O.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
Description Page A70 Compact Plug-in max. max. min. max.
Steel rollers on op- A 6LS1 206LS1* 8,9 N 55° 35° 20°
posite sides of arm 2 lb.
Nylon rollers on A 6LS3 — 8,9 N 55° 35° 20°
same side of arm 2 lb.
ADJUSTABLE LENGTH ROLLER LEVER ROTARY ACTUATED SWITCHES
Compact
ORDER GUIDE
Length adjustable 1.2 to 3.5 in. (30.6 to 88.9 mm)
Momentary action. Nylon rollers.
Electrical Catalog ListingRating O.F.† P.T. O.T. D.T.
Description Page A70 Compact Plug-in max. max. min. max.
Standard Pretravel A 1LS3 201LS3* 13,3 N 20° 30° 12°
20° 3 lb.
UL/CSA F 1LS3-L —
Low pretravel 5° B 1LS58 — 13,3 N 5° 30° 4°
3 lb.
Low pretravel 5° B 1LS59 — 5,0 N 5° 30° 4°
and low operating 18 oz.
force
†at 1.5N length
LOW FORCE ROD ROTARY ACTUATED SWITCHES
Compact
ORDER GUIDE
Momentary action, 5-inch (127mm) aluminum rod.
Electrical Catalog ListingRating O.F.** P.T. O.T. D.T.
Description Page A70 Compact Plug-in max. max. min. max.
Standard Pretravel A 1LS10 201LS10* 1,39 N 20° 30° 12°
20° 5 oz.
UL/CSA F 1LS10-L —
Low pretravel 5° B 1LS47 201LS47* 1,39 N 5° 30° 4°
5 oz.
Low pretravel 5° B 1LS53 201LS51* 0,83 N 5° 30° 4°
and low operating 3 oz.
force
**Rod fully extended
WOBBLE LEVER ACTUATED
SWITCHES
1
2
3
4
ORDER GUIDE
Momentary action.
Electrical Catalog ListingRating O.F. P.T.
Description Page A70 Compact Plug-in max. max.
Flexible cable actuator1 D 8LS1 208LS1* 1,39 N 28,6
5 oz. 1.125
UL/CSA G 8LS1-L — 1,39 N 28,6
5 oz. 1.125
Combination spring-rod2 D 8LS3 208LS3* 1,39 N 28,6
5 oz. 1.125
Low force steel wire3 D 8LS125 208LS125* 0,28 N 63,5
1 oz. 2.5
Coil spring4 D 8LS152 208LS152* 1,39 N 28,6
Stainless steel 5 oz. 1.125
*Require Terminal Block (18PA1 for 200LS Switches) which must be ordered separately. Unless damaged, it is
not necessary to replace terminal block when replacing switch.
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches LS/200LS Series
Compact Limit Switches
A72 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
TOP PLUNGER ACTUATED SWITCHES
Compact
ORDER GUIDE
Momentary action.
O.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
Electrical max. max. min. max.
Rating Catalog Listing N mm mm mm
Description Page A70 Compact Plug-in lb. in. in. in.
Standard top plunger A 2LS1 202LS1* 31,1 1,65 6,35 0,51
7 .065 .250 .020
UL/CSA F 2LS1-L — 31,1 1,65 6,35 0,51
7 .065 .250 .020
Low operating force E 2LS111 202LS111* 10 1,65 5,56 0,23
top plunger 36 oz. .065 .219 .009
TOP ROLLER PLUNGER ACTUATED SWITCHES
Plug-in*
ORDER GUIDE
Momentary action.
O.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
Electrical max. max. min. max.
Rating Catalog Listing N mm mm mm
Description Page A70 Compact Plug-in lb. in. in. in.
Standard top roller A 5LS1 205LS1* 31,1 1,65 5,56 0,51
Plunger 7 .065 .219 .020
Steel roller UL/CSA F 5LS1-L — 31,1 1,65 5,56 0,51
7 .065 .219 .020
SIDE PLUNGER ACTUATED SWITCHES
Compact
ORDER GUIDE
Momentary action. Assembled with plunger facing front (label side).
O.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
Electrical max. max. min. max.
Rating Catalog Listing N mm mm mm
Description Page A70 Compact Plug-in lb. in. in. in.
Standard side roller A 4LS1 204LS1* 40 2,77 6,35 1,02
9 .109 .250 .040
SIDE ROLLER PLUNGER ACTUATED SWITCHES
Plug-in*
Roller may be turned in any position through 360°.
ORDER GUIDE
Momentary action. Assembled with plunger facing front (label side).
O.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
Electrical max. max. min. max.
Rating Catalog Listing N mm mm mm
Description Page A70 Compact Plug-in lb. in. in. in.
Standard side roller A 3LS1 203LS1* 40 2,77 5,56 1,02
plunger 9 .109 .219 .040
Steel Roller
* Require Terminal Block (18PA1 for 200LS Switches)
which must be ordered separately. Unless damaged,
it is not necessary to replace terminal block when
replacing switch.
N J Newton
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; P.T. —
Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential
Travel.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches LS/200LS Series
Compact Limit Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A73
ROTARY ACTUATED SWITCHES — WITHOUT LEVERS
The following compact LS and plug-in
200LS limit switches are sold without actuating levers. Levers are ordered separately
from the order guide below and on the facing page.
Plug-in*
Compact
ORDER GUIDE
Momentary action, except where noted.
Electrical
Rating Catalog Listing O.Tq. P.T. O.T. D.T.
Description Page A70 Compact Plug-in max. max. min. max.
Standard 20N A 1LS2 201LS2* 0,51 Nm 20° 30° 12°
pretravel 4.5 in.
lb.
UL/CSA F 1LS2-L — 0,51 Nm 20° 30° 12°
4.5 in.
lb.
Low pretravel 5° B 1LS9 201LS9* 0,51 Nm 5° 30° 4°
4.5 in.
lb.
Standard A 1LS23 201LS23* 0,21 Nm 20° 30° 12°
pretravel 20° 30 in.
Low operating force oz.
Low pretravel 5° B 1LS56 201LS56* 0,11 Nm 5° 30° 4°
Low operating 15 in.
force oz.
Maintained1 A 6LS2 206LS2* 0,34 Nm 55° 35° 20°
Contact 3 in. lb.
UL/CSA F 6LS2-L — 0,34 Nm 55° 35° 20°
3 in. lb.
* Require Terminal Block (18PA1 for 200LS Switches).
Note 1 — Yoke lever actuators normally used.
Characteristics:
O.Tq. — Operating Torque; P.T. — Pretravel; O.T.
— Overtravel; D.T. — Differential Travel
AUXILIARY ROTARY LEVERS
ORDER GUIDE
Type Catalog Listing
Roller arm, with nylon,
steel, or ball bearing roller. Nylon 6PA71
Steel 6PA121
Ball bearing 6PA144
Yoke roller lever with nylon
or steel rollers. Steel 6PA80
Rollers on same side. Steel 6PA82
Nylon 6PA102
60mm radius levers Part # PA-J11
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches LS/200LS Series
Compact Limit Switches
A74 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
AUXILIARY ROTARY LEVERS
ORDER GUIDE
Type Catalog Listing
Adjustable aluminum rod. LSZ54M
Adjustable stainless steel
rod. 6PA63
Adjustable spring rod. 6PA69
Hand operated aluminum
button on stainless steel
lever. 6PA57
Adjustable roller arm with
steel or nylon rollers.
.75 dia. roller Steel LSZ52D
.75 dia. roller Nylon LSZ52C
1.00 dia. roller Nylon LSZ52J
1.50 dia. roller Nylon LSZ52K
2.00 dia. lever Nylon LSZ52M
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches LS/200LS Series
Replacement Parts
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A75
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Except where noted, all operating heads are furnished with actuators.
Contact BlockCatalog Operating Actuator
Listing Compact Plug-In Head Only
1LS1-L 2MN1-L 2MN6 9PA15 6PA121
1LS1 2MN1
201LS1
1LS2-L 2MN1-L 2MN6 9PA16† Note 1
1LS2 2MN1
201LS2
1LS3-L 2MN1-L 2MN6 9PA16† LSZ52C
1LS3 2MN1
201LS3
1LS6 2MN1 2MN6 9PA50 6PA121
201LS6
1LS9 2MN8 2MN13 9PA16† Note 1
201LS9
1LS10-L 2MN1-L 2MN6 9PA40 6PA43
1LS10 2MN1
201LS10
1LS19 2MN8 2MN13 9PA15 6PA121
201LS19
1LS23 2MN1 2MN6 9PA68† Note 2
201LS23
1LS47 2MN8 2MN13 9PA40 6PA43
201LS47
1LS53 2MN8 2MN13 9PA48 6PA43
201LS51
1LS56 2MN8 2MN13 9PA74† Note 2
201LS56
1LS58 2MN8 — 9PA16† LSZ52C
1LS131 2MN8 — 9PA50 6PA121
1LS501 2MN1 2MN14 9PA15 6PA121
201LS501
†Furnished without actuator.
Note 1—Any auxiliary actuator shown can be used with these listings.
Note 2—6PA43, 6PA63, 6PA71 or 6PA121 auxiliary actuators only are
recommended for these listings.
Note 3—Yoke lever actuators normally used.
CONDUIT SEALING PACKETS
Packet Cable O.D. Inches
2PA6 .400 N–.435 N
2PA16 .435 N–.470 N
2PA1 .530 N–.570 N
(See page A49 for description)
Contact BlockCatalog Operating Actuator
Listing Compact Plug-In Head Only
2LS1-L 2MN1-L 2MN6 9PA32 None
2LS1 2MN1
202LS1
2LS111 2MN3 2MN7 9PA71 None
202LS111
3LS1 2MN11 2MN9 9PA45 None
203LS1
4LS1 2MN11 2MN9 9PA44 None
204LS1
5LS1-L 2MN1-L 2MN6 9PA33 None
5LS1 2MN1
205LS1
6LS1 2MN1 2MN6 9PA46 6PA80
206LS1
6LS2-L 2MN1-L 2MN6 9PA47† Note 3
6LS2 2MN1
206LS2
6LS3 2MN1 — 9PA47† 6PA102
7LS1 2MN1 — 9PA15 6PA121
8LS1-L 2MN11-L 2MN9 9PA58 None
8LS1 2MN11
208LS1
8LS3 2MN1 2MN6 9PA49 None
208LS3
8LS125 2MN11 2MN9 9PA54 None
208LS125
8LS152 2MN1 2MN6 9PA42 None
208LS152
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches LS/200LS Series
Mounting Dimensions (For reference only)
A76 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
ROLLER LEVER
Compact
Plug-in
Cavity mount
SWITCH WITHOUT LEVER
Compact
Plug-In
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches LS/200LS Series
Mounting Dimensions (For reference only)
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A77
ADJUSTABLE LENGTH ROLLER LEVER
Compact
Plug-in
YOKE ROLLER LEVER
Compact
Plug-in
ADJUSTABLE LENGTH ROD
Compact
Plug-in
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches LS/200LS Series
Mounting Dimensions (For reference only)
A78 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
TOP ROLLER PLUNGER
Compact
Plug-in
SIDE ROLLER PLUNGER
Compact
Plug-in
TOP PLUNGER
Compact
Plug-in
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches LS/200LS Series
Mounting Dimensions (For reference only)
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A79
SIDE PLUNGER
Compact Plug-In
WOBBLE LEVER
Compact (spring-rod) Plug-in (wire)
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches LS Series
International Compact Limit Switches
A80 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
FEATURES
1 Ideal source of replacement parts for
imported machine tools or transplant
factories.
1 Made in Honeywell factories in Europe
and Japan.
1 Mode of operation is field adjustable
1 NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4, 6, 12, and 13
1 Optional indicator light with Neon lamp
or LED
1 Rugged cast aluminum housing
1 Temperature range –20° to 70°C (–2° to
158°F)
1 Gold plated contacts available
CIRCUITRY
10A – 125, 250, 480 VAC
0.8A – 125 VDC, 0.4A – 250 VDC
1⁄2 HP – 125 VDC, 1 HP – 250 VAC
Two-Circuit Double-Break
INTERNATIONAL LISTINGS ORDER GUIDE
Honeywell O.F. P.T. O.T. D.T
Description Europe Yamatake max. max. max. max.
Standard ILS1-4PG ILS1-J 1360g 20° 30° 12°
Low Pretravel ILS19-4PG ILS19-J 1360g 7° 30° 3°
HIGH OVERTRAVEL
SWITCH WITH ACTUATOR
ORDER GUIDE
Characteristics: O.F. – Operating Force; P.T. – Pretravel;
O.T. – Overtravel; D.T. – Differential Travel
Catalog O.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
Description Listing max. max. min. max.
High Overtravel 1LS-J50 3.43 kg-cm 30° 60° 15°
High Overtravel 1LS-J500 3.43 kg-cm 20° 55° 12°
High Overtravel Low
Pretravel
1LS-J550 3.43 kg-cm 10° 62° 5°
TOP BALL PLUNGER ORDER GUIDE
Catalog O.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
Description Listing max. max. min. max.
Top Ball Plunger 2LS-J6 2,720 g 1.7mm 4.0mm 0.15mm
Replacement Head 9PA-J66
Contact Block 2MN11-J
OPTIONAL INDICATOR
Limit switch cover with indicator module can
be ordered separately or as a complete
switch by adding ‘‘E’’, ‘‘EC’’ or ‘‘E5’’ to catalog listings (ex. 1LS1-JE).
ORDER GUIDE
Catalog Additional Letter
Voltage Listing for Complete Switch
100/200 VAC Neon LS-29PA1 E ex. 1LS1-JE
24 VAC/DC LED LS-29PA5 E5 ex. 1LS1-JE5
12 to 125 VAC/DC LED LS-29PAEC EC ex. 1LS1-JEC
Note: The lamp module on back of cover can be easily rotated to monitor either the N.O. or the N.C.
contacts.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches LS Series
International Compact Limit Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A81
DOUBLE SEAL TYPE
1 Housing unit and switching unit are
sealed
1 Switching unit plunger has a boot seal,
and epoxy-sealed seams
SWITCH UNIT
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
(For reference only)
ORDER GUIDE
Available Catalog Listing
1LS1-JS Standard roller lever - side rotary
1LS19-JS Low pretravel side rotary roller lever
1LS-J500S High overtravel side rotary roller lever
1LS-J550S High overtravel - low pretravel side rotary
5LS1-JS Top roller plunger
Conduit Thread
‘‘PG’’ specifies PG 13,5 thread e.g. 1LS1-4PG
‘‘C’’ specifies 20 mm thread e.g. 1LS1-4C
(Minimum order quantities may be required for optional conduit threads.)
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches LD Series
Multiple Plunger Limit Switches
A82 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
FEATURES
1 Ideal source of replacement parts for
imported machine tools or transplant
factories
1 Up to 15A capacity
1 Variety of switch units
1 Roller and chisel plunger are available
1 Operating points are precisely factoryadjusted
1 Easy mounting and wiring
1 NEMA 6, 13 and IEC IP 67 sealing
1 Temperature range –10 to +70°C
(+14 to +158°F)
One LD series multi-plunger limit switch can
replace several individual switches in many
machine tooling applications, and on welding and transfer machines in automobile
plants.
Numerous conduit arrangements are possible, making switch wiring and maintenance simple and inexpensive.
Catalog LDS-5000K LDV-5000 LDZ-5000 LD-Z
Listing Series Series Series Series
Electrical
Specifications
Max. current at
max. voltage
ratings
5A at 125, 250VAC K
series; 0.1A at 125VAC
0.1A at 30VDC
10A at 125,
250VAC
0.5A at 125VDC
0.25A at 250VDC
15A at 125, 250,
480VAC
0.5A at 125VDC
0.25A at 250VDC
15A at 125, 250,
480VAC
0.5A at 125VDC
0.25A at 250VDC
Single Pole Circuitry SPDT SPDT SPDT SPDT
Double Throw
Operating
Characteristics
Plunger Number 2,3,4,5,6,7,8 2,3,4,6,8 2,3,4,6,8,10,12 2
Pitch 8 ± 0.15mm 12 ± 0.2mm 19 ± 0.2mm 18 ± 0.25mm
Type Chisel-shaped Chisel-shaped roller Chisel-shaped roller Roller
O.F. max. – N/lb. 10/2.2 14.74/3.3 19.75/4.4 14.74/3.3
P.T. max. – mm/in. 1.5/0.06 1.5/0.06 1.5/0.06 1.5/0.06
O.T. min. – mm/in. 2/0.99 3/0.12 3/0.12 3/0.12
D.T. – mm/in. 0.2/0.008 max. 0.1–0.32 0.01–0.05 0.01–0.05
0.004–0.013 0.0005–0.002 0.0005–0.002
Characteristics: O.F.—Operating Force; P.T.—Pretravel; O.T.—Overtravel; D.T.—Differential Travel; N—Newtons
ORDER GUIDE
(For identification of existing listings only. Not for generating new listings.)
L D 6 — 5 6 6 6 6
1 1 1 1 1
SWITCHING UNIT
Z: Type BZ basic switch
V: Type V3 basic switch
S: Type SM basic switch
NUMBER OF PLUNGERS
2: 2 plungers
3: 3 plungers
4: 4 plungers
5: 5 plungers (LDS Series
only)
6: 6 plungers
7: 7 plungers (LDS Series
only)
8: 8 plungers
ACTUATOR
0: Chisel Plunger
1: Roller Plunger (Type
LDS is not offered)
NUMBER AND POSITION
OF CONDUIT
0: PF 1/2, 2 at base; Type
LDS is 1 at base
1: PF 3/4, 2 at base (Type
LDZ only)
2: PF 1/2, 2 at side Type
LDS is not offered
CONTACT
MATERIAL:
BLANK:
Silver or silver
alloy contacts
‘‘K’’:
Gold alloy
crosspoint
contacts
L D — Z 6 — 6
1 1 1
SWITCHING UNIT NUMBER OF
PLUNGERS
TYPE OF ROLLERS
Z: Type BZ
basic switch
5: Hardened stainless steel
2: 2 plungers (9.5 dia.×4.5)
55: Stainless steel
(12.7 dia.×4.8)
REPLACEMENT SWITCH UNITS
Switches Replacement
LDS-5000 AS-J212
LDS-5000K AS-J212K
LDZ-5000 AS-J209
LDZ-5000K AS-J209K
LDV-5000 AS-J215
LDV-5000K AS-J215K
REPLACEMENT HEADS – LDZ ONLY
Bevel 9PA-J68
Roller 9PA-J67
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches LD Series
Multiple Plunger Limit Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A83
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
(For reference only)
0.0 mm
0.00 inches
LDS-5000 and LDS-5000K
*NUMBER OF PLUNGERS 2 4 6 8
DIMENSION ‘‘H’’ 50 mm 66 mm 82 mm 98 mm
LDZ-5000
*NUMBER OF PLUNGERS 2 4 6 8
DIMENSION ‘‘H’’ 70 mm 108 mm 146 mm 184 mm
LD-Z
*NUMBER OF PLUNGERS 2 4 6
DIMENSION ‘‘H’’ 75 mm 110 mm 145 mm
LDV-5000
*NUMBER OF PLUNGERS 2 3 4 6
DIMENSION ‘‘H’’ 58 mm 70 mm 82 mm 106 mm
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches SL1 Series
Compact Limit Switches
A84 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
CIRCUITRY AND ELECTRICAL RATING
Listing Rating Contact
SL1-6 5A-125, 250VAC Silver
Single-Pole
SL1-6 K
0.1A-125VAC
Gold Clad Cross PointDouble-Throw 0.1A-30VDC
ORDER GUIDE AND MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
UL/CSA listings available by adding ‘‘2’’ to catalog listing.
Example: SL1-A2
UL Recognized, file #E37559
CSA Certified, file #LR61344, LR21098, LR47132, LR61643
ROLLER PLUNGER
Catalog SL1-A
Listing SL1-AK
O.F. (max.) 1,200 g
R.F. (min.) 500 g
P.T. (max.) 1.5 mm
O.T. (min.) 3 mm
D.T. (max.) 0.1 mm
O.P. 31.4 mm
CROSS ROLLER PLUNGER
Catalog SL1-D
Listing SL1-DK
O.F. (max.) 1,200 g
R.F. (min.) 500 g
P.T. (max.) 1.5 mm
O.T. (min.) 3 mm
D.T. (max.) 0.1 mm
O.P. 31.4 mm
Characteristics: O.F. - Operating Force; R.F. - Release Force; P.T. - Pretravel; O.T. - Overtravel; D.T. - Differential Travel; N - Newtons
FEATURES
1 Ideal source of replacement parts for
imported machine tools or transplant
factories
1 NEMA 3,4, 13 and IEC IP 67 sealing
1 Smaller size saves space
1 Rugged Zinc diecast housing
1 Wide product selection to suit many
applications
1 Snap-in terminal enclosure makes
mounting and wiring easy
1 Temperature ranges: Standard –10 to
+70°C (14 to 158°F); Low temp. with
roller lever –40 to +70°C (–40 to 158°F);
Low temp. with roller plunger –50 to
70°C (–60 to +158°F)
SL1 series compact limit switches are
sealed, sensitive, and have a long life. The
compact size makes them suitable for the
total miniaturization of machinery or equipment.
Versions are available with: gold-clad crosspoint contacts, prewiring, lamp indications,
seal boots with roller plungers, and a variety
of actuating possibilities.
For rapid response – off the shelf service,
all bold face listings are normally stocked
items.
Note: Conduit will seal to cable diameters
from 5.8mm to 9.6mm.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches SL1 Series
Compact Limit Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A85
STRAIGHT PLUNGER
Catalog SL1-H
Listing SL1-HK
O.F. (max.) 1,200 g
R.F. (min.) 500 g
P.T. (max.) 1.5 mm
O.T. (min.) 3 mm
D.T. (max.) 0.1 mm
O.P. 25.4 mm
ROLLER LEVER
Catalog SL1-P
Listing SL1-PK
O.F. (max.) 400 g
R.F. (min.) 80 g
P.T. (max.) 2 mm
O.T. (min.) 4 mm
D.T. (max.) 0.3 mm
O.P. 23.1 mm
ROLLER PLUNGER
WITH SEAL BOOT
Catalog SL1-B
Listing SL1-BK
O.F. (max.) 1,200 g
R.F. (min.) 500 g
P.T. (max.) 1.5 mm
O.T. (min.) 3 mm
D.T. (max.) 0.1 mm
O.P. 41.4 mm
LONG ROLLER PLUNGER
SL1-E
SL1-EK
Catalog
Listing
O.F. (max.) 1,200g
R.F. (min.) 500g
P.T. (max.) 1.5 mm
O.T. (min.) 3 mm
D.T. (max.) 0.1 mm
O.P. 41,4 mm
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches SL1 Series
Compact Limit Switches
A86 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
LONG CROSS ROLLER
PLUNGER
SL1-K
SL1-KK
Catalog
Listing
O.F. (max.) 1,200g
R.F. (min.) 500g
P.T. (max.) 1.5mm
O.T. (min.) 3mm
D.T. (max.) 0.1mm
O.P. 41,4mm
COMPACT LIMIT SWITCHES WITH LAMP INDICATION
FEATURES
1 Available with neon lamp for 100-250
VAC. Available with LED lamp for 24
VDC
1 Lamp indication clearly visible from
most angles through the rugged
transparent nylon enclosure
1 Provided with oil resistant vinyl cabtyre
cable
ORDER GUIDE
Specification Catalog Listing Wiring
1 Neon lamp
1 100 to 250 VAC SL1-6 EXG2
1 Silver contact
1 LED lamp
1 24 VDC SL1-6 KFXG2
1 Gold clad
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
(For reference only) Dimensions - mm
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
General Purpose
Compact Limit Switches VL Series
FEATURES
Gold plated silver contacts
Compact design for small
mounting space.
Special design for easy
wiring with ample wiring
space
 Two-circuit double-break
Diecast base and plastic
cover
Standard mounting
dimensions
 Long mechanical life
 5Amp current capacity
Ambient Temp range: -20
to 60 Degrees Celsius [-4 to
140 degrees Fahrenheit]
C-UL, CE approved
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Machine Tools
Material Handling
 Food Processing Machinery
Conveyors
Packaging Machinery
DESCRIPTION
The new economical SZL-VL Series miniature type limit switches are
specially designed for applications of small mounting space. These
miniature switches are ideal for OEM machinery which requires a rugged
and reliable limit switch that is capable of being mounted in space restricted
applications. A wide range of actuators and optional neon lamp indicators
add additional flexibility. A special pre-molded flexible cable gland allows for
fast and simple wiring termination
LIFE CURVE
10
5
4
3
2
1
0.3
0 5 10
CIRCUITRY
Sensing and Control
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
General Purpose
Compact Limit Switches VL Series
SELECTION GUIDE
Features
SZL-VL-A
SZL-VL-B
SZL-VL-C
Actuator Side Rotary - Roller Lever Standard
Side Rotary - Roller Lever
Adjustable
Side Rotary - Rod
Adjustable
Operating
Force (O.F.) 5,88 N max. [1.32 lbs max.]
3,35 N - 7,84 N max. [0.75
lbs - 1.76 lbs max.]
2 N - 7,84 N max. [.45 lbs 1.76 lbs max.]
Release Force
(R.F.) 0,49 N min. [0.11 lbs min.]
0,21 N - 0,49 N min. [0.046
lbs - 0.11 lbs min.]
0,12 N - 0,49 N min. [0.026
lbs - 0.11 lbs min.]
Pretravel (P.T.) 20 ° max. 20 ° max. 20 ° max.
Overtravel
(O.T.) 75 ° min. 75 ° min. 75 ° min.
Differential
Travel (D.T.) 10 ° max. 10 ° max. 10 ° max.
Product Type Minature Limit Switches
Ampere Rating 5.0 A / 0.4 A
Supply Voltage 250 Vac max. / 125 Vdc max.
Termination
Type Cable Gland
Operating
Temperature
Range
-20 °C to 60 °C [-4 °F to140°F]
Vibration 55 Hz at double amplitude of 1.5 mm
Housing
Material Zinc Die-Cast / Plastic
Shock 10 g max.
Circuitry 1NC 1NO SPDT; Double Break
Approvals UL, C-UL, CE
Sealed Industrial
UL File # E150950
Availability North-America; Asia-Pacific
Sealing IP64
Mechanical
Life up to 10 million operations
Series Name VL Series
2 Honeywell  Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
General Purpose
Compact Limit Switches VL Series
SELECTION GUIDE
Features
SZL-VL-D
SZL-VL-E
SZL-VL-F
Actuator Top Plunger Cross Roller Plunger Wobble - Plastic Rod Coil Spring
Operating
Force (O.F.) 8,83 N max. [2 lbs max.] 8,83 N max. [2 lbs max.] 0,88 N max. [0.2 lbs max.]
Release Force
(R.F.) 1,47 N min. [0.33 lbs min.] 1,47 N min. [0.33 lbs min.] Pretravel (P.T.) 1,5 mm max. [0.060 in max.]
1,5 mm max. [0.060 in
max.] 30 mm max. [1.18 in max.]
Overtravel
(O.T.) 4 mm min. [0.158 in min.] 4 mm min. [0.158 in min.] 20 mm min. [0.788 in min.]
Differential
Travel (D.T.)
0,7 mm max. [0.028 in.
max.]
0,7 mm max. [0.028 in.
max.] Product Type Minature Limit Switches
Ampere Rating 5.0 A / 0.4 A
Supply Voltage 250 Vac max. / 125 Vdc max.
Termination
Type Cable Gland
Operating
Temperature
Range
-20 °C to 60 °C [-4 °F to140°F]
Vibration 55 Hz at double amplitude of 1.5 mm
Housing
Material Zinc Die-Cast / Plastic
Shock 10 g max.
Circuitry 1NC 1NO SPDT; Double Break
Approvals UL, C-UL, CE
Sealed Industrial
UL File # E150950
Availability North-America; Asia-Pacific
Sealing IP64
Mechanical
Life up to 10 million operations
Series Name VL Series
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945 Honeywell  Sensing and Control 3
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
General Purpose
Compact Limit Switches VL Series
SELECTION GUIDE
Features
SZL-VL-G
SZL-VL-H
Actuator Wobble - Coil Spring Roller Plunger
Operating
Force (O.F.) 0,88 N max. [0.2 lbs max.] 8,83 N max. [2 lbs max.]
Release Force
(R.F.) - 1,47 N min. [0.33 lbs min.]
Pretravel (P.T.) 30 mm max. [1.18 in max.] 1,5 mm max. [0.060 in max.]
Overtravel
(O.T.) 20 mm min. [0.788 in min.] 4 mm min. [0.158 in min.]
Differential
Travel (D.T.) 0,7 mm max. [0.028 in.
max.]
Product Type Minature Limit Switches
Ampere Rating 5.0 A / 0.4 A
Supply Voltage 250 Vac max. / 125 Vdc max.
Termination
Type Cable Gland
Operating
Temperature
Range
-20 °C to 60 °C [-4 °F to140°F]
Vibration 55 Hz at double amplitude of 1.5 mm
Housing
Material Zinc Die-Cast / Plastic
Shock 10 g max.
Circuitry 1NC 1NO SPDT; Double Break
Approvals UL, C-UL, CE
Sealed Industrial
UL File # E150950
Availability North-America; Asia-Pacific
Sealing IP64
Mechanical
Life up to 10 million operations
Series Name VL Series
4 Honeywell  Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
General Purpose
Compact Limit Switches VL Series
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For Reference Only)
mm in (Roller can be
in any position
(with hexagonal
7 .276 in depth
mounting holes
41.2±.08
36.2±0.8nylon roller
R3
0
M4 arm
56±0.3
21±0.2
28
M3x6
cover screw
M4 arm fixing nut
12.5
.402
18.5
64
2-M5 (P=0.8)
tapped
14
7.5±0.2
15.1
38.1
25
2-M3x23
20.4±0.3
PT 2
0° max
cover screw
(Standard type)
18 dia.x7
thorough 360°)
.827±.008
1.102
2.205±.012
.492
holes)
rotated and locked
1.622±.031
1.425±.031
10.2
.728
.803±.012
2.520
.551
1.5
.984
.594
.295±.008
mounting holes
2-M5 (P=0.8)
tapped
mounting holes
2-4.1 dia.+0.2-0
fixing screw
SZL-VL-A
mounting holes
.161 dia.
+0.008
-0
hexagonal holes
Arm fastening plate
Mounting metal
M4 arm fastening
plate screw with
Adjustable lenght of arm
(30-70)
.402
2.0
(Roller can be rotated
and locked in any
position thorough 360°)
2-M3x23
cover screw
M3x6
cover screw
12.5
56±0.3
21±0.2
28
7 .276 in depth
mounting holes
2-M5 (P=0.8) tapped
18.5
64
14
7.5±0.2
15.1
20.4±0.3
25
(46.4)
PT 20
°max
(Standard type)
1.102
.827±.008
.492
2.205±.012
18 dia.x7 nylon rooler
hexagonal holes
plate screw with
M6 arm fastening
10.2
.728
2.520
.551
.295±.008
(1.827)
.984
.594
.803±.012
2-M5 (P=0.8) tapped
mounting holes.079
mounting holes
2-4.1 dia.
+0.2
0
1.122±.031
1.319±.031
33.5±0.8
1.878±.031
47.7±0.8
42.7±0.8
1.681±.031
28.5±0.8
SZL-VL-B
mounting holes
.161 dia.
+0.008
-0
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945 Honeywell  Sensing and Control 5
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
General Purpose
Compact Limit Switches VL Series
7 .276 in depth
mounting holes
hexagonal holes
.217
36.3±0.8
44.9
(Roller can be rotated
and locked in any
position thorough 360°)
M4 rod fastening plate
screw with hexagonal holes
Rod fastening plate
12.5
56±0.3
21±0.2
28
Adjustable lenght of rod
(30-118)
.402
18.5
64
14
2-M5 (P=0.8) tapped
7.5±0.2
15.1
20.4±0.3
25
Rod mounting metal
M6 mounting rod
fastening screw with
2-M3x23
cover screw
M3x6
cover screw
(44.9)
PT 20°
max
(Standard type)
5.5
2.6 .102 dia. rod
.492
2.205±.012
1.102
.827±.008
1.768
1.429±.031
10.2
.728
2.520
.551
.295±.008
(1.768)
.984
.594
.803±.012
2-M5 (P=0.8) tapped
mounting holes
mounting holes
2-4.1 dia.
+0.2
0
SZL-VL-C
mounting holes
.161 dia.
+0.008
-0
mounting holes
.402
2-M3x23
cover screw
2-4.1 +0.2
mounting holes
2-M5 (P=0.8) tapped
7 .276 in depth
M3x6
cover screw
64
14
7.5±0.2
15.1
25
20.4±0.3
.118
26.5
56±0.3
21±0.2
28
stainless steel plunger
mounting holes
2-M5 (P=0.8) tapped
(Standard type)
7. 276 dia.
dia.
3
1.043
2.205±.012
1.102
.827±.008
10.2
.803±.012
4
2.520
.984
.594
.295±.008
.157
.551
0
PT 1.5 max
SZL-VL-D
.161 +0.008
mounting holes
dia. -0
6 Honeywell  Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
General Purpose
Compact Limit Switches VL Series
.402
M3x6
cover screw
12.5 dia.x3.8
stainless steel roller
2-M3x23
cover screw
21±0.2
28
56±0.3
38
14.8
7.5±0.2
15.1
25
20.4±0.3
.157
64
14
mounting holes
2-M5 (P=0.8) tapped
7 .276 in depth
mounting holes
2-M5 (P=0.8) tapped
(Standard type)
.583
1.496
2.205±.012
.827±.008
1.102
10.2
4
.803±.012
2.520
.551
.295±.008
.984
.594
mounting holes
2-4.1 dia.
+0.2
0
PT 1.5 max
SZL-VL-E
mounting holes
.161 -0 dia.
+0.008
.402
21±0.2
56±0.3
14
64
7.5±0.2
.157
28
20.4±0.3
25
15.1
5.8 dia.
3 dia.
Nylon rod
41.5
100±1.5
2-M3x23
M3x6
cover screw
7 .276 in depth
mounting holes
2-M5 (P=0.8) tapped
PT 50 max
(Standard type)
cover screw
1.634
3.937±.059
2.205±.012
1.102
.827±.008
10.2
.118
.228
.803±.012
4
2.520
.551
.295±.008
.984
.594
2-M5 (P=0.8) tapped
mounting holes
mounting holes
2-4.1 dia.+0.2 0
SZL-VL-F
mounting holes
.161 dia.
+0.008
-0
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945 Honeywell  Sensing and Control 7
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
General Purpose
Compact Limit Switches VL Series
Sensing and Control
Honeywell
11 West Spring Street
Freeport, Illinois 61032
Printed with Soy Ink
on 50% Recycled Paper
002304-2-EN IL50 GLO 901 Printed in USA
www.honeywell.com/sensing
WARRANTY/REMEDY
Honeywell warrants goods of
its manufacture as being free of
defective materials and faulty
workmanship. Contact your
local sales office for warranty
information. If warranted goods
are returned to Honeywell
during the period of coverage,
Honeywell will repair or replace
without charge those items it
finds defective. The foregoing is
Buyer’s sole remedy and is in
lieu of all other warranties,
expressed or implied,
including those of
merchantability and fitness
for a particular purpose.
Specifications may change
without notice. The information
we supply is believed to be
accurate and reliable as of this
printing. However, we assume
no responsibility for its use.
While we provide application
assistance personally, through
our literature and the Honeywell
web site, it is up to the customer
to determine the suitability of the
product in the application.
For application assistance,
current specifications, or name
of the nearest Authorized
Distributor, check the Honeywell
web site or call:
1-800-537-6945 USA
1-800-737-3360 Canada
1-815-235-6847 International
FAX
1-815-235-6545 USA
INTERNET
www.honeywell.com/sensing
info@micro.honeywell.com
.402
21±0.2
56±0.3
14
64
7.5±0.2
.157
28
20.4±0.3
25
15.1
.047 stainless
51.5
100±1.5
2-M3x23
cover screw
M3x6
cover screw
7 .276 in depth
mounting holes
2-M5 (P=0
1.2 dia.
PT 30 max
(Standard type)
.8) tapped
2.028
3.937±.059
2.205±.012
.827±.008
1.102
10.2
steel wire
.803±.012
4
2.520
.551
.295±.008
.984
.594
2-M5 (P=0.8)
mounting holes
mounting holes
2-4.1
tapped
dia.
+0.2
0
SZL-VL-G
mounting holes
-0.161 dia.
+0.008
56±0.3
38
14.8
12.5 dia.x3.8
stainless steel roller
21±0.2
28
2-M3x23
cover screw
M3x6
cover screw
.402
20.4±0.3
.157
64
14
7 .276 in depth
mounting holes
2-M5 (P=0.8) tapped
mounting holes
2-M5 (P=0.8) tapped
15.1
25
7.5±0.2
(Standard type)
.583
1.496
2.205±.012
1.102
.827±.008
10.2
.803±.012
4
2.520
.551
.295±.008
.594
.984
mounting holes
2-4.1 dia.
+0.2
0
PT 1.5 max
SZL-VL-H
mounting holes
.161 dia.
+0.008
-0
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
91MCE Series
Mini Compact Limit Switch
DESCRIPTION
The 91MCE series limit switch is a compliment to Honeywell's
existing product line of smaller, lower cost limit switches.
Designed for modern industrial OEMs, the miniature package
size fits in applications where space is limited. The small
package size can be gang mounted for applications requiring
more than two switch circuits. The 20mm mounting pattern
meets most globally accepted mounting standards.
This product family offers the user many options including a
variety of different actuator styles. Connection options include
pre-leaded cable in various lengths or M12 connectors, both
with side or bottom exits. Design flexibility is further enhanced
with the availability of both slow action and snap action
circuitry. Direct acting contacts are designed to open the NC
contact when actuated. The epoxy-sealed rugged die-cast
housing provides enhanced environmental durability.
Priced competitively, the 91MCE is a drop-in replacement to
many products, and provides enhanced quality that customers
expect from Honeywell.
FEATURES
• Direct acting contacts are designed to open NC contacts
when actuated
• Sealed to IP67; NEMA 1, 4, 12, 13 suitable for outdoor
applications
• CE, cULus, CCC approvals meet most global approvals
• Nine actuator styles offer design flexibility
• Slow-action and snap-action circuitry options
• Pre-leaded cable and M12 connector options
• Expected mechanical life: 5 million operations
• Side exit (standard) and bottom exit connection options
POTENTIAL APPLICATIONS
• Machine equipment
• Material handling
• Aerial lifts
• Forklifts
• Off road and outdoor equipment
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
91MCE Series
2 www.honeywell.com/sensing
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Parameter Measure
Operating speed 0,05 mm to 1 m per second
Operating frequency – mechanical 120 ops per minute
Operating frequency – electrical 30 ops per minute
Insulation resistance > 100 Mohm @ 500 Vdc
Rated voltage 300 Vac (EN60947-5-1)
Rated thermal current 10A pre-leaded versions; 3A connector versions
Electrical rating ac 15 A 300; dc 13 Q300
Dielectric strength 1000 Vac for one minute between current carrying parts
2500 Vac for one minute between non-current carrying parts
Expected mechanical life 5 million operations
Expected electrical life 5 x 105 operations
Operating temperature -25 °C to 85 °C [ -13 °F to 185 °F] without the formation of ice
Humidity < 95 % RH
Cable 5 core, 0.75 mm2
Degree of protection IP67
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
IEC 947-5-1 / EN 90947-5-1
Designation &
Utilization Category
Rated operational current Ie (A) at rated operational voltage Ue VA rating
120 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 500 V 600 V Make Break
AC15 A300 6 3 – – – – 7200 720
125 Vdc 250 Vdc
DC13 Q300 0.55 0.27 69 69
BAR CHARTS
Snap-action for plunger
actuators
Slow-action for plunger
actuators
Snap-action for side rotary Slow-action for side rotary
PIN OUT – “Q” OPTION
Pin 1 & 2 – Normally Closed
Pin 3 & 4 – Normally Open
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Mini Compact Limit Switch
Honeywell Sensing and Control 3
DIMENSIONS
91MCE1-P1/S1 – PIN PLUNGER 91MCE2-P1/S1 – ROLLER PLUNGER 91MCE3-P1/S1 – CROSS ROLLER
PLUNGER
91MCE16-P1/S1 – SIDE ROTARY
LEVER WITH METAL ROLLER
91MCE18-P1/S1 - PIN PLUNGER WITH
BOOT SEAL
91MCE27-P1/S1 - PANEL MOUNT PIN
PLUNGER
91MCE30-P1/S1 - PANEL MOUNT
BOOTED PIN PLUNGER
91MCE28-P1/S1 – PANEL MOUNT
ROLLER PLUNGER
91MCE29-P1/S1 – PANEL MOUNT
CROSS ROLLER PLUNGER
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Sensing and Control
Honeywell
1985 Douglas Drive North
Golden Valley, MN 55422
www.honeywell.com/sensing
002311-2-EN IL50 GLO Printed in USA
June 2010
Copyright © 2010 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.
91MCE SWITCH PART NUMBER TREE
WARNING
IF USED IN APPLICATIONS CONCERNING HUMAN SAFETY
• Only use NC direct opening (“positive opening”/”positive
break”) contacts, identified by the symbol .
• Do NOT use flexible/adjustable actuators. Only use actuators
designed for safety applications.
• Do NOT defeat, tamper, remove, or bypass this switch.
• Hazardous voltage, disconnect power before servicing.
• Strictly adhere to all installation and maintenance instructions
• Consult with local safety agencies and their requirements when
designing a machine-control link, interface, and all control
elements that affect safety.
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death
or serious injury.
WARNING
MISUSE OF DOCUMENTATION
• The information presented in this product sheet is for reference
only. Do not use this document as a product installation guide.
• Complete installation, operation, and maintenance information
is provided in the instructions supplied with each product.
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death
or serious injury.
WARRANTY/REMEDY
Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as being free of defective
materials and faulty workmanship. Honeywell’s standard product
warranty applies unless agreed to otherwise by Honeywell in writing;
please refer to your order acknowledgement or consult your local sales
office for specific warranty details. If warranted goods are returned to
Honeywell during the period of coverage, Honeywell will repair or
replace, at its option, without charge those items it finds defective. The
foregoing is buyer’s sole remedy and is in lieu of all other
warranties, expressed or implied, including those of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. In no event
shall Honeywell be liable for consequential, special, or indirect
damages.
While we provide application assistance personally, through our
literature and the Honeywell web site, it is up to the customer to
determine the suitability of the product in the application.
Specifications may change without notice. The information we supply
is believed to be accurate and reliable as of this printing. However, we
assume no responsibility for its use.
SALES AND SERVICE
Honeywell serves its customers through a worldwide network of sales
offices, representatives and distributors. For application assistance,
current specifications, pricing or name of the nearest Authorized
Distributor, contact your local sales office or:
E-mail: info.sc@honeywell.com
Internet: www.honeywell.com/sensing
Phone and Fax:
Asia Pacific +65 6355-2828; +65 6445-3033 Fax
Europe +44 (0) 1698 481481; +44 (0) 1698 481676 Fax
Latin America +1-305-805-8188; +1-305-883-8257 Fax
USA/Canada +1-800-537-6945; +1-815-235-6847
+1-815-235-6545 Fax
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches 914CE Series
Miniature Pre-Wired Enclosed Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A87
NOTE: Bushing seal shown refers to ‘‘K’’
roller plunger and cross-roller plunger listings only.
Factory pre-wiring with industrial quality cable (type SJTO) allows for miniaturization of
the connection and eliminates the need to
wire at the switch. This allows the 914CE to
be used in limited access areas.
The cable electrical connection and basic
switch terminals are encapsulated in an
epoxy compound. An elastomer seal between the plunger and switch housing, plus
mounting screw holes with continuous
walls, keep liquids from entering the switch
cavity. The seal boot offered on the 914CE18
and 914CE20 prevents contaminants from
impeding plunger movement.
A full range of actuators is available, including plain plungers, roller plungers, side rotary, multi-directional wire, and manual. Any
of the LS or HDLS limit switch levers may be
used with the side rotary 914CE16. Pages
A37 & A39.
914CE’s may be specified with 3-foot (0,91
m), 6-foot (1,83 m), or 9-foot (2,74 m) cable.
A 90° steel bracket (Catalog Listing 933PA1)
is available for mounting a switch in various
planes relative to the mounting surface. See
page A92.
PLUNGER ACTUATED SWITCHES
1
2
3 4
For rapid response – off the shelf service,
all bold face listings are normally stocked
items.
FEATURES
1 Miniature size
1 Wide selection of actuators
1 Precision characteristics
1 Zinc die cast housing
1 Optional mounting bracket
1 Fluorocarbon seal available
1 Preleaded or connector versions
1 Temperature range 35° to 160°F (2° to 71°C)
for NEMA 1 and 3 only versions; all others 10°
to 200°F (–12° to 93°C)
1 UL Recognized, file #E41859
1 CSA Certified, file #LR15775
1 CE Certified
1 Low temp. versions available (–40°C & °F)
ELECTRICAL RATING
Amps
Circuitry Load Make Break
A 240 VAC, ind. 1.2 0.2
240 VAC, res. 5 5
28 VDC, res. 3 3
Single-pole
28 VDC, ind. 3 3
Double-throw
UL/CSA: 5 amps, 1/10
Hp, 125 or 250 VAC
B 1 amp res., 0.5 amp ind.,
30 VDC
UL Rating:
1 amp, 125 VAC
C UL/CSA Rating
3 amp, 125 or 250 VAC
CABLE TERMINATION
Side Exit
GANG MOUNT TO BUILD MULTIPLE-PLUNGER
SWITCH
.63 in. (16mm) between plungers.
Bottom Exit
ORDER GUIDE
Description
(Bottom exit O.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
cable unless max. max. min. max.
otherwise Catalog Elec. N mm mm mm
noted) Listing* NEMA Rating lbs. in. in. in.
Plunger1 914CE1-3 1,3 A 12,2 1,8 3,0 0,1
2.75 .071 .118 .004
Plunger1 914CE1-3G 1,3 B 12,2 1,8 3,0 0,1
Gold Contacts 2.75 .071 .118 .004
Plunger1 914CE1-3A 1,3 A 12,2 1,8 3,0 0,1
(Side exit 2.75 .071 .118 .004
cable)
Bushing mount 914CE27-3 1,3 A 12,2 1,8 3,0 0,1
Plunger2 2.75 .071 .118 .004
Adjustable 914CE19-3 1,3,4 A 22,2 1,8 3,0 0,1
Plunger3 12,13 5 .071 .118 .004
Boot sealed 914CE18-3 1,3,4 A 22,3 1,8 3,0 0,1
Plunger4 12,13 5 .071 .118 .004
Side exit 914CE18-3A 1,3,4 A 22,3 1,8 3,0 0,1
cable 12,13 5 .071 .118 .004
Fluorocarbon
Seals 914CE18-3V
N J Newtons
* These listings have 0,91m (3 ft.) cable. To order 1.83,
(6 ft.) cable, change the –3 to –6. To order 2,74m (9
ft.) cable, change the –3 to –9.
Characteristics: O.F. – Operating Force; P.T. – Pretravel; O.T. – Overtravel; D.T. – Differential Travel.
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches 914CE Series
Miniature Pre-Wired Enclosed Switches
A88 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
ROLLER PLUNGER ACTUATED
SWITCHES
1 2
3 4
5 6
NOTE:
Switches held depressed for extended periods of time at temperature extremes may
experience retarded plunger return upon
deactuation. Where such a condition exists
in the application, contact the 800 number.
ORDER GUIDE
Description**
(Bottom exit
cable unless
otherwise noted.)
Catalog
Listing NEMA
Elec.
Rating
O.F.
max.
N
lbs.
P.T.
max.
mm in.
O.T.
min.
mm in.
D.T.
max.
mm in.
Roller 914CE2-3 1,3 A 12,2 1,8 3,0 0,1
Plunger1 2.75 .071 .118 .004
914CE2-3K 1,3,4,6 A 22,3 1,8 3,0 0,1
6P,12,13 5 .071 .118 .004
914CE2-3C 1,3 A 17,8 1,8 3,0 0,51
SPDTDB 4 .071 .118 .020
Roller 914CE2-3G 1,3 B 12,2 1,8 3,0 0,1
Plunger1 2.75 .071 .118 .004
Gold Contacts
Roller Plunger1 914CE2-3A 1,3 A 12,2 1,8 3,0 0,1
(Side exit
cable
2.75 .071 .118 .004
914CE2-3AK 1,3,4,6 A 22,3 1,8 3,0 0,1
6P,12,13 5 .071 .118 .004
Bushing Mount 914CE28-3 1,3 A 12,2 1,8 3,0 0,1
Roller Plunger2 2.75 .071 .118 .004
Cross Roller 914CE3-3 1,3 A 12,2 1,8 3,0 0,1
Plunger3 2.75 .071 .118 .004
914CE3-3K 1,3,4,6 A 22,3 1,8 3,0 0,1
6P,12,13 5 .071 .118 .004
Cross Roller 914CE3-3G 1,3 B 12,2 1,8 3,0 0,1
Plunger3 2.75 .071 .118 .004
Gold Contacts
Cross Roller 914CE3-3A 1,3 A 12,2 1,8 3,0 0,1
Plunger3 2.75 .071 .118 .004
(Side exit 914CE3-3AK 1,3,4,6 A 22,3 1,8 3,0 0,1
cable). 6P,12,13 5 .071 .118 .004
Bushing Mount 914CE29-3 1,3 A 12,2 1,8 3,0 0,1
Cross-Roller
Plunger4
2.75 .071 .118 .004
Boot Sealed 914CE31-3 1,3,4,6 A 22,3 1,8 3,0 0,1
Roller Plunger5 6P,12,13 5 .071 .118 .004
Fluorocarbon
Seals 914CE31-3V
Boot Sealed 914CE55-3 1,3,4,6 A 22,3 1,8 3,0 0,1
Cross Roller 6P,12,13 5 .071 .118 .004
Plunger
Ball Bearing6 914CE66-3 1,3 A 12,2 1,8 3,0 0,1
2.75 .071 .118 .004
SIDE ROTARY AND WOBBLE
ACTUATED SWITCHES
5
6
ORDER GUIDE
Lever not included on side rotary versions. Any LS or HDLS lever may be used. See pages A37
to A39.
Description Catalog Elec. O.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
(Bottom exit) Listing NEMA Rating max. max. min. max.
Side*** 914CE16-3 1,3,4,6 A 0,34 Nm 30° 40° 3°
rotary5 6P,12,13 3 in. lbs.
Side rotary5 914CE16-3A 1,3,4,6 A 0,34 Nm 30° 40° 3°
Side exit 6P,12,13 3 in. lbs.
cable
Multidirectional 914CE20-3 1,3,4,6 A 0,56 N — — —
spring wire 6P,12,13 2 oz.
wobble
actuator6 9PA86-CE Replacement Actuator
N J Newtons
* These listings have 0,91m (3 ft.) cable. To order 1,83m (6 ft.) cable, change the –3 to –6. For other cable
lengths, contact the 800 number.
** Snap release not recommended on these devices.
*** Switch operates on clockwise and counterclockwise rotation of the lever shaft.
Characteristics: O.F. – Operate Force; P.T. – Pretravel; O.T. – Overtravel; D.T. – Differential Travel
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches 914CE Series
Miniature Pre-Wired Enclosed Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A89
MANUALLY OPERATED SWITCHES
ORDER GUIDE
Description
(Bottom exit
cable)
Catalog
Listing* NEMA
Elec.
Rating
O.F.
max.
N
lbs.
P.T.
max.
mm in.
O.T.
min.
mm in.
D.T.
max.
mm in.
.94 in. 914CE22-3 1,3 A 8,9 1,8 3,0 0,1
(23,9mm) dia. 2 .071 .118 .004
button
N J Newtons
*These listings have 0,91m (3 ft.) cable. To order 1,83m (6 ft.) cable, change the –3 to –6. For other cable lengths,
contact the 800 number.
Characteristics: O.F. – Operate Force; P.T. – Pretravel; O.T. – Overtravel; D.T. – Differential Travel
MINIATURE ENCLOSED SWITCHES WITH CONNECTORS
ORDER GUIDE WITH AC STYLE CONNECTORS
Description
Connector
Exit
Catalog
Listing NEMA
Elec.
Rating
O.F. max.
N
lbs.
P.T. max.
mm in.
O.T. min.
mm in.
D.T. max.
mm in.
Plunger Bottom 914CE1-Q1 1, 3
C
12,2 1,8 3,0 0,1
2.75 .071 .118 .004
Boot sealed
plunger
Bottom 914CE18-Q1 1, 3, 4, 6
C
22,3 1,8 3,0 0,1
Side 914CE18-AQ1 12, 13 5 .071 .118 .004
Roller plunger Bottom 914CE2-Q1 1, 3 C 12,2 1,8 3,0 0,1
Bottom 914CE2-KQ1 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, 13 2.75 .071 .118 .004
Cross roller
plunger
Bottom 914CE3-Q1 1, 3
C
12,2 1,8 3,0 0,1
Bottom 914CE3-KQ1 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, 13 2.75 .071 .118 .004
Side rotary
(w/o lever)
Bottom 914CE16-Q1 1, 3, 4, 6
C
0,34 Nm 30° 40° 3°
Side 914CE16-AQ1 12, 13 3 in. lb.
Bushing
mount Roller
plunger
Bottom 914CE28-Q1 1, 3
C
12,2 1,8 3,0 0,1
2.75 .071 .118 .004
For DC style connectors, delete the ‘‘1’’ at the end of the catalog listing. Example: 914CE1-Q1 (AC); 914CE1-Q (DC).
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
PLAIN PLUNGER/RECEPTACLE
Bottom Exit Connector
Side Exit Connector
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches 914CE Series
Miniature pre-wired enclosed switches
A90 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
QUICK-CONNECT CABLES
914CE switches mate with the quick-connect cables listed below. The cable has PVC
sheathing and #22 AWG leadwires.
AC STYLE CABLES
Connector Cable Catalog
Style Length Listing
Straight 6′ 704000D02F060
20′ 704000D02F200
Right angle
(90°)
6′ 704001D02F060
20′ 704001D02F200
AC Style Pin Configuration
(male receptacle)
Pin Layout
DC STYLE CABLES
Connector Cable Catalog
Style Length Listing
Straight 2 M 804000A09M020
5 M 804000A09M050
Right angle
(90°)
2 M 804001A09M020
5 M 804001A09M050
DC Style Pin Configuration
(male receptacle)
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
Straight Style Connector
Right Angle (90°) Style Connector
Dimension ‘‘A’’
AC Style – 1.375 (34,9)
DC Style – 1.050 (26,7)
AC Style Pin Configuration (cable plug)
(Face view of female connector)
Pin #1 J Red w/Black Tr.–Common
Pin #2 J Red w/White Tr.–Normally Open
Pin #3 J Red–Normally Closed
Pin #4 J Green–Ground
DC Style Pin Configuration (cable plug)
(Face view of female connector)
Pin #1 J Brown leadwire/Normally opened
Pin #2 J White leadwire/Common
Pin #3 J Blue leadwire/Ground
Pin #4 J Black leadwire/Normally closed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches 914CE Series
Mounting Dimensions
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A91
PLUNGER/CABLE
SIDE EXIT
CABLE
DETAIL
PLUNGER (With seal boot) ADJUSTABLE PLUNGER
PLUNGER (Bushing mount) ROLLER PLUNGER (Bushing mount) ROLLER PLUNGER
MANUAL OPERATOR CROSS ROLLER PLUNGER MULTIDIRECTIONAL WIRE
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches 914CE Series
Mounting Dimensions
A92 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
CROSS ROLLER PLUNGER (Bushing mount) SIDE ROTARY*
* Any LS or HDLS limit switch lever can be used with this switch.
BOOT SEALED ROLLER PLUNGER BALL BEARING
MOUNTS THRU .517/13,13 DIA. HOLE IN PANEL .165/4,19 MAX. THICK
MOUNTING BRACKET
933PA1
BOOT SEALED CROSS ROLLER PLUNGER
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches BF Series
Plastic Enclosed Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A93
BF Series Plastic Enclosed Basic Switches are available with a wide variety of operators, and
are designed for easy mounting and wiring.
BF switches mount utilizing two (2) #6 screws installed through the two diametrically
opposite mounting holes in the switch housing (2.312 in x 1.375 in spacing). The BF switches
are designed to allow mounting with the cover either towards or away from the mounting
surface. It may be more convenient to select the appropriate operator orientation to allow
mounting with the cover away from the mounting surface, permitting wiring after mounting.
Switches with lever type actuators (actuator code L in the second position after the dash) are
adjustable in two directions. The entire actuator can be rotated around its mounting
bushing, and the angle of the lever can also be changed.
FEATURES
1 Wide variety of actuators — roller levers,
wobble levers, and pin plungers
1 Four conduit openings:
–1/2-14 NPT
–1/2-14 NPSM
–PF1/2
–PG13.5
1 Large internal cavity for easy wiring
1 Pressure plate style wire clamps
1 Rugged plastic enclosure eliminates
need for grounding
1 Several basic switches available ranging
from 0.1 Amp electronic duty gold
contact to 11 Amp 1/3 HP
1 Sealed to NEMA 1, 3, 4 and 13
requirements
1 Wide temperature range, –25 to +160°F
(–31 to +71°C)
1 UL recognized
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
1 Overhead cranes and hoists
1 Surface transportation equipment
1 Special machinery
1 Agricultural equipment
1 Earth moving equipment
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches BF Series
Plastic Enclosed Switches
A94 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
ORDER GUIDE
BF –
ORIENTATION
L L.H. Actuator, std. mtg.
CONDUIT OPENING
1 1/2 – 14 NPT
2 1/2 – 14 NPSM
3 PF1/2
4 PG13.5
BASIC SWITCH
A 5 Amp – V7
B 11 Amp – V7
S 0.1 Amp Gold Clad – V7
ACTUATOR
L1 Roller Lever
L2 Rod Lever
L3 One Way Roller Lever
L4 Manual Lever
P1 Straight Plunger, Std.
W1 Coil Spring Wobble
W2 Plastic Wobble, Std.
W3 Plastic Wobble, Tall
W4 Spring Wire, Std.
W5 Spring Wire, Tall
SEALING PACKETS (for use with the 1/2-14 npt conduit opening)
Packet (for use with
1/2-14 NPT) Cable O.D. In. (mm)
2PA6 .400 – .435 (10,2 – 11,05)
2PA16 .435 – .470 (11,05 – 11,90)
2PA1 .530 – .570 (13,5 – 14,5)
A liquid tight conduit fitting for the 1/2–14 NPT conduit opening is also
available.
Packet Cable O.D. In. (mm)
2PA17 .170 – .470 (4,3 – 11,9)
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
COIL SPRING WOBBLE LEVER
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches BF Series
Plastic Enclosed Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A95
PIN PLUNGER
ROLLER LEVER
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches E6/V6 Series
Compact Enclosed Switches
A96 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
FEATURES
1 Side or flange mount
1 Momentary or maintained contact
1 Grounding screw
1 High capacity (22 amp) available
1 Temperature range –25°F to +160°F
(–32° to +71°C)
1 Cast zinc housing NEMA 1
1 UL Recognized, file #E12252
1 CSA Certified, file #LR41372
1 E6 NEMA 1
1 V6 NEMA 1, 3
1 Epoxy filled NEMA 1, 3, 4, 12, 13
1 Preleaded or connector termination
options
STRAIGHT PLUNGER ACTUATED
SWITCHES
Side mount with seal boot
Side mount without seal boot
ROLLER PLUNGER
ACTUATED SWITCHES
Side mount with seal boot
For rapid response – off the shelf
service, all bold face listings are
normally stocked items.
E6 (side mount) and V6 (flange mount)
switches are offered with or without actuator
seal boots. Both have a combination insulator/seal cemented inside the bottom enclosure. Lead washers are used to seal the
mounting holes on side mount switches. All
side mount switches are installed with #6
screws, except the BZE6-2RN7 (#8
screws). Removal of the bottom enclosure
exposes the terminals for easy wiring.
ELECTRICAL RATING
Circuitry Electrical Rating
A UL/CSA Rating:
15 amps, 125, 250 or 480 VAC:
2 amps, 600 VAC:
Single-pole 1⁄8 Hp, 125 VAC: 1⁄4 Hp, 250 VAC:
Double-throw 1⁄2 amp, 125 VDC: 1⁄4 amp, 250 VDC.
B UL/CSA Rating:
10 amps, 125 or 250 VAC:
0.3 amp, 125 VDC: 0.15 amp, 250 VDC.
Double-pole
Double-throw
ORDER GUIDE
P.T. O.T. D.T.
O.P. O.F. max. min. max.
Elec. Catalog mm N mm mm mm
Description Rating Mtg. Listing in. oz. in. in. in.
With seal boot A Side BZE6-2RN 43,66 ± 0,76 2,50- 1,98 5,56 0.05
SPDT. 1.719 ± .030 6,67 .078 .219 .002
9-24Flange BZV6-2RN 69,09 ± 1,52
2.720 ± .060
Same as A Side BZE6-2RN7 43,66 ± 0,76 2,50- 1,98 5,56 0,05
BZE6-2RN 1.719 ± .030 6,67 .078 .219 .002
except 9-24
#8 Mounting
screws.
With seal boot. B Side DTE6-2RN 46 ± 0,76 7,23- 2,80 3,17 1,53
DPDT. 1.812 ± .030 16,4 .110 .125 .060
26-59Flange DTV6-2RN 71,4 ± 0,76
2.812 ± .030
Without seal boot. A Side BZE6-2RQ 38,1 ± 0,76 2,50- 0,38 5,56 0,05
SPDT. 1.500 ± .030 3,62 .015 .219 .002
9-13Flange BZV6-2RQ 63,5 ± 1,14
2.500 ± .045
ORDER GUIDE
P.T. O.T. D.T.
O.P. O.F. max. min. max.
Elec. Catalog mm N mm mm mm
Description Rating Mtg. Listing in. oz. in. in. in.
With seal boot. A Side BZE6-2RN80 56,7 ± 1,14 2,50- 1,98 5,55 0,05
Roller parallel to 2.232 ± .045 6,68 .078 .219 .002
long axis of 82,1 ± 1,14 9-24
switch. SPDT Flange BZV6-2RN80 3.232 ± .045
With seal boot. B Side DTE6-2RN80 59,6 ± 1,0 5,56- 2,80 3,17 1,53
Roller parallel to 2,345 ± .040 13,3 .110 .125 .060
long axis of 20-48
switch. DPDT.
Without seal boot. A Side BZE6-2RQ8 49,6 ± 1,14 2,50- 0,38 3,55 0,05
Roller parallel to 1.953 ± .045 3,62 .015 .140 .002
9-13long axis of Flange BZV6-2RQ8 75 ± 1,52
switch. SPDT. 2.953 ± .060
N J Newtons Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; P.T. — Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T.
— Differential Travel; O.P. — Operating Position.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches E6/V6 Series
Compact Enclosed Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A97
CROSS ROLLER PLUNGER ACTUATED SWITCHES
Flange mount
without seal boot
ORDER GUIDE
D.T.
O.P. O.F. P.T. O.T. max.
Elec. Catalog mm N mm mm mm
Description Rating Mtg. Listing in. oz. in. in. in.
Without seal A Side BZE6-2RQ81 49,6 ± 1,14 2,50- 0,38 3,55 0,05
boot. Roller 1.953 ± .045 3,62 .015 .140 .002
9-13perpendicular Flange BZV6-2RQ81 75 ± 1,52
to long axis of 2.953 ± .060
switch.
SPDT.
As above with A Side BZE6-2RN81 56,7 ± 1,14 2,5- 1,98 5,56 0,05
seal boot. 2.232 ± .045 6,67 .078 .219 .002
9-24Flange BZV6-2RN81 82,1 ± 1,14
3.232 ± 0.45
ROLLER LEVER ACTUATED SWITCHES
Flange mount
with seal boot
Side mount
without seal boot
ORDER GUIDE
P.T. O.T. D.T.
O.F. max. min. max.
Elec. Catalog N mm mm mm
Description Rating Mtg. Listing oz. in. in. in.
With seal
boot. Field
adjustable
360°
horizontally
and 225°
vertically.
A Side BZE6-2RN2 2,78- 4,78 5,56 0,15
5,57 .188 .219 .006Flange BZV6-2RN2
SPDT 10-20
B Side DTE6-2RN2 2,78- 6,76 5,56 4,19
8,35 .266 .219 .165Flange DTV6-2RN2
DPDT 10-30
Without seal
boot.
Adjustable as
above, except
horizontal
adjustment in 45°
increments.
A Side BZE6-2RQ2 2,78- 4,78 5,56 0,15
SPDT 5,01 .188 .219 .006Flange BZV6-2RQ2
10-18
DPDT B Side DTE6-2RQ2 2,78- 6,76 5,56 4,19
5,57 .266 .219 .165
10-20
ONE-WAY ROLLER LEVER ACTUATED SWITCHES
Side mount
with seal boot
ORDER GUIDE
P.T. O.T. D.T.
O.F. max. min. max.
Elec. Catalog N mm mm mm
Description Rating Mtg. Listing oz. in. in. in.
With seal boot. Field
adjustable 360°
horizontally and 180°
verticallly. SPDT.
A Side BZE6-2RN28 2,22- 5,95 5,56 0,15
5,57 .234 .219 .006Flange BZV6-2RN28
8-20
LOW FORCE ROD LEVER
Rod can be formed in-line with the switch
once, or cut, for application.
Flange mount
without seal boot
ORDER GUIDE
P.T. O.T. D.T.
O.F. max. min. max.
Elec. Catalog N mm mm mm
Description Rating Mtg. Listing oz. in. in. in.
Without seal boot.
Field adjustable 360°
horizontally in 45°
increments and 250°
vertically. SPDT.
A Side BZE6-2RQ62 0,55- 18,24 21,2 5,82
1,39 .718 .838 .229Flange BZV6-2RQ62
2-5
As above, but with
seal boot.
A Side BZE6-2RN62 0,831,95
Flange BZV6-2RN62
3-7
N J Newtons
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; P.T. — Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential Travel
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches E6/V6 Series
Compact Enclosed Switches
A98 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
COIL SPRING WOBBLE LEVER ACTUATED SWITCHES
Side mount
with seal boot
ORDER GUIDE
O.F.
max.
Elec. Catalog N P.T.
Description Rating Mtg. Listing oz. max.
With seal boot. Operates from A Side BZE6-2RN18 1,95 15°
any direction, except pull. Flange BZV6-2RN18 7
SPDT.
MAINTAINED CONTACT (RESET) SWITCHES
The switches shown below provide maintained contact after the operating force on
either top or bottom plunger is released.
Note: The top plungers on these switches
provide more accurate and uniform operation than the ‘‘reset’’ plungers and should
be used when closely held operating characteristics are required.
ELECTRICAL RATING
Circuitry Electrical Rating
C UL/CSA Rating: L67
15 amps, 125, 250 or 480 VAC;
1⁄4 Hp, 125 VAC; 1⁄2 Hp, 250 VAC;
1⁄2 amp, 125 VDC; 1⁄4 amp, 250 VDC.
Single-pole
Double-throw
STRAIGHT PLUNGER ACTUATED (RESET) SWITCHES
Side mount
with seal boot
ORDER GUIDE
Reset
P.T. O.T. O.F.
O.P. O.F. max. min. min.
Elect. Catalog mm N mm mm N*
Description Rating Mtg. Listing in. oz. in. in. oz.
Without seal boot. C Side BZE6-RQX2 38,1±0,76 1,66- 0,31 4,75 2,22
SPDT. 1.500±.030 2,65 .012 .187 8
Flange BZV6-RQX2 63,5±1,1 6-9.5
2.500±.045
With seal boot. C Side BZE6-RNX1 43,66±0,76 1,66- 1,98 4,75 1,66
SPDT. 1.718±.030 5,57 .078 .187 6
Flange BZV6-RNX1 69,1±1,53 6-20
2.720±.060
ROLLER PLUNGER ACTUATED (RESET) SWITCHES
Side mount
without seal boot
ORDER GUIDE
Reset
P.T. O.T. O.F.
O.P. O.F. max. min. min.
Elect. Catalog mm N mm mm N*
Description Rating Mtg. Listing in. oz. in. in. oz.
Without seal boot. C Side BZE6-RQ8X2 51,2±1,15 1,67- 0,31 3,56 2,22
Roller parallel to 2.015±.045 2,64 .012 .140 8
long axis to switch. 6-9.5
SPDT.
N J Newtons Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; P.T. — Pretravel; O.T. —
Overtravel; O.P. — Operating Position
MANUALLY ACTUATED SWITCHES
With 1.5 inch (38,1 mm) button.
Side mount
with seal boot
ORDER GUIDE
P.T. O.T. D.T.
O.F. max. min. max.
Elec. Catalog N mm mm mm
Description Rating Mtg. Listing oz. in. in. in.
With seal boot. Field A Side BZE6-2RN4 2,78- 4,78 5,56 0,15
adjustable 360° Flange BZV6-2RN4 5,57 .188 .219 .006
horizontally and 180° 10-20
vertically. SPDT.
As above, but A Side BZE6-2RQ4 2,78without seal boot. Flange BZV6-2RQ4 5,00
10-18
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches E6/V6 Series
Compact Enclosed Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A99
ROLLER LEVER ACTUATED (RESET) SWITCHES
Side mount without seal boot
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Bottom enclosure includes bottom half
of enclosure, insulator seal and two
screws. Seal boot includes the elastomer plunger seal, and retaining hardware.
Basic packet includes mounting hardware and seal boot, where applicable.
ORDER GUIDE
Reset
O.F. P.T. O.T. O.F.
max. max. min. min.
Elec. Catalog N mm mm N
Description Rating Mtg. Listing oz. in. in. oz.
Without seal boot. Field
adjustable 360°
horizontally in 45°
increments and 180°
vertically. SPDT.
C Side BZE6-RQ2X2 2,78- 4,78 5,56 2,22
Flange BZV6-RQ2X2 5,01 .188 .219 8
10-18
With seal boot.
Adjustable as above.
SPDT.
C Side BZE6-RN2X1 4,45 4,78 5,56 3,33-
Flange BZV6-RN2X1 16 .188 .219 8,35
12-30
CONDUIT SEALING PACKETS
Packet Cable O.D. Inches
2PA6 .400N – .435N
2PA16 .435N – .470N
2PA1 .530N – .570N
Catalog Listing Bottom Enclosure Seal Boot Basic Packet Switching Unit Actuator
BZE6-2RN 3PA13-E6 10PA2 1PA2* BZ-2RQ77** —
BZV6-2RN 3PA14-V6
BZE6-2RN7 3PA13-E6 10PA2 1PA46* BZ-2RN730** —
BZE6-2RQ 3PA13-E6 — 1PA1 BZ-2RQ66** —
BZV6-2RQ 3PA14-V6
BZE6-2RQ8 3PA13-E6 — — BZ-2RQ784** —
BZV6-2RQ8 3PA14-V6
BZE6-2RQ81 3PA13-E6 — 1PA19 BZ-2RQ785** —
BZV6-2RQ81 3PA14-V6
BZE6-2RN80 3PA13-E6 10PA2 1PA54-BZ* BZ-2RN784 —
BZE6-2RN2 3PA13-E6 10PA2 1PA13* BZ-2RN702** 6PA2*
BZV6-2RN2 3PA14-V6
BZE6-2RQ2 3PA13-E6 — 1PA3 BZ-2RQ68** 6PA1
BZV6-2RQ2 3PA14-V6
BZE6-2RN28 3PA13-E6 10PA2 1PA13* BZ-2RN702** 6PA16*
BZV6-2RN28 3PA14-V6
BZE6-2RQ62 3PA13-E6 — 1PA3 BZ-2RQ68** 6PA62
BZV6-2RQ62 3PA14-V6
BZE6-2RN62 3PA13-E6 10PA2 1PA13* BZ-2RN702** 6PA140-E6*
BZV6-2RN62 3PA14-V6
BZE6-2RQ4 3PA13-E6 — 1PA3 BZ-2RQ68** 6PA7
BZV6-2RQ4 3PA14-V6
BZE6-RQX2 8PA54-E6 — 1PA1 BZ-RQX66** —
BZV6-RQX2 8PA53-V6
BZE6-RNX1 8PA56-E6 10PA2 1PA2* BZ-RQX167** —
BZV6-RNX1 8PA55-V6
BZE6-RQ8X2 8PA54-E6 — 1PA19 BZ-RQX784** —
BZE6-RQ2X2 8PA54-E6 — 1PA3 BZ-RQX68** 6PA1
BZV6-RQ2X2 8PA53-V6
BZE6-RN2X1 8PA56-E6 10PA2 1PA13* BZ-RNX702** 6PA2*
BZV6-RN2X1 8PA55-V6
BZE6-2RN4 3PA13-E6 10PA2 1PA13* BZ-2RN702** 6PA9*
BZV6-2RN4 3PA14-V6
BZE6-2RN18 3PA13-E6 10PA2 — BZ-2R-A2 6PA195*
BZV6-2RN18 3PA14-V6
DTE6-2RN† 3PA13-E6 10PA2 1PA2* DT-2R-A7 8PA14
DTV6-2RN† 3PA14-V6
DTE6-2RN2† 3PA13-E6 10PA2 — DT-2R-A7 6PA2*
DTV6-2RN2† 3PA14-V6
*Includes seal boot. **Includes basic packet. †To replace internal plunger, order 8PA14.
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches E6/V6 Series
Mounting Dimensions (For reference only)
A100 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
STRAIGHT PLUNGER ROLLER PLUNGER
Side mount Flange mount Side mount
with seal boot without seal boot with seal boot
CROSS ROLLER PLUNGER ROLLER LEVER
Flange mount Side mount Flange mount
without seal boot without seal boot with seal boot
ONE-WAY ROLLER LEVER ROD LEVER MANUAL
Side mount Flange mount Side mount
with seal boot without seal boot with seal boot
COIL SPRING ROLLER LEVER (Reset)
Flange mount Flange mount Side mount
with seal boot with seal boot without seal boot
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches E6/V6 Series
Epoxy Filled
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A101
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (continued)
PLUNGER (Reset) ROLLER PLUNGER (Reset)
Side mount Flange mount Side mount
with seal boot without seal boot without seal boot
Epoxy Filled Compact Enclosed Switches
The Epoxy Filled Compact Enclosed Switch
is a very rugged, but economical solution for
precision switching needs for a variety of
applications in heavy equipment. This may
be the cost effective solution you’ve been
looking for.
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
1 Trash compactors – mobile or stationary
1 Off-road construction equipment
1 Machine tools where precision switching
is needed
1 Heavy machinery
1 Bottling machinery
Designed for demanding
environments
1 Rugged zinc diecast housing with
phosphate sealed epoxy finish
Resists harsh conditions
1 Switch wiring cavity is epoxy
filled
1 Wire entry area completely factory
sealed
1 NEMA 1, 3, 4, 12, 13
Fits wide variety of applications
1 Seven different actuator styles
Coil spring boot band
1 Improved sealing
Very reilable operation
1 Precision snap-action basic
switch within housing
1 Broad electrical and temperature
ranges
Easy and economical to install
1 Mounts with just two screws
1 Switch is preleaded with three (3)
foot, four (4) conductor STOOW-A
cable .41-.46 in. (10.4-11.7 mm)
1 Connector versions available
ORDERING GUIDE FOR EPOXY FILLED E6/V6 TYPES
Description Catalog Listing
Straight plunger. BZE6-2RN-F3
Straight plunger 4 pin connector. BZE6-2RN-FR
Roller lever. Field adjustable 360° horizontally and 225° vertically BZE6-2RN2-F3
Coil spring wobble lever. Operates from any direction except pull. BZE6-2RN18-C3*
Low force rod lever. Field adjustable 360° horizontally in 45° increments and 180° vertically. BZE6-2RN62-F3
* Note: This switch has a pin plunger and the wiring cavity cannot be completely filled with epoxy. They are sealed at the conduit opening only.
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches BZG/BZH Series
Enclosed Switches
A102 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
BZG/BZH switches have a neoprene seal
gasket between the housing halves, elastomer boot actuators, sealed conduit connectors, and die cast aluminum housing.
Mounting holes are located outside the
switch cavity and accept No. 10 screws. A
neon pilot light can be added to switches
having two conduit openings to indicate
contact status.
FEATURES
1 Pilot light (optional)
1 Cast aluminum housing
1 Side or flange mount
ACCESSORIES
Pilot Light 110-220 VAC (complete with seal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15LT1
Wiring Seal (for No. 14 type ‘‘S’’ rubber jacketed cord) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2PA1
ELECTRICAL RATING
Circuitry Electrical Rating
A UL Rating
15 amp, 125, 250 or 480 VAC;
2 amp, 600 VAC;
1⁄8 Hp, 125 VAC; 1⁄4 Hp, 250 VAC;
Single-pole 1⁄2 amp, 125 VDC; 1⁄4 amp 250 VDC.
Double-throw
1 Single and double conduit openings
1 UL Recognized, file #E12252
1 Grounding screw
1 Sealed to NEMA 1, 3, 4, and 13
STRAIGHT PLUNGER ACTUATED SWITCHES
Flange mount
with seal boot
ORDER GUIDE
P.T. O.T. D.T.
Catalog Listing O.F. max. min. max.
Elec. 1 Conduit 2 Conduit N mm mm mm
Description Rating Mtg. Opening Openings oz. in. in. in.
With seal boot. A Side BZG1-2RN BZG2-2RN 2,50- 1,98 5,56 0,05
SPDT. Flange BZH1-2RN BZH2-2RN 6,68 .078 .219 .002
9-24
Seal boot with
roller plunger
A Side BZG1-2RN80 —
ROLLER LEVER ACTUATED SWITCHES
Side mount
with seal boot
ORDER GUIDE
P.T. O.T. D.T.
Catalog Listing O.F. max. min. max.
Elec. 1 Conduit 2 Conduit N mm mm mm
Description Rating Mtg. Opening Openings oz. in. in. in.
With seal boot. A Side BZG1-2RN2 BZG2-2RN2 2,78- 4,78 5,56 0,15
Field adjustable Flange BZH1-2RN2 BZH2-2RN2 5,57 .188 .219 .006
360° horizontally 10-20
and 225°
vertically. SPDT.
LOW FORCE ROD ACTUATED SWITCHES
Side mount
with seal boot
For rapid response – off the shelf
service, all bold face listings are
normally stocked items.
ORDER GUIDE
Rod can be cut or bent to suit application needs
P.T. O.T. D.T.
Catalog Listing O.F. max. min. max.
Elec. 1 Conduit 2 Conduit N mm mm mm
Description Rating Mtg. Opening Openings oz. in. in. in.
With seal boot. A Side BZG1-2RN62 BZG2-2RN62 0,83- 18,24 21,29 5,82
Field adjustable Flange BZH1-2RN62 BZH2-2RN62 1,95 .718 .838 .229
360° horizontally 3-7
and 250°
vertically. SPDT.
N J Newtons Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; P.T. — Pretravel;
O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential Travel
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches BZG/BZH Series
Enclosed Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A103
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Catalog Listing
Switching Units
For Straight Plunger Switch BZ-2RN770
For Roller or Rod Lever Switch BZ-2RN702
Actuators
Roller Lever 6PA2
Rod Lever 6PA140-E6
Seal Boot, including retaining hardware 10PA2
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
PLUNGER
Side mount Flange mount Roller plunger
ROLLER LEVER
Side mount
Flange mount (2 conduit openings)
ROD
Flange mount Side mount
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches BAF1 Series
High Capacity Enclosed Switches
A104 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
The elastomer boot on sealed actuator versions protects the actuating mechanism
and the internal basic switch from contaminants. There is a seal gasket between the
cover plate and the enclosures on all versions.
The cover plate is removed for ease of wiring
and switch replacement without demounting the switch.
The actuator position is designated ‘‘right’’
or ‘‘left,’’ when looking at the nameplate.
FEATURES
1 Up to 20 ampere capacity
1 Cast aluminum housing with 3-hole
mounting
1 Right or left-hand (sealed or unsealed)
actuators
1 Cover seal, captive cover screws
1 Momentary or maintained contact
1 UL Recognized, file #E12252
1 CSA Certified, file #LR41372
1 Grounding screw
1 NEMA 1, 3*, 4*, and 13*
(* except BAF1-2RQ9 listings)
ELECTRICAL RATING
Circuitry Electrical Rating
B UL/CSA Rating:
10 amps, 125 or 250 VAC;
0.3 amp, 125 VDC; 0.15 amp, 250 VDC.
Double-pole
Double-throw
D UL/CSA Rating:
20 amps, 125, 250 or 480 VAC;
1 Hp, 125 VAC; 2 Hp, 250 VAC;
1⁄2 amp, 125 VDC; 1⁄4 amp, 250 VDC;
Lamp Load — 10 amps, 125 VAC.
High Capacity
SPDT
STRAIGHT PLUNGER ACTUATED SWITCHES
ORDER GUIDE
O.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
O.P. max. max. min. max.
Elec. Actuator Catalog mm N mm mm mm
Description Rating Position† Listing in. lbs. in. in. in.
With
seal
boot.
D Right BAF1-2RN-RH 53,19±0,76 11,2 2,39 5,56 0,26
SPDT Left BAF1-2RN-LH 2.094±.030 2.5 .094 .219 .010
B Right DTF2-2RN-RH 52,07±1,0 11,2 3,59 3,96 1,53
DPDT Left DTF2-2RN-LH 2.050±.040 2.5 .141 .156 .060
With seal boot, right-hand actuator
ROLLER PLUNGER ACTUATED SWITCHES
ORDER GUIDE
O.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
Actuator O.P. max. max. min. max.
Elec. Posi- Catalog mm N mm mm mm
Description Rating tion† Listing in. lbs. in. in. in.
Without D Right BAF1-2RQ9-RH 64,69 11,1 2,39 3,96 0,25
seal SPDT Left BAF1-2RQ9-LH 2.547 2.5 .094 .156 .010
boot.
Field
adjustable
360°
horizontally.
Has D Right BAF1-2RQN8-RH 64,69 35,6 3,18 4,75 0,19
O-ring Left BAF1-2RQN8-LH 2.547 8 .125 .187 .0075
actuator
seal
SPDT
Without seal boot,
right-hand actuator
FLEXIBLE ROD ACTUATED SWITCHES
ORDER GUIDE
Elec. Actuator Catalog P.T.
Description Rating Position† Listing max.
With seal boot. Operates from
any direction, except direct pull.
SPDT.
D Right BAF1-2RN18-RH 15°
Left BAF1-2RN18-LH
N J Newtons
† When looking at nameplate.
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; P.T. —
Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential Travel;
O.P. — Operating Position
With seal boot,
right-hand actuator
For rapid response – off the shelf service, all bold face listings are normally stocked
items.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches BAF1 Series
High Capacity Enclosed Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A105
ROLLER LEVER ACTUATED SWITCHES
With seal boot,
right-hand actuator
ONE-WAY ROLLER LEVER ACTUATED SWITCHES
With seal boot
right-hand actuator
MANUALLY ACTUATED SWITCHES
With seal boot,
right-hand actuator
MAINTAINED CONTACT (RESET) PLUNGER ACTUATED SWITCHES
With seal boots,
right-hand actuator
ORDER GUIDE
O.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
max. max. min. max.
Elec. Actuator Catalog N mm mm mm
Description Rating Position† Listing lbs. in. in. in.
With seal
boot. Field
adjustable
360°
horizontally
and 225°
vertically.
D Right BAF1-2RN2-RH 8,90
2
5,56
.219
6,35
.250
0,51
.020SPDT Left BAF1-2RN2-LH
B Right DTF2-2RN2-RH 11,1
2.5
7,93
.312
5,56
.219
3,05
.120DPDT Left DTF2-2RN2-LH
ORDER GUIDE
O.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
max. max. min. max.
Elec. Actuator Catalog N mm mm mm
Description Rating Position† Listing lbs. in. in. in.
With seal boot. Field
adjustable 360°
horizontally and 180°
vertically. SPDT.
D Right BAF1-2RN28-RH 8,90
2
5,56
.219
6,35
.250
0,51
.020Left BAF1-2RN28-LH
ORDER GUIDE
Has 1.5 inch (38,1 mm) diameter button.
O.F.
max.
Elec. Actuator Catalog N
Description Rating Position† Listing lbs.
With seal boot. Field adjustable
360° horizontally and 180°
vertically. SPDT.
D Right BAF1-2RN4-RH 8,90
2
Left BAF1-2RN4-LH
ORDER GUIDE
Contact transfer is maintained after either plunger is operated. (Top plunger provides
more accurate and uniform characteristics.)
O.F. P.T. O.T.
max. max. min.
Elec. Actuator Catalog N mm mm
Description Rating Position† Listing lbs. in. in.
With seal boot on both top
and bottom (reset)
plungers. SPDT.
D Right BAF1-3RNX1 7,79
1.75
2,39
.094
4,45
.219
N J Newtons
† When looking at nameplate.
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; P.T. —
Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential Travel
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches BAF1 Series
High Capacity Enclosed Switches
A106 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Basic Packets include mounting hardware,
an insulator, and a cover seal ring. The plunger seal boot and retaining hardware may
be ordered separately as 10PA2.
CONDUIT SEALING PACKETS
Catalog
Listing
Packet Cable O.D. Inches
2PA6 .400N–.435N
2PA16 .435N–.470N
2PA1 .530N–.570N
(See page A41 for description.)
Catalog Listing
Replacement Part Numbers
Switch Type Basic Packet Switching Unit* Actuator
BAF1-2RN 1PA10 BA-2R708-P7 8PA1**
BAF1-2RQ9 1PA10 BA-2R708-P7 8PA10
BAF1-2RQN8 1PA10 BA-2R708-P7 8PA52
BAF1-2RN18 1PA10 BA-2R708-P7 6PA20**
BAF1-2RN2 1PA10 BA-2R708-P7 6PA2**
BAF1-2RN28 1PA10 BA-2R708-P7 6PA16**
BAF1-2RN4 1PA10 BA-2R708-P7 6PA9**
BAF1-3RNX1 1PA23 BA-3RX717 8PA1**
DTF2-2RN — DT-2R-A7 8PA32**
DTF2-2RN2 — DT-2R-A7 6PA2**
* Includes basic packet.
** Includes seal boot.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
PLUNGER (with seal boot)
Left-hand Right-hand
*28,2 on DTF2 Types
1.11
COIL SPRING (with seal boot)
Left-hand Right-hand
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches BAF1 Series
High-Capacity Enclosed Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A107
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
ROLLER PLUNGER (without seal boot)
Right-hand Left-hand
*28,2 on DTF2 Types
1.11
ROLLER LEVER (with seal boot)
Right-hand Right-hand*28,2 on DTF2 Types
1.11
MANUAL (with seal boot) PLUNGER (Reset)
(with seal boot)
Left-hand Right-hand*28,2 on DTF2 Types
1.11
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches OP Series
Enclosed Switches
A108 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
OP enclosed switches are precision snapaction switches sealed in rugged cast aluminum housings. Cover and shaft seals keep
out moisture and other contaminants on rotary operated switches. The plungers in the
Q-plunger version are not sealed.
Refer to page A123 for explosion-proof Type
EX switches, which are dimensionally interchangeable with OP switches.
FEATURES
1 Cast aluminum housing
1 Mounts from 4 sides
1 Cover seal, captive cover screws
1 Momentary contact
ELECTRICAL RATING
Circuitry Electrical Rating
A UL/CSA Rating:
15 amps, 125, 250 or 480 VAC;
1⁄8 Hp, 125 VAC; 1⁄4 Hp, 250 VAC;
1⁄2 amp, 125 VDC; 1⁄4 amp, 250 VDC.
Single-pole
Double-throw
B UL/CSA Rating:
10 amps, 125, 250 VAC;
0.3 amp, 125 VDC; 0.15 amp, 250 VDC.
Double-pole
Double-throw
D UL/CSA Rating:
20 amps, 125, 250 or 480 VAC;
1 Hp, 125 VAC; 2 Hp, 250 VAC;
1⁄2 amp, 125 VDC; 1⁄4 amp, 250 VDC.
Single-pole Lamp Load — 10 amps, 125 VAC.
Double-throw
E 5 amps, 125, 250 or 480 VAC;
1⁄2 amp - 125VDC; 1⁄4 amp - 250 VDC
Single-pole
Double-throw
1 UL Recognized, file #E12252
1 CSA Certified, file #LR57325
1 Grounding screw
1 NEMA 1, 3*, 4* and 13*
(* Except Q-plunger and high temperature types)
ROLLER LEVER ACTUATED SWITCHES
ORDER GUIDE
P.T. D.T.
max. max.
Elec. Catalog mm O.T. mm
Description Rating Listing O.F. in. max. in.
Roller
Lever is
field
adjustable
through
360N
CW actuation*
SPDT
A OP-AR 2,22-5,56 N
.5-1.25 lbs.
5,56
.219
(8°)
90° 0,18
.007
(.25°)
CW actuation*
SPDT will withstand
400°F for 100 hours
E OP-AR400 2,22-5,56 N
.5-1.25 lbs.
5,56
.219
(8°)
90° 0,18
.007
(.25°)
CW actuation*
High capacity.
SPDT
D OPA-AR 3,34-8,90 N
.75-2 lbs.
5,56
.219
(8°)
25° 0,3
.012
(.4°)
CW actuation*
DPDT
B OPD-AR 2,22-6,67 N
.5-1.5 lbs.
4,78
.250
(10°)
25° 2,77
.109
(4°)
CCW actuation*
SPDT
A OP-AR30 1,11 N max.
2.5 lbs. max.
1,65
.065
(3.5°)
25° 0,18
.007
(.25°)
CCW actuation*
Basic switch plunger
held depressed (normal
position) DPDT
B OPD-AR30 12,2 N max.
2.75 lbs.
max.
5,56
.219
(8°)
25° 2,77
.109
(4°)
CW or CCW actuation*
No lever return spring.
No mounting bracket
furnished. SPDT.
A OP-AR16 0,56 N max.
2 oz. max.
— — —
No lever furnished.† A OP-AR20 0,08-0,23 N 8° 90° .25°
CW actuation.* SPDT .75-2 in. lb.
N J Newtons
* Actuation is designated as CW (clockwise) or
CCW rotation, when looking at the switch
nameplate.
† Choice of levers available for use with OP-AR20:
6PA5-EX (non-sparkling roller), 6PA6-OP (steel
roller), 6PA127-EX (nylon roller), 6PA130-EX (CW).
6PA142-EX (CCW), and 6PA136-EX (Aluminum
rod).
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; P.T. —
Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential
Travel
For rapid response – off the shelf
service, all bold face listings are
normally stocked items.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches OP Series
Enclosed Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A109
CROSS ROLLER LEVER ACTUATED SWITCH
ORDER GUIDE
O.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
max. max. min. max.
Elec. Catalog N mm mm mm
Description Rating Listing lbs. in. in. in.
CW actuation* A OP-CR 2,22-5,56 5,56 90° 0,18
Field adjustable through 360°. .5-1.25 .219 max. .007
SPDT (8°) (.25°)
MANUALLY ACTUATED SWITCH
ORDER GUIDE
Elec. Catalog O.F.
Description Rating Listing max.
Large 3x3.5 inch paddle for fast, easy operation A OP-AR50 11.1 Newtons
SPDT 2.5 lbs. (approx.)
OVERTRAVEL PLUNGER ACTUATED SWITCHES
ORDER GUIDE
O.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
O.P. max. max. min. max.
Elec. Catalog mm N mm mm mm
Description Rating Listing in. lbs. in. in. in.
In-line SPDT A OP-Q 47,2±1,52 13,3 1,98 4,78 0,10
actuation 1.859±.060 3 .078 .188 .004
High Capacity D OPA-Q 46±1,52 8,90 1,27 3,18 0,23
SPDT 1.812±.060 2 .050 .125 .009
DPDT B OPD-Q 46±1,52 13,3 2,77 3,58 1,52
1.812±.060 3 .109 .141 .060
BOOT SEALED PLUNGER ACTUATED SWITCH
ORDER GUIDE
O.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
max. max. min. max.
Elec. Catalog N mm mm mm
Description Rating Listing lbs. in. in. in.
In-line actuation A OP-N 15,5 1,98 4,78 0,10
with boot seal 3.5 .078 .188 .004
* Clockwise actuation, when looking at the switch
nameplate.
N J Newtons
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; P.T. —
Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential
Travel; O.P. — Operating Position
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches OP Series
Enclosed Switches
A110 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
CONDUIT SEALING PACKETS
Catalog Listing
Packet Cable O.D. Inches
2PA6 .400N – .435N
2PA16 .435N – .470N
2PA1 .530N – .570N
(See page A99 for description.)
REPLACEMENT PARTS
In addition to the items shown below, these
replaceable internal levers are available:
33PA2-OP for OP-AR, OP-AR20 and OP-CR; and
33PA3-OP for OP-AR50.
Catalog Listing
Replacement Part Numbers
Switch Listing Switching Unit Acutator Springs
OP-AR BZ-2R-P4 6PA6-OP 33PA7-EX
OPA-AR BA-2R-P4 6PA6-OP 33PA6-EX
OPD-AR DT-2R4-A7 6PA6-OP 33PA6-EX
OP-AR30 BZ-2R-P4 6PA6-OP 33PA5-EX
OPD-AR30 DT-2R711-A7 6PA6-OP 33PA5-EX
OP-AR16 BZ-2RW88-P5 6PA6-OP —
OP-AR20 BZ-2R-P4 † 33PA7-EX
OP-Q BZ-2R-P4 8PA7-OP —
OPA-Q BA-2R-P4 — —
OPD-Q DT-2R-A7 — —
OP-CR BZ-2R-P4 6PA131-EX 33PA7-EX
OP-AR50 BZ-2R-P4 6PA134-OP 33PA7-EX
† Levers for OP-AR20 are on pages A108 and A109.
MOUNTING BRACKETS
15PA85-EX is used for top, bottom, back or end
mounting. It is furnished with each switch, except
OP-AR16 and OP-AR62.
15AP86-EX is ordered separately for top mounting
of plunger switches.
(Switches may also be direct mounted using 1032 NF screws.)
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
ROLLER LEVER WITHOUT LEVER
Note: For additional mounting dimensions refer to EX drawings
on page A125 (cross roller lever) and page A126 (plunger and
manually actuated switches) which are dimensionally identical
to their OP counterparts.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches LN Series
Compact Pre-Wired Enclosed Switches
Honeywell 1 Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A111
LN switches are designed to withstand rapid
hammer-blow actuation. Impact on the actuating plunger cannot reach the precision
switch unit inside. Individual seals around
each leadwire and cover plate protect
switch cavity from condensate, oil and dust.
Actuator Postion: The RH or LH suffix on the
end of the catalog listing means the actuator
is to the right or left side of the switch as
viewed from the nameplate.
FEATURES
1 Zinc die cast housing
1 Will withstand impact actuation
1 Positioning dowel holes
1 SPDT or 2-CKT DB circuitry
1 CSA Certified, file #LR41372
1 UL Recognized, file #E12252
1 No. 14 type HWM wire leads, conduit hub
seal
1 Conduit size 1⁄2 -14NPSM
1 NEMA, 1, 3, 4, and 13
For rapid response – off the shelf service, all bold face listings are normally stocked
items.
ELECTRICAL RATING
Circuitry Electrical Rating
A UL/CSA Rating:
15 amps, 125, 250 or 480 VAC;
1⁄8 Hp, 125 VAC; 1⁄4 Hp, 250 VAC;
1⁄2 amp, 125 VDC; 1⁄4 amp, 250 VDC.
Single-pole
Double-throw
E UL Rating:
10 amps, 125 or 250 VAC;
1⁄2 Hp, 125 VAC.
Two-circuit
Double-break
STRAIGHT PLUNGER ACTUATED SWITCHES
Left-hand actuator
ORDER GUIDE
O.F. O.T. D.T.
O.P. max. P.T. min. max.
Catalog ListingElec. Lead mm N mm mm mm
Rating Right-Hand Left-Hand Length* in. lbs. in. in. in.
A BZLN-RH BZLN-LH 1-ft. 41,7 ± 0,10 22,2 0,20-0,51 5,16 0,10
BZLN-RH5 BZLN-LH5 5-ft. 1.640 ± .004 5 .008-.020 .203 .004
E 1LN1-1-RH 1-ft. 41,0 ± 0,13 26,7 1,57 4,34 0,76
1LN1-5-RH 1LN1-5-LH 5-ft. 1.615 ± .005 6 .062 .171 .030
max.
ROLLER ARM ACTUATED SWITCHES
Right-hand actuator
ORDER GUIDE
Roller arm is field adjustable 260° vertically.
O.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
max. max. min. max.
Catalog Listing**Elec. Lead N mm mm mm
Rating Right-Hand Left-Hand Length* lbs. in. in. in.
A BZLN-2-RH BZLN-2-LH 1-ft. 13,3 1,98 11,91 0,36
BZLN-2-RH5 BZLN-2-LH5 5-ft. 3 .078 .469 .014
E 2LN1-3-RH 2LN1-3-LH 3-ft. 13,3 3,18 8,74 1,98
2LN1-5-RH 2LN1-5-LH 5-ft. 3 .125 .344 .078
N J Newtons
* In addition to 1-ft. (0,305 m) and 5-ft. (1,524 m),
other lead lengths are available.
** Replacement actuators: 6PA4-RH for right-hand,
6PA4-LH for left-hand versions.
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; P.T. —
Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential
Travel; O.P. — Operating Positions.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches
Explosion-Proof Switches
A112 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
MICRO SWITCH explosion-proof switches contain and cool the
escaping hot gases that otherwise could cause an explosion outside the switch. Most of them are UL-CSA listed. Appropriate file
reference numbers and copies of the card file are available from
your local Branch Office or MICRO SWITCH, Freeport, Illinois.
Switches described on the following pages, except as noted below,
are UL listed as follows:
NEMA TYPE 7, CLASS I
FLAMMABLE GASES OR VAPORS
Type 7 enclosures are for use indoors in
locations classified as Class I, Groups B, C,
or D by the National Electrical Code.
Group B — (only switches so noted in the
order guides include this listing). Atmospheres containing hydrogen or manufactured gas.
Group C — atmospheres containing diethyl
ether, ethylene, or cyclopropane.
Group D — Atmospheres containing gasoline, hexane, butane, naptha, propane, acetone, toluene, or isoprene.
DIVISION 1
Locations in which hazardous agents are
present under normal operating conditions.
DIVISION 2
Locations in which hazardous agents may
be present only in case of accidental rupture
or breakdown.
All MICRO SWITCH listings covered in Division 1 are also covered in the same groups
in Division 2.
NEMA TYPE 9, CLASS II
COMBUSTIBLE DUSTS
Type 9 enclosures are for use in indoor
locations classified as Class II, Groups E, F
or G, as defined in the National Electrical
Code.
Group E — Atmospheres containing metal
dust.
Group F — Atmospheres containing carbon
black, coal dust or coke dust.
Group G — Atmospheres containing flour,
starch, or grain dust.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™
GSX Series
Explosion-Proof Safety Switch
DESCRIPTION
Honeywell Sensing and Control MICRO SWITCH™ GSX
Series Explosion-Proof Safety Switches combines the worldclass MICRO SWITCH™ global safety switch (GSS) with our
superior explosion-proof housing from our LSX and BX product
lines, offering our customers the best of our engineering
expertise.
The positive break feature is designed to provide a safe failure
mode, ensuring the machine will not start, and therefore
supporting a safer working environment.
The GSX Series safety switch platform allows for over 10,000
actuator and switching option combinations, enabling our
customers to source most of their safety and explosion-proof
switch requirements from a single, global supplier.
FEATURES
• Snap-action co
• Positive action eaks current upon opening
of door or ap
• Explosion-proo
• NEMA 1, 3, 4, aling
• cULus, ATEX, IECEx
• Simple install
• Positive br
• Extensive swit actuator styles
BENEFITS
ntacts with positive break
push plunger br
erture
f housing for hazardous locations
12, 13 and IP67 se
ation
eak feature
ching options and
• Designed will open
and the mac
• Breaks curre aperture
Reduces risk that hazardous gases or dusts could cause
on • Meets IEC
• Designed to provide
machine will n
• Superior sea
POTENTIAL A
to ensure that even welded contacts
hine will stop in an emergency
nt upon opening of door or

an explosi
Ex standards
a safe failure mode, ensuring the
ot start
ling for different applications
PPLICATIONS
Gates, doors, access pa
• Hydrocarbon refinin
• Chemical proc
• Agricultural e
• Food processing
• Grain elevators
nels or cages on machinery in:
g essing
quipment
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™ GSX Series
SPECIFICATIONS
Designation and
Utilization Category
Rated Operational Current Ie (A) at Rated Operational Voltage Ue (V)
24 V 120 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 500 V 600 V
AC15 A300 — 6 A 3 A — — — —
AC15 A500 — 6 A 3 A 1,9 A 1,5 A 1,4 A —
AC15 A600 — 6 A 3 A 1,9 A 1,5 A 1,4 A 1,2 A
DC13 Q300 2,8 A 0,55 A 0,27 A — — — —
Rated thermal current (Ith) 10 A Sealing IP67; NEMA 1, 3, 4, 12, 13
Rated impulse withstand
(Uimp)
2500 V Pollution degree 3
R 0 V, 600 V Operating temperature
range
to 158 °F] -40 °C to 70 °C [-40 °Fated insulation voltage 300 V, 50
(Ui)
Short-circuit protective
device (type/
rating)
Expected mechanical
life maximum
Class J fuse
(10 A/600 V)
1,000,000 operations
C
c onditional short-circuit
urrent
1000 A — —
Complies with:
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, as amended by directive 93/68/EEC.
Machinery Directive 98/37/EEC only as the directives relate to the components being used in a safety function.
IEC/EN60947-1, IEC/EN60947-5-1.
2 www.honeywell.com/sensing
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Explosion-Proof Safety Switch
NOMENCLATURE TREE
Honeywell Sensing and Control 3
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™ GSX Series
Figure 1. Side rotary head with standard roller
Figure 2. Pin plunger Figure 3. Top roller plunger Figure 4. Top roller lever
4 www.honeywell.com/sensing
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Sensing and Control
Honeywell
1985 Douglas Drive North
Golden Valley, Minnesota 55422
www.honeywell.com/sensing
004764-1-EN IL50 GLO Printed in USA
July 2008
Copyright © 2008 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.
ORDER GUIDE
Listing Description
GSXA42A1E 0.5 in NPT housing 2NC/1NO side rotary Ø 0.75 in x 0.25 in bronze roller
GSXA42B 0.5 in NPT housing 2NC/1NO pin plunger
GSXA42C 0.5 in NPT housing 2NC/1NO top roller plunger
GSXA42D 0.5 in NPT housing 2NC/1NO top roller lever
GSXA46A1E 0.5 in NPT housing 3NC/1NO side rotary Ø 0.75 in x 0.25 in bronze roller
GSXA46B 0.5 in NPT housing 3NC/1NO pin plunger
GSXA46C 0.5 in NPT housing 3NC/1NO top roller plunger
GSXA46D 0.5 in NPT housing 3NC/1NO top roller lever
GSXC42A1E 20 mm housing 2NC/1NO side rotary Ø 0.75 in x 0.25 in bronze roller
GSXC42B 20 mm housing 2NC/1NO pin plunger
GSXC42C 20 mm housing 2NC/1NO top roller plunger
GSXC42D 20 mm housing 2NC/1NO top roller lever
GSXC46A1E 20 mm housing 3NC/1NO side rotary Ø 0.75 in x 0.25 in bronze roller
GSXC46B 20 mm housing 3NC/1NO pin plunger
GSXC46C 20 mm housing 3NC/1NO top roller plunger
GSXC46D 20 mm housing 3NC/1NO top roller lever
WARNING
MISUSE OF DOCUMENTATION
• The information presented in this product sheet is for
reference only. Do not use this document as a product
installation guide.
• , operation, and mai
d in the instru
each product.
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in
death or serious injury.
Complete installation
information is provide
ntenance
ctions supplied with
WARNING
PERSONAL INJURY
DO NOT USE these products as safety or emergency stop
devices or in any other application lure of the
product could result in personal injury.
Failure to comply with these instructions could result
in death or serious injury.
where fai
WARRANTY/REMEDY
Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as being free of
defective materials and faulty workmanship. Honeywell’s
standard product warranty applies unless agreed to otherwise
by Honeywell in writing; please refer to your order
acknowledgement or consult your local sales office for specific
warranty details. If warranted goods are returned to Honeywell
during the period of coverage, Honeywell will repair or replace,
at its option, without charge those items it finds defective. The
foregoing is buyer’s sole remedy and is in lieu of all other
warranties, expressed or implied, including those of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. In no
event shall Honeywell be liable for consequential, special,
or indirect damages.
While we provide application assistanc personally, through
our literature and the Honeywell web site, it is up to the
er to deter ct in the
tion.
Specifications may change without notice. The information we
supply is believed to be accurate and reliable as of this
printing. However, we assume no responsibility for its use.
SALES AND SERVICE
Honeywell serves its customers through a worldwide network
of sales offices, representatives and distributors. For
application assistance, current specifications, pricing or name
of the nearest Authorized Distributor, contact your local sales
office or:
E-mail: info.sc@honeywell.com
Internet: www.honeywell.com/sensing
Phone and Fax:
Asia Pacific +65 6355-2828
+65 6445-3033 Fax
Europe +44 (0) 1698 481481
+44 (0) 1698 481676 Fax
Latin America +1-305-805-8188
+1-305-883-8257 Fax
USA/Canada +1-800-537-6945
+1-815-235-6847
+1-815-235-6545 Fax
e custom
applica
mine the suitability of the produ
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™
BX/BX2 Series
Hazardous Area Switches
DESCRIPTION
The MICRO SWITCH™ BX/BX2 Series is ideal for outdoor
use or in adverse environments where a combination of
explosion proof plus sealing requirements are needed. To
comply with explosion-proof requirements the BX/BX2 has
flame paths within the housing, which cool exploding gases
below the ignition temperature before they reach explosive
gases surrounding the housing. Flame paths on the BX/BX2
are (1) an extended plunger between the switch cavity and
head and (2) the cover-housing threads on the front of the
switch.
While the MICRO SWITCH™ BX Series features an
aluminum housing, the MICRO SWITCH™ BX2 Series has a
316L stainless steel housing that provides enhanced corrosion
resistance in applications exposed to aggressive, caustic
agents, as well as those often present in chemical processing
plants, off-shore/near-shore sites, and other hazardous areas.
These products are weather sealed for outdoor use and
designed for explosive gas/dust environments. The BX/BX2
Series is directly interchangeable with the LSX. Adapter plate
not required. All heads are field adjustable at 90° increments.
Honeywell explosion-proof switches are designed
specifically for use in hazardous location applications. The
BX/BX2 enclosure is sealed for protection against corrosion,
water, dust and oil as defined in IEC60529. The temperature
rating for these products depends upon the seal material used.
Products using a fluorosilicone seal have a rating of -40 °C to
70 °C [-40 °F to 158 °F]. Products using a fluorocarbon seal
have a rating of -12 °C [10 °F] to 70 °C [158 °F]. These
enclosures meet Ex d IIC T6, Ta -40 °C to 70 °C and Ta -12 °C
to 70 °C, respectively. As well as Ex d tD A21 IP67 T85 °C.
SIRA 00ATEX1037X and IECEx SIR 07.0102X.
Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety
Requirements has been assured by compliance with
EN 60079-0:2006, EN 60079-1:2007, EN 61241-0:2004, EN
61241-0:2006, IEC 60079-0:2004 4th Ed., IEC 60079-0:2007 6th
Ed., IEC 61241-0:2004 1st Ed., and IEC 61241-1:2004 1st Ed.
The maximum contruction gap (ic) is less than that required by
Table 2 of EN/IEC60079-1:2007, clause 5.2.2 as detailed
below.
Flame path Max. gap Comment
Push rod & bearing 0,076 mm Cylindrical spigot joint
All BX2 conduit types and BX products with conduit types
1/2-14NPT, 3/4-14NPT also meet the North American
Hazardous Locations Designation: NEMA 7 - Class I, Groups B,
C and D; NEMA 9 - Class II, Groups E, F and G and comply
with UL Standard: UL 894.
FEATURES
• BX (M20, PG13.5, or PF1/2 conduit): ATEX and IEC Ex
• BX (1/2-14 NPT, 3/4-14 NPT): UL, CSA, ATEX, IEC Ex
• BX2: UL, cUL, ATEX IEC Ex
• BX/BX2: IP67; NEMA 1, 3, 4, 6, 13
• BX (1/2-14 NPT, 3/4-14 NPT) and BX2: NEMA 7, 9 (Div. 1,
Class I, Groups B, C, & D Div 1, Class II, Groups E, F, & G)
• BX/BX2: II 2 G; Ex d IIC T6 • II 2 D; Ex d tD A21 T85°C
• Choice of housing: aluminum or 316L stainless steel
• Diverse conduit selection for wide range of applications
• Variety of heads and non-sparking actuators
• 10 A continuous carry electrical rating
• Choice of silver or gold contacts
• External and internal grounding screw
• Fluorocarbon and low-temperature sealing
POTENTIAL APPLICATIONS
• Control valves and actuators
• Offshore drilling
• Grain elevators
• Petrochemical plants
• Chemical plants
• Waste treatment
• Paint booths
• Mining conveyors
• Pulp and paper coating
• Hazardous waste handling
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™ BX/BX2 Series
2 www.honeywell.com/sensing
SELECTION GUIDE
Features
BX4A3K BX24A3K BX4A3K-1A BX24A3K-1A BX24P4L
Description
Side rotary, momentary, no
lever, 1NO/1NC
Side rotary, momentary, with
lever, 1NO/1NC
Side rotary, momentary, low pretravel, 2NO/2NC
Actuator
Lever not included - reference
lever required accessory
1.5 in fixed length lever with front
mounted nylon roller
(.75 in dia. x .25 in wide)
Lever not included - reference
lever required accessory
Conduit Thread 20 mm conduit 20 mm conduit 20 mm conduit
Circuitry
1NC 1NO single-pole doublethrow, snap-action, double-break
1NC 1NO single-pole doublethrow, snap-action, double-break
2NO 2 NC double-pole doublethrow, snap-action, double-break
Approvals ATEX, IEC Ex
UL, cUL, ATEX
IEC Ex
ATEX, IEC Ex
UL, cUL, ATEX
IEC Ex
UL, cUL, ATEX, IEC Ex
Actuator Side rotary Side rotary Side rotary
Pretravel 15° 15° 9°
Overtravel 60° 60° 68°
Differential Travel 5° 5° 4°
Operating Torque 0,45 N m max. [4 in-lb max.]
UL File # – – –
CSA File # – – –
Sealing
IP67; NEMA 1,
3, 4, 6, 13
IP67; NEMA 1,
3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 13
IP67; NEMA 1,
3, 4, 6, 13
IP67; NEMA 1,
3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 13
IP67; NEMA 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 13
Product Type Weather-sealed, explosion-proof limit switches/IEC Ex approvals
Ampere Rating 10 A (Thermal)
Supply Voltage 600 Vac and 250 Vdc max.
Operating
Temperature Range
-40 °C to 70 °C [ -40 °F to 158 °F]
Housing Material Aluminum (BX Series); 316L Stainless Steel (BX2 Series)
Housing Type BX non plug-in
Sealed Explosion-proof
Availability Global
Agency Approvals and
Standards
• BX (M20, PG13.5, or PF1/2 conduit): ATEX and IEC Ex
• BX (1/2-14 NPT, 3/4-14 NPT): UL, CSA, ATEX, IEC Ex
• BX2: UL, cUL, ATEX IEC Ex
• BX/BX2: IP67; NEMA 1, 3, 4, 6, 13
• BX (1/2-14 NPT, 3/4-14 NPT) and BX2: NEMA 7, 9 (Div. 1, Class I, Groups B, C, & D Div 1, Class II,
Groups E, F, & G
• BX/BX2: II 2 G; Ex d IIC T6 • II 2 D; Ex d tD A21 T85°C)
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Hazardous Area Switches
Honeywell • Sensing and Control 3
SELECTION GUIDE
Features
BX4D3K BX4C3K BX24C4L BXA4L
Description Top roller plunger, 1NO/1NC
Top plunger
plain, 1NC/1NC
Top plunger plain,
2NO/2NC
Side rotary, momentary, no
lever, 2NO/2NC
Actuator N/A N/A
Lever not included - reference
lever required accessory
Conduit Thread 20mm conduit 20 mm conduit 3/4 in - 14NPT conduit
Circuitry
1NC 1NO single-pole doublethrow, snap-action, doublebreak
1NC 1NO
single-pole
double-throw,
snap-action,
double-break
2NO 2 NC
double-pole
double-throw,
snap-action,
double-break
2NC 2NO single-pole doublethrow, snap-Action, doublebreak
Approvals ATEX, IEC Ex ATEX, IEC Ex
UL, cUL, ATEX
IEC Ex
UL, CSA, ATEX, IEC Ex
Actuator Top roller plunger Top plunger Side rotary
Pretravel 1,78 mm [0.070 in] 1,78 mm [0.070 in] 15°
Overtravel 4,83 mm [0.190 in] 4,83 mm [0.190 in] 60°
Differential Travel 0,38 mm [0.015 in]
0,38 mm
[0.015 in]
0,51 mm
[0.020 in]

Operating Position
68.6 mm ± 1 mm
[2.700 in ± 0.040 in]
58.5 mm ± 0.76 mm
[2.305 in ± 0.030 in]

Operating Torque – – 0,45 N m max. [4 in-lb max.]
Operating Force 0,45 N max. [4 lb max.] 0,45 N max. [4 lb max.] –
UL File# – – E61730
CSA File # – – LR57327
Sealing IP67; NEMA 1, 3, 4, 6, 13
IP67; NEMA 1,
3, 4, 6, 13
IP67; NEMA 1, 3,
4, 6, 7, 9, 13
IP67; NEMA 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9,
13
Product Type Weather-sealed, explosion-proof limit switches/IEC Ex approvals
Ampere Rating 10 A (Thermal)
Supply Voltage 600 Vac and 250 Vdc max.
Operating Temperature
Range
-40 °C to 70 °C [ -40 °F to 158 °F]
Housing Material Aluminum (BX Series); 316L Stainless Steel (BX2 Series)
Housing Type BX non-plug-in
Sealed Explosion-proof
Availability Global
Agency Approvals and
Standards
• BX (M20, PG13.5, or PF1/2 conduit): ATEX and IEC Ex
• BX (1/2-14 NPT, 3/4-14 NPT): UL, CSA, ATEX, IEC Ex
• BX2: UL, cUL, ATEX IEC Ex
• BX/BX2: IP67; NEMA 1, 3, 4, 6, 13
• BX (1/2-14 NPT, 3/4-14 NPT) and BX2: NEMA 7, 9 (Div. 1, Class I, Groups B, C, & D Div 1,
Class II, Groups E, F, & G)
• BX/BX2: II 2 G; Ex d IIC T6 • II 2 D; Ex d tD A21 T85°C
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™ BX/BX2 Series
4 www.honeywell.com/sensing
SELECTION GUIDE
Features
BXP4L BX2P4L BXA3K BX2A3K BXC4L BX2C4L
Description
Side rotary, momentary, low pretravel, 2NO/2NC
Side rotary, momentary, no
lever, 1NO/1NC
Top plunger plain, 2NO/2NC
Actuator
Lever not included - reference
lever required accessory
Lever not included - reference
lever required accessory
N/A
Conduit Thread 3/4 in - 14NPT conduit 1/2 in - 14NPT conduit 3/4 in - 14NPT conduit
Circuitry
2NO 2 NC double-pole doublethrow, snap-action, double-break
1NC 1NO single-pole doublethrow, snap-action, double-break
2NO 2 NC double-pole doublethrow, snap-action, double-break
Approvals
UL, CSA,
ATEX, IEC Ex
UL, cUL, ATEX
IEC Ex
UL, CSA,
ATEX, IEC Ex
UL, cUL, ATEX
IEC Ex
UL, CSA,
ATEX, IEC Ex
UL, cUL, ATEX
IEC Ex
Actuator Side rotary Side rotary Top plunger
Pretravel 9° 15° 1,78 mm [0.070 in]
Overtravel 68° 60° 4,83 mm [0.190 in]
Differential Travel
(D.T.)
4° 5° 0,51 mm [0.020 in]
Operating Position – –
58.5 mm ± 0.76 mm
[2.305 in ± 0.030 in]
Operating Force – – 0,45 N max. [4 lb max.]
Operating Torque 0,45 N m max. [4 in-lb max.]
UL File # – E61730 – –
CSA File # – LR57327 – –
Sealing IP67; NEMA 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 13 IP67; NEMA 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 13 IP67; NEMA 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 13
Product Type Weather-sealed, explosion-proof limit switches/IEC Ex approvals
Ampere Rating 10 A (Thermal)
Supply Voltage 600 Vac and 250 Vdc max.
Operating
Temperature Range
-40 °C to 70 °C [ -40 °F to 158 °F]
Housing Material Aluminum (BX Series); 316L Stainless Steel (BX2 Series)
Housing Type BX non plug-in
Sealed Explosion-proof
Operating Force (O.F.) 0,45 N max. [4 in lb max.]
Availability Global
Agency Approvals and
Standards
• BX (M20, PG13.5, or PF1/2 conduit): ATEX and IEC Ex
• BX (1/2-14 NPT, 3/4-14 NPT): UL, CSA, ATEX, IEC Ex
• BX2: UL, cUL, ATEX IEC Ex
• BX/BX2: IP67; NEMA 1, 3, 4, 6, 13
• BX (1/2-14 NPT, 3/4-14 NPT) and BX2: NEMA 7, 9 (Div. 1, Class I, Groups B, C, & D Div 1, Class II,
Groups E, F, & G)
• BX/BX2: II 2 G; Ex d IIC T6 • II 2 D; Ex d tD A21 T85°C
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Hazardous Area Switches
Honeywell • Sensing and Control 5
BX MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only) mm/in
Conduit sizes 1/2-14NPT, 3/4-14NPT, M20, PG13.5, PF1/2 are available for each switch type and carry ATEX and IEC Ex
approvals. 1/2-14 NPT, 3/4-14 NPT, and M20 carry UL and CSA approvals
Verify that the mating threaded fitting is identical with the conduit thread shown on the product nameplate
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MICRO SWITCH™ BX/BX2 Series
6 www.honeywell.com/sensing
BX2 MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only) mm/in
Conduit sizes 1/2-14NPT, 3/4-14NPT, M20, PG13.5, PF1/2 are available for each switch type and carry ATEX and IEC Ex
approvals. 1/2-14 NPT, 3/4-14 NPT, and M20 carry UL and CSA approvals
Verify that the mating threaded fitting is identical with the conduit thread shown on the product nameplate
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Hazardous Area Switches
Honeywell • Sensing and Control 7
BX Levers –
Required
Accessories
LSZ51A
LSZ51C
LSZ52C
LSZ52J
LSZ52K
Lever style Roller – standard Roller – standard Roller – adjustable Roller – adjustable Roller – adjustable
Comment Roller - standard;
material: nylon;
roller mounted on
front of lever
Roller - standard;
material: nylon;
roller mounted on
back of lever
Roller - adjustable;
material: nylon;
roller mounted on
front of lever
Roller - adjustable;
material: nylon;
roller mounted on
front of lever
Roller - adjustable;
material: nylon;
roller mounted on
front of lever
Radius 38,1 mm
[1.5 in]
38,1 mm
[1.5 in]
38,1 mm to 88,9 mm
[1.5 in to 3.5 in]
38,1 mm to 88,9 mm
[1.5 in to 3.5 in]
38,1 mm to 88,9 mm
[1.5 in to 3.5 in]
Diameter 19,05 mm
[0.75 in]
19,05 mm
[0.75 in]
19,05 mm
[0.75 in]
25,4 mm
[1.0 in]
38,1 mm
[1.5 in]
Width 6,35 mm
[0.25 in]
6,35 mm
[0.25 in]
6,35 mm
[0.25 in]
12,7 mm
[0.5 in]
6,35 mm
[0.25 in]
Product type Lever
Availability Global
BX Levers –
Required
Accessories
LSZ53E
LSZ53S
LSZ54M
LSZ55A
LSZ55C
Lever style Roller – yoke Roller – yoke Rod – standard Roller with offset Roller with offset
Comment Roller - yoke;
material: nylon;
roller mounted on
back-front of lever
Roller - yoke;
material: nylon;
roller mounted on
back-back of lever
Rod - standard;
material: aluminum;
material: aluminum
Roller - with offset;
material: nylon;
roller mounted on
back of lever
Roller - with offset;
material: nylon;
roller mounted on
front of lever
Radius 38,1 mm
[1.5 in]
38,1 mm
[1.5 in]
139,7 mm
[5.5 in]
38,1 mm
[1.5 in]
38,1 mm
[1.5 in]
Diameter 19,05 mm
[0.75 in]
19,05 mm
[0.75 in]
- 19,05 mm
[0.75 in]
19,05 mm
[0.75 in]
Width 6,35 mm
[0.25 in]
6,35 mm
[0.25 in]
- 6,35 mm
[0.25 in]
6,35 mm
[0.25 in]
Product type Lever
Availability Global
BX2 Levers –
Required
Accessories
LS2Z51A
L2SZ51R
LS2Z52A
Lever style Non-sparking roller – standard Non-sparking roller – standard Non-sparking roller – adjustable
Comment Roller - standard; material:
nylon; roller mounted on front
of lever
Roller - standard; material: nylon;
roller mounted on back of lever
Roller - adjustable; material: nylon;
roller mounted on front of lever
Radius 38,1 mm [1.5 in] 38,1 mm [1.5 in] 38,1 mm to 88,9 mm
[1.5 in to 3.5 in]
Diameter 19,05 mm [0.75 in] 40,38 mm [1.59 in] 19,05 mm [0.75 in]
Width 12,7 mm [0.5 in] 6,35 mm [0.25 in] 6,35 mm [0.25 in]
Product type Lever
Availability Global
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Sensing and Control
Honeywell
1985 Douglas Drive North
Golden Valley, MN 55422
www.honeywell.com/sensing
002306-4-EN IL50 GLO Printed in USA
May 2010
Copyright © 2010 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.
WARNING
IF USED IN APPLICATIONS CONCERNING
HUMAN SAFETY
• Use only NC direct opening (“positive opening”/”positive
break”) contacts, identified by the symbol.
• Do NOT use flexible/adjustable actuators. Only use
actuators designed for safety applications.
• Do NOT defeat, tamper, remove, or bypass this switch.
• Hazardous voltage, disconnect power before servicing
• Strictly adhere to all installation and maintenance
instructions
• Consult with local safety agencies and their
requirements when designing a machine-control link,
interface and all control elements that affect safety.
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in
death or serious injury.
WARNING
OPENING PRODUCTS HAZARD
DO NOT OPEN these products when energized or in a
flammable gas atmosphere.
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in
death or serious injury.
WARRANTY/REMEDY
Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as being free of
defective materials and faulty workmanship. Honeywell’s
standard product warranty applies unless agreed to otherwise
by Honeywell in writing; please refer to your order
acknowledgement or consult your local sales office for specific
warranty details. If warranted goods are returned to Honeywell
during the period of coverage, Honeywell will repair or replace,
at its option, without charge those items it finds defective. The
foregoing is buyer’s sole remedy and is in lieu of all other
warranties, expressed or implied, including those of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. In no
event shall Honeywell be liable for consequential, special,
or indirect damages.
While we provide application assistance personally, through
our literature and the Honeywell web site, it is up to the
customer to determine the suitability of the product in the
application.
Specifications may change without notice. The information we
supply is believed to be accurate and reliable as of this
printing. However, we assume no responsibility for its use.
WARNING
IMPROPER CONDUIT THREAD USE
DO NOT USE any other conduit thread than the one identified
on the product. Verify that the mating threaded fitting is
identical with the conduit thread shown on the product
nameplate.
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in
death or serious injury.
WARNING
MISUSE OF DOCUMENTATION
• The information presented in this product sheet is for
reference only. Do not use this document as a product
installation guide.
• Complete installation, operation, and maintenance
information is provided in the instructions supplied with
each product.
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in
death or serious injury.
SALES AND SERVICE
Honeywell serves its customers through a worldwide network
of sales offices, representatives and distributors. For
application assistance, current specifications, pricing or name
of the nearest Authorized Distributor, contact your local sales
office or:
E-mail: info.sc@honeywell.com
Internet: www.honeywell.com/sensing
Phone and Fax:
Asia Pacific +65 6355-2828
+65 6445-3033 Fax
Europe +44 (0) 1698 481481
+44 (0) 1698 481676 Fax
Latin America +1-305-805-8188
+1-305-883-8257 Fax
USA/Canada +1-800-537-6945
+1-815-235-6847
+1-815-235-6545 Fax
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches LSX Series
Weather-Sealed Explosion-Proof Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A113
LSX switches are for use either indoors or
outdoors in hazardous atmospheres as they
are a completely sealed explosion-proof device. Mounting hole location and tracking is
same as the long established MICRO
SWITCH ML-E1 explosion-proof switch.
An optional mounting plate provides the
same tracking and mounting as the standard HDLS. The majority of HDLS operating
heads and circuitry options are available on
the LSX.
Standard HDLS levers are used, but because of explosion-proof requirements, only nylon rollers or other non-sparking material can be selected. Plunger and cat whisker
types listed in the LSX order guide are of
non-sparking material.
SEALS
Application proven HDLS head seals are
retained to seal the top of the LSX. The
circular cover on the front is easily unscrewed to expose the switching elements for
wiring or replacement. A screwdriver or bar
used on the wrenching lugs extending from
the front of the cover allows easy removal or
tightening. An O-ring seal is located between the housing and cover.
The LSX withstands pressure of an internal
explosion and cools the exploding gases
below the kindling temperature of the explosive atmosphere. Flame paths are provided
by the cover-housing threads and an extended plunger between the switch cavity
and head.
FEATURES
1 Sealing - applicable portions of NEMA 1,
3, 4, 6, 7, 9, and 13.
1 Tracking interchangeability with MICRO
SWITCH ML-E1 and HDLS.
1 Variety of heads and non-sparking
actuators.
1 Field adjustability matches switch to
application.
1 Momentary, maintained, random
sequence, or center neutral action.
1 10 amps continuous carry electrical
rating.
1 Choice of silver or gold contacts.
1 1⁄2 or 3⁄4 inch conduit opening.
1 UL Listed, file #E61730
1 CSA Certified, file #LR57327
1 Internal grounding screw.
NEMA standards: 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9 and 13. UL
listed and CSA certified: Class I, Div. 1,
Groups B, C and D. Class II, Div. 1, Groups
E, F and G.
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches LSX Series
Weather-Sealed Explosion-Proof Switches
A114 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
HOW TO ORDER
The order guide shows the option codes which are added to the LSX prefix to
specify the operating head, body and circuitry, assembly modifications (if
desired) and actuator type.
The example given below is LSXA3K-1A. This is an explosion-proof LSX
switch with the standard side rotary momentary-action head (A), single-pole
circuitry and 1⁄2 in. conduit opening (3K). Since no modification codes are
listed, it is adjusted for both clockwise (CW) and counterclockwise (CCW)
operation, with the actuator shaft facing the front (label side) of the switch.
The actuator (-1A) is in a 1.5 in. lever with a .75 in. nylon roller on the open side.
There are list price adders for double-pole circuitry and the actuators. (Levers
may also be ordered separately by specifying the LSX listings shown in the
actuator code description.)
ORDER GUIDE
LSX standard weather-sealed explosion-proof switch.
Typical Catalog Listing: LSX A 3K
Head Code
A*
Side rotary. Momentary.
P
Side rotary. Low
differential travel.
Momentary.
R*
Side rotary. Low torque.
Momentary.
V
Adjustable top plunger.
Momentary.
H
Side rotary. Low
differential travel and low
torque. Momentary.
N*
Side rotary. Maintained
contact.
B*
Top rotary. Momentary.
W*
Adjustable side plunger.
Momentary.
C
Top plunger. Momentary.
D
Top roller plunger.
Momentary.
E*
Side plunger.
Momentary.
F*
Side roller plunger.
Momentary.
J
Wobble
stick.
Momentary.
K
Cat
whisker.
Momentary.
* Available with a Single Pole N.C. Direct Acting contact.
Electrical Rating D. To order, use 3N for body and circuitry
code.
Body and Contacts
Circuitry Code
3K Silver
3E Gold plated
Single-pole, 1 N.O., 1
N.C., 1⁄2 in. conduit.†
4K 3⁄4 in. conduit†
4L Silver
4S Gold plated
Double-pole, 2 N.O., 2
N.C., 3⁄4 in. conduit.†
7L Silver 1⁄2 in. conduit†
7S Gold plated
3N SPNC Direct Acting
L
Side rotary. Sequence
operation.
4M Silver
4T Gold plated
Sequential. Pole 1
operates before Pole 2
(CW, CCW or both). 3⁄4 in.
conduit.†
7T Gold plated 1⁄2 in.
conduit.
M
Side rotary. Center
neutral.
4N Silver
4U Gold plated
Center neutral. Pole 1
operates CCW, Pole 2
operates CW. 3⁄4 in.
conduit.†
7U Gold contacts 1⁄2 in.
conduit
V
V
V
Only
Only
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches LSX Series
Weather-Sealed Explosion-Proof Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A115
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
Same as HDLS, see page A34.
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
See next page.
TEMPERATURE RATINGS
Same as HDLS, see page A56.
ENVIRONMENTAL SEAL PERFORMANCE
Same as HDLS, see page A56.
LOW TEMPERATURE and HIGH TEMPERATURE SEALED
See next page.
1A
Actuation
Direction
Modification Code
(No additional cost.)
No Code.
CW and CCW. (Head
types A, B, H, L, P, R.)
1
CW operation.
(Optional with head
types A, B, H, L, P, R.)
2
CCW operation.
(Optional with head
types A, B, H, L, P, R.)
Head/Actuator
Orientation
Modification Code
(No additional cost.)
No Code.
Side rotary heads
assembled with
actuator shaft facing
front. Roller on top
roller plungers
assembled parallel to
mounting surface.
3
Head
assembled
with
actuator
shaft to
right side.
(Optional with head
types A, E, F, H, L, M,
N, P, R.)
4
Head
assembled
with
actuator
shaft to left side.
(Optional with head
types A, E, F, H, L, M,
N, P, R.)
5
Head
assembled
with
actuator
shaft to
back of
switch. (Optional with
head types A, E, F, H,
L, M, N, P, R.)
6
Roller on
top roller
plungers
assembled
perpendicular
to mounting surface.
(Optional with head
type D.)
8
Roller on side plunger
is assembled in vertical
position.
Actuator Code
1
LSZ51 lever
(no roller).
1A
LSZ51A lever
with .75 in. nylon
roller on front side.
1C
LSZ51C lever
with nylon roller
on back side.
2C
LSZ52C
adjustable
lever (1.5-3.5 in.) with .75 in. nylon
roller.
2J
LSZ52J
adjustable
lever (1.5-3.5 in.) with 1 in. nylon roller.
2K
LSZ52K
adjustable
lever (1.5-3.5 in.) with 1.5 in. nylon
roller.
3S
LSZ53S yoke lever
with .75 in. nylon
rollers (same side).
3E
LSZ53E yoke lever
with .75 in. nylon
roller (one ea. side).
4M
LSZ54M
aluminum rod
actuator.
4
LSZ54 hub for
rod actuator.
5
LSZ55 offset lever
(no roller).
5A
LSZ55A offset lever
with .75 in. nylon
roller on back side.
5C
LSZ55C offset lever
with .75 in. nylon
roller on front side.
7A
Wobble stick actuator. (Use with head
type J only.)
8A
Cat whisker actuator. (Use with head
type K only.)
1.5 in. long levers, except where noted.
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches LSX Series
Weather-Sealed Explosion-Proof Switches
A116 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
Rotary actuated switches
Side Rotary
Center Top Rotary
Momentary Maintained Sequence Neutral Momentary
LSXP LSXH LSXL LSXM
LSXA Low Diff. LSXR Low Diff. (Double Pole (Double Pole
Standard Travel Low Torque Low Torque LSXN Only) Only) LSXB
Pretravel max. 15° 9° 15° 9° 65° 1st step 15° 18° 25°
2nd step 10°
additional
Overtravel min. 60° 66° 60° 66° 20° 48° 57° 100°
Differential SPDT DPDT SPDT DPDT SPDT DPDT SPDT DPDT SPDT DPDT SPDT DPDT
Travel max. 5° 7° 3° 4° 5° 7° 3° 4° 30° 35° 5° 10° 10° 12°
Operating 0,45 Nm 0,45 Nm 0,19 0,19 Nm 0,45 Nm 0,45 Nm 0,45 Nm 0,28 Nm
Torque max. 4 in. lbs. 4 in. lbs. 1.7 in. lbs. 1.7 in. lbs. 4 in. lbs. 4 in. lbs. 4 in. lbs. 2.5 in. lbs.
Operating 10 to 250°F 30 to 250°F 10 to 250°F 30 to 250°F
Temp. Range –12 to 121°C –1 to 121°C –12 to 121°C –1 to 121°C
Nm J Newton meters
Plunger actuated switches
Momentary
LSXC LSXD LSXE LSXF
Top Plunger Top Roller Plunger Side Plunger Side Roller Plunger
Pretravel max. 1,78mm 1,78mm 2,54mm 2,54mm
.070 in. .070 in. .100 in. .100 in.
Differential Travel max. SPDT DPDT SPDT DPDT
0,38mm 0,51mm 0,38mm 0,51mm 1,14mm 1,14mm
.015 in. .020 in. .015 in. .020 in. .045 in. .045 in.
Overtravel min. 4,83mm 4,83mm 4,83mm 4,83mm
.190 in. .190 in. .190 in. .190 in.
Operating Force max. 17,8 N 17,8 N 26,7 N 26,7 N
4 lbs. 4 lbs. 6 lbs. 6 lbs.
Operating Point 58,5 ± 0,76mm 68,6 ± 1mm 33,0 ± 0,76mm 44,1 ± 1mm
2.305 ± .030 in. 2.700 ± .040 in. 1.300 ± .030 in. 1.735 ± .040 in.
Operating Temperature Range –12 to 93°C
10 to 200°F
Wobble Actuated Switches
Momentary
LSXJ LSXK Cat Whisker
Delrin Rod (Wire)
Radius approx.
Pretravel max. 25,4mm 50,8mm
1.0 in. 2.0 in.
Operating Force max. 2,78 N 1,39 N
10 oz. 5.0 oz.
Operating Temperature Range –12 to 93°C
10 to 200°F
N J Newtons
COMPLETELY FLUOROCARBON-
SEALED AND LOW TEMPERATURE
SWITCHES
Completely fluorocarbon-sealed and low
temperature construction LSX switches are
available. See page A42 for a full description
of both of these options.
How to order
For fluorocarbon-sealed switches, insert
the additional letters Y and C in the appropriate places in the standard catalog listing; for
low temperature versions insert the additional letters Y and B. Examples follow:
LSXA3K—standard side rotary switch
LSXYAC3K—completely fluorocarbonsealed version of the LSXA3K
LSXA3K—standard side rotary switch
LSXYAB3K—low temperature version of
the LSXA3K
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches LSX Series
Weather-Sealed Explosion-Proof Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A117
ADAPTER PLATE
Catalog Listing LSXZ4022 adapter plate enables the explosion-proof LSX to be mounted on existing HDLS mounting holes. The
LSX has a recessed back into which the
adapter plate fits and mounts, using two
screws (furnished).
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Operating Heads
Catalog Listing
Switch Type Operating Head Only
LSXA LSZ1A
LSXB LSZ1B
LSXC LSXZ1C
LSXD LSXZ1D
LSXE LSXZ1E
LSXF LSXZ1F
LSXH LSZ1H
LSXJ LSZ1JGA
LSXK LSXZ1KHA
LSXL LSZ1L
LSXM LSZ1M
LSXN LSZ1N
LSXP LSZ1P
LSXR LSZ1R
Contact Blocks
Circuitry Contact Block
Single Pole LSXZ3K
Double Pole LSXZ3L
Sequence or Center Neutral LSXZ3M
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
TOP SIDE
ROTARY ROTARY
Conduit Openings
(LSXA3, LSXB3, LSXH3, LSXN3,
LSXP3 and LSXR3 have 1⁄2-14 NPT.
LSXA4, LSXB4, LSXH4, LSXLR,
LSXM4, LSXN4, LSXP4, and LSXR4 have 3⁄4-14 NPT.
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches LSX Series
Weather-Sealed Explosion-Proof Switches
A118 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
TOP PLUNGER TOP ROLLER PLUNGER
CAT WHISKER WOBBLE STICK
TOP PLUNGER TOP ROLLER PLUNGER
Conduit Openings
(LSXJ3, and LSXK3 have 1⁄2-14 NPT.)
(LSXJ4 and LSXK4 have 3⁄4-14 NPT.)
Conduit Openings
(LSXE3 and LSXF3 have 1⁄2-14 NPT.
LSXE4 and LSXF4 have 3⁄4-14 NPT).
Conduit Openings
(LSXC3 and LSXD3 have 1⁄2-14 NPT.
LSXC4 and LSXD4 have 3⁄4-14 NPT).
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches CLSX Series
Momentary Explosion-Proof Cable Pull Limit Switches: For Signaling Applications
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A119
MOMENTARY (CONTACT SWITCH) OPERATING HEAD
Momentary CLSX Cable Pull Limit Switches are designed for signaling applications; they
are not to be used as emergency stop devices. (For emergency stop applications, see the
Maintained Explosion-Proof Cable Pull Limit Switch in the Safety Products Catalog.)
When using direct acting contacts, Momentary Cable Pull Limit Switches provide a means to
manually force disconnection of a normally closed control circuit by pulling on an attached
cable. Momentary switches cause contact transfer if the cable is manually pulled and held.
When the cable is released, switch contacts return to their original state. Momentary
switches have either direct-acting contacts or snap-action contacts.
SEALS
CLSX Switches are for use either indoors or outdoors in hazardous atmospheres as they are
a completely sealed explosion-proof device.
Application proven HDLS head seals are retained to seal the top of the CLSX. The circular
cover on the front is easily unscrewed to expose the switching elements for wiring or
replacement. A screwdriver or bar used on the wrenching lugs extending from the front of
the cover allows easy removal or tightening. An O-ring seal is located between the housing
and cover.
The CLSX withstands pressure of an internal explosion and cools the exploding gases
below the kindling temperature of the explosive atmosphere. Flame paths are provided by
the cover-housing threads and an extended plunger between the switch cavity and head.
FEATURES
1 Optional direct acting contacts enhance
reliability
1 Cable length may be up to 200 ft. in a
straight line
1 Sealing meets applicable portions of
NEMA 1, 3, 4, 7, 9 and 13
1 10 amps continuous carry electrical
rating
1 1/2 or 3/4 inch conduit opening
1 UL Listed
1 CSA Certified
1 Internal grouding screw
NEMA standards: 1, 3, 4, 7, 9 and 13. UL
listed and CSA certified: Class I, Div. 1,
Groups B, C and D. Class II, Div. 1, Groups
E, F and G.
Typical Applications
1 Petroleum Plants
1 Chemical Plants
1 Mining Conveyors
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches CLSX Series
Momentary Explosion-Proof Cable Pull Limit Switches: For Signaling Applications
A120 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
TECHNICAL DATA CLSX SERIES SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical
Rate thermal current Ith = 10 A
Rate insulation voltage Ui = 660 VAC/660 VDC
Impulse voltage Uimp = 2.5 kV
Contact resistance <25 milliohms
Operating rating AC15 U = 600 V: I = 1.2 A
U = 240 V: I = 3 A
U = 120 V: I = 6 A
DC13 U = 250 V: I = 0.27 A
U = 24 V: I = 2.8 A
UL/CSA A600/Q300
Mechanical
Protection class NEMA 1, 3, 4, 7, 9 and 13
Mechanical life 105 operations maximum
Temperature Range -1° to 70°C (30° to 158°F)
Terminal identification Numbering to EN50013
Head/housing material Zinc die cast
EXAMPLE CATALOG LISTING
Catalog Listing Description
B4B-1 Blue Body/Black Head – 1/2N NTP
Conduit Tap, 1NO – 1NC Direct Acting, Momentary, Head Assembled
with Actuator to the Left
CLSX ORDER GUIDE
CLSX –
MODIFICATION CODES
(HEAD ORIENTATION)
NO NUMBER INDICATES
NO MODIFICATION
1 HEAD ASSEMBLED WITH
ACTUATOR TO THE LEFT
2 HEAD ASSEMBLED WITH
ACTUATOR TO THE FRONT
3 HEAD ASSEMBLED WITH
ACTUATOR TO THE
MOUNTING SURFACE
HEAD CODE
B MOMENTARY
BASIC SWITCH CODE
1 1NC DIRECT ACTING
2 1NO – 1NC SNAP ACTION (Monitoring Only)
4 1NO – 1NC DIRECT ACTING
BODY CODE
B BLUE BODY/BLACK HEAD – 1/2N NTP CONDUIT TAP
E BLUE BODY/BLACK HEAD – 3/4N NTP CONDUIT TAP
CLSX SERIES – BASE PRICE
EXPLOSION – PROOF SINGLE HEAD CABLE PULL LIMIT SWITCH
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches EX Series
Explosion-Proof Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A121
Single-Conduit
Connect Switch*
* See page A124 for double conduit connect switches.
EX switches feature the smallest UL-listed
housings available for use in hazardous locations. Flame paths within the housing
cool exploding gases below the kindling
temperature before they reach the explosive
gases surrounding the housing.
The enclosed switching unit, which is held in
place by screws, is accessible when the
cover plate is removed. A tapped conduit
opening is located in one end of one group
of EX listings (pages A122-A123); while a
second group (page A124) has a conduit
opening in each end of the switch.
These switches are not sealed against liquids and are not intended to be subjected to
liquid splash or for outdoor applications. If a
sealed explosion-proof switch is required,
refer to the type CX and LSX.
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
Circuitry Electrical Ratings
A UL/CSA Rating:
15 amps, 125, 250 or 480 VAC;
1⁄8 Hp, 125 VAC; 1⁄4 Hp, 250 VAC;
1⁄2 amp, 125 VDC; 1⁄4 amp, 250 VDC.
Single-Pole
Double-Throw
B UL/CSA Rating:
20 amps, 125, 250 or 480 VAC;
10 amps, 125 VAC ‘‘L’’;
1 Hp, 125 VAC; 2 Hp, 250 VAC;
Single-Pole 1⁄2 amp, 125 VDC; 1⁄4 amp, 250 VDC.
Double-Throw
C UL/CSA Rating:
10 amps, 125 or 250 VAC;
0.3 amp, 125 VDC; 0.15 amp, 250 VDC.
Double-Pole
Double-Throw
D UL/CSA Rating:
10 amps, 125, 250 or 480 VAC;
1⁄2 amp, 125 VDC; 1⁄4 amp, 250 VDC.
Single-Pole
Double-Throw
E UL Rating:
1 amp, 125 VAC.
Single-Pole
Double-Throw
FEATURES
1 NEMA 1, 7 and 9
1 Compact, rugged housing
1 Up to 20 amp capacity
1 Ample wiring space
1 Mounts from 4 sides
1 Roller arms adjustable through 360°
1 Non-sparking actuators
1 Captive cover screws
1 UL Listed, file #E14274
1 CSA Certified, file #LR57324
1 Grounding screw
NEMA
NEMA standards: 1, 7 and 9.
UL listed and CSA certified: Class I, Div. 1,
Groups B, C and D (Group B - only as noted
in order guides); and Class II, Div. 1, Groups
E, F and G.
Also refer to NEMA application note in the
Reference Standards section at the rear of
this catalog.
TEMPERATURE RANGE
EX switches are for use in a temperature
range of –40 to 160°F (–40 to 71°C). For
applications outside these limits, please call
the 800 number.
ACTUATORS
Roller arm versions are designed for cam or
slide operation. Listings include clockwise
and counterclockwise actuation. Levers are
adjustable through 360°. The roller is nonsparking material.
The cross-roller arm switch is for use where
the operating mechanism approaches from
a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal
axis of the switch.
The overtravel plunger has a case hardened, radius tipped, push-rod plunger guided
by a sturdy bushing.
The manually operated switch has a large
paddle-shaped actuator.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Available replacement parts are listed on
page A125. An installation sheet packed
with each switch describes these parts in
detail and explains how they are installed.
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches EX Series
Explosion-Proof Switches
A122 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
ROLLER LEVER ACTUATED
SWITCHES
AUXILIARY ACTUATORS
Order rotary actuators for the EX-AR20 from
the selection shown below.
Roller Lever
6PA5-EX
(Bronze roller)
6PA127-EX
(Nylon roller)
Cross Roller Lever
6PA131-EX
(Bronze roller)
One-Way Roller Lever
For CW
actuation:
6PA130-EX
(Bronze roller)
For CCW
actuation:
6PA142-EX
(Bronze roller)
Adjustable Length
Roller Lever
6PA138-EX
(Nylon roller)
Rod Lever
6PA136-EX
(Aluminum rod)
ORDER GUIDE
P.T. D.T.
Elec. max. max.
Rating Catalog mm O.T. mm
Description Pg. A121 Listing O.F. in. max. in.
CW actuation*. 15 amp. SPDT. A EX-AR 2,22-5,56 N
.5-1.25 lb.
5,56
.219
(8°)
90° 0,18
.007
(0.25°)
CW actuation*. 20 amp. SPDT. B EXA-AR 3,34-8,90 N
.75-2 lb.
5.56
.219
25° 0,3
.012
(4°)
CCW actuation*. 15 amp. SPDT. A EX-AR30 11,1 N
2.5 lb. max.
2,65
.065
25° 0,18
.007
(0.25°)
CW or CCW actuation*. 15 amp.
Low O.F. (no return spring).
Without mtg. bracket. SPDT.
A EX-AR16 0,56 N
2 oz. max.
— — —
Also UL
listed
and
CSA
certified
for
Class I
Group B
(hydrogen)
atmospheres.
CW actuation*.
15 amp. SPDT.
A EX-AR800 2,22-5,56 N
.5-1.25 lb.
5,56
.219
90° 0,18
.007
(0.25°)
CCW actuation*.
15 amp. SPDT.
A EX-AR830 11,1 N
2.5 lb. max.
1,65
.065
25° 0,18
.007
(0.25°)
CW actuation*.
10 amp. DPDT.
C EXD-AR-3† 2,22-6,67 N
.5-1.5 lb.
6,35
.250
25° 2,77
.109
(4°)
CCW actuation*.
10 amp. DPDT.
C EXD-AR30-3† 12,2 N
2.75 lb.
5,56
.219
25° 2,77
.109
CW actuation*. 1
amp.** SPDT.
E EXH-AR3 2,22-6,67 N
.5-1.5 lb.
5,56
.219
25° 0,64
.025
CCW actuation*.
1 amp.** SPDT.
E EXH-AR33 11,1 N
2.5 lb. max.
1,65
.065
(3.5°)
25° 0,64
.025
No lever furnished. (Order levers
shown at left of this page as
separate items.) CW actuation*.
SPDT.
A EX-AR20 0,22 Nm
31.25 in./oz.
5,56
.219
90° 0,18
.007
(0.25°)
As above except CCW actuation. A EX-AR230 0,22 Nm
31.25 in./oz.
5,56
.219
90° 0,18
.007
(0.25°)
Nm J Newton meters
* CW (clockwise) or CCW actuation, when looking
at nameplate.
** Hermetically sealed switching unit, furnished with
10.5 ft./3,2 m leadwire.
† Furnished with 0,91 m (3 ft.) leadwire
Characteristics; O.F. — Operating Force; P.T. —
Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential
Travel
For rapid response – off the shelf service, all bold face listings are normally stocked
items.
Adjustable length 12.5 N max. rod lever
with 1N nylon roller.
6PA204-EX
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches EX Series
Explosion-Proof Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A123
CROSS ROLLER LEVER ACTUATED SWITCH
ORDER GUIDE
P.T. D.T.
Elec. O.F. max. max.
Rating Catalog N mm O.T. mm
Description Pg. A121 Listing oz. in. max. in.
CW actuation* 15 amp. A EX-CR 2,22-5,56 5,56 90° 0,18
SPDT 8-20 .219 .007
ONE-WAY ROLLER LEVER ACTUATED SWITCH
ORDER GUIDE
P.T. D.T.
Elec. O.F. max. max.
Rating Catalog N mm O.T. mm
Description Pg. A121 Listing oz. in. max. in.
CW actuation* 15 amp. A EX-AR128 2,22-5,56 5,56 90° 0,18
SPDT 8-20 .219 .007
LOW FORCE ROD LEVER ACTUATED SWITCH
ORDER GUIDE
O.F.
Elec. max.
Rating Catalog N P.T. O.T.
Description Pg. A121 Listing oz. max. min. D.T.
Furnished without mounting A EX-AR1613 0,56 18° 40° —
bracket. CW actuation* 2
15 amp. SPDT
MANUALLY ACTUATED SWITCH
ORDER GUIDE
O.F.
Elec. max.
Rating Catalog N
Description Pg. A121 Listing lb.
Large 3 x 3.5 inch paddle for fast, easy operation.
15 amp. A EX-AR50 11,1
SPDT 2.5
OVERTRAVEL PLUNGER ACTUATED SWITCHES
ORDER GUIDE
O.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
Elec. max. max. min. max. O.P.**
Rating Catalog N mm mm mm mm
Description Pg. A121 Listing lb. in. in. in. in.
15 amp. A EX-Q 13,34 1,98 4,78 0,10 47,22
SPDT 3 .078 .188 .004 1.859
20 amp. B EXA-Q 8,90 1,27 3,18 0,23 46,02
SPDT 2 .050 .125 .009 1.812
Also UL listed 15 amp A EX-Q800 13,34 1,98 4,78 0,10 47,22
for Class I, SPDT 3 .078 .188 .004 1.859
Group B 10 amps C EXD-Q-3† 13,34 3,96 3,58 1,52 46,02
(hydrogen) DPDT 3 .156 .141 .060 1.812
atmospheres.
With seal boot on plunger. D EX-N15 13,34 1,98 4,78 0,10 52,32
10 amp. SPDT 3 .078 .188 .004 2.060
* CW (Clockwise) or CCW actuation, when looking at
nameplate.
** Tolerance ± 1,52 in./.060 mm.
† Furnished with 0,91 m (3 ft.) leadwire.
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; P.T. —
Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential
Travel
N J Newtons
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches EX Series
Explosion-Proof Switches
A124 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
Double-conduit
connect switch
EX switches on this page have conduit
openings on each side of the enclosure
which enable through-wiring. This feature
also allows the user to split the wiring of a
double-pole switch, with one-pole exiting
from each side.
The enclosure is larger than EX switches
with one conduit opening and provides additional space for wiring.
NEMA
Double-conduit connect EX switches also
meet the applicable portions of the NEMA
classifications listed on page A121.
ROLLER LEVER ACTUATED SWITCHES
ORDER GUIDE
P.T. D.T.
Elec. O.F. max. max.
Rating Catalog N mm O.T. mm
Description Pg. A121 Listing oz. in. max. in.
Two 1⁄2 in. conduit openings. A 1EX1 2,22-5,56 5,56 90° 0,18
CW actuation.* 15 amp. 8-20 .219 .007
SPDT.
Two 1⁄2 in. conduit openings. B 2EX1 3,61-8,90 5,56 25° 0,3
CW actuation.* 20 amp. 13-32 .219 .012
SPDT.
Two 3⁄4 in. conduit openings. C 4EX1-3† 2,22-6,67 6,35 25° 2,77
CW actuation.* 10 amp. 8-24 .250 .109
DPDT.
* CW (clockwise) or CCW actuation, when looking at
nameplate.
N J Newtons
† Furnished with 0,91 m (3 ft.) leadwire.
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; P.T. —
Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential
Travel.
MOUNTING BRACKETS
15PA85-EX is used for top, bottom, back or
end mounting. It is furnished with each
switch, except where noted in the order
guides.
15PA86-EX is ordered separately for top
mounting of plunger switches. EX switches
may also be direct mounted, using 10-32
UNF screws.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches EX Series
Explosion-Proof Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A125
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Catalog Listing
Replacement Part Numbers
Switch Switching
Listing Unit Actuator Springs
EX-AR BZ-2R-P4 6PA5-EX 33PA7-EX
EX-AR16 BZ-2RW88-P5 6PA5-EX —
EX-AR20 BZ-2R-P4 * 33PA7-EX
EX-AR30 BZ-2R-P4 6PA5-EX 33PA5-EX
EX-AR50 BZ-2R-P4 6PA134-OP 33PA7-EX
EX-AR800 BZ-2R-P4 6PA5-EX 33PA7-EX
EX-CR BZ-2R-P4 6PA131-EX 33PA7-EX
EX-Q BZ-2R-P4 8PA15-EX —
EX-N15 BZ-2R15-P4 8PA12-EX —
EXA-AR BA-2R-P4 6PA5-EX 33PA6-EX
EXD-AR-3 DT-2R4-A7 6PA5-EX 33PA6-EX
EXH-AR3 4HS202 6PA5-EX 33PA6-EX
EXH-AR33 4HS203 6PA5-EX 33PA5-EX
EXD-AR30-3 DT-2R711-A7 6PA5-EX 33PA5-EX
Catalog Listing
Replacement Part Numbers
Switch Switching
Listing Unit Actuator Spring
EX-AR128 BZ-2R-P4 6PA130-EX 33-PA7-EX
EX-AR1613 BZ-2RW88-P5 6PA136-EX —
EX-Q800 BZ-2R-P4 8PA15-EX —
EXA-Q BA-2R-P4 8PA15-EX —
EXD-Q-3 DT-2R-A7 8PA77-EX —
1EX1 BZ-2R-P4 6PA5-EX 33PA7EX
2EX1 BA-2R-P4 6PA5-EX 33PA6-EX
4EX1-3 DT-2R4-A7 6PA5-EX 33PA6-EX
* Actuators for EX-AR20 are shown on page A122.
In addition to the items shown above, the following replaceable
internal levers are available: 33PA1-EX for EX-AR, EX-AR800,
EXA-AR, EXD-AR-3, EXH-AR3, EX-AR20, EX-CR, EX-AR128, 1EX1,
2EX1, and 4EX1-3.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
ROLLER LEVER NO LEVER
CROSS ROLLER LEVER ONE-WAY ROLLER LEVER
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches EX Series
Explosion-Proof Switches
A126 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
LOW FORCE ROD MANUAL ACTUATOR
PLUNGER PLUNGER WITH SEAL BOOT
SWITCHES WITH DOUBLE CONDUIT OPENINGS
ROLLER LEVER
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches CX Series
Weather-Sealed Explosion-Proof Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A127
FEATURES
1 Sealing - applicable portions of NEMA 1,
3, 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 7, 9, and 13
1 Watertight and dusttight for outdoor use
1 4-20 mA analog output available
1 UL Listed, file #E14274
1 Analog UL file #E68247
1 CSA Certified, file #LR57324
1 Rugged cast aluminum housing
1 Pretravel, overtravel, and actuating
sequence can be field adjusted without
tools (all basics individually)
1 Rotary types convert in seconds to
clockwise, counterclockwise, or bothway operation
CX switches are built especially for outdoor
use in hazardous atmospheres. These enclosures are constructed to withstand the
pressure of an internal explosion. Flame
paths cool the exploded gases to a point
less than the lowest safe operating temperature of the surrounding gas.
O-ring seals make the enclosure weatherproof but are outside of required flame paths
so explosion proof requirements are maintained.
Analog output: either resistive or 4-20 mA is
available.
Operating temperature range is –25° to
+85°C (–13° to 185°F).
NEMA standards: 1, 3, 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 7, 9 and
13.
UL listed: Class I, Div. 1, Groups B (14CX,
16CX, 24CX, 26CX, 36CX, and 84CX only), C
and D; and Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F and
G. CSA certified: Class I, Div. 1, Groups B
(14CX, 16CX, 24CX, 26CX, 36CX and 84CX
only), C and D; and Class II, Groups E, F and
G.
For rapid response – off the shelf service,
all bold face listings are normally stocked
items.
ROTARY ACTUATED SWITCHES
Short housing
Standard housing
Actuators are not included with switch. Order them separately.
ROTARY LEVERS
Catalog
Lever Type Listing
1.5 in. lever, no roller LSZ51
.75 in. roller, front LSZ51A
.75 in. roller, back LSZ51C
1.5-3.5 in. adjustable lever
.75 in. roller LSZ52C
1.0 in. roller LSZ52J
1.5 in. roller LSZ52K
1.5 in. yoke roller
.75 in. rollers, back LSZ53S
.75 in. rollers, each side LSZ53E
5 in. rod lever LSZ54M
Hub only LSZ54
1.5 in. offset lever, no roller LSZ55
.75 in. roller, back LSZ55A
.75 in. roller, front LSZ55C
Rollers are nylon. Non-sparking rollers must
be used in hazardous locations.
ORDER GUIDE
As factory assembled, all basic switches
operate on clockwise and counterclockwise
rotation. Actuating mechanism can be field
adjusted for CW or CCW operation only. No
tools are required.
Catalog Listings
Shaft Restoring
Force To Center
Housing Basic Electrical
Description1 With W/O2 Size Switch(es)2 Ratings
15 amp. SPDT. 11CX1 11CX11 Short BZ(1) A
11CX2 11CX12 Short BZ(2) A
21CX3 21CX13 Standard BZ(3) A
21CX4 21CX14 Standard BZ(4) A
20 amp. SPDT. 12CX1 12CX11 Short BA(1) B
12CX2 12CX12 Short BA(2) B
22CX3 22CX13 Standard BA(3) B
22CX4 22CX14 Standard BA(4) B
Also UL listed for Class I. 14CX1 14CX11 Short DT(1) C
Group B (hydrogen atmospheres). 24CX2 24CX12 Standard DT(2) C
10 amp. DPDT. 24CX3 24CX13 Standard DT(3) C
Also UL listed for 16CX2 16CX12 Short HS(2) D
Class I, Group B 26CX4 26CX14 Standard HS(4) D
(hydrogen atmospheres). 16CX1 16CX11 Short HS(1) D
1 amp, SPDT. 26CX3 26CX13 Standard HS(3) D
Analog position sensing.* — 18CX10 Short None —
Current output (4-20 mA). — 281CX12 Standard BZ(2) A
284CX12 Standard DT(2) C
Analog position sensing.* 19CX0 — Short None —
Resistive output. 29CX1 — Standard BZ(1) A
29CX2 — Standard BZ(2) A
1 amp, SPDT with 1172CX2 1172CX12 Short BZ(2) F
gold contacts. 2172CX4 2172CX14 Standard BZ(4) F
* Where noted, BZ basic switches are 15 amp, SPDT; DT basic switchs are 10 amp DPDT. Refer to next page for
analog position sensing specifications.
1 Basic switches operate nearly simultaneously in multiple switch devices.
2 Shafts of devices without shaft restoring
force can be rotated through 360°.
Basic switches will be in operated mode
through two 105° sections.
Eight side mounting holes can be tapped
5/16N-18.
MOUNTING HOLES
Add the letter A to listings with side mounting holes tapped 5/16-18(8).
Example: 11CX2A
Add the letter B to listings with thru mounting holes tapped 3/8-24(4).
Example: 11CX2B.
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches CX Series
Weather-Sealed Explosion-Proof Switches
A128 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
Circuitry Electrical Ratings
A UL/CSA Rating: L96
BZ 15 amps, 120, 240 or 480 VAC, ind. and res.
Single-Pole 1⁄8 Hp, 120 VAC; 1⁄4 Hp, 240 VAC.
Double-throw .5 amp, 125 VDC, .25 amp, 250 VDC., res.
B UL/CSA Rating: L23
BA 20 amps, 120, 240 or 480 VAC, ind. and res.
Single-Pole 1 Hp, 120 VAC; 2 Hp, 240 VAC.
Double-throw .5 amp, 125 VDC, .25 amp, 250 VDC res.
C UL/CSA Rating: L59
DT 10 amps, 120 or 240 VAC, ind. and res.
Double-pole .3 amp, 125 VDC, .15 amp, 250 VDC, res.
Double-throw
D UL/CSA Rating: L22
HS 1 amp, 120 VAC, ind. and res.
Single-Pole
Double-throw
F UL/CSA Rating: L22
BZ (Gold Contact) 1 amp, 125 VAC
Single-Pole
Double-throw
ANALOG POSITION SENSING SPECIFICATIONS
Current Output (4-20 mA) Resistive Output Replacement PC Board
Voltage compliance range: 12.5 to 40 VDC
Maximum load resistance:
RL, Max,–V Supply - 12.5
20 mA
Current signal output: 4-20 mA
Span: Adjustable from 15° to 90° of angular
rotation.
Null: 4 mA position may be set at any angular
position.
500 ohms ± 10% in center (free position)
975 ohms max at 105° rotation clockwise (CW).
25 ohms min. at 105° rotation CCW. 2 watts
power at 70°/150°F at full scale
Different potentiometer values can be ordered.
(Minimum order quantities may be required.)
For current output devices 15PA261-CX
PLUNGER ACTUATED SWITCHES
Standard housing shown.
ORDER GUIDE
Catalog Listing
With Restoring Housing Basic Electrical
Description1 Force Size Switch(es) Ratings
15 amp. SPDT 31CX1 Short BZ(1) A
31CX2 Short BZ(2) A
41CX3 Standard BZ(3) A
41CX4 Standard BZ(4) A
20 amp. SPDT 32CX1 Short BA(1) B
32CX2 Short BA(2) B
42CX3 Standard BA(3) B
42CX4 Standard BA(4) B
Also UL listed for 36CX1 Short HS(1) D
Class I, Group B 36CX2 Short HS(2) D
(hydrogen atmospheres).
1 amp. SPDT.
1 Basic switches operate nearly simultaneously in multiple switch devices.
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS (All CX Switches)
Rotary Actuation Plunger Actuation
Basic Switch Type BZ BA DT HS BZ BA HS
Pretravel (max.)* 15° 15° 30° 30° .10 in./2,5 mm
Differential Travel (max.) 10° 10° 25° 20° .04 in./1.0 mm
Overtravel (min.)* 90° 90° 75° 75° .19 in./4,75 mm
Operating Torque (max.) 11.1 in. lb./1,25 Nm —
Operating Force (max.) — 8.82 lb./39,2 N
* May be modified in field to suit application requirements.
N J Newtons
Nm J Newton meters
LOW TEMPERATURE SWITCHES
Add the letter C to listings for low temperature versions.
Example: 21CX14C –40°F (–40°C) Rotary
36CX2C –35°F (–37°C) Plunger
REPLACEMENT BASIC SWITCH
ASSEMBLIES
These assemblies are factory adjusted to
the same operating characteristics as a new
CX switch. They include components subject to mechanical or electrical wear: basic
switches, cam wheels and followers, and
springs.
To order, change the first number in the
complete switch catalog listing to 9 for rotary switches and 10 for plunger switches
with short housings.
Example:
Rotary switch 12CX5
Replacement J 92CX5
Plunger switch 36CX2
Replacement J 106CX2
Note: Basic switch assemblies for rotary actuated switches, with or without shaft restoring force, will be the same.
For example:
11CX1 and 11CX11 use 91CX1.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches CX Series
Weather-Sealed Explosion-Proof Switches
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A129
80CX SWITCHES ALSO WITHSTAND
CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENTS
80CX switches have rugged bronze housings which are resistant to salt water and
other corrosive environments. They comply
with the NEMA 4X requirement for protection against corrosion, in addition to NEMA
enclosure standards met by other CX
switches. O-ring seals make the enclosure
weather-proof, but are outside of required
flame paths so explosion-proof requirements are maintained.
STAINLESS STEEL LEVER ACTUATORS
These levers match the corrosion resistance of the 80CX housing. Non-sparking rollers
must be used in hazardous locations.
ORDER GUIDE STAINLESS STEEL LEVERS WITH NYLON ROLLERS
Std. Roller Lever
Radius (In.) Dia. In. Width In. Catalog Listing
1.5 .75 .25 LS2Z51A
Std. Lever w/o roller 1.5 .75 .25 LS2Z51
Adjustable Radius
1.5-3.5 .75 .25 LS2Z52A
Note: Refer to page A36 for lever dimensions.
ROTARY ACTUATED SWITCHES
80CX switches available with standard
housing only.
Actuators are not included with switches.
Order them separately.
MOUNTING HOLES
Add the letter A to listings with side
mounting holes tapped 5/16-18(8).
Example: 82CX2A
Add the letter B to listings with thru
mounting holes tapped 3/8-24(4).
Example: 81CX2B.
ORDER GUIDE
As factory assembled, all basic switches
operate on clockwise or counterclockwise
rotation. Actuating mechanism can be field
adjusted for CW or CCW operation only. No
tools are required.
Catalog Listings
Shaft Restoring ElectricalForce To Center Housing Basic Ratings
Description1 With Without2 Size Switch(es) Page A109
15 amp. SPDT 81CX1 81CX11 Standard BZ(1) A
81CX2 81CX12 Standard BZ(2) A
81CX3 81CX13 Standard BZ(3) A
81CX4 81CX14 Standard BZ(4) A
20 amp. SPDT 82CX1 82CX11 Standard BA(1) B
82CX2 82CX12 Standard BA(2) B
82CX3 82CX13 Standard BA(3) B
82CX4 82CX14 Standard BA(4) B
Also UL listed for Class I, 84CX1 84CX11 Standard DT(1) C
Group B (hydrogen 84CX2 84CX12 Standard DT(2) C
atmospheres). 10 amp. DPDT
Potentiometer-equipped 89CX0 — Standard Pot. only E
versions. (Where noted, basic 89CX1 — Standard BZ(1), pot. A,E
switches are 15 amps, SPDT.) 89CX2 — Standard BZ(2), pot. A,E
Notes: Refer to page A127.
MODIFIED SHAFT ENABLES
DIRECT COUPLING
CX switches are available with a 3⁄8 inch
diameter by 3⁄4 inch long flatted shaft which
conforms to standard NEMA motor shaft
specifications. It accepts commercially
available shaft couplers, permitting easy,
direct coupling to most equipment actuators.
To specify a ‘‘direct-couple’’ CX switch, add
-DO1 to catalog listings shown in the order
guides, i.e. 11CX12-DO1. Pricing is the same
as for unmodified versions.
Flatted
Shaft
Version
MOUNTING BRACKET
An aluminum mounting bracket is available
for adapting CX switches to existing 2-hole
mounting arrangements.
To order, specify Catalog Listing 15PA148CX.
15PA148-CX
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches CX Series
Weather-Sealed Explosion-Proof Switches
A130 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
ROTARY Short housing Standard housing
PLUNGER Short housing Standard housing
THESE HOLES NOT FURNISHED ON 80CX SERIES
LEVER ACTUATORS
LSZ51 LSZ55
LSZ52
Front
mounting
Back
mounting
Front
mounting
Back
mounting
LSZ53
LSZ54
Both rollers
Front mounting
See order guides for roller dimensions.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches
Operating Characteristics
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada A131
Definitions below explain the meaning of
operating characteristics. Characteristics
shown in tables throughout catalog were
chosen as most significant. Sketches show
how characteristics are measured for in-line
plunger actuation and rotary actuation.
Linear dimensions for in-line actuation are
from top of plunger to a reference line, usually the center of the mounting holes. In the
case of flange or bottom mounted switches,
the reference line is the bottom of the switch.
Rotary actuated HDLS, LS and ML limit
switches have the characteristics in degrees
of angular rotation. The operating characteristic dimensions on enclosed switches
such as E6, OP, and EX with rotary actuators
are listed in linear dimensions with the adjustable lever in one extreme position.
Differential Travel (D.T.) — Plunger or actuator travel from point where contacts
‘‘snap-over’’ to point where they ‘‘snapback.’’
Free Position (F.P.) — Position of switch
plunger or actuator when no external force
is applied (other than gravity).
Full Overtravel Force — Force required to
attain full overtravel of actuator.
Operating Position (O.P.) — Position of
switch plunger or actuator at which point
contacts snap from normal to operated position. Note that in the case of flexible or
adjustable actuators, the operating position
is measured from the end of the lever or its
maximum length. Location of operating position measurement shown on mounting dimension drawings.
Operating Force (O.F.) — Amount of force
applied to switch plunger or actuator to
cause contact ‘‘snap-over.’’ Note in the case
of adjustable actuators, the force is measured from the maximum length position of
the lever.
Overtravel (O.T.) — Plunger or actuator
travel safely available beyond operating position.
Pretravel (P.T.) — Distance or angle traveled in moving plunger or actuator from free
position to operating position.
Release Force (R.F.) — Amount of force
still applied to switch plunger or actuator at
moment contacts snap from operated position to unoperated position.
Total Travel (T.T.) — Distance from actuator free position to overtravel limit position.
ROTARY ACTUATION
IN-LINE PLUNGER ACTUATION
FULL LOAD AND LOCKED ROTOR CURRENTS FOR SINGLE PHASE AND DC MOTORS.
Alternating Current Direct Current
115 Volts 230 Volts 115 Volts 230 Volts
Full Locked Full Locked Full Locked Full Locked
HP Load Rotor Load Rotor Load Rotor Load Rotor
2 24.0 144.0 12.0 72.0 17.0 170.0 8.5 85.0
11⁄2 20.0 120.0 10.0 60.0 13.2 132.0 6.6 66.0
1 16.0 96.0 8.0 48.0 9.6 96.0 4.8 48.0
3⁄4 13.8 82.8 6.9 41.4 7.4 74.0 3.7 37.0
1⁄2 9.8 58.8 4.9 29.4 5.4 54.0 2.7 27.0
1⁄3 7.2 43.2 3.6 21.6 3.8 38.0 1.9 19.0
1⁄4 5.8 34.8 2.9 17.4 3.0 30.0 1.5 15.0
1⁄6 4.4 26.4 2.2 13.2 2.4 24.0 1.2 12.0
1⁄8 3.8 22.8 1.9 11.4 2.2 22.0 1.1 11.0
1⁄10 3.0 18.0 1.5 9.0 2.0 20.0 1.0 10.0
1⁄20 1.5 9.0 — — — — — —
L
im it/E
n clo
sed
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Limit and Enclosed Switches
Reference Standards
A132 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
MICRO SWITCH ENCLOSURES IN THIS CATALOG
NEMA TYPES
Non-Hazardous Locations Hazardous Locations
1 3 4 4X 6 6P 12 13 7B 7C 7D 9E 9F 9G
HDLS* w w w w9 w w10 w
LS w w w w w
E6/V6 w
BZG/BZH w w3 w3 w3
BAF1 w w2 w2 w2
OP w w3 w3 w3
914CE w w w4 w4 w4 w4 w4
LN w w w w
LSX w w w w w w w w w w w
EX w w5 w w w w w
CX w w w w6 w w7 w w w w w
BF w w w w
CLS w w w w
2CLS w w w w
CLSX w w w w w w w w w w
Note 2 — Not applicable to BAF-1-2RQ9 listings.
Note 3 — Not applicable to Q-plunger types.
Note 4 — 914CE1, 914CE2, and 914CE3 listings comply with NEMA 1 and 3 only.
Note 5 — Only EX series 800, EXD, EXH, and EXN.
Note 6 — Only CX series 80.
Note 7 — Only listings with HS or DT basic switches.
Note 8 — Not applicable to LZ side lever types.
Note 9 — Stainless steel LS2.
Note 10 — Pre-wired HDLS.
APPLICATION INFORMATION
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Position Sensors SE and XE Series
Environment-Sealed Basic Switches
Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada 13
GENERAL INFORMATION
SE and XE switches are the smallest environment-sealed switches offered by
MICRO SWITCH. Both types enclose basic switches within a corrosion resistant
aluminum housing to seal precision
switch contacts from contamination. SE
switches include a SM basic switch, and
XE switches include the smaller SX basic
switch.
Switches held depressed for extended
periods of time at temperature extremes
may experience retarded plunger return
upon deactuation. Where such a condition exists in the application, contact the
800 number for special designs that are
available.
FEATURES
1 Watertight seal per enclosure design
symbol 3, MIL-S-8805
1 Power load switching capability up to 7
amps
1 Temperature tolerance up to +221°F
(105°C)
1 High temperature construction for use
to +300°F (149°C)
1 Several auxiliary actuators
1 Choice of termination
1 Military standard construction with listings qualified to MIL-S-8805
1 All 4SE switches are UL recognized
and CSA certified
1 4XE switches are UL recognized
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
Circuitry Electrical Rating Code
Single-Pole
Double-Throw
A 5 amps res., 3 amps ind., (sea level), 5 amps res.,
2.5 amps ind., (50,000 feet) 28 vdc.
5 amps res., 5 amps ind., 125 or 250 vac, 60 Hz.
D UL Rating
7 amps, 250 vac 60 Hz
B UL and CSA Rating
5 amps, 250 vac, 60 Hz
E 7 amps res., 4 amps ind., (sea level),
7 amps res., 2.5 amps ind., (50,000 feet), 28 vdc.
C 7 amps res., 4 amps ind., (sea level),
7 amps res., 2.5 amps ind., (50,000 feet), 28 vdc.
7 amps res., 4 amps ind., (sea level), 115 vac, 400 Hz
R 1 amp res., 0.50 amp ind., 28 vdc.
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; R.F. — Release Force;
P.T. — Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential Travel;
O.P. — Operating PositionSE SWITCHES ORDER GUIDE
Characteristics
Electrical O.F. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P.
Catalog Recommended Rating Newtons Newtons mm mm mm mm
Listing For Code ounces ounces inches inches inches inches
1 foot leads
(other lengths
available)
Fig. 1
1SE1 Most applications A 1,39-4,73 1,11 1,27 0,08 0,1 10,8
5-17 4 .050 .003 .004 .425
1SE2 SPST — Normallyclosed
A 1,39-4,73 1,11 1,27 0,08 0,1 10,8
5-17 4 .050 .003 .004 .425
1SE3 SPST — Normallyopen
A 1,39-4,73 1,11 1,27 0,08 0,1 10,8
5-17 4 .050 .003 .004 .425
4SE1 UL and CSA listing
and UL and CSA
listed lead wire
B 1,39-4,73 1,11 1,27 0,08 0,1 10,8
5-17 4 .050 .003 .004 .425
5SE1 Oil resistant
Fluorosilicone seal
A 1,39-4,73 1,11 1,27 0,08 0,1 10,8
5-17 4 .050 .003 .004 .425
7SE1 Lower force A 1,11-2,22 0,56 1,27 0,08 0,1 10,8
4-8 2 .050 .003 .004 .425
Fig. 2
12SE4-T High return force A 1,39-5,28 1,11 1,27 0,08 0,1 10,8
5-19 4 .050 .003 .004 .425
1SE1-T For customer
leading
A 1,39-4,73 1,11 1,27 0,08 0,1 10,8
5-17 4 .050 .003 .004 .425
P
o sitio
n S
enso
rs Position Sensors SE Series
Environment-Sealed Basic Switches
14 Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; R.F. — Release Force;
P.T. — Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential Travel;
O.P. — Operating Position
AUXILIARY ACTUATORS FOR SE SWITCHES ORDER GUIDE
(Switches are not included with actuators)
Characteristics measured
with actuators mounted to a 1SE1
Actuator O.F. R.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
Length A max. min. approx. min. max. O.P. F.P.
Catalog mm Newtons Newtons mm mm mm mm mm
Listing Description inches ounces ounces inches inches inches inches inches
Fig. 3
JE-1 Straight leaf
(mounting
hardware
included)
16,8 3,34 0,56 3,81 0,38 0,64 11,2 15±0,76
.66 12 2 .150 .015 .025 .440 .590±.030
Fig. 4
JE-4 Roller leaf.
Roller turned
90° to switch
axis
(mounting
hardware
included).
16,8 3,34 0,56 3,81 0,38 0,64 16,3 20,1
.66 12 2 .150 .015 .025 .640 .790
approx.
Fig. 5
JE-5 Roller leaf
(mounting
hardware
included)
14,2 3,34 0,56 3,81 0,38 0,64 16,3 20,1±0,76
.560 12 2 .150 .015 .025 .640 .790±.030
Fig. 6
JE-17 Roller leaf.
Reversed
position
(mounting
hardware
included)
14,2 3,34 0,56 3,81 0,38 0,64 16,3 20,1±0,76
.560 12 2 .150 .015 .025 .640 .790±.030
Fig. 7
JE-21 Roller lever 13,7 1,67 0,28 2,54 0,25 0,41 16,3 18,8±0,76
.540 6 1 .100 .010 .016 .640 .740±.030
Fig. 8
JE-22 Tandem
Roller
Lever
17,8 4,73 1,11 2,54 0,15 0,3 16,8±1,3 19,3±1,3
.700 17 4 .100 .006 .012 .660±.050 .760±.050
Position Sensors XE Series
Environment-Sealed Basic Switches
Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada 15
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; R.F. — Release Force;
P.T. — Pretravel; D.T. — Differential Travel; O.P. — Operating Position.XE SWITCHES ORDER GUIDE
Characteristics
O.F. R.F. P.T. O.T. D.T. O.P.
Electrical max. max. max. min. max. mm
Catalog Rating Newtons Newtons mm mm mm inches
Listing Recommended For Code ounces ounces inches inches inches ±.020 (0,51)
1 foot leads
(other lengths
available)
1XE1
(MS27994-1)
Most applications
MIL-S-8805
requirements
C 1,39-4,73 1,11 1,27 0,1 0,13 10,8
5-17 4 .050 .004 .005 .425
1XE201
(MS27994-4)
General Use
MIL-S-8805
requirements
C 1,39-4,73 1,11 1,27 0,1 0,13 10,8
5-17 4 .050 .004 .005 .425
MIL-W-22759/11
wire
1XE3 SPST-Normally Open C 1,39-4,73 1,11 1,27 0,1 0,13 10,8
5-17 4 .050 .004 .005 .425
1XE301
(MS27994-5)
Gold Contacts
MIL-W-22759/11 wire
R 1,39-4,73 1,11 1,27 0,1 0,13 10,8
5-17 4 .050 .004 .005 .425
4XE1 UL listing and UL and
CSA listed leadwire
D 1,39-4,73 1,11 1,27 0,1 0,13 10,8
5-17 4 .050 .004 .005 .425
5XE1 Oil resistant
Fluorosilicone seal
C 1,39-4,73 1,11 1,27 0,1 0,13 10,8
5-17 4 .050 .004 .005 .425
14XE1 Less operating force
Use to +300°F
(149°C)
E 2,50 0,56 0,76 0,1 0,13 10,9
9 max. 2 .030 .004 .005 .430
Fig. 9
14XE1-T For customer leading
Use to +300°F
(149°C)
E 2,50 0,56 0,76 0,1 0,13 10,9
9 max. 2 .030 .004 .005 .430
1XE1-T
(MS27994-3)
For customer leading C 1,39-4,73 1,11 1,27 0,1 0,13 10,8
5-17 4 .050 .004 .005 .425Fig. 10
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; R.F. — Release
Force; P.T. — Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential
Travel; O.P. — Operating Position; F.P. — Free Position.
AUXILIARY ACTUATORS FOR XE SWITCHES ORDER GUIDE
(Switches are not included with the actuators)
Characteristics measured with actuator mounted on a 1XE1
O.F. R.F. P.T. O.T. D.T.
max. min. approx. min. max. O.P. F.P.
Catalog Newtons Newtons mm mm mm mm mm
Listing Description ounces ounces inches inches inches inches inches
JM-1 Straight leaf 5,84 0,83 3,18 0,23 0,3 10,8±0,76 14±0,76
21 3 .125 .009 .012 .425±.030 .550±.030
Fig. 11
JM-5 Roller leaf 5,84 0,83 3,18 0,23 0,3 15,9±0,89 19,1±0,89
21 3 .125 .009 .012 .625±.035 .750±.035
Fig. 12
P
o sitio
n S
enso
rs Position Sensors SE Series
Environment-Sealed Basic Switches
16 Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada
SE MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
SE switches
MOUNTING HOLES WILL ACCEPT PINS OR
SCREWS OF 22,1/.087 MAX DIA
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
SE auxiliary actuators
Fig. 3
Fig. 4 Fig. 5
Fig. 6 Fig. 7
Fig. 8
Position Sensors XE Series
Environment-Sealed Basic Switches
Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada 17
XE MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
XE switches
Fig. 9 Fig. 10
XE auxiliary actuators
Fig. 11 Fig. 12
P
o sitio
n S
enso
rs Position Sensors HM Series
Miniature Hermetically Sealed Switches
18 Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada
FEATURES
1 Hermetically sealed per enclosure design symbol 5, MIL-S-8805
1 Power load switching capability up to 4
amperes, 28 VDC and 2 Amps115 VAC,
400 Hz
1 Temperature tolerance from –85°F to
+250°F (–65°C to +121°C)
1 High temperature construction for use
from –85°F to +500°F (–65°C to
+260°C)
1 Variety of auxiliary actuators
1 Choice of terminal styles
1 Gold contacts for special applications
1 Military standard construction with listings on the MIL-S-8805 qualified products list.
GENERAL INFORMATION
HM switches are not generally recommended for 115 VAC, 60 Hz. If you have a
60 Hz application in the milliamp range,
contact our 800 number for special design variations that are available.
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
Circuitry Electrical Rating Code
Single-Pole H 1 amp res., 0.25 amp ind., 28 VDC.
Double-Throw
Single-Pole I 2 amps res., 2 amps ind., 0.5 amps lamp load, 115 VAC,
Double-Throw 400 Hz.
4 amps res., 2 amps ind., 1 amp lamp load, 28 VDC
Single-Pole J 1⁄2 amp res., 1⁄4 amp ind. (sea level or 70,000 ft.),
Double-Throw 28 VDC
Single-Pole K 3 amps res., 1 amp ind. (sea level or 70,000 ft.), 28 VDC
Double-Throw 1 amp res. or ind. (sea level), 115 VAC., 400 Hz.
Single-Pole L 3 amp res., 1 amp ind., 28 VDC
Double-Throw 1 amp res., 1 amp ind., 115 VAC, 400 Hz.
APPLICATION NOTES
1. Honeywell does not recommend the use of silver cadmium oxide switch contacts in non-arcing loads. Non-arcing loads are generally loads less than 12 volts and/or 0.5
amp. Catalog listings in the 5, 6, 15, and 16HM Series use silver cadmium oxide contacts. If you
have specific questions, contact the MICRO SWITCH Application Center at 1-800-537-6945.
2. For applications involving non-arcing loads, catalog listings in the 9, 10, 19 and 20HM Series
are recommended.
3. The 1, 2, 5, and 6HM Series are recommended for use only in 3 to 4 amp range applications.
Position Sensors HM Series
Miniature Hermetically Sealed Switches
Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada 19
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; R.F. — Release Force;
P.T. — Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential Travel;
O.P. — Operating Position.HM ORDER GUIDE
Operating Characteristics
Catalog
Listing Recommended For
Electrical
Rating
Code
O.F. max.
Newtons
ounces
R.F. min.
Newtons
ounces
P.T. max.
mm inches
O.T. min.
mm inches
D.T. max.
mm inches
O.P.
mm inches
±.015 (0,38 mm)
Fig. 1
11HM1
(MS27216-5)
Most applications.
Exceeds MIL-S-8805
requirements for
shock and vibration.
K 1,95 0,28 0,76 0,08 0,15 8,38
7 1 .030 .003 .006 .330
13HM1 Applications requiring
gold contacts
H 1,95 0,28 0,76 0,08 0,15 8,38
7 1 .030 .003 .006 .330
9HM1
(MS27216-6)
Bifurcated gold
contacts
J 1,95 0,28 0,76 0,08 0,15 8,38
7 1 .030 .003 .006 .330
Fig. 2
2HM19-1
(MS27216-2)
MIL-S-8805
application
requirements 1 ft.
(305mm) leads
I 1,95 0,28 0,76 0,08 0,15 8,38
7 1 .030 .003 .006 .330
2HM19-5
(MS27216-4)
5 foot (1524mm) long
leads
I 1,95 0,28 0,76 0,08 0,15 8,38
7 1 .030 .003 .006 .330
Fig. 3
16HM1-1 High temperature to
500°F (260°C) flat
spring
L 1,95 0,28 0,76 0,08 0,15 8,38
7 1 .030 .003 .006 .330
Fig. 4
15HM2 Operating in
temperatures to
+500°F (260°C) with
weld tab termination.
L 1,95 0,28 0,76 0,08 0,15 8,38
7 1 .030 .003 .006 .330
HM MOUNTING
A force spreading plate is recommended to reduce the
chance of product damage due to excessive mounting force.
MOUNTING PLATE 19PA137-HM
NOTICE
Torque on #2 mounting screws must be restricted to 1.5 inch
pounds max. to prevent switch damage. The force spreading
mounting plate used as shown will allow up to 2.5 inch
pounds of mounting torque.
P
o sitio
n S
enso
rs Position Sensors HM Series
Miniature Hermetically Sealed Switches
20 Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; R.F. — Release Force;
P.T. — Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential Travel;
O.P. — Operating Position; F.P. — Free Position.
AUXILIARY ACTUATORS FOR HM SWITCHES ORDER GUIDE
(Switches are not included)
Operating Characteristics with Actuator Mounted on a 6HM1-1
O.F. max. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P. F.P.
Catalog Temp. Newtons Newtons mm mm mm mm mm
Listing Description (Max.) ounces ounces inches inches inches inches inches
JS-254 Leaf 500°F 2,50 0,56 0,76 0,76 8,64 12,2
(260°C) 9 2 — .030 .030 .340 approx. .480 approx.
Fig. 5
JS-151 Roller leaf 500°F 2,50 0,56 0,76 0,76 14 17,5
(260°C) 9 2 — .030 .030 .550 approx. .690 approx.
Fig. 6
JS-307 Straight lever 500°F 0,42 0,03 3,18 0,64 1,42 10,3
(260°C) 1.5 .11 .125 .025 .056 .406 approx.
approx.
Fig. 7
JS-308 Roller lever 500°F 0,42 0,03 3,18 0,64 1,42 14,3
(260°C) 1.5 .11 .125 .025 .056 .562 approx.
approx.
Fig. 8
MOUNTING TORQUE:
JS-254 2.5 inch pounds
all others 1.5 inch pounds
See optional mounting plate – previous
page.
All standard JS actuators in the SM Section of Catalog 10 can be used with the
HM line. However, hardware, insulator,
and oil impregnated roller supplied with
these actuators may not provide the required service at temperatures above
250°F (121°C).
Position Sensors HM Series
Miniature Hermetically Sealed Switches
Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada 21
HM MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
Pin plunger switches
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
MOUNTING HOLES WILL ACCEPT PINS OR
SCREWS OF 1,9/.08 DIA
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Auxiliary actuators
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
P
o sitio
n S
enso
rs Position Sensors HS Series
Hermetically Sealed Switches
22 Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada
GENERAL INFORMATION
HS switches are designed for applications
where maximum electrical rating and maximum sealing are essential, and where size
and weight requirements are less critical.
These switches are side mounted through
mounting holes that are outside the sealed
switching chamber.
FEATURES
1 Hermetically sealed per MIL-S-8805,
design symbol 5 (–67° to +180°F or
–55° to 82°C)
1 Power load switching capability up to
25 amperes, 28 VDC
1 Temperature tolerance from –67°F to
+250°F (–55°C to +125°C)
1 High temperature construction for use
to +300°F (149°C)
1 Several styles of integral lever
actuators
1 Two styles of terminals
1 Military standard construction with listings on the MIL-S-8805 qualified products list
1 UL recognized File #E12252; CSA certified LR 4442
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
Circuitry Electrical Rating Codes
Single-Pole M 25 amps res., 8 amps ind., 5 amps motor, 3 amps
Double-Throw lamp load, 28 vdc;
1 amp res., 1 amp ind., 115 vac, 60 Hz
UL-CSA Rating: 1 amp., 115 vac, 60 Hz.
N 15 amps res., 8 amps ind., 28 vdc;
1 amp res., 1 amp ind., 115 vac, 60 Hz
O 20 amps res., 8 amps ind., 28 vdc;
1 amp res., 1 amp ind., 115 vac, 60 Hz
UL-CSA Rating: 1 amp, 115 vac, 60 Hz
P 10 amps res., 5 amps ind., 28 vdc;
1 amp res., 1 amp ind., 115 vac, 60 Hz
UL-CSA Rating: 1 amp., 115 vac, 60 Hz.
Position Sensors HS Series
Hermetically Sealed Switches
Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada 23
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; R.F. —
Release Force; P.T. — Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T.
— Differential Travel; O.P. — Operating Position.HS ORDER GUIDE
Operating Characteristics
Electrical O.F. max. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. O.P.
Catalog Rating Newtons Newtons mm mm mm mm
Listing Recommended For Code ounces ounces inches inches inches inches
1HS1
(MS25011-1)
Most applications
MIL-S-8805 (M8805/47)
M 2,78-6,12 1,11 1,65 0,25 0,51 13,5 ± 0,38
10-22 4 .065 .010 .020 .530 ± .015
101HS1 Operating in
temperatures to
+250°F (121°C)
O 2,78-6,12 1,11 1,65 0,25 0,51 13,5 ± 0,38
10-22 4 .065 .010 .020 .530 ± .015
102HS1 Operating in
temperatures to
+300°F (149°C)
P 2,78-8,34 1,11 1,65 0,25 0,51 13,5 ± 0,38
Fig. 1 10-30 4 .065 .010 .020 .530 ± .015
4HS4-118 Lead wire termination N 2,78-6,12 1,11 1,65 0,25 0,51 15,6
10-22 4 .065 .010 .020 .615±
.020
Fig. 2
1HS41 Applications requiring
added overtravel
M 1,11-5,56 0,56 1,57 2,54 13,54
4-20 2 — .062 max. .100 .533
approx.
Fig. 3
1HS6
(MS25011-4)
MIL-S-8805
requirements. More
operating force
M 6,12-7,78 1,11 2,16 0,25 0,51 13,5 ± 0,38
22-28 4 .085 .010 .020 .530 ± .015
Fig. 4
1HS3 Roller lever M 2,78-6,12 1,11 1,65 0,25 0,51 18,3 ± 0,38
10-22 4 .065 .010 .020 .720 ± .015
Fig. 5
HS MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
Mounting holes will accept pins or screws of .139N (3,53mm) diameter.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3
Fig. 4 Fig. 5
P
o sitio
n S
enso
rs Position Sensors EN Series
Environment-Sealed Limit Switches
Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada 25
FEATURES
1 Environment-proof seal per Symbol 4,
MIL-S-8805
1 Qualified to MIL-S-8805
1 Standard temperature range: –65°F to
+185°F (–54°C to +85°C)
1 High temperature range listings: –65°F
to +257°F (–54°C to +125°C)
1 Meets or exceeds mechanical and
electrical life as defined in MIL-S-8805
1EN1-6
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The electrical ratings charted below are referenced in the order guides. Refer to appropriate MIL specification for ratings applicable to specific switches.
DC RATINGS (Amps)
Sea Level 50,000 FeetRating2
Code Voltage Inrush Motor Res. Ind. Inrush Motor Res. Ind.
A 28 VDC 24 4 4 2 24 43 41 2
B 28 VDC 36 6 10 3 36 63 10 3
C 28 VDC 30 5 15 10 30 53 15 10
D 28 VDC 24 4 5 3 N/A
E 28 VDC N/A 1 .5 N/A 1 .5
F 28 VDC 24 4 7 4 24 43 7 2.5
Notes:
1 5 amps for rotary switches
2 For other electrical data, contact your nearest MICRO SWITCH Sales Office. MIL-S-8805 ratings apply when
this specification is invoked.
3 Application information only.
AC RATINGS (Amps)
Sea Level
MotorRating
Code Voltage Make Break Res. Ind.
A&D 125/460 VAC @ 60 Hz 24 4 5 3
125 VAC @ 400 Hz 24 4 5 5
B 125/250 VAC @ 60 Hz 20 3 5 5
460 VAC @ 60 Hz 20 3 3 3
125 VAC @ 400 Hz 36 6 10 6
C 125/250 VAC @ 60 Hz 20 3 5 5
460 VAC @ 60 Hz 20 3 3 3
125 VAC @ 400 Hz 30 5 10 6
F 125/460 VAC @ 60 Hz 12 2 2 2
125 VAC @ 400 Hz 24 4 5 5
CIRCUITRY
Two Single-Pole
Double-Throw
Circuits
Four Single-Pole
Double-Throw
Circuits
Two Circuit
Double Break
Four Circuit
Double Break
P
o sitio
n S
enso
rs Position Sensors EN Series
Environment-Sealed Limit Switches
26 Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada
TERMINATION
Termination is specified in the order
guides. Leadwires are generally six feet
long, and of the gage and Military Specifications noted in the order guides.
MOUNTING
Plunger actuator switches mount through
5⁄8 inch or 15⁄32 inch diameter holes. Lock
washer, keyed washer, and wire lock hexagon mounting nuts lock the switches in
their mounting holes.
Rotary actuator switches mount through
15/32 inch diameter holes. A lock washer
wire lock hexagon nut and locating pins
on the top of the housing prevent switch
rotation.
OPERATION
Plunger Actuators
For in-line actuation. An ice scraper ring
cleans the actuator with each operation.
Ball Bearing Plunger Actuator
For random direction operation. An ice
scraper ring cleans the actuator with each
operation. For further information, contact your nearest MICRO SWITCH Sales
Office.
Roller Plunger Actuators
For cam and slide actuation not to exceed
20° rise. Roller adjusts laterally in 45° increments. An ice scraper ring cleans the
actuator with each operation.
Rotary Linkage Lever Actuator
A threaded rod attaches to the rotary lever
for positive actuation. The rotary lever operates in either direction and adjusts laterally to any position through 360°. The
threaded rod pivots in two planes. The actuator has no spring return, but is controlled directly by the movement of the actuating device.
Rotary Roller Lever Actuator
For cam and slide actuation with more
than a 30° rise. A spring returned mechanism, this actuator is available in clockwise and counterclockwise operation designs. The actuator adjusts laterally to
any position through 360°. The roller is
laminated phenolic.
DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
Position Sensors EN Series
Environment-Sealed Limit Switches
Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada 27
MIL-S-8805 PERFORMANCE APPROVED SWITCHES
EN Standard Size Switches
Strength of Strength of
Terminal Actuating Mounting
Strength Means Bushing Seal
Catalog Procurement Newtons Newtons Nm Moisture Salt Acceler- Resilient
Listing Part No. lbs. lbs. in. lbs. Vibration Shock Resistance Spray Explosion ation (Symbol 4)
1EN1-6 MS24331-1 66,7 133 1,7 10-58 Hz 100gs Applicable Applicable Applicable N/A Applicable
2EN1-6 MS24331-2 15 30 15 at .060 in. (1,52mm) .006 sec. test test test test
3EN1-6 MS24331-3 Double Amplitude pulse
4EN1-6 MS24331-4 58-500 Hz sawtooth
at 10gs
31EN11-6 MS21320-1 66,7 44,5 1,7 10-58 Hz 100gs Applicable Applicable Applicable N/A Applicable
31EN1-6 MS21320-2 15 10 15 at .060 in. (1,52mm) .006 sec. test test test test
32EN11-6 MS21320-3 Double Amplitude pulse
32EN1-6 MS21320-4 sawtooth
33EN11-6 MS21320-5 58-500 Hz
33EN1-6 MS21320-6 at 10gs
34EN11-6 MS21320-7
34EN1-6 MS21320-8
41EN1-6 MS24420-1 66,7 — 1,7 10-58 Hz 100gs Applicable Applicable Applicable N/A Applicable
42EN1-6 MS24420-2 15 15 at .060 in. (1,52mm) .006 sec. test test test test
43EN1-6 MS24420-3 Double Amplitude pulse
44EN1-6 MS24420-4 sawtooth
58-500 Hz
at 10gs
1EN75-R3 M8805/65-001 — 44,5 1,7 10-70 Hz High Applicable Applicable Applicable 20g Applicable
10 15 at .060 in. (1,52mm) impact test test test test
Double Amplitude type ‘‘H’’
70-2000 Hz
at 15gs
1EN1-6 1EN1-S 1EN42-R
Characteristics: O.F. – Operating Force; R.F. – Release Force; P.T. – Pretravel; O.T. –
Overtravel; D.T. – Differential Travel.EN STANDARD SIZE SWITCHES ORDER GUIDE
Housing
Characteristics Dimensions2
R.F. P.T. O.T. D.T. Wgt. Repl.
Elec. O.F. min. max. min. max. Height Dia. max. Mtg.
Rating1 Catalog N N mm mm mm mm mm g Hdw.
Circuitry Actuator Termination Code Listing lbs. lbs. inches inches inches inches inches oz. Pkt.6
Plunger No. 20 A 1EN1-6 26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 6,35 0.51 24,9 25,4 207 1
Leadwire (MS24331-1) 6-12 4 .040 .250 .020 .980 1.0 7.3
MIL-W-22759/7 (8805/40)
Ball as above A 2001EN1-6 26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 6,35 0.51 24,9 25,4 207 1
Bearing 6-12 4 .040 .250 .020 .980 1.0 7.3
Plunger
Plunger Screw4 A 1EN1-S 26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 6,35 0,51 38,2 25,4 99 3
Two 6-12 4 .040 .250 .020 1.505 1.0 3.5
Single-Pole
Double-Throw Plunger Side5 A 1EN42-R 26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 6,35 0.51 26,9 58,43 221 3
Circuits Receptacle 6-12 4 .040 .250 .020 1.06 2.3 7.8
Notes:
1 Electrical ratings are on page 25.
2 Combine housing diameter and height with actuator
on page 26 for overall size.
3 Maximum length rather than housing diameter.
4 This listing has 4-48 NF × .175 inch round head
screws with lockwashers. Terminals are well isolated by phenolic barriers and epoxy casting resin.
5 These listings have pin receptacles (mating connectors should be ordered from a local supplier).
6 See page 33 for replacement mounting hardware
packet catalog listings.
N J Newtons
P
o sitio
n S
enso
rs Position Sensors EN Series
Environment-Sealed Limit Switches
28 Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada
1EN43-R 2EN1-6 41EN1-6
21EN9-6 22EN9-6 42EN1-6 31EN1-6 32EN1-6
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; R.F. — Release Force;
P.T. — Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential Travel.EN STANDARD SIZE SWITCHES ORDER GUIDE
Housing
Characteristics Dimensions2
R.F. P.T. O.T. D.T. Wgt. Repl.
Elec. O.F. min. max. min. max. Height Dia. max. Mtg.
Rating1 Catalog N N mm mm mm mm mm g Hdw.
Circuitry Actuator Termination Code Listing lbs. lbs. inches inches inches inches inches oz. Pkt.4
Plunger Bottom3 A 1EN43-R 26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 6,35 0,51 53,3 25,4 204 3
Receptacle 6-12 4 .040 .250 .020 2.1 1.0 7.2
Plunger No. 18 B 2EN1-6 26,7-53,4 22,8 1,27 6,35 0,89 38,1 38,1 156 1
Two Leadwire (MS24331-2) 6-12 5 .050 .250 .035 1.5 1.5 5.5
Single-Pole MIL-W-22759/7 (8805/40)
Double-Throw
Circuits Roller No. 20 A 21EN9-6 26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 6,35 0,51 24,9 25,4 252 4
Plunger Leadwire 6-12 4 .040 .250 .020 .980 1.0 8.9
(MIL-W-22759/7)
Roller No. 18 B 22EN9-6 26,7-53,4 22,2 1,02 6,35 0,76 38,1 38,1 38,3 4
Plunger Leadwire 6-12 5 .040 .250 .030 1.5 1.5 13.5
(MIL-W-22759/7)
Rotary No. 20 A 31EN11-6 (CW) 1,4-2,8 Nm 1,0 Nm 53,6 25,4 269 5
Roller Leadwire (MS21320-1) max. 4N
Lever MIL-W-22759/7 (8805/48) 12-25 in. lb. 9 in. lb. 13N 32N max. 2.11 1.0 9.5 5
31EN1-6 (CCW)
(MS21320-2)
Rotary No. 18 B 32EN11-6 (CW) 1,4-2,8 Nm 1,0 Nm 68,6 38,1 368 5
Roller Leadwire (MS21320-3) max. 6N
Lever MIL-W-22759/7 (8805/48) 12-25 in. lb. 9 in. lb. 20N 25N max. 2.7 1.5 13 5
32EN1-6 (CCW)
(MS21320-4)
(8805/48)
Rotary No. 20 A 41EN1-6 0,34 Nm 25,4 25,4 213 5
Linkage Leadwire (MS24420-1) max. — — — 12N
Lever MIL-W-22759/7 3 in. lb. max. 1 1.0 7.5
Rotary No. 18 B 42EN1-6 0,57 Nm 42,2 38,1 220 5
Linkage Leadwire (MS24420-2) max. — — — 12N
Lever MIL-W-22759/7 (8805/49) 5 in. lb. max. 1.66 1.5 7.75
Notes:
1 Electrical ratings are on page 25.
2 Combine housing diameter and height with actuator
on page 26 for overall size.
3 These listings have pin receptacles (mating connectors should be ordered from a local supplier).
4 See page 33 for replacement mounting hardware
packet catalog listings.
N J Newtons
Position Sensors EN Series
Environment-Sealed Limit Switches
Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada 29
5EN1-6 25EN9-6 3EN1-6 23EN9-6 33EN1-6
4EN1-6 24EN9-6 34EN1-6 44EN1-6
Characteristics: O.F. — Operating Force; R.F. — Release Force;
P.T. — Pretravel; O.T. — Overtravel; D.T. — Differential Travel.EN STANDARD SIZE SWITCHES ORDER GUIDE
Housing
Characteristics Dimensions2
R.F. P.T. O.T. D.T. Wgt. Repl.
Elec. O.F. min. max. min. max. Height Dia. max. Mtg.
Rating1 Catalog N N mm mm mm mm mm g Hdw.
Circuitry Actuator Termination Code Listing lbs. lbs. inches inches inches inches inches oz. Pkt.3
Four Plunger No. 20 A 5EN1-6 26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 6,35 0,76 30,5 38,1 346 3
Single-Pole Leadwire 6-12 4 .040 .250 .030 1.2 1.5 12.2
Double-Throw (MIL-W-5086)
Circuits
Roller No. 20 A 25EN9-6 26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 6,35 0,76 30,5 38,1 360 4
(See p. 25 for Plunger Leadwire 6-12 4 .040 .250 .030 1.2 1.5 12.7
circuit drawing) (MIL-W-5086)
Plunger No. 18 C 3EN1-6 26,7-53,4 22,2 1,52 6,35 0.89 33,3 38,1 241 1
Leadwire (MS24331-3) 6-12 5 .060 .250 .035 1.31 1.5 8.5
MIL-W-22759/7 (8805/40)
Two Circuit
Double Break Roller No. 18 C 23EN9-6 26,7-53,4 22,2 1,52 6,35 0.89 33,3 38,1 255 4
Plunger Leadwire 6-12 5 .060 .250 .035 1.31 1.5 9
(MIL-W-5086)
Rotary No. 18 C 33EN11-6 (CW) 1,4-2,8 Nm 0.9 Nm 62 38,1 269 5
Roller Leadwire (MS21320-5) 12-25 in. lb. 8 in. lb. 15° 30° 5° 2.44 1.5 9.5
Lever MIL-W-22759/7 (8805/48) 5
33EN1-6 (CCW)
(MS21320-6)
(8805/48)
Plunger No. 18 C 4EN1-6 26,7-53,4 22,2 1,78 6,35 1,14 43,2 38,1 368 1
Leadwire (MS24331-4) 6-12 5 .070 .250 .045 1.7 1.5 13
MIL-W-22759/7 (8805/40)
Roller No. 18 C 24EN9-6 26,7-53,4 22,2 1,78 6,35 1,14 43,2 38,1 368 4
Four Circuit Plunger Leadwire 6-12 5 .070 .250 .045 1.7 1.5 13
Double Break (MIL-W-5086)
Rotary No. 18 C 34EN11-6 (CW) 1,4-2,8 Nm 0,9 Nm 71,6 38,1 439 5
Roller Leadwire (MS21320-7) 12-25 in. lb. 8 in. lb. 15° 30° 10° 2.82 1.5 15.5
Lever MIL-W-22759/7 (8805/48) 5
34EN1-6 (CCW)
(MS21320-8)
(8805/48)
Rotary No. 18 C 44EN1-6 1,1 Nm 45,7 38,1 451 5
Linkage Leadwire (MS24420-4) max. — — — 20N 1.8 1.5 15.9
Lever MIL-W-22759/7 (8805/49) 10 in. lb.
Notes:
1 Electrical ratings are on page 25.
2 Combine housing diameter and height with actuator
dimension on page 26 for overall size.
3 See page 33 for replacement mounting hardware
packet catalog listings.
N J Newtons
P
o sitio
n S
enso
rs Position Sensors EN Series
Environment-Sealed Limit Switches
30 Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada
1EN194-S (similar in
appearance but has
screw terminals)
1EN51-6 1EN61-6 1EN75-R 1EN76-R 1EN75-R3 21EN75-R1 21EN75-2
1EN231-6
Characteristics: O.F. – Operating Force; R.F. – Release Force;
P.T. – Pretravel; O.T. – Overtravel; D.T. – Differential Travel.EN SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS ORDER GUIDE
Characteristics
R.F. P.T. O.T. D.T. Wgt. Repl.
Elec. O.F. min. max. min. max. max. Mtg.
Special2 Rating1 Catalog N N mm mm mm g Hdw.
Requirement Actuator Termination Circuitry Code Listing lbs. lbs. inches inches inches oz. Pkt.3
High Plunger No. 20 (2)SPDT A 1EN231-6 26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 5,84 0,51 207 3
Velocity Leadwire 6-12 4 .040 .230 .020 7.3
Actuation (MIL-W-22759/1)
Low Force Plunger No. 20 (2)SPDT A 1EN51-6 13,3-26,7 8,9 1,02 6,35 0,51 213 3
Operation Leadwire 3-6 2 .040 .250 .020 7.5
(MIL-W-5086)
Increased Plunger No. 20 (2)SPDT A 1EN61-6 26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 12,7 0,51 227 3
Overtravel Leadwire 6-12 4 .040 .500 .020 8
(MIL-W-5086)
Increased Plunger Screw (2)SPDT A 1EN194-S 26,7-53,4 17,8 0,38-1,02 21,8 0,51 113 7
Overtravel 6-12 4 .015-.040 .860 .020 4
High Shock Plunger Bottom (2)SPDT A 1EN75-R 26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 6,35 0,51 198 8
Receptacle 6-12 4 .040 .250 .020 7
High Shock Plunger Side (2)SPDT A 1EN76-R 26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 6,35 0,51 227 8
Receptacle 6-12 4 .040 .250 .020 8
High Shock Plunger Bottom (2)SPDT D 1EN75-R3 26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 6,35 0,51 198 8
Receptacle (M8805/65-001) 6-12 4 .040 .250 .020 7
High Shock Roller Bottom (2)SPDT A 21EN75-R1 26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 6,35 0,51 204 11
Plunger Receptacle 6-12 4 .040 .250 .020 7.2
High Shock Roller No. 20 (2)SPDT A 21EN75-2 26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 6,35 0,51 207 11
Plunger Leadwire 6-12 4 .040 .250 .020 7.3
(MIL-W-22759/7)
Notes:
1 Electrical ratings are on page 25.
2 These are just a few of the designs that have been
developed to meet special application requirements. If you have similar or different special requirements, contact MICRO SWITCH for the right
switch to meet them.
3 See page 33 for replacement mounting hardware
packet catalog listings
N J Newtons
EXPLANATIONS OF SWITCHES WITH
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
High velocity actuation
This switch is designed to withstand near
‘‘hammer-blow’’ actuation as is found in
over-center locking mechanisms. It is dimensionally interchangeable with standard listing 1EN1-6.
Low force operation
Special spring construction within this
switch reduces the normal 6 to 12 pound
(26,7 to 53,4 N) EN operating force to 3 to
6 pounds (13,3 to 26,7 N). This switch is
also dimensionally interchangeable with
the standard size 1EN1-6. Low force 600
series ENs have 3 to 6 pounds (13,3 to
26,7 N) of operating force.
Increased overtravel
A longer plunger and bushing on the
switch extends the EN overtravel capabilities from the normal .250 inch to .860
(6,35 to 21,8 mm). The longer bushing also permits additional adjustment of the
plunger position.
High impact shock
Catalog listing1EN75-R3 (M8805/65-001)
has been qualified to MIL-S-8805, including high impact shock class H. Other
switches rated for high impact shock applications incorporate the same plunger
mechanism and internal switch design as
used in the1EN75-R3 and are expected to
conform to the same requirements.
Terminations of these listings are:
1EN75-R DM-9601-7P-1D
Deutch receptacle
1EN75-R3 GS02-16S-1P-003
Cannon receptacle
1EN76-R DM-9601-7P-1D
Deutch receptacle
21EN75-R1 GS02-16S-1P-003
Cannon receptacle
21EN75-2 MIL-W-22759/7
Two foot lead wire 20 gage
MICRO SWITCH does not furnish mating connectors with these products.
Position Sensors EN Series
Environment-Sealed Limit Switches
Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada 31
Miniature Standard
FEATURES
1 Meets or exceeds mechanical and
electrical life as defined in MIL-S-8805.
1 Seal definition: Environment-proof. Resilient per MIL-S-8805, symbol 4.
1 Military specification: MIL-S-8805
1 Temperature range: –67°F to +185°F
(–55°C to +85°C)
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
Refer to page 25.
MINIATURE TYPE SWITCHES
Miniature type EN switches meet the demand for smaller size and lighter weight
without sacrificing performance or electrical capacity. These types are of the same
construction, seal, and materials as the
standard size EN switches.
Type 400EN switches are directly interchangeable with their standard size EN
counterpart, yet are smaller in diameter
and lighter in weight. The miniature listing
housing is .312 inch (7,92mm) smaller in
diameter, and the switch weight 1⁄2 ounce
(14,2g) less.
MIL-S-8805 PERFORMANCE APPROVED SWITCHES
EN Miniature Switches
Strength of Strength of
Terminal Actuating Mounting
Procure- Strength Means Bushing Moisture Seal
Catalog ment Newtons Newtons Nm Resist- Salt Explo- Acceler- Resilient
Listing Part No. lbs. lbs. in. lbs. Vibration Shock ance Spray sion ation (Design 4)
402EN1-6 MS21321-1 66,7 133 1,7 10-70 Hz 100gs Applicable Applicable Applicable N/A Applicable
404EN1-6 MS21321-2 15 30 15 at .060 in.
(1,52mm) D.A.1
70-2000 Hz
at 15gs
.006 sec.
pulse
sawtooth
test test test test
602EN1-6 MS27240-1 66,7 44,5 1,7 10-70 Hz 100gs Applicable Applicable Applicable N/A Applicable
604EN1-6 MS27240-2 15 10 15 at .060 in.
(1,52mm) D.A.1
70-2000 Hz
at 15gs
.006 sec.
pulse
sawtooth
test test test test
622EN1-6 MS27240-3
624EN1-6 MS27240-4
602EN222-6 MS27240-5
604EN222-6 MS27240-6
622EN222-6 MS27240-7
624EN222-6 MS27240-8
Notes:
1D.A. J double amplitude or displacement.
402EN1-6 602EN1-6
P
o sitio
n S
enso
rs Position Sensors EN Series
Environment-Sealed Limit Switches
32 Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada
442EN1-6 404EN1-6 444EN1-6 622EN1-6 604EN1-6 602EN602-6
Characteristics: O.F. – Operating Force; R.F. – Release Force;
P.T. – Pretravel; O.T. – Overtravel; D.T. – Differential Travel.EN MINIATURE SWITCHES ORDER GUIDE
Housing
Characteristics Dimensions1
R.F. P.T. O.T. D.T. Repl.
Elec. O.F. min. max. min. max. Height Dia. Wgt. Mtg.
Rating Catalog N N mm mm mm mm mm g Hdw.
Circuitry Actuator Code Listing lbs. lbs. inches inches inches inches inches oz. Pkt3
Two
Single-Pole
Double-Throw
Circuits
Plunger F 402EN1-6
(MS21321-1)
(8805/39)
26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 6,35 0,51 24,9 17,5 204 1
6-12 4 .040 .250 .020 .980 .688 7.2
Rotary
Linkage
Lever
F 442EN1-6 34 Nm 25.4 17.5 207 9
max. — — — 12N
3 in. lbs. 1.0 .688 7.3
Four
Single-Pole
Double-Throw
Circuits
Plunger F 404EN1-6
(MS21321-2)
8805/39)
26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 6,35 0,51 30,5 25,4 354 1
6-12 4 .040 .250 .020 1.2 1.0 12.5
Rotary
Linkage
Lever
F 444EN1-6 .34 Nm 30,2 25,4 340 6
max. — — — 12N
3 in. lbs. 1.19 1.0 12
Two SPDT
Circuits
Plunger F 602EN1-6
(MS27240-1)
(8805/43)
26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 3,18 0,51 25,4 17,5 176 2
6-12 4 .040 .125 .020 1.0 .688 6.2
E 602EN222-6
(MS27240-5)
(8805/43)
2
Roller Plunger F 622EN1-6
(MS27240-3)
(8805/43)
26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 3,18 0,51 25,4 17,5 204 10
6-12 4 .040 .125 .020 1.0 .688 7.2
E 622EN222-6
(MS27240-7)
(8805/43)
10
Four SPDT
Circuits
Plunger F 604EN1-6
(MS27240-2)
(8805/43)
26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 3,18 0,51 30,5 25,4 354 2
6-12 4 040 .125 .020 1.2 1.0 12.5
E 604EN222-6
(MS27240-6)
(8805/43)
2
Roller Plunger F 624EN1-6
(MS27240-4)
(8805/43)
26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 3,18 0,51 30,5 25,4 354 10
6-12 4 040 .125 .020 1.2 1.0 12.5
E 624EN222-6
(MS27240-8)
(8805/43)
Two SPDT
Circuits
.125 Dia.
Plunger
F 602EN602-6 8,9-17,8 4,4 0,38 6,35 0,51 25,4 17,5 170 2
2-4 1 .015±.010 .250 .020 1.0 .688 6.0
Notes:
1 Combine housing diameter and height with actuator
dimension on this page or page 26 for overall size of
the switch.
2 All miniature EN limit switches listed here have 6 foot
(1,8m) lengths of No. 20 leadwire per MS22759-7,
marked per MIL-W-5088. For variations, contact
MICRO SWITCH.
3 See page 33 for replacement mounting hardware
packet catalog listings
N J Newtons
600EN ACTUATOR DIMENSIONS
400EN actuator dimensions are the
same as those shown for standard
size ENs on page 26.
Position Sensors EN Series
Environment-Sealed Limit Switches
Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada 33
EN REPLACEMENT PARTS ORDER GUIDE
Catalog Listing Description For Use on:
6PA30 Roller lever arm 30EN series
6PA31 Linkage lever arm 40EN series
6PA357 Threaded rod only
6PA32 Roller lever arm 1EN & 1HE series
6PA202 Roller lever arm 600EN & 600HE series
15PA104 Roller guide and locking ring 21EN, 422/424EN
series (5⁄8 N bushing)
15PA105 Roller guide and locking ring 622/624EN series
(15⁄32 N bushing)
15PA137 Locking ring only 21EN 422/424EN
series (5⁄8 N bushing)
15PA107 Locking ring only 622EN & 624EN
series (15⁄32 N bushing)
19PA8 Military-type mounting hardware 1EN series (5⁄8 N bushing)
19PA9 Military-type mounting hardware 600EN series (15⁄32 N bushing)
REPLACEMENT MOUNTING HARDWARE PACKETS
Refer to EN order guides on previous
pages (catalog listing column and right
hand column) for switch/mounting hardware cross-reference.
Repl. Mtg. Catalog Repl. Mtg. Catalog
Hdw. Pkt. Listing Hdw. Pkt. Listing
1 19PA8 7 19PA120-EN
2 19PA9 8 19PA121-EN
3 19PA78-EN 9 19PA122-EN
4 19PA115-EN 10 19PA123-EN
5 19PA117-EN 11 19PA124-EN
6 19PA119-EN
1 Other packets are available. Contact your local MICRO SWITCH sales office for more
information.
P
o sitio
n S
enso
rs Position Sensors EN Series
Environment-Sealed Limit Switches
34 Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada
EN MOUNTIND DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
Standard size EN switches
1EN75-R 1EN75-R3
1EN76-R 21EN75-R1
1EN51-6
1EN231-6 21EN75-2
1EN61-6 600EN actuators
Plunger Roller plunger
Position Sensors HE Series
Hermetically Sealed Limit Switch
Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada 35
GENERAL INFORMATION
True hermetic sealing with metal-to-metal, glass-to-metal constuction assures
maximum seal effectiveness for exceptionally long periods of time despite continuous changes in atmospheric pressures and temperatures.
1HE1-6 is directly interchangeable with
the 1EN1-6 (MS24331-1) environmentproof switches, and has the same operating characteristics, physical dimensions, and electrical capacity. This switch
features corrosion resistance, small size,
one hole wire-lock mounting, and MILW-22759/7 leadwire.
Most EN type actuators can be provided
on HE switches. Contact MICRO SWITCH
for more information.
FEATURES
1 Sealing: Hermetic sealing per MILS-8805, hermetic symbol 5
1 1HE1-6 qualified to military specification: MIL-S-8805/80
1 Vibration: 10 to 81 Hz at .060 in.
(1,52mm) D.A. 81 to 2000 Hz at 20 gs
1 Shock: 200 g, .007 second, half sine
pulse
1 Strength of actuating means: 250 lbs.
(1112N)
1 Strength of mounting means: 400 in.
lbs. (45,2 Nm) - 1HE1-6, 200 in. lbs.
-602/622 HE
1 Also meets sand and dust, explosion,
icing, minimum current, and moisture
resistance requirements
1 Temperature range: –67°F to +257°F
(–55°C to +125°C)
1 Weight: 7.3 oz. (207 g) max1HE1-6, 6.5
oz. (184g) max. 602HE1-6 (including 6
ft. (1,8m) leadwires)
1 Circuitry: Two or four single-pole, double-throw circuits
1 Meets or exceeds mechanical and
electrical life as defined in MIL-S-8805
1 Modifications: Other leadwire types
and lengths are available. Receptacle
termination is also possible
ELECTRICAL RATINGS amps at sea
level and 100,000 feet (amps)
602/622HE1-6
28 VDC 1HE1-6 604/624HE1-6
Resistive 5 7
Inductive 3 4
Motor 4 4
Gold contacts can be provided with 1⁄2
amp inductive and 1 amp resistive at 28
VDC electrical rating. P
o sitio
n S
enso
rs Position Sensors HE Series
Hermetically Sealed Limit Switch
36 Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada
Characteristics: O.F. – Operating Force; R.F. – Release Force;
P.T. – Pretravel; O.T. – Overtravel; D.T. – Differential Travel.HE ORDER GUIDE
Characteristics
O.F. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max.
Newtons Newtons mm mm mm
Circuitry Catalog Listing Actuator lbs. lbs. in. in. in.
1HE1-6 Plunger 26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 6,35 0,51
(MS8805/80-01) 6-12 4 .040 .250 .020
602HE1-6 Plunger 22,2-53,4 13,3 1,02 3,18 0,51
5-12 3 .040 .125 .020
622HE1-6 Roller 22,2-53,4 13,3 1,02 3,18 0,51
Plunger 5-12 3 .040 .125 .020
Two
Single-Pole
DoubleThrow
Circuits
Four
Single-Pole
DoubleThrow Circuits
604HE1-6 Plunger 26,7-53,4 17,8 1,02 3,18 0,51
6-12 4 .040 .125 .020
624HE1-6 Roller 22,2-53,4 13,3 1,02 3,18 0,51
Plunger 5-12 3 .040 .125 .020
HE MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
1HE1-6
602HE1-6 622HE1-6
604HE1-6 has same dimensions as 602HE1-6, except housing
dia. is 1.0/25,4; and housing height is 1.2/30,5.
624HE1-6 has same dimensions as 622HE1-6, except housing dia. is
1.0/25,4; and housing height is 1.2/30,5.
Position Sensors HR Series
High Temperature Hermetically Sealed Switches
Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada 37
FEATURES
1 Enclosure seal: Sealed per MILS-8805, enclosure design Symbol 5*
1 Terminal strength: 15 lbs. (66,7N)
1 Strength of actuating means: 35 lbs.
(156N)
1 Strength of mounting bushing: 15 in.
lbs. (1,7Nm)
1 Vibration: 10 to 58 Hz at .060 in.
(1,52mm) D.A. 58 to 500 Hz at 20 gs
1 Shock: 100 gs, .006 sec. sawtooth
pulse
1 Also meets moisture resistance, explosion, and salt spray requirements.
1 Temperature range: –85°F to +600°F
(–65°C to +315°C)
1 Modifications: Receptacle termination
is available. Temperature rating may be
lowered because of receptacle limitations or customer-specified leadwire.
* Watertight test not applicable per MIL-S-8805.
GENERAL INFORMATION
HR switches combine maximum sealing,
high (600°F, 315°C) temperature capabilities, and rugged, heavy duty, corrosionresistant construction to provide reliable
switching in the most demanding applications.
MOUNTING
Plunger actuator switches bushing
mount through 3⁄4 inch (19,1mm) diameter
holes. Lock washer, keying washer, and
wire lock hexagon mounting nuts lock the
switches in their mounting.
Rotary actuator switches mount through
15⁄32 inch (11,9mm) diameter holes. A lock
washer, wire lock hexagon nut, and locating pins on the top of the housing prevent
switch rotation.
ACTUATORS
Plunger
For in-line actuation. An ice scraper ring
clears the actuator with each operation.
Material is stainless steel.
Roller plunger
For cam and slide actuation not to exceed
20° rise. Roller adjusts laterally in 45° increments. An ice scraper ring cleans the
actuator with each operation. Material is
stainless steel.
ELECTRICAL RATING
MS24594-1 ratings apply when MIL-S-8805/41
is invoked.
Amperage
Voltage Ind. Res.
28 DC 2 5
CIRCUITRY
One Single-Pole
Double-Throw Circuit
Two Single-Pole
Double-Throw Circuits P
o sitio
n S
enso
rs Position Sensors HR Series
High Temperature Hermetically Sealed Switches
38 Honeywell Sensing and Control 11-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 11-416-293-8111 Canada
Characteristics: O.F. – Operating Force; R.F. – Release Force;
P.T. – Pretravel; O.T. – Overtravel; D.T. – Differential Travel.HR ORDER GUIDE
Characteristics
O.F. R.F. min. P.T. max. O.T. min. D.T. max. Weight
Catalog Newtons Newtons mm mm mm g
Listing Actuator Circuitry Terminals1 lbs. lbs. inches inches inches oz.
12HR1-S2
(MS24594-1)
Plunger (2)SPDT Screw 26,7-53,4 22,2 1,27 6,35 0,38 127
6-12 5 .050 .250 .015 4.5
12HR8-6 Plunger SPDT Leadwire 26,7-53,4 22,2 1,27 6,35 0,38 284
6-12 5 .050 .250 .015 10
22HR1-S Roller Plunger (2)SPDT Screw 26,7-53,4 22,2 1,27 6,35 0,38 142
6-12 5 .050 .250 .015 5
Notes:
1 Screw terminals are 4-48 NF × .188 inch screw with
sems washers. Leadwire terminals are 6 foot
(1,8mm).
2 Meets MIL-S-8805/41 specification.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
12HR1-S
Fig. 1
12HR8-6
Fig. 3
22HR1-2
Fig. 2
41HR1-S
Fig. 4
Basic Switches AC Series
Door
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 89
Style 1
Style 2
Style 3
Style 4
Style 5
Style 6
Style 7
Style 8
FEATURES
1 Automatically cut power when service
door or drawer is opened, helping protect personnel and equipment.
1 Enables circuit testing with power On
by manually pulling rod actuator to
maintained-On position. (Closing door
or drawer resets switch.)
1 Basic switches are component recognized by UL to UL1054 special use
switches.
1 UL recognized AC are available
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
A 15 amps, 125, 250 or 480 VAC; 1/2
amp, 125 VDC; 1/4 amp, 250 VDC.
B 5 amps, 125 or 250 VAC; 30 VDC
ind., 3 amps (sea level) and 2.5 amps
(50,000 ft.); res., 5 amps (sea level
and 50,000 ft.); max. inrush 25 amps.
C 15 amps, 125 or 250 VAC; 1/2 amp,
125 VDC; 1/4 amp, 250 VDC; 1/3 hp,
125 or 250 VAC.
ORDER GUIDES WITH STEEL ROD ACTUATORS
Characteristics:
F.P. — Free Position;
O.P. — Operating Position;
D.P. — Depressed Position.
F.P. O.P. D.P.
max. min. max.
Style Basic Elec. Catalog mm mm mm Temp.
No. Description SwitchRating Listing In. In. In. Ratings
1 15 amps, SPDT. BZ A 1AC2 11,1 6.35 3.18 –65°F to +180°F
.438 .250 .125
2 5 amps, SM(4) B 8AC1 9,53 5,16 3,18 –65°F to +250°F
Four SPDT ckts. .375 .203 .125
3 Three 6-foot leads. SE B 9AC4 9,53 5,16 3,18 –65°F to +221°F
Sealed basic .375 .203 .125
switches
5 amps, SPDT
3 Two 3-foot leads. SE B 9AC12-3 9,53 5,16 3,18 −65°F to +221°F
Sealed basic .375 .203 .125
switches.
5 amps, SPST-N.O.
4 Can be reset without V3 C 13AC1 15,9 12,3 6,68 −67°F to +300°F
momentary ckt. .625 .485 .263
break.
15 amps, SPDT.
5 Miniature size. SM B 17AC1-T 9,53 5,59 4,45 −65°F to +250°F
5 amps, SPDT 17AC18-T† .375 .220 .175 −67°F to +185°F
(MS16106-4)
6 Tapped hole in end V3 C 2AC59† 9,53 5,16 3,18 −67°F to +185°F
of actuator rod. (MS16106-1) .375 .203 .125
15 amps, SPDT.
†–These are military approved listings and the temperature range shown is for the finished product. All other
listings are not military approved and the temperature range shown is the range for the basic switch only.
WITH HIGH STRENGTH THERMOPLASTIC ROD ACTUATORS*
2 5 amps. SM(4) B 8AC9 9,53 5,16 3,18
Four SPDT ckts. (MS16106-3) .375 .203 .125
6 15 amps. SPDT. V3 C 22AC1 9,53 5,16 3,18
.375 .203 .125
6 Tapped hole in end V3 C 22AC2 9,53 5,16 3,18
of actuator rod. .375 .203 .125
15 amps. SPDT.
7 15 amps. SPDT. V3 C 23AC1 9,53 5,16 3,18
.375 .203 .125
7 Tapped hole in end V3 C 23AC2 9,53 5,16 3,18
of actuator rod. .375 .203 .125
15 amps. SPDT.
8 15 amps. V3(2) C 24AC1 9,53 4,75 3,18
Two SPDT ckts. .375 .187 .125
8 Tapped hole in end V3(2) C 24AC2 9,53 4,75 3,18
of actuator rod. 4AC54** .375 .187 .125
15 amps. (MS16106-2)
Two SPDT ckts. 4AC55
(MS16106-5)
*Not for use above 85°C (+185°F). Use steel
actuators at higher temperatures. For additional
catalog listings, contact the 800 number.
**Both switches operate on pull stroke, only one
switch operates on push (reset) stroke.
S
ealed
/H
ig h Tem
p erature
Basic Switches DM/DP Series
Snap-in Panel Mount
90 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
Momentary Action Alternate Action Push-Pull Pull-to-Cheat
Bullet nose plunger
(SPDT shown)
Bullet nose plunger
(DPDT shown)
Finger grip plunger
(DPDT shown)
Finger grip plunger
with flat tip (SPDT shown)
Finger grip plunger with
spherical tip (DPDT
shown)
FEATURES
1 Attractive, rugged snap-in panel mount
design — easy installation
1 Choice of momentary, alternate pushpull and pull-to-cheat operation
1 Quick-connect terminals
1 Expected mechanical life: 1 million operations, 95% survival
1 Temperature range: −35° to +180°F
(−37° to 82°C)
1 UL recognized file #E22779, CSA certified file #LR4442
DM electrical rating — UL and CSA rating:
10 amps, 1/2 HP, 125, 250 or 277 VAC
DP electrical rating — UL standard 508,
14 amps 3/4 hp, 125, 250 VAC; Pilot Duty:
150 V A – 125, 250 VAC; 16 amps, 125,
250, 277 VAC, 3/4 hp, 125, 250 VAC; Pilot
Duty: 150 V A – 125, 250 VAC.
NOTE: Refer to MICRO SWITCH Catalog 30 for DM switches with snap-on
pushbuttons.
MOMENTARY ACTION
Momentary action switches are available
in a choice of concave, convex, or bullet
nose plunger styles.
Convex
plunger
Concave
plunger
ALTERNATE ACTION
These switches have push-on, push-off
operation. The alternate action is at two
levels, with the maintained On position of
the plunger at a lower level than the normal Off.
PUSH-PULL
When plunger is depressed, it remains
down and maintains circuit transfer.
Switch contacts return to the previous position when the plunger is pulled to the extended position.
PULL-TO-CHEAT
Pull-to-cheat operates normally as a momentary action switch. However, by pulling the plunger beyond the normal free
position, a maintained On position is
achieved.
POSSIBLE VARIATIONS
In addition to the standard quick-connect
.188 x .020 N (4,78 x 0,51 mm) terminals,
angled forms and .250 x .032 N (6,35 x 0,81
mm) terminals can be provided. DM plungers and faceplates are available in any
combination of white, black, gray, or red.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
Dimensions shown are for reference only.
2DM 1DM/1DP
Panel Hole Detail Panel Hole Detail
Basic Switches DM/DP Series
Snap-in Panel Mount
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 91
ORDER GUIDE – DM
Characteristics: F.P. — Free Position; O.P. — Operating Position; O.T. — Overtravel; O.F. — Operating
Force; R.F. — Release Force
O.T. O.F. R.F.
F.P. O.P. max. max. min.
Catalog Plunger Faceplate mm mm mm N N
Listing Action Circuitry Type/Color Color in. in. in. oz. oz.
1DM1 Momentary SPDT Bullet nose/White White 22,4 19,1±1,5 9,53 4,17 0,83
.880 .750±.060 .375 15 3
1DM2 Momentary SPNC Bullet nose/White White 22,4 19,1±1,5 9,53 4,17 0,83
.880 .750±.060 .375 15 3
1DM3 Momentary SPNO Bullet nose/White White 22,4 19,1±1,5 9,53 4,17 0,83
.880 .750±.060 .375 15 3
1DM18 Momentary SPDT Concave/Black Gray 11,4 — 3,05 4,17 0,83
.450 .120 15 3
1DM19 Momentary SPDT Concave/Red Gray 11,4 — 3,05 4,17 0,83
.450 .120 15 3
1DM21 Momentary SPDT Convex/White White 11,4 9,02±1,5 3,05 4,17 0,83
.450 .355±.060 .120 15 3
1DM38 Momentary SPNO Convex/White White 11,4 9,02-1,5 3,05 4,17 0,83
.450 .355±.060 .120 15 3
1DM301 Push-Pull SPDT Finger grip/Black Gray 24,1 — 15,9 — —
.950 .625
1DM401** Pull-to-Cheat SPDT Finger grip/White White 17,8 — 13,2 4,17 0,83
.700 .520 15 3
2DM1 Momentary DPDT Bullet nose/Black Black 22,4 19,6±1,0 10,2 6,67 1,67
.880 .770±.040 .400 24 6
2DM5 Momentary DPDT Concave/Black Gray 11,4 — 3,05 6,67 1,67
.450 .120 24 6
2DM6 Momentary DPDT Concave/Red Gray 11,4 — 3,05 6,67 1,67
.450 .120 24 6
2DM301 Push-Pull DPDT Finger grip/Black Gray 24,1 — 15,9 — —
.950 .625
2DM409 Pull-to-Cheat DPDT Finger grip/Black Black 21,6 18,9±1,3 15,0 6,67
.850 .745±.050 .590 24
2001DM1* Alternate SPDT Bullet nose/White White 22,4 — 15,4 5,56 —
.880 .605 20
* Latch position 16,9 mm ± 0,76 mm (.665 in. ± .030 in.)
** Extended position 23,6 mm (.930 in. max.)
ORDER GUIDE – DP
O.T. O.F. R.F.
F.P. O.P. max. max. min.
Catalog Plunger Faceplate mm mm mm N N
Listing Action Circuitry Type/Color Color in. in. in. oz. oz.
1DP5 Momentary SPNO Bullet nose/White White 22,4 15,1±1,5 9,53 4,45 0.83
.880 .595±.060 .375 16 3
1DP801 Momentary SPDT Concave/White White 11,4 9,0±1,5 3,0 6,67 0,83
.45 .355±.060 .120 24 3 Do
o r S
w itch
es Basic Switches WW Series
Door
92 Honeywell Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
WWs are available with or without a plunger guard. A cheat-key can be furnished
for use with the plunger guard to maintain
the switch plunger in the depressed condition (see photos →).
GENERAL INFORMATION
The WW Series switching mechanism is a
non-snap double break shorting bar type
construction. One, two or three circuit versions are available.
The three-circuit unit has two poles. The
term ‘‘pole’’ denotes the number of completely separate circuits that can pass
through the switch at one time. On a
three-circuit switch in the unoperated
condition (see drawing) circuit #2 is
closed and circuit #1and #3 are open. As
the plunger is depressed, circuit #2
opens and circuit #1 and #3 are closed.
The switch is two-pole since it makes and
breaks two separate circuits (#1 and #3).
When the plunger is released, circuit #1
and #3 are broken and circuit #2 is
closed.
Plunger guard version and cheat-key.
FEATURES
1 Snap-in panel mounting
1 Variety of terminal sizes
1 Accepts quick-connect insulated
terminals
1 10-16 amps electrical rating at 125 or
250 VAC depending on number of circuits and termination
1 Same panel cutout as double-pole DM
switch
1 Quick-connect D7 and D9 termination
complies with VDE requirements for
3mm air gap
1 Switches with plunger guards and D7,
D9 terminations are VDE approved
1 UL recognized, CSA certified
1 Meets UL’s 100,000 operations requirement for operator-accessible interlock switches
1 Covered under UL standard 508 Industrial Motor Controls
With cheat-key installed.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
NOTE: Terminals will accept quick-connect receptacles
available from AMP, Hollingsworth and others.
Basic Switches WW Series
Door
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell Sensing and Control 93
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
UL and CSA * Asterisked loads tested for 100,000 cycles
Electrical Electrical Electrical
Rating 3-Pole Rating 2-Pole Rating 1-Pole
C Contacts 1-1, 3-3:
†*15A, 125VAC, *10A, 250VAC: 1⁄2
hp @ 125, 250VAC;
3A ‘‘L’’, 125VAC;
150VA pilot duty @ 125/250VAC
A Contacts 1-1, 3-3:
†*16A, 125/250VAC:
1⁄2 hp, 125/250 VAC;
3A ‘‘L’’, 125VAC;
150 VA pilot duty 125/250 VAC;
*2A, 24VDC
B Contacts 1-1:
*16A, 125/250VAC;
3⁄4 hp,
125/250VAC;
150VA pilot duty 125/250 VAC;
3A, ‘‘L’’, 125VAC
D Same as C with 0.1A, 125 VAC;
*2A, 24VDC
F Same as A with 0.1A, 125VAC
E †Contacts 2-2:
0.1A, 125VAC/VDC
G *5A, 125VAC, 2A, *24VDC
VDE †
Flagged loads tested for 10,000 cycles
Circuits #1 and #3
†16 (4)A, 250VAC
Circuit #2
†0.1 (0.05) A, 250VAC
ORDER GUIDE
Catalog Listings* Circuitry Electrical Rating Plunger Guard
WW1A04A-D7 #1 - N.O. A No
WW1G03A-D7 #1 & #3 - N.O. A No
WW1K06D-D7 #1 & #3 - N.O. C No
#2 - N.C. E
WW1G02A-D9 #1 & #3 - N.O. A Yes
WW1K05D-D9 #1 & #3 - N.O. C Yes
#2 - N.C. E
Cheat-key: Catalog Listing 15PA256-WW
Termination Options
To order other termination options,
substitute the option letter and number at
the end of the catalog listing.
D7: .187 x .032 in. (4,75 x 0,8 mm).
D8: .187 x .020 in. (4,75 x 0,5 mm).
D9: .250 x .032 in. (6,35 x 0,8 mm).
D7 and D9 terminals are VDE certified.
VDE limits D7 terminals to 12A.
CATALOG LISTING CODE
WW 1 K 00 D D8–
Type
Action
Circuitry
Variations
Elec. Rating
Termination
D
o o r S
w itch
es Pressure Switches and Sensors
PBN Series
DESCRIPTION
The Honeywell PBN series is a range of versatile, low-cost,
ultra-low pressure switches and sensors.
PBN products are compact, lightweight, feature high reliablity,
and are designed to yield a repeatable response over millions
of cycles. They can be mounted in virtually any orientation
and their rugged construction allows use in the most rigorous
environments.
Product specifications such as operating characteristics,
termination type and contact materials can be customised for
certain applications.
FEATURES
• Sensitive to ultra-low pressures
• Gage, vacuum and differential measurement
• Miniature size
• Lightweight
• Fast response
• Rugged housings
• Shock and vibration resistant
• Low and high current versions
POTENTIAL APPLICATIONS
• Arc fault detection
• Filter restriction
• Safety interlock
• HVAC
• Vacuum control
• Liquid level sensing
• Pick and place machinery
• Pump control
• Counters
• Edge detection
• Traffic counters
• Motor control
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
2 Honeywell • Sensing and Control
PBN1
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Characteristic Measure
Output SPST normally open
Sensing medium Air
Expected mechanical life Up to 20 million cycles depending
on load
Proof pressure 8 psi for units where set point is
3.0 in-H2O or less; 15 psi for units where
set point is greater than 3.0 in-H2O
Weight Less than 10 grams
Operating temperature 4 °C to 66 °C with Polyurethane
(standard) diaphragm; -40 °C to 96 °C
with Teflon (optional) diaphragm
Action pressure Tolerance ±20 % for non-adjustable
sensors except for PBN1XXXX-A
which has a tolerance of +0 %/-100 %
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Characteristic Measure
Mounting 2,6 mm (No 4), thread size screws
through mounting lugs or 2 mm (No 2)
thread size screws through eyelets
Case material Polycarbonate standard
(other materials available upon request)
Contact material Gold inlay 18 carat on phosphor bronze
Diaphragm material Polyurethane (standard)
Teflon (optional)
Electrical connections Terminals: 4,8 x 0,5 mm tab-type
(bifurcated) for use with female quick
disconnects (ref. AMP 2-520182-2 or
equivalent)
Pressure ports Smooth perpendicular and barbed radial
Pressure settings Factory set or field adjustable
(see chart). Switching hysteresis = 0 %
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Characteristic Measure
Current rating 40 mA resistive for life up to 20 million
cycles
Operating voltage ac/dc – 30 V or less with resistive load
or 120 Vac neon lamp load
Contact resistance 1 Ω or less at 150 % of actuation pressure
DESCRIPTION
The PBN1 series is available in a wide range of actuation
pressures. The required pressure can be supplied factory
set or as an adjustable unit. Smooth 4 mm diameter ports
perpendicular to the housing and 5 mm barbed radial ports
are available. Nominal actuation pressure varies from 1 in-H2O
to 50 in-H2O on factory set models. Adjustable models have
actuation pressures which can be set up to 416 in-H2O.
FEATURES
• Sensitive to ultra-low pressure
• Gauge, vacuum and differential measurement
• Miniature size
• Lightweight
• Fast response
• Rugged housings
• High shock and vibration resistant versions available
• Adjustable and non-adjustable models
POTENTIAL APPLICATIONS
• Arc fault detection
• Filter restriction
• Safety interlock
• HVAC
• Vacuum control
• Liquid level sensing
• Pick and place machinery
• Pump control
• Counters
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Honeywell • Sensing and Control 3
Ultra-Low Pressure Sensors
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Number Nominal Actuation Pressure Proof Pressure
4mm smooth perpendicular ports 5mm barbed radial ports in-H2O mbar psi psi
PBN1B222-A PBN1B332-A 0.5 1,24 0.018 8
PBN1B222-B PBN1B332-B 1.0 2,49 0.036 8
PBN1B222-C PBN1B332-C 1.5 3,73 0.054 8
PBN1B222-D PBN1B332-D 2.0 4,97 0.072 8
PBN1B222-E PBN1B332-E 3.0 7,46 0.108 8
PBN1B222-F PBN1B332-F 4.0 9,95 0.144 15
PBN1B222-G PBN1B332-G 6.0 14,92 0.217 15
PBN1B222-J PBN1B332-J 8.0 19,89 0.289 15
PBN1B222-K PBN1B332-K 10.0 24,86 0.361 15
PBN1B222-L PBN1B332-L 12.0 29,84 0.433 15
PBN1B222-M PBN1B332-M 15.0 37,30 0.541 15
PBN1B222-N PBN1B332-N 20.0 49,73 0.722 15
PBN1B222-P PBN1B332-P 30.0 74,59 1.083 15
PBN1B222-Q PBN1B332-Q 40.0 99,46 1.444 15
PBN1B222-S PBN1B332-S 50.0 124,32 1.804 15
Adjustable models
PBN1B222-R6 PBN1B332-R6 10.0 to 50.0 24,9 to 124,5 0.36 to 1.80 15
PBN1B222-R7 PBN1B332-R7 51.0 to 416.0 127.0 to 1036.0 1.84 to 15.01 15
Note: Electrical ratings – 40 mA. 30 V ac/dc. 120 Vac neon lamp load
Note: Adjustable models – following adj.. set screw should be sealed using suitable RTV sealant
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
4 Honeywell • Sensing and Control
PBN1 Ultra-Low Pressure Sensors
DIMENSIONS
25,40
(1,00)
9,53
(0,38)
5,59
(0,22)
1,63
(0,06)
11,18
(0,44)
ø 3,96
(0,16)
7,92
(0,31)
7,92
(0,31)
9,14
(0,36)
12,70
(0,50)
12,70
(0,50)
2,03
(0,08)
25,40
(1,00)
14,38
(0,57)
15,49
(0,61)
29,46
(1,16)
18,03
(0,71)
ø 3,96
(0,16)
ø 3,28
(0,13)
7,62
(0,33)Low
pressure
port
Mounting holes (2)
High
pressure
port4,75
(0,19)
4 mm smooth perpendicular ports
5 mm barbed radial ports
5,59
(0,22)
5,08
(0,20)
13,96
(0,55)
11,18
(0,44)1,63
(0,06)
5,33
(0,21)
25,40
(1,00)
9,53
(0,38)
4,75
(0,19)
4,75
(0,19)
2,03
(0,08)
25,40
(1,00)
14,38
(0,57)
29,46
(1,16)
ø 3,28
(0,13)
Mounting holes (2)
Adjustable Models Only
Adjustment screw 1,27mm (,05)
Hex socket – clockwise to increase
actuation point, counterclockwise to
decrease actuation point
Mark Honeywell
Part # &
Date code
12,70
(0,50)
50,93
(2,00)
12,70
(0,50)
7,62
(0,33)
ø 4,75
(0,19)
ø 6,35
(0,25)
Note: See chart for rev level
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Honeywell • Sensing and Control 5
PBN3 High-Current, Low Pressure Sensors
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Characteristic Measure
Switch type SPDT normally open or normally closed
Switching medium Air or compatible fluids
Expected mechanical life Up to five million cycles depending on
load
Proof pressure 15 psi for units where set point is
75 in-H2O or less; 80 psi for units where
set point is greater than 75 in-H2O
Weight Less than 20 grams
Operating temperature 4 °C to 66 °C with Polyurethane
(standard) diaphragm; -40 °C to 96 °C
with Teflon (optional)diaphragm
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Characteristic Measure
Mounting 2,6 mm (No 4), thread size screws
through mounting lugs or 2 mm (No 2)
thread size screws through eyelets
Case material Polycarbonate and Polyetherimide
standard (other materials available
upon request) (see chart)
Contact material Silver (gold available on special order
for “dry contact” applications)
Electrical connections 6,3 mm x 0,8 mm quick connect terminals supplied on all listings except
PBN3XXXX-B and -D which have
4,8 mm x 0,5 mm connections
Pressure ports Smooth perpendicular and barbed radial
Pressure settings Factory set or field adjustable
(see chart)
Switching hysteresis = 25 % to 50 % of
set point
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Characteristic Measure
Switch type Single pole double throw
Switch rating Dependent on actuation pressure
(see chart)
Contact voltage 250 Vac
DESCRIPTION
The PBN3 series is a range of miniature, high-current, lowpressure devices which measure gauge pressure and can
switch up to 16(4) A. Smooth 4 mm perpendicular ports and
5 mm barbed radial ports are available. Nominal actuation
pressure varies from 1 in-H2O to 6,5 in-H2O. Adjustable models
have actuation pressures which can be set from 10 in-H2O to
1109 in-H2O.
PBN3 devices comprise a snap-action SPDT pressure switch
which contains an actuator assembly and miniature micro
switch. The devices are designed to respond to positive air
pressure but may also be activated by non-corrosive liquids at
low pressures.
FEATURES
• High current switching capacity
• Sensitive to low gauge pressures
• Miniature size
• Lightweight
• Fast response
• Rugged housings
• Adjustable and non-adjustable models
POTENTIAL APPLICATIONS
• Counting
• Edge detection
• Liquid level sensing
• Traffic counters
• Motor control
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6 Honeywell • Sensing and Control
PBN3
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Number Actuation Pressure
4 mm smooth
perpendicular
ports
5 mm barbed radial ports in-H2O mbar Tolerance
from
nominal
AMP
rating
Terminal
width
mm Proof pressure
psiSame side
as terminals
Opposite side
from terminals
PBN3C421-B* PBN3C441-B* PBN3C451-B* 1.0 2,49 +100% -50% 3 4,75 15
PBN3C421-D* PBN3C441-D* PBN3C451-D* 2.0 4,98 ±20 % 3 4,75 15
PBN3C421-H PBN3D441-H PBN3D451-H 6.5 16,19 ±30 % 5 6,35 15
Adjustable models
PBN3D421-R1 PBN3D441-R1 PBN3D451-R1 10.0 to 28.0 24,9 to 69,8 N/A 5 6,35 15
PBN3E421-R2 PBN3E441-R2 PBN3E451-R2 35.0 to 75.0 87,0 to 187,0 N/A 16 6,35 15
Listings with polyetherimide as case material
PBN3E421-R8 PBN3E441-R8 PBN3E451-R8 83.0 to 416.0 207,0 to 1034,0 N/A 16 6,35 80
PBN3E421-R9 PBN3E441-R9 PBN3E451-R9 416.0 to 1109.0 1034,0 to 2758,0 N/A 16 6,35 80
Note: Contact voltage 250 Vac max
*Supplied with terminals 4, 8mm x 0,5 mm instead of standard 6,3 mm x 0,8 mm
DIMENSIONS
4mm smooth perpendicular ports
Adjustable Models Only
Adjustment screw 1,98mm (,078)
Hex socket – clockwise to increase
actuation point, counterclockwise to
decrease actuation point
Terminal width
(see table)
Note: See chart for rev level
25,40
(1,00)
25,20
(0,99)
10,16
(0,40)
12,70
(0,50)
12,70
(0,50)
46,99
(1,87)
4,75mm terminal
49,78
(1,96)
6,35mm terminal
0,8
(0,03)
7,92
(0,31)
25,40
(1,00)
18,24
(0,72)
ø 2,36
(0,09)
Mounting holes (4) ø 3,96(0,16)
Pressure port
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Honeywell • Sensing and Control 7
High-Current, Low Pressure Sensors
5 mm barbed radial ports, opposite side from terminals
5 mm barbed radial ports, same side from terminals
Adjustable Models Only
Adjustment screw 1,98mm (,078)
Hex socket – clockwise to increase
actuation point, counterclockwise to
decrease actuation point
Note: See chart for rev level
Terminal width
(see table)
0,8
(0,03)
7,14
(0,28)
25,40
(1,00)
25,40
(1,00)30,58
(1,20)
18,24
(0,72)
ø 3,17
(0,12)
Mounting holes (2)
46,99
(1,87)
4,75mm terminal
49,78
(1,96)
6,35mm terminal
6,35
(0,25)
Typ 2
29,56
(1,17)
14,80
(0,58)
4,30
(0,17)
12,68
(0,50)
ø 4,74
(0,18)
Pressure portø 6,35
(0,25)
ø 3,17
(0,12)
Mounting holes (2)
ø 7,14
(0,28)
Adjustable Models Only
Adjustment screw 1,98mm (,078)
Hex socket – clockwise to increase
actuation point, counterclockwise to
decrease actuation point
30,58
(1,20)
25,40
(1,00)
25,40
(1,00)
18,24
(0,72)
29,56
(1,17)
0,8
(0,03)
Terminal width
(see table)
46,99
(1,87)
4,75mm terminal
49,78
(1,96)
6,35mm terminal
ø 4,74
(0,18)
Pressure port
ø 6,35
(0,25)
12,70
(0,50)
6,35
(0,25)
Typ 2
4,30
(0,17)
14,80
(0,58)
Mark Honeywell
Part # &
Date code
Note: See chart for rev level
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Sensing and Control
Honeywell
1985 Douglas Drive North
Golden Valley, MN 55422 USA
+1-815-235-6847
www.honeywell.com/sensing
EN0M-0358
August 2008
Copyright © 2008 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.
PBN Series Pressure Switches and Sensors
Warranty. Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as
being free of defective materials and faulty workmanship.
Honeywell’s standard product warranty applies unless agreed
to otherwise by Honeywell in writing; please refer to your
order acknowledgement or consult your local sales office for
specific warranty details. If warranted goods are returned to
Honeywell during the period of coverage, Honeywell will repair
or replace, at its option, without charge those items it finds
defective. The foregoing is buyer’s sole remedy and is in
lieu of all warranties, expressed or implied, including those
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
In no event shall Honeywell be liable for consequential,
special, or indirect damages.
While we provide application assistance personally, through
our literature and the Honeywell web site, it is up to the
customer to determine the suitability of the product in the
application.
Specifications may change without notice. The information
we supply is believed to be accurate and reliable as of this
printing. However, we assume no responsibility for its use.
For more information about Sensing and Control products, visit
www.honeywell.com/sensing or call +1-815-235-6847
Email inquiries to info.sc@honeywell.com
WARNING
PERSONAL INJURY
• DO NOT USE these products as safety or emergency
stop devices or in any other application where failure of
the product could result in personal injury.
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in
death or serious injury.
WARNING
MISUSE OF DOCUMENTATION
• The information presented in this catalogue is for
reference only. DO NOT USE this document as product
installation information.
• Complete installation, operation and maintenance
information is provided in the instructions supplied with
each product.
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in
death or serious injury.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Series 1000
Hydraulic Brake Pressure Switch
DESCRIPTION
The Honeywell Series 1000 pressure switch is a small, lowcost switch actuated by hydraulic fluid or gas. The switch is
highly responsive for low-set-point and high burst rating
requirements, and may also be used when converting the
brake system to hydraulic applications.
With its IP65 sealing and high burst rating, Honeywell’s Series
1000 switch often excels in harsh environments such as
extreme weather conditions or particle-filled areas. In addition
to its high resistance to shock and vibration, this pressure
switch is designed to maintain its tolerances across
temperature ranges in high system pressure environments.
FEATURES
• Low set point: actuates at 20 psi
• Reduced part count
• High burst rating (for high cost-of-failure applications)
• Banjo bolt fitting
• Sealed to IP65
BENEFITS
• Low set point is highly responsive
• Reduced field failures at part level
• Enhanced reliability, lowers warranty costs
• Minimized footprint
• Designed for use in high shock and vibration along with
most extreme weather conditions
POTENTIAL APPLICATIONS
• Small vehicle brake light actuation
• Compact agricultural tractors
• Utility vehicles (UTVs)
• Trucks and lift trucks
• Small self-propelled vehicles
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Series 1000
SPECIFICATIONS
Characteristic Parameter
Type Direct acting
Circuitry Normally open
Connector size M10 x 1.25 banjo fitting
Terminals 6,3 mm [0.25 in] blade
Set point 20 psi ±10 psi [1,37 bar ±0,69 bar]
Operating pressure, max. 1200 psi [82,74 bar]
Proof pressure 2400 psi [165,47 bar]
Burst pressure 4800 psi [330,95 bar]
Operating temperature -40 °C to 121 °C [-40 °F to 250 °F]
Operating media DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid
Electrical rating 12 Vdc with two-1157 bulbs (4.4 A)
Contacts Silver plated copper
Diaphragm EPDM
Housing Rynite 545 glass filled
Base Trivalent plated steel
Spring 17-7 PH stainless steel
Connector options M10 x 1.25 double banjo; M10 x 1, 1/8-27 NPT
DIMENSIONS
2 www.honeywell.com/sensing
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Hydraulic Brake Pressure Switch
Sensing and Control
Honeywell
1985 Douglas Drive North
Golden Valley, Minnesota 55422
www.honeywell.com/sensing
009581-1-EN IL50 GLO Printed in USA
October 2008
Copyright © 2008 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.
ORDER GUIDE
Catalog
Listing
Description
83355 Series 1000 hydraulic brake pressure switch, normally open, 20 psi, M10 x 1.25 single banjo fitting, blade terminals
83354 Series 1000 hydraulic brake pressure switch, normally open, 20 psi, M10 x 1.25 double banjo fitting, blade terminals
WARNING
PERSONAL INJURY
DO NOT USE these products as safety or emergency stop devices
or in any other application where failure of the product could result
in personal injury.
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death
or serious injury.
WARRANTY/REMEDY
Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as being free of defective
materials and faulty workmanship. Honeywell’s standard product
warranty applies unless agreed to otherwise by Honeywell in writing;
please refer to your order acknowledgement or consult your local sales
office for specific warranty details. If warranted goods are returned to
Honeywell during the period of coverage, Honeywell will repair or
replace, at its option, without charge those items it finds defective. The
foregoing is buyer’s sole remedy and is in lieu of all other
warranties, expressed or implied, including those of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. In no event
shall Honeywell be liable for consequential, special, or indirect
damages.
While we provide application assistance personally, through our
literature and the Honeywell web site, it is up to the customer to
determine the suitability of the product in the application.
Specifications may change without notice. The information we supply
is believed to be accurate and reliable as of this printing. However, we
assume no responsibility for its use.
WARNING
MISUSE OF DOCUMENTATION
• The information presented in this product sheet is for reference
only. Do not use this document as a product installation guide.
• Complete installation, operation, and maintenance information
is provided in the instructions supplied with each product.
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death
or serious injury.
SALES AND SERVICE
Honeywell serves its customers through a worldwide network of sales
offices, representatives and distributors. For application assistance,
current specifications, pricing or name of the nearest Authorized
Distributor, contact your local sales office or:
E-mail: info.sc@honeywell.com
Internet: www.honeywell.com/sensing
Phone and Fax:
Asia Pacific +65 6355-2828
+65 6445-3033 Fax
Europe +44 (0) 1698 481481
+44 (0) 1698 481676 Fax
Latin America +1-305-805-8188
+1-305-883-8257 Fax
USA/Canada +1-800-537-6945
+1-815-235-6847
+1-815-235-6545 Fax
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
1.47” REF.
The 5000 Series switch is specifically
designed to stand up to extended duty
applications. This switch is factory set
but capable of field adjustment. It
features a Kapton diaphragm for
compatibility with a wide variety of
fluids, and various terminations
including a Metri-Pack connector that
forms a tight seal when connected.
Among the outstanding design benefits
are its durable construction, compact
size, and enhanced set point integrity.
2.3” REF.
1.47” REF.
5000 Series Switch
with Screw Terminals
5000 Series Switch
with Metri-Pack Terminal
Set Points from 0.5 to 150 psi
5000 Series Extended Duty Pressure Switch With Direct Action Blade Contacts
Switch Boot P/N 79380
for Vacuum and Pressure
NOTE: OPERATING MEDIA (PRESSURE SWITCH)
The pressure switch is designed to operate with air,
motor oils, transmission oils, jet fuels and other similar
hydrocarbon media.
4
Standard Specifications
Type: Direct action
blade contact
Contacts: Silver alloy,
gold plated
Set Point: Factory set
from 0.5 to 150 PSI
Operating Pressure:
150 PSI for 0.5-24 PSI set point range,
250 PSI for 25-150 PSI set point range
Proof Pressure: 500 PSI
Burst Pressure: 750 PSI for 0.5-24 PSI
set point range
1250 PSI for 25-150 PSI
set point range.
Ratings:
Resistive: 15 AMP- 6 VDC
8 AMP- 12 VDC
4 AMP- 24 VDC
Inductive: 1 AMP- 120 VAC
0.5 AMP- 240 VAC
Diaphragm: Polyimide film
Temperature
Range: -40° F to + 250° F
Connector: 1/8 -27 NPT male thread
Terminals: #8-32 screws,
1/4” blade,
280 Series Metri-Pack
Circuitry: SPST-N.O., N.C.,
1 circuit adjustable dual
circuit, or 2 circuits
adjustable dual circuit.
Also available are
N.O./N.O. dual circuit
and N.C./N.C. dual circuit.
Base: Plated Steel
Cover: Glass reinforced polyester
Options: Brass, plastic or stainless
steel base; various base
connector thread sizes;
wire leads (potted & sealed).
2.9” REF.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
5
Single Circuit
1 Terminal
3. The tolerances given in the table
are applicable to a switch adjusted
so that the N.O. circuit closes
before the N.C. circuit opens and
applies to the N.C. circuit. The
N.O. set point and tolerances are
such that a minimum overlap of 1
PSI exists during which both circuits
are on.
5000 Series Pressure Switch With Standard Terminal
Contact
Setting
Factory
Set At
Circuitry
Part NumberContact
Setting3
Part Number
Single Circuit
2 Terminals
Dual Circuit
One circuit adjustable1
Dual Circuit
Both circuits adjustable2
0.5-1 PSI
±0.3
1.1-3 PSI
±0.5
3.1-7 PSI
±1
8-13 PSI
±2
14-24 PSI
±3
25-50 PSI
±5
51-90 PSI
±7
91-150PSI
±10
Part Number
Screw
78630
78634
78142
78149
78143
78150
78144
78151
78145
78152
78146
78153
78147
78154
78148
78155
Blade
78631
78635
78399
78406
78400
78407
78401
78408
78402
78409
78403
78410
78404
78411
78405
78412
Part Number
Blade
78629
78633
76056
76066
76583
76585
76584
76586
76057
76067
76058
76068
76059
76069
76060
76070
Screw
78628
78632
76051
76061
76575
76577
76576
76578
76052
76062
76053
76063
76054
76064
76055
76065
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
78712
76076
76587
76588
76077
76078
76079
76080
78711
76071
76579
76580
76072
76073
76074
76075
Screw Blade Screw Blade
76081
76582
76082
76083
76084
76085
76086
76590
76087
76088
76089
76090
3-4 PSI
±0.5
5-8 PSI
±1
9-24 PSI
±2
25-50 PSI
±3
51-90 PSI
+5/-2
91-150 PSI
+8/-2
1 PSI
2 PSI
4 PSI
10 PSI
15 PSI
35 PSI
60 PSI
100 PSI
Notes:
1. The N.C. circuit is the reference
circuit for the dual circuit switch;
the normally open circuit is not
adjusted. The expected dead band
between the N.C. & N.O. circuit
is shown in the chart below. For
applications requiring the normally
open circuit as the reference circuit
the N.C. circuit is not adjusted.
2. Switch may be adjusted so that:
A. N.C. circuit opens before N.O.
circuit closes.
B. N.C. and N.O. circuit have same
set point.
C. N.O. circuit closes before the
N.C. circuit opens. (There is no
dead band and both circuits are on
for a brief period of time.)
Contact
Setting
Factory
Set At
Circuitry
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
2 PSI
5 PSI
10 PSI
20 PSI
35 PSI
60 PSI
85 PSI
115 PSI
135 PSI
5000 Series Pressure Switch With Metri-Pack Terminal
Part Number
Single Circuit
(Mates with Packard
P/N 15300027)
Part Number
Dual Circuit
One circuit adjustable1
(Mates with Packard
P/N 12034147)
1-3 PSI
±0.5
4-6 PSI
±1
7-12 PSI
±2
13-24 PSI
±3
25-46 PSI
±5
47-76 PSI
±6
77-100 PSI
±7
101-126
±9
127-150 PSI
±10
Dual Circuit
Both circuits adjustable2
(Mates with Packard
P/N 12034147)
77029
77020
77030
77021
77031
77022
77032
77023
77033
77024
77034
77025
77035
77026
77036
77027
77037
77028
77038
77039
77040
77041
77042
77043
77044
77045
77046
Part
Number
Contact
Setting3
3-4 PSI
±0.5
5-10 PSI
±1
11-24 PSI
±2
25-46 PSI
±3
47-76 PSI
+5/-2
77-100 PSI
+7/-2
101-126 PSI
+9/-2
127-150 PSI
+10/-2
77047
77048
77049
77050
77051
77052
77053
77054
0.5-3 PSI
4-7 PSI
8-13 PSI
14-24 PSI
25-50 PSI
51-90 PSI
91-150 PSI
1.5 PSI
2.5 PSI
3.5 PSI
8 PSI
15 PSI
23 PSI
40 PSI
Dead Band
Note 1: Expected Dead Band (Higher than N.C. circuit)
Contact
Setting
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1
Pushbuttons Pushbutton Panels
Toggles/Rockers
Manuals
Pushbutton panels. Low profile SLP pushbutton panels feature standard
matrices and custom arrays tailored to your requirements. They use a conductive rubber technology for operator feedback. Plus full-face LED lighting and legends, and a variety of button sizes and colors.
Manual switches. Designed by industrial designers to achieve a balance
between harmonious appearance and ergonomics, AML Advanced
Manual Line has pushbuttons, paddles,and rockers; with LED, incandescent, and neon illumination. Plus matching indicators and LED annunciators. A smaller cousin, MML Miniature Manual Line, offers many AML features in a space-saving size.
Pushbuttons. A wide array of different pushbutton families, many with
lighted display and matching indicators. Includes Series 2, an easily assembled modular design with many color display/control options; lowcost DM pushbuttons and compact PB unlighted pushbuttons.
Toggles/Rockers. NT/TL, TS, TW and AT toggles, and NR/TP rockers feature various degrees of sealing, choice of many circuitry combinations,
and 2 or 3-position operation.
Typical Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Index by Product Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Selection Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Catalog Listings/Order Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-161
Panel Design Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Catalog Listing - Page Number Index . . . . . . . . . 170
S
electio
n Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Applying Manual Controls and Displays
150 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
PANEL DESIGN
Adherence to good human factors principles can help your product make good
first impressions as it is being evaluated
by your customers; and increase longterm user satisfaction. You can gain a
competitive edge that may translate into
better acceptance by your customer and
the user.
The panel, being the surface provided for
display and control components, serves
as the direct interface for human/machine
dialogue. We’d like to offer the following
guidelines to help you achieve ergonomically pleasing panels where communication flows operator-to-machine, and
back again.
PREPARATION
Begin with procedures common to any
design process. Prepare a list of the requirements related to the job to be performed. Then ask yourself such questions as:
1 What is the panel (control station) to
do?
1 Who will be the users?
1 Is there a special sequence of
procedures to follow?
1 Are there special environmental
conditions or military requirements?
1 Will the equipment be used inside or
outside; in a shop, home or office?
1 Will barriers, guards or protective
shields be needed to safeguard
components and/or users?
1 Will the maintenance tasks be
performed by the equipment user or a
technician? How often and how easy
to do?
1 Who will install or set up the
equipment?
1 Are elaborate instructions required or
can you design to make them
unnecessary?
1 What components are available?
1 Will you do the specifying?
1 What are the cost constraints?
1 What elements should be added to
estimate total installed cost?
Explore as many alternate means of
achieving the desired results as possible.
Then select the most effective combination of components. The earlier the foregoing questions are asked and answered
in the concept or selection process, the
more closely the panel design will match
the requirements of a given application.
MATCH CONTROL TO FUNCTION
People expect controls to move in certain
ways. Where possible, component selection should be an extension of normal
habit patterns. For example, the wallmounted toggle switch found in homes
conveys a habit pattern for turning on
lights. The upward flipping motion generally associated with ‘‘ON’’ can be used
with other toggle, rocker and paddle
switches for a natural transfer of a previously learned habit.
The clockwise motion of a rotary knob is
frequently used to select an appliance
function, such as the desired washer cycle. This same familiar action may be
adapted to a control panel as an extension of a normal habit pattern.
When a panel uses control actions wellestablished in our daily lives:
1 Reaction time is reduced.
1 The first control movement by an
operator is usually correct.
1 An operator can perform faster, and
can make adjustments with greater
precision.
1 An operator can learn control
procedures faster.
Pushbuttons (alternate-action
or momentary)
Push/pull switches Toggles for 2- or 3-position select
Paddles for 2- or 3-position select Rockers for 2- or 3-position select
Pushbutton and rotary pushbutton/selector Trackball and joystick controls for 3-D maneuvering of CRT cursors in mapping or tracking
tasks
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Applying Manual Controls and Displays
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada 151
PANEL DESIGN
COMPONENT ARRANGEMENT
Some control panels become overly
complex because of the number and different types of components, or because
the designer failed to explore enough alternative arrangements.
Before drawing the elements on a panel
outline, it is helpful to make paper cutouts
of the separate switches, indicators, etc.
These cutouts can be easily shifted into
various groups, and relationships until
the most effective arrangement is found.
You will save hours of tedious drawing,
erasing and redrawing, and should
achieve a better layout. Also, you are
more likely to resist the temptation to stop
looking for the optimal solution too early
in the design process.
Here are some suggestions for good arrangement:
1. Frequently used components should
be the most accessible.
– for manually operated controls,
somewhere between elbow and
shoulder height.
– for displays, nearest the normal line
of sight.
2. Arrange controls and displays for a
conventional sequence of operation,
left-to-right and top-to-bottom, just as
we normally read.
3. Define functional areas by leaving
space between component groups.
Avoid outline borders, color patches
and brackets extending from group titles (except in cases of extreme density.)
4. Locate emergency controls and displays prominently on the panel to assure easy viewing and access by the
operator.
5. Where large layouts are necessary,
distribute the workload between both
hands of the operator — for ease of
operation and increased productivity.
6. Locate displays above (preferable) or
to the left of corresponding manual
controls to prevent visual interference
while the manual controls are being
operated. (When manual controls are
at the extreme left of a panel, displays
should be above the controls.)
Alternative panel layouts. These before-and-after views illustrate how an existing
design may be upgraded to better communicate through layout revision and component substitution. Both function and appearance are improved.
For example, the left hand panel uses outline frames to unnecessarily separate related
functions. The frames serve merely as a decorative feature and contribute to a crowded
look. In the right hand panel, the frames are eliminated, as the components themselves
define their functional space.
The uniform use of square and rectangular panel elements in the right hand panel
serves to futher simplify and harmonize the appearance. Note that the UNIT FAULT
indicators and the analog meter are located in the top half of the panel to help prevent
the operator’s hand from obscuring them when the controls are being used. The
POWER switch-indicator combination eliminates the separate POWER ON light. Also,
legends appear above their respective components, rather than in the left hand
version’s random arrangement.
R
eference/Ind
ex C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Applying Manual Controls and Displays
152 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
PANEL DESIGN
GRAPHICS CONSIDERATIONS
Panel graphics need not overwhelm the
operator with their size, since they are
normally viewed at about arm’s length.
Legibility is reinforced when the color
chosen for the graphics contrasts strongly with the background. Type is most legible when it is shown as dark lettering on a
light panel.
Panel Titles
Titles applied to the panel itself should
normally appear above the controls to
prevent them from being obscured when
a control is in use. An exception would be
when panel components must be placed
at a height that would block the operator’s
line of sight to the title.
If different-sized components are used in
a horizontal array, pick a common baseline for all their associated titles to avoid a
stepped, disorderly look.
Whenever possible, apply graphics directly on the manual controls or lighted
indicators themselves. This not only conserves valuable panel space, but enhances overall design flexibility. Recommended graphic colors for component
surfaces are white on red, green, and
blue; black on yellow and white; and
white or black on amber.
Alphanumeric and symbol legends can
be added or easily changed merely by
replacing a switch or indicator button,
lens, or rocker-button operator.
Type Selection. All titles should be composed of a simple sans serif typeface for
optimum clarity (see examples, at right).
Lettering should be horizontal, never vertical. Type sizes should conform to panel
component priorities (refer to typical letter heights for titles in descending order,
as shown on page 184).
Avoid abbreviations whenever possible;
spell out the entire word. If horizontal
space is tight, try condensed type, but
use it consistently, not interspersed with a
standard width type. Inconsistent use of
the type styles, sizes, or line weights add
visual ‘‘noise’’ to the overall panel
scheme and should be avoided.
Layout and graphic design considerations
Typeface Examples
Helvetica Medium (This is the preferred type proportion and weight for most titles).
Helvetica Medium Condensed
Helvetica Bold
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Applying Manual Controls and Displays
Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada 153
PANEL DESIGN
Strip barriers between switches
help to prevent
inadvertent operation.
Full barriers surround pushbuttons
where more switch
protection is desired.
ILLUMINATED COLOR TECHNIQUES
Transmitted color achieved with colored lens
(color is visible even when display is
unlighted).
Projected color achieved with colored filter
behind white lens (color not visible until lamp
is lighted).
Hidden legend/hidden color (dead front).
Dark lens hides color/message until display
is lighted.
Hinged guards over pushbuttons in high risk
control situations. Guards may also be
locked for additional security.
Transmitted color refers to the use of
colored buttons in applications when the
color must be apparent when the display
is lighted or unlighted.
Projected color is achieved with a white
lens and a color filter/lens. When the
lamps are off, the display is white. It becomes colored when illuminated. Though
effective in dimly lit or dark rooms, the
color signal tends to weaken in high ambient light.
Dead front is a hidden legend/color display which generally uses a transparent,
smoky gray lens with a legend on a color
insert. The display appears black and unabtrusive when the lamps are off. When
illuminated, color and legend appear.
Ready-to-install low-profile pushbutton matrices can serve as panel
elements or an entire panel. Intelligence can be provided by on-board
microprocessors which terminate to
a plug-in connector.
R
eference/Ind
ex C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Applying Manual Controls and Displays
154 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
PANEL DESIGN
TYPE SIZES
The type sizes chosen should always correspond to the functional priorities of the
control panel components, in a descending order, e.g., Panel Title, Group Title,
Station Title. Individual application requirements may vary, but grossly oversized letters should be avoided (see
drawing).
COLOR CODING
Follow accepted human factor standards
when you color code interface components. Since many colors relate to certain
well established meanings, e.g., red for
STOP, green for GO, they should be used
wherever appropriate.
Color Meanings Examples
Red Alerts an operator that an incompatible or dangerous Stop, No-go, Error, Failure, Malfunction,
condition exists and corrective action should be taken. Danger, Warning, Hazard, Take Cover
Yellow Marginal condition exists Pressure Below Normal, Check Hopper Level,
Caution, Inspection Port Open
Green Monitored equipment is in tolerance, or a condition is On, Power On,* Go-ahead, Safe, Ready
satisfactory and it is all right to proceed
Blue May use as an advisory indicator, but has limited coding High Beam (automobile headlights)
value; however blue is ideally suited for use at periphery
of vision where it can be apparent, but not intrusive
White Indicates system conditons or transitions, neither positive Boiler #1 On Line, Reservoir Cycling
nor negative; doesn’t imply success or failure
* Note: The power generating industry is an exception, since it traditionally has used the color red to indicate Power On.
Their rationale is that red connotes a ‘‘hot’’ electrical condition. However, green is definitely the preferred human
factors choice for Power On indication.
PANEL FINISH
Non-reflecting, matte-textured colors
from light gray to black, beige, and white
will yield a panel that contrasts well with
controls and indicators of any color. Neutral color backgrounds will focus attention
on the controls. But color effectiveness is
muted when interface components are
surrounded by a panel of a like or similar
color.
When in doubt, keep it simple and in good
taste – and you will achieve the most satisfying, long-term results.
FINAL EVALUATION
Prior to finalizing your design, evaluate the total panel layout experimentally. Assess its
communication effectiveness with a test situation, using a mock-up or prototype.
Describe the application to typical operators, individually.
Observe the procedures used by the operators. If there are basic design errors, they
should show up, along with the operator’s preferences for certain control features.
Separate individual prejudices from valid criticisms. Then apply the data to a revised
layout. Check and recheck.
In actual practice, there are normally several revisions made beyond an initial proposal. Rarely, if ever, does the first scheme prove acceptable as the final design; so don’t
be disheartened when new insights from associates or test results necessitate change.
Even after a design goes into production, it is not unusual for revisions to be made
because of undiscovered problems.
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML Series
Advanced Manual Line
18 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
IN FRONT OF THE PANEL
Coordinated, attractive appearance.
AML features innovations designed by industrial designers to achieve the best balance of human factors and aesthetic appearance. Operator height, bezel size,
and the compatibility of square and rectangular shapes blend with other components to harmonize your panel. There’s
no visual clutter to distract from man/
machine communication.
This comprehensive line of lighted and
unlighted manual controls features:
1 Pushbuttons for high and
intermediate frequency functions;
1 Rocker and paddle switches, with 2 or
3 positions, for less frequent control
functions;
1 Plus lighted indicators and
annunciators which complement
AML’s universal appeal.
Various controls can be matched with
their functions to accommodate the most
natural and efficient habit pattern reflex.
Keylock operated switches can be used
to assure ‘‘authorized personnel only’’
access.
Display flexibility. AML offers a choice of
five legend sizes, four button heights, full
or split section display, and illumination
by incandescent lamps, LED’s or neons.
Colors are bright and uniform, providing a
strong definition and good visibility. (Nonilluminated devices have the same attractive colors.)
Color display options include:
1 Transmitted color — color can be
distinguished whether lamp is On or
Off.
1 Dead front — display appears black,
until illumination causes legend and
color to appear.
1 Projected color — white display is
diffused with color when illuminated.
BEHIND THE PANEL
AML’s simple, cost effective design provides many behind-panel benefits for the
designer and installer/user.
Simple to install. They snap in from the
panel front individually or in vertical or
horizontal strips; or in subpanel mounted
strips and matrices that can be pre-assembled and pre-wired to assure accurate alignment and efficient panel building.
Electrical flexibility. Solid state switches
with Hall effect integrated circuits interface directly with microprocessors and
other logic level devices. These IC’s were
first applied in MICRO SWITCH solid state
keyboards. Today, many MICRO SWITCH
products incorporate the Hall effect technology to meet a wide range of position
sensing and manual control needs.
Electronic control switches with gold or
silver contacts, and 1, 2, or 4 poles, will
handle up to 3 amps. Including an encoded version which generates different binary coded outputs merely by changing
cam-keyed buttons.
Power duty switches meet line disconnect application needs with10-amp pushbuttons and 15-amp paddle and rocker
switches.
Easy to wire. All AML devices present
single level termination. This means faster, easier, neater, and more economical
wiring. And there is a choice of solder,
quick-connect, push-on, and printed circuit termination.
MATING RECEPTACLES
The .110 × .020 quick-connect/solder terminal (types 2 and 8) is designed for use
with receptacles that comply with the UL
standard for insertion and withdrawal
forces. Maximum insertion force is 12 lbs.
max., withdrawal force is 14 lbs. These receptacles are supplied by: AMP Inc.,
Berg, Augat, Hollingsworth, MALCO,
Zierick, and others. Refer to Thomas Register or the Yellow Pages for the location of
your local supplier.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML Series
Advanced Manual Line
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 19
FEATURES
1 Complete selection of pushbutton,
rocker and paddle (toggle type)
switches accommodates different
functions and promotes operator
efficiency.
1 Solid state, electronic, and power
duty control.
1 Full or split screen incandescent
display switches and indicators
provide vivid transmitted color,
projected color (for neutral display
when unlit), and dead front (hidden
color).
1 Wide-angle visibility LED and line
voltage neon display switches and
indicators.
1 Annunciators back-lighted by LED’s
enable high density message display.
1 Keylock switches available for
controlled access applications.
1 All AML terminations at the same
shallow depth (1.7 in. /43,1 mm) for
convenient wiring or PC board
termination.
1 Snap-in surface mount or sub-panel
(hidden bezel) mount with mounting
hardware.
1 Pad printed legends with a clear
polyurethane overcoat available in a
choice of five standard sizes.
1 Metric design for worldwide acceptance.
1 UL recognized, CSA certification.
1 Selected listings are certified by VDE,
CEE, SEV, and FINKO (for compliance
status, contact the 800 number.
MICRO SWITCH AML Advanced Manual
Line combines functional flexibility with
electrical versatility to provide a broad
range of options to choose from.
EASY TO RELAMP
Relamping of T-1-3/4 incandescent
AML91 lamps is accomplished from the
front of the panel without tools. (AML92
T-1-3/4 LEDs can be added in the same
manner.)
FULL GUARD BEZEL OPTION
As an alternative to standard height bezels (.06 in./1,5 mm), pushbutton switches can be furnished with full guard bezels
extending .19 in./5.0 mm from the mounting surface. In the free position, standard
buttons are flush with full guard bezels.
The raised bezel guards against accidental operation by someone leaning against
or dropping something on a control console.
High Intensity LEDs For Full-face AML Lighted Display
AML92 Series
1 Full-face illumination for high visibility lighted colors.
1 Advanced illumination technology combines high-intensity LED in standard
T-1-3/4 wedge base lamp package.
1 Easy plug-in installation in AML lighted switches and indicators.
1 Low operating temperature permits high density, continuous operation with
minimal heat build-up.
AML92 Series LEDs have a quad chip assembled in a T-1-3/4 wedge base lamp
package. They provide full-face illumination when used with lighted pushbutton,
rocker and paddle switches, or indicators equipped with incandescent lamp
sockets. For ordering information, refer to page 59.
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML Series
Advanced Manual Line
20 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
AML CHARACTERISTICS
AML 10 Series AML 20 Series AML 30 Series AML 40 Series
Electrical/Mechnical Life* N/A
Pushbuttons–Momentary 1,000,000 100,000 25,000 --Pushbuttons–Alternate 25,000 25,000 25,000 --Rockers 25,000 25,000 25,000 --Paddles 25,000 25,000 25,000 --Agency Ratings
(May not apply to every
series division)
UL File E53576 File E12252 File E12252 File E58932
CSA File LR4442 File LR4442 File LR4442 File LR4442
VDE None File 0630/10.78+ File 0630/10.78++ None
Rating 1710 Rating 1710
No. 4275.5788 No. 4275.5788
*95% Survival
+ Exception: Four-Pole AML’s are not included in VDE Approval
++ Exception: Only the 2-pole AML33 and AML34 are certified by VDE
AML ELECTRICAL DATA
1 AML10 Series
Electrical Characteristics Absolute Maximum Rating4
Switching Time
Max.
Output
Leakage Voltage
Integrated Supply Output Current Rise Fall Supply Externally Loads
Circuit Current Voltage max. 10% to 90% to Voltage Applied to to Storage
Function (Max.) (Operated) (Released) 90% 10% (VS) Output Output Temperature
5 VDC 3.5 mA +.4 Volt 2.0 µA 1.0µsec 1.0µsec –.5 to +7.0 –.5 Volt min. 20 mA –40°C to
Sinking1 (Released) (Sinking (Sinking (Sinking VDC +15 Volts max. (Sinking) +65°C
6.5mA 8 mA) 8 mA) 8 mA) 0° to +65°C (Off condition) (–40° to
(Operated — (+32° to +149°F)
no load) +149°F)
6-16 VDC 6.5 mA @ + .4 Volt 20 µA 1.5µsec 0.5µsec –1.2 to +20 +20 VDC max. in 40 mA –40°C to
Sinking2 6 VDC. (Sinking (Sinking (Sinking VDC Off condition only +65°C
10.0 mA @ 20mA 20 mA) 20 mA) –0.5 VDC min. in (–40° to
16 VDC max.) Off or On +149°F)
(Plus load condition.
current)3
4.5-24 VDC
Sinking
5 V
7.0 mA
(Released)
24 V
9.0 mA
(Released)
14.0 mA
(Operatedno load)
+.4 Volt
(Sinking
10 mA)
10 µA 1.5 µ sec
(Sinking
10 mA)
0.5 µ sec
(Sinking
10 mA)
–30 to +30
VDC
–0.5 Volt min. +24
Volts max. (Off
condition)
20 mA
(Sinking)
–40−C to
+65°C (–40°
to +149°F)
5 VDC Scan 3.8 mA @ .6V
max. input at
Logic ‘‘0’’
2.4 VDC
min.
(Sourcing
11 mA)
1.0 µA 1.5 µ sec
(Sourcing
5 mA)
1.5 µ sec
(Sourcing
5 mA)
–.5 to +7.0
VDC
–.5 VDC min.
7.0 max.
(Off Condition)
25 mA
(Scan)
–40°C to
+65°C
(–40° to
+149°F)
1 Over temperature range of 0° to +55°C (+32° to 2 Over temperature range of 0° to +55°C (+32° to 4 As with all solid state components, performance can be
+131°F) and supply voltage of 4.5 to 5.5 VDC. +131°F) and supply voltage of 16 VDC. expected to deteriorate as rating limits are approached;
however, they will not be damaged unless the limits are
exceeded.
3 At 24°C. (+75°F)
1 AML20 Series
Contacts Voltage Current Load Type
Silver 250 VAC 2 Amps 75% Power Factor
or 125 VAC 3 Amps 75% Power Factor
Gold-plated Silver 24 VDC 2 Amps Resistive
Gold 125 VAC/DC 100 mA Resistive
1 AML30 Series
Current
Voltage Pushbuttons Rockers or Paddles Load Type
125 VAC 10 amps 15 amps 60% power factor
250 VAC 10 amps 15 amps 60% power factor
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML Series
Mounting Dimensions (For Reference Only)
60 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
AML11/12 and 21/22 SWITCHES Note: Top of full guard bezel housing AML27 SWITCHES
AML41C/D and AML42C INDICATORS .19/5,0 from panel.
PUSHBUTTONS
KEYLOCK
For terminal locations, see page 62.
For terminal locations, see page 63.
AML14/16 and AML24/26 SWITCHES AML13/15 and 23/25 SWITCHES
ROCKERS PADDLES
For terminal locations, see page 62, 63. For terminal locations, see page 62, 63.
AML41 INDICATOR AML42 INDICATOR TERMINAL TYPES
LENS STYLE MINIATURE
For terminal locations, see page 62.
NOTE
1 Dimensions are mm or mm/IN
IN
Solder Hole will accept two #22 AWG Stranded Conductor (per NEMA publication DC-2
1976)
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML Series
Mounting Dimensions (For Reference Only)
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 61
AML31/32 SWITCHES AML34/36 SWITCHES
PUSHBUTTON ROCKER
AML33/35 SWITCHES TERMINAL LOCATIONS
PADDLE PUSHBUTTON ROCKER AND PADDLE
AML43 INDICATORS PANEL CUTOUT FOR SINGLE-STATION
FRONT-OF-PANEL MOUNTING
Recommended panel thickness: .060-.187/1,52-4,75
NOTES
1 Dimensions are mm or mm/IN
IN
Manufacturers logo on this side of housing
Solder Hole Will Accept One #14 AWG Stranded Conductor
(Per NEMA Publication DC-2 1976)
PANEL PUNCH FOR AML SERIES
A panel punch is manufactured by Greenlee-Textron Tool Co.,
Rockford, IL (815-926-3011).
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML Series
Mounting Dimensions (For Reference Only)
62 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
TERMINAL LOCATIONS FOR AML10 SWITCHES
PUSHBUTTONS
Solder and Quick-Connect Printed Circuit
Illuminated devices shown (non-illuminated devices do not have lamp terminals).
ROCKERS AND PADDLES
Solder and Quick-Connect Printed Circuit
One Integrated Circuit Two Integrated Circuits One Integrated Circuit Two Integrated Circuits
Illuminated devices shown (non-illuminated devices do not have lamp terminals)
TERMINAL LOCATIONS FOR AML41 INDICATORS
Solder and Quick-Connect
1 Incandescent
Lamp Circuit
1 Incandescent
Lamp Circuit
2 Incandescent
Lamp Circuits
2 Incandescent
Lamp Circuits
1-3 Incandescent
Lamp Circuits
Printed Circuit
1 Incandescent 1 Incandescent 2 Incandescent 2 Incandescent 1-3 Incandescent
Lamp Circuit Lamp Circuit Lamp circuits Lamp Circuits Lamp Circuits
TERMINAL LOCATIONS FOR AML42 INDICATORS
Solder and Quick-Connect Printed Circuit
1 LED Circuit 1 LED Circuit 1 LED Circuit
1 LED Circuit
NOTE
1 Dimensions are MM or MM/IN
IN
Manufacturer’s logo on this side of
housing
4 – Lamp terminals are not provided for
non-illuminated devices
positive terminal ident. (+) marked this
side of housing
1 – lamp termination identified by ‘‘B’’.
2 – lamp termination identified by ‘‘A’’
and ‘‘C’’.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML Series
Mounting Dimensions (For Reference Only)
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 63
TERMINAL LOCATIONS FOR AML20 SWITCHES
PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES
Solder or Quick-Connect
Terminal identification marked on each adjacent side of housing
KEYLOCK SWITCHES
Solder or Quick-Connect
Printed Circuit
1 Pole 4 Pole2 Pole
PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES
Printed Circuit
1 Pole
2 Pole
4 Pole
1 Pole 2 Pole
ILLUMINATED ROCKERS AND PADDLES
Solder or Quick-Connect
Printed Circuit
1 Pole 2 Pole 1 Pole 2 Pole
NON-ILLUMINATED ROCKERS AND PADDLES
Solder or Quick-Connect Printed Circuit
1 Pole 2 Pole 4 Pole
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML Series
Mounting Dimensions (For Reference Only)
64 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
ANNUNCIATORS
AML45 SERIES
Manufacturer’s logo on this side of housing
For panel punch manufacturer, see page 61.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML Series
Mounting Dimensions (For Reference Only)
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 65
MULTI-STATION FRONT-PANEL MOUNTING
Panel cutouts (See page 61 for panel punch manufacturer.)
Square Switches & Indicators Rect. Switches & Indicators Annunciator
(.8) (No. of units) — .045* (1.20) (No. of units) — .045* (.40) (No. of units) — .045*
(20,3) (No. of units) — 1,14* (30,5) (No. of units) — 1,14* (10,1) (No. of units) — 1,14*
For each barrier, add .053/1,35 * Note: If barriers are used, do not subtract .045 in./1,14 mm from the panel cutout
formula. (.045 in./1,14mm is the allowance for the width of the bezel.)
AML61 MULTI-STATION SUBPANEL MOUNTING
Panel cutouts for AML61
Mounting Bracket
Orientation Width Length
A* in. .810
mm 20,57 (.810)(No. of units)
B in. .810
mm 20,57 (1.210)(No. of units)
C or D* in. 1.210
mm 27,94 (.810)(No. of units)
*More than two cans with mounting brackets required for strips
of more than 10 units.
AML61 MOUNTING CENTERS
Mounting Centers/Number of CansMounting Bracket
Orientation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
‘‘A’’ or ‘‘C’’ in. 1.285 2.095 2.905 3.715 4.525 5.335 6.145 6.955 7.765 8.575 9.385 10.195
mm 32,64 53,21 73,79 94,36 114,94 135,51 156,08 176,66 197,23 217,81 238,38 258,95
‘‘B’’ in. 1.685 2.895 4.105 5.315 6.525 7.735 8.945 10.155
mm 42,80 73,53 104,27 135,00 165,74 196,48 227,20 257,94
‘‘D’’ or ‘‘E’’ in. on CL .807 1.614 2.421 3.228 4.035 4.842 5.649 6.456 7.263 8.070 8.877
mm on CL 20,50 41,00 61,49 81,99 102,49 122,99 143,48 163,98 184,48 204,98 225,48
Tolerance J ±.015
C
D
E
B
A
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML Series
Mounting Dimensions (For Reference Only)
66 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
AML75 PANEL SEAL ACCESSORY
Panel cutouts
Multiple panel sealed units should not be
mounted together in a single elongated
slot, since this would create an unsealed
space between each unit.
Side-by-side mounting can be achieved,
per the center-to-center dimensions
shown in the drawing. (Dotted lines indicate the seal bases which are abutting at
front of panel.)
AML75 seals are not designed for use
with the AML61 mounting system.
NOTE: Suggested cutout dimensions are
based on an .125N/3,18 mm panel thickness. Individual preferences for inpanel fit
may require measurement of assemblies
before panels are cut.
AML76 SWITCH GUARD ACCESSORY
PANEL CUTOUTS
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
AML Series LED Application Information
MICRO SWITCH
Sensing and Control
Honeywell Inc.
11 West Spring Street
Freeport, Illinois 61032
005418-1- EN IL50 GLO 198 Printed in USA
www.honeywell.com/sensing
LED APPLICATION INFORMATION
For those devices without internal current limiting
resistors, suitable external control of the LED
current must be provided. It is recommended that a
minimum of 5 VDC open circuit voltage with an
appropriate series resistance be used to drive
LEDde-vices. This minimizes the effect of temperature (current variation) on forward volt-age of the
LED. Resistor values can be determined by supply
voltage or current for LED:
RS = E - Vf / If
WHERE: RS = Series Resistance
E = Supply Voltage
Vf = Forward Voltage of LED
If = Circuit Current
If a diode is added in series for reverse polarity
protection then:
RS = E - Vf - VPD / If
WHERE: VPD = Forward Voltage of
Protection Diode
WARRANTY/REMEDY
Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as
being free of defective materials and faulty
workmanship. Contact your local sales office for
warranty information. If warranted goods are
returned to Honeywell during the period of
coverage, Honeywell will repair or replace without
charge those items it finds defective. The foregoing
is Buyer’s sole remedy and is in lieu of all other
warranties, expressed or implied, including
those of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose.
Specifications may change without notice. The
information we supply is believed to be accurate
and reliable as of this printing. However, we
assume no responsibility for its use.
While we provide application assistance
personally, through our literature and the Honeywell
web site, it is up to the customer to determine the
suitability of the product in the application.
For application assistance, current specifications,
or name of the nearest Authorized Distributor,
contact a nearby sales office. Or call:
1-800-537-6945 USA
1-800-737-3360 Canada
1-815-235-6847 International
FAX
1-815-235-6545 USA
INTERNET
www.honeywell.com/sensing
info@micro.honeywell.com
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
AML Series Panel Cutouts
MICRO SWITCH
Sensing and Control
Honeywell Inc.
11 West Spring Street
Freeport, Illinois 61032
005417-1- EN IL50 GLO 198 Printed in USA
www.honeywell.com/sensing
PANEL CUTOUT FOR SINGLE-STATION FRONT-
OF-PANEL MOUNTING
Recommended panel thickness: 1,52 - 4,75 mm
[0.060 to 0.187 in].
WARRANTY/REMEDY
Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as
being free of defective materials and faulty
workmanship. Contact your local sales office for
warranty information. If warranted goods are
returned to Honeywell during the period of coverage,
Honeywell will repair or replace without charge those
items it finds defective. The foregoing is Buyer’s sole
remedy and is in lieu of all other warranties,
expressed or implied, including those of
merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose.
Specifications may change without notice. The
information we supply is believed to be accurate and
reliable as of this printing. However, we assume no
responsibility for its use.
While we provide application assistance
personally, through our literature and the Honeywell
web site, it is up to the customer to determine the
suitability of the product in the application.
For application assistance, current specifications,
or name of the nearest Authorized Distributor,
contact a nearby sales office. Or call:
1-800-537-6945 USA
1-800-737-3360 Canada
1-815-235-6847 International
FAX
1-815-235-6545 USA
INTERNET
www.honeywell.com/sensing
info@micro.honeywell.com
C
ourtesy of S
teven E
ngineering, Inc. ! 230 R
yan W
ay, S
outh S
an Francisco, C
A
94080-6370 ! M
ain O
ffice: (650) 588-9200 ! O
utside Local A
rea: (800) 258-9200 ! w
w w .stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML11 Series
Solid State Pushbutton
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 21
INCANDESCENT OR NON-LIGHTED DISPLAY
Buttons ordered separately.
FEATURES
1 Hall effect reliability.
1 Provides low voltage signals that
interface with nearly all DC logic level
loads.
1 5 VDC, 6-16 VDC and 4.5-24 VDC
supply voltage.
1 Full guard bezel option.
1 Lamps can be furnished installed or
ordered separately.
1 UL recognized.
1 Lamp circuit independent of switch
circuit.
AML11 ORDER GUIDE
AML11 B B A 2 AA
Housing
Type
Standard Bezel:
AML11B Square Non-Lighted
AML11C Square 1 Lamp Ckt.
AML11E Rect. Non-Lighted
AML11F Rect. 1 Lamp Ckt.
AML11G Rect. 2 Lamp Ckts.
Full Guard Bezel:
AML11H Square Non-Lighted
AML11J Square 1 Lamp Ckt.
AML11K Rect. Non-Lighted
AML11L Rect. 1 Lamp Ckt.
AML11M Rect. 2 Lamp Ckts.
Bezel
Color
B
Black
Incandescent
Lamp Type
A
No Lamp
Installed
B
6 V Lamp*
C
14 V Lamp*
E
28 V Lamp*
Terminal
Type
2
.110 × .020
(Solder or
Quick-Connect)
3
.025 H .025
(Printed
Circuit, or
Push-On)
Circuitry
Codes
5 VDC
Sinking
AA
Momentary
Action
AE
Alternate
Action
6-16 VDC
Sinking
BA
Momentary
Action
BE
Alternate
Action
5 VDC
Scan**
CA
Momentary
Action
CE
Alternate
Action
4.5-24
VDC
Sinking
DA
Momentary
Action
DE
Alternate
Action
* Lamps will be installed per each lamp circuit
specified in the Housing Type.
** See ‘‘Scan Switches,’’ next page.
Example: AML11BBA2AA
Square pushbutton switch housing, non-lighted; black bezel; .110 × .020 termination;
momentary action; current sinking output for use with 5 volt supply.
CURRENT SINKING OUTPUT
AML10 SERIES
A permanent magnet plunger moves adjacent to the Hall effect integrated circuit
to give a digital, current sinking normally
high output.
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML12 Series
Solid State Pushbutton
22 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
LED DISPLAY
LED ‘‘window’’ buttons ordered separately.
LEDs are not replaceable.
FEATURES
1 Hall effect reliabilty (Refer to facing
page for electrical specifications.)
1 Rectangular, high efficiency LED’s
give flush display area and wide angle
indication.
1 Available with or without diode
protection for the LED’s.
1 5 thru 24 VDC devices have an
internal resistor to maintain LED
current at nominal 20 mA.
Electrical Data Page 20
Buttons Page 43, 44
Lamps and LEDs Page 59
Accessories Page 57, 58
Mounting Dimensions Page 60, 62
1 LED circuit independent of switch
circuit.
1 UL recognized.
AML12 ORDER GUIDE
AML12C B B 2 AA
Housing Type
Standard Bezel:
AML12C Square 1 LED
Full Guard Bezel:
AML12J Square 1 LED
Bezel
Color
B
Black
LED Color/
Voltage
Red
B V*
C 5 V
D 10 V
E 15 V
F 24 V
Yellow
H V*
J 5 V
K 10 V
L 15 V
M 24 V
Green
R V*
S 5 V
T 10 V
W 15 V
X 24 V
Terminal Type/
Diode Protection
2
.110 × .020
(Solder or
Quick-Connect)
3
.025 × .025
(Printed Circuit
or Push-On)
8
.110 × .020
With Diode
Protection
Circuitry
Codes
5 VDC
Sinking
AA
Momentary
Action
AE
Alternate
Action
6-16 VDC
Sinking
BA
Momentary
Action
BE
Alternate
Action
5 VDC
Scan**
CA
Momentary
Action
CE
Alternate
Action
4.5-24
VDC
Sinking
DA
Momentary
Action
DE
Alternate
Action
* See LED application information for devices
without current-limiting resistor, page 59.
Example: AML12CBB2AA
Square pushbutton switch housing;
black bezel; red LED; .110 × .020 termination; current sinking output for use with 5
volt supply; momentary action.
AML11/12 HALL EFFECT SCAN SWITCHES
Scan switches interface directly with a
port expander and microcomputer to operate either in a scan matrix or as an individual function switch with a level sourcing signal (emitter follower). Scanning is
used to look at each switch in a matrix to
see which stations are active. The scan
matrix significantly lowers overall power
consumption, since each switch requires
power only while being strobed.
In the scanned mode, the minus supply
connection becomes the scanning input
connection. When this input is high, the
switch is de-energized and does not consume power. When the scan input is low,
the switch will draw current as it normally
does when energized. If the button is depressed when the scan input is low, the
output will be high. The output remains
low if the button is not depressed during
the scan cycle.
ELECTRICAL DATA
Circuitry Termination
Dotted lines denote rectangular housing.
1 The ‘‘MICRO SWITCH’’ identification is shown on
this side of the switch housings.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML13 Series
Solid State Paddle
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 23
INCANDESCENT OR NON-LIGHTED DISPLAY
Covers ordered separately.
FEATURES
1 Hall effect reliability.
1 Provides low voltage signals that
interface with nearly all DC logic level
loads.
1 5 VDC and 6-16 VDC supply voltage.
1 2 or 3-position operation.
1 Toggle type paddle operators
permanently installed in rectangular
housings.
1 Covers for the switch housing may be
lighted or unlighted.
1 UL recognized.
1 Lamps can be furnished installed or
ordered separately.
1 Lamp circuit independent of switch
circuit.
AML13 ORDER GUIDE
AML13 E B A 2 AA 01
Housing Operator/Bezel Incandescent Terminal Circuitry Operating
Type Color Lamp Type Type Code Action
AML13 E
Rectangular
Non-Lighted
AML13 F
Rectangular
1 Lamp Ckt. (A)
AML13 G
Rectangular
2 Lamp Ckts.
(A & B)
B
Black/Black
A
No Lamp
Installed
B
6 V Lamp*
C
14 V Lamp*
E
28 V Lamp*
2
.110 × .020
(Solder or
Quick-Connect)
3
.025 × .025
(Printed Ckt.,
or Push-On)
One IC (Ckt. A):
AA
5 V Sinking
BA
6-16 V Sinking
DA
4.5-24 VDC
Sinking
Two IC’s
(Ckts. A & B):
AC
5 V Sinking
BC
6-16 V Sinking
DC
4.5-24 VDC
Sinking
Insert Code
Numbers from
Operating
Action Chart
1 The ‘‘MICRO SWITCH’’
identification is shown
on this side of the switch
housing.
* Lamps will be installed per each lamp circuit specified in the Housing Type.
Example: AML13EBA2AA01
Rectangular non-lighted paddle switch
housing; black paddle and bezel; .110 ×
.020 terminals; with one 5 V sinking IC
pack; two position operation.
OPERATING ACTION
2 Position:
01
Maint. None Maint.
02
Mom. None Maint.
03
Maint. None Mom.
3-Position:**
04
Maint. Maint. Maint.
05
Mom. Maint. Mom.
06
Maint. Maint. Mom.
07
Mom. Maint. Maint.
** 3-position switches must have two circuits specified in the listing (circuitry codes ‘‘AC’’ or ‘‘BC’’).
Covers
ordered
separately
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML15 Series
Solid State Paddle
24 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
LED DISPLAY
Covers with LED ‘‘window’’ ordered separately.
LEDs are not replaceable.
FEATURES
1 Hall effect reliabilty.
1 Rectangular, high efficiency LED’s
give flush display area and wide angle
indication.
1 Available with or without diode
protection for the LED’s.
1 5 thru 24 VDC devices have an
internal resistor to maintain LED
current at nominal 20 mA.
1 LED circuit independent of switch
circuit.
1 UL recognized.
Electrical Data Page 20
Paddle Covers Page 48, 49
Lamps Page 59
Accessories Page 57, 58
Mounting Dimensions Page 60, 62
AML15 ORDER GUIDE
AML15 F B B 2 AA 01 R X
Housing Operator LED Terminal Type/ Circuitry Operating LED Color LED Color
Type Bezel Color Voltage Diode Protection Code Action (LED A) (LED B)
AML15 F
Rect.
1 LED
AML15 G
Rect.
2 LED’s
B
Black/Black
B
V*
C
5 V
D
10 V
E
15 V
F
24 V
2
.110 × .020
(Solder or
Quick-Connect)
3
.025 × .025
(Printed Circuit,
or Push-On)
8
.110 × .020
w/Diode Protection
for LED
One IC
(Ckt. A):
AA
5 V Sinking
BA
6-16 V Sinking
DA
4.5-24 VDC
Sinking
Two IC’s
(Ckts. A & B):
AC
5 V Sinking
BC
6-16 V Sinking
DC
4.5-24 VDC
Sinking
Insert
Code
Numbers
from
Operating
Action
Chart
R
Red
Y
Yellow
G
Green
X
No LED
R
Red
Y
Yellow
G
Green
X
No LED
* See LED application information for devices without current-limiting resistor, page 59.
Example: AML15FBB2AA01RX
Rectangular paddle switch housing with
one LED, without resistor, black paddle
and bezel; .110 × .020 terminals, with one
5 V sinking IC pack; 2-position operation.
CIRCUIT OUTPUT STATES
Ckt. Low
A (operated) High High
Ckt. Low
B High High (operated)
Switch base
termination
1 The ‘‘MICRO SWITCH’’ identification is on this side of the switch housing.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML21 Series
Electronic Control Pushbutton
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 27
INCANDESCENT OR NON-LIGHTED DISPLAY
Buttons ordered separately.
FEATURES
1 1, 2, or 4 poles.
1 Silver or gold contacts.
1 Full guard bezel option.
1 Momentary or 2-level alternate action
(push-on, push-off).
1 UL recognized, CSA certified.
1 Lamps can be furnished installed or
ordered separately.
1 Lamp circuit independent of switch circuit.
AML21 Series: 1 pole and 2-pole
only.
AML21 ORDER GUIDE
AML21 B B A 2 AA
Housing Bezel Incandescent Terminal Circuitry Codes
Type Color Lamp Type Type (Each pole has double-throw)
Standard Bezel: B A 2 Silver Mom. Action
AML21B Square Non-Lighted
AML21C Square 1 Lamp Ckt.
AML21E Rect. Non-Lighted
AML21F Rect. 1 Lamp Ckt.
AML21G Rect. 2 Lamp Ckts.
Full Guard Bezel:
AML21H Square Non-Lighted
AML21J Square 1 Lamp Ckt.
AML21K Rect. Non-Lighted
AML21L Rect. 1 Lamp Ckt.
AML21M Rect. 2 Lamp Ckts.
Black No Lamp
Installed
B
6 V Lamp*
C
14 V Lamp*
E
28 V Lamp*
.110 × .020
(Solder or
Quick-Connect)
3
.025 × .025
(Printed Ckt. or
Push-On)
Contacts AA 1-Pole
AC 2-Pole
CC 4-Pole
Alt. Action
AB 1-Pole
AD 2-Pole
CD 4-Pole
Gold
Contacts
Mom. Action
BA 1-Pole
BC 2-Pole
DC 4-Pole
Alt. Action
BB 1-Pole
BD 2-Pole
DD 4-Pole
Gold-Plated
Silver
Contacts
Mom. Action
EA 1-Pole
EC 2-Pole
Alt. Action
EB 1-Pole
ED 2-Pole
* Lamps will be installed per each lamp circuit specified in the Housing Type.
Example: AML21BBA2AA
Square pushbutton switch housing nonlighted; black bezel; .110 × .020 termination; momentary action; 1-pole, doublethrow; silver contacts.
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML22 Series
Electronic Control Pushbutton
28 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
LED DISPLAY
Buttons with LED ‘‘window’’ ordered separately.
LEDs are not replaceable.
FEATURES
1 Identical to AML21 switches, except
furnished with high efficiency LED
display.
1 Rectangular LED’s are flush with
button surface, providing wide angle
indication.
1 Optional diode protection for LED’s.
1 5 thru 24 VDC LED devices have an
internal resistor to maintain current at
nominal 20 mA.
1 UL recognized, CSA certified.
1 LED circuit independent of switch
circuit.
Electrical Data Page 20
Buttons Page 43, 44
Lamps Page 59
Accessories Page 57, 58
Mounting Dimensions Page 60, 63
AML22 Series: 1 pole and
2-pole only.
AML22 ORDER GUIDE
AML22 C B B 2 AA
Housing Bezel LED Color/ Terminal Circuitry Codes
Type Color Voltage Type (Each pole has double-throw)
Standard Bezel: B Red 2 Silver Mom. Action
AML22C Square 1 LED
AML22H Square 1 HighProfile LED (For use with
AML52-A buttons)
Full Guard Bezel:
AML22J Square 1 LED
Black B V*
C 5V
D 10V
E 15V
F 24V
Yellow
H V*
J 5V
K 10V
L 15V
M 24V
Green
R V*
S 5V
T 10V
W 15V
X 24V
.110 × .020
(Solder or
Quick-Connect)
3
.025 × .025
(Printed Ckt.,
or Push-On)
8
.110 × .020
With Diode
Protection
for LED
Contacts AA 1-Pole
AC 2-Pole
CC 4-Pole
Alt. Action
AB 1-Pole
AD 2-Pole
CD 4-Pole
Gold
Contacts
Mom. Action
BA 1-Pole
BC 2-Pole
DC 4-Pole
Alt. Action
BB 1-Pole
BD 2-Pole
DD 4-Pole
Gold-Plated
Silver
Contacts
Mom. Action
EA 1-Pole
EC 2-Pole
Alt. Action
EB 1-Pole
ED 2-Pole
* See LED information for devices without current limiting resistor, page 59.
Example: AML22CBB2AA
Square pushbutton switch housing with
one LED, black bezel; red LED (without
resistor); .110 × .020 termination; momentary action, 1-pole, double-throw; silver contacts.
CONTACT ARRANGEMENT
1, 2 or 4 poles: Form C
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML23 Series
Electronic Control Paddle
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 29
INCANDESCENT OR NON-LIGHTED DISPLAY
Covers ordered separately.
FEATURES
1 Silver or gold contacts.
1 1, 2 or 4 poles.
1 Toggle type paddle operators
permanently installed in rectangular
housings.
1 Covers for the switch housing may be
lighted or unlighted.
1 UL recognized, CSA certified.
1 Lamps can be furnished installed or
ordered separately.
1 Lamp circuit independent of switch
circuit.
Electrical Data Page 20
Paddle Covers Page 48
Lamps Page 59
Accessories Page 57, 58
Mounting Dimensions Page 60,63
AML23 Series: 1 pole and
2-pole only.
AML23 ORDER GUIDE
AML23 E B A 2 AA 01
Housing Operator/Bezel Incandescent Terminal Circuitry Operating
Type Color Lamp Type Type Codes Action
AML23 E B A 2 Insert Code
letters as
shown in
Circuitry Chart
Insert Code numbers
from Operating
Action Chart
Rectangular Black/Black No Lamp
Installed
B
6 V Lamp*
C
14 V Lamp*
E
28 V Lamp*
.110 × .020
(Solder or
Quick-Connect)
3
.025 × .025
(Printed Ckt.,
or Push-on)
Non-Lighted
AML23 F
Rectangular
1 Lamp Ckt. (A)
AML23 G
Rectangular
2 Lamp Ckts.
(A & B)
* Lamps will be installed per each lamp circuit specified in the Housing Type.
1 The ‘‘MICRO SWITCH’’
identification is shown
on this side of the
switch housings.
Example: AML23EBA2AA01
Rectangular non-lighted paddle switch
housing; black paddle and bezel; .110 ×
.020 terminals; with one circuit ON and
one circuit OFF in each extreme operator
position (maintained).
CIRCUITRY
Silver Gold 2-Position 3-Position
Contacts Contacts
AA BA
AC BC
(Non-illuminated
switches only)
CA DA
CC DC
(Non-illuminated
switches only)
OPERATING ACTION
2-Position:
01
Maint. None Maint.
02
Mom. None Maint.
03
Maint. None Mom.
3-Position:
04
Maint. Maint. Maint.
05
Mom. Maint. Mom.
06
Maint. Maint. Mom.
07
Mom. Maint. Maint.
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML24 Series
Electronic Control Rocker
30 Honeywell 1 Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada
INCANDESCENT OR NON-LIGHTED DISPLAY
Rocker operators ordered separately.
FEATURES
1 Silver or gold contacts.
1 2 or 3 position operation.
1 UL recognized, CSA certified.
1 Lamps can be furnished installed or
ordered separately.
1 Lamp circuit independent of switch
circuit.
Electrical Data page 19
Rockers page 51
Lamps page 58
Accessories pages 56, 57
Mounting Dimensions pages 59, 62
* *
*AML24 Series: 1 pole and
2-pole only.
AML24 ORDER GUIDE
AML24 E B A 2 AA 01
Housing Bezel Incandescent Terminal Circuitry Operating
Type Color Lamp Type Type Codes Action
AML24 E B A 2 Insert Code
letters as
shown in
Circuitry Chart
Insert Code numbers
from Operating
Action Chart
Rectangular Black No Lamp
Installed
B
6 V Lamp*
C
14 V Lamp*
E
28 V Lamp*
.110 × .020
(Solder or
Quick-Connect)
3
.025 × .025
(Printed Ckt.,
or Push-on)
Non-Lighted
AML24 F
Rectangular
1 Lamp Ckt. (A)
AML24 G
Rectangular
2 Lamp Ckts.
1 The ‘‘MICRO SWITCH’’
identification is shown
on this side of the
switch housings.
* Lamps will be installed per each lamp circuit specified in the Housing Type.
Example: AML24EBA2AA01
Rectangular non-lighted rocker switch
housing; black bezel; .110 × .020 terminals; with one circuit ON and one circuit
OFF in each extreme operator position
(maintained).
CIRCUITRY
Silver Gold 2-Position 3-Position
Contacts Contacts
AA BA
AC BC
(Non-illuminated
switches only)
CA DA
CC DC
(Non-illuminated
switches only)
OPERATING ACTION
2-Position:
01
Maint. None Maint.
02
Mom. None Maint.
03
Maint. None Mom.
3-Position:
04
Maint. Maint. Maint.
05
Mom. Maint. Mom.
06
Maint. Maint. Mom.
07
Mom. Maint. Maint.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML25 Series
Electronic Control Paddle
30 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
LED DISPLAY
Covers with LED ‘‘window’’ ordered separately.
FEATURES
1 Identical to AML23, except furnished
with one or two rectangular high
efficiency LED’s which give flush
display area and wide angle
indication.
1 Available with or without diode
protection for LED’s.
1 LED circuit independent of switch
circuit.
1 5 thru 24 VDC devices have internal
resistor to maintain current at nominal
20 mA.
1 UL recognized, CSA certified.
AML25 Series: 1 pole and
2-pole only.
AML25 ORDER GUIDE
AML25 F B B 2 AA 01 R X
Housing Operator/ LED Terminal Type/ Circuitry Operating LED Color LED Color
Type Bezel Color Voltage Diode Protection Codes Code (LED A) (LED B)
AML25 F B B 2 Insert code Insert code R R
Rectangular Black/Black V* .110 × .020 letters numbers Red Red
1 LED (Solder or Q-C) as shown in from Y Y
C Circuitry Operating Yellow Yellow
AML25 G 5 V 3 Chart Action G G
Rectangular .025 × .025 on p. 29 Chart Green Green
2 LED’s D (Printed Ckt.,
LED version
on p. 29 X X
10 V or Push-On
available
No LED No LED
only withE 8
AA15 V .110 × .020
BAw/Diode
CAF protection
DA24 V
circuitry
*See LED application information for devices without current-limiting resistor, page 59.
Example: AML25FBB2AA01RX
Rectangular paddle switch; illuminated
with one red LED, this device has a black
paddle and bezel, and .110 × .020 terminals; with one circuit ON and one circuit
OFF in each extreme operator position
(maintained).
† For further information on replacement
LED’s, call the 800 number.
Covers
ordered
separately 1 The ‘‘MICRO SWITCH’’ identification is
shown on this side of the switch housings.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML26 Series
Electronic Control Rocker
Honeywell 1 Sensing and Control 1 1-800-537-6945 USA 1 F1-815-235-6847 International 1 1-800-737-3360 Canada 31
LED DISPLAY
Rocker operators ordered separately.
LEDs are not replaceable.
FEATURES
1 Identical to AML24, except furnished
with one or two rectangular high
efficiency LED’s which give flush
display area and wide angle
indication.
1 Available with or without diode
protection for LED’s.
1 LED circuit independent of switch
circuit.
Electrical Data page 19
Rockers page 52
Lamps and LEDs page 58
Accessories page 57
Mounting Dimensions pages 59, 62
1 5 thru 24 VDC LED devices have
internal resistor to maintain current at
nominal 20 mA.
1 UL recognized, CSA certified.
* *
*AML26 Series: 1 pole and
2-pole only.
AML26 ORDER GUIDE
AML26 F B B 2 AA 01 R X
Housing LED Terminal Type/ Circuitry Operating LED Color LED Color
Type Bezel Color Voltage Diode Protection Codes Action (LED A) (LED B)
AML26 F B B 2 Insert code Insert code R R
1 LED Black V* .110 × .020 letters numbers Red Red
(Solder or as shown in from Y Y
AML26 G C Quick-Connect Circuitry Operating Yellow Yellow
2 LED’s 5 V Chart Action G G
3 Chart Green Green
D .025 × .025
LED version
X X
10 V (Printed Ckt.,
available
No LED No LED
or Push-On)
only withE
AA15 V 8
BA.110 × .020
CAF w/Diode
DA24 V for LED
circuitryprotection
*See LED application information for devices without current-limiting resistor, page 58.
Example: AML26FBB2AA01RX
Rectangular rocker switch; illuminated
with one LED, this device has a black
bezel, .110 × .020 terminals; with one
circuit ON and one circuit OFF in each
extreme operator position (maintained).
1 The ‘‘MICRO SWITCH’’ identification is
shown on this side of the switch housings.
Rocker
ordered
separately
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML27 Series
Electronic Control Keylock
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 33
NON-LIGHTED FEATURES
1 Enable control of access to computer
peripherals, keyboards, point-of-sale
terminals, and security systems which
are locked when unattended; and
other locations where tampering must
be discouraged.
1 2 or 3 positions, maintained (90°
throw) and momentary action (60°
throw).
1 5-bit key combinations
Electrical Data Page 19
Mounting Dimensions Page 60, 63
Accessories Pages 57-58
1 UL recognized, CSA certified.
1 Static discharge protection (up to 20
kV when grounded).
AML27 ORDER GUIDE
AML27 A B K 2 AA 21 BA
Circuitry Codes Operation Action
Housing Bezel Button Terminal (Each pole has (Key out in center position, Key
Type Color Color Type double-throw) except where noted) Combinations
AML27 A B K 2 Silver Contacts: (Two Keys
Black Black .110 × .020 AA Furnished)
Square (Solder or 1 pole
housing Quick-Connect) AC BA BL
2 pole BB BM
Non-Lighted 3 BC BN
.025 × .025 Gold Contacts: BD BP
(Printed BA BE BQ
BF BR
BG BS
BH BT
BJ BV
BK BW
Circuit or 1 pole
Push-On) BC
2 pole
CCW Center CW
21
None Maint. Maint.
22*
None Maint. Maint.
23
None Maint. Mom.
24
Maint. Maint. Maint.
25
Mom. Maint. Mom.
26**
Maint. Maint. Maint.
27***
Mom. Maint. Maint.
28***
Maint. Maint. Maint.
29†
Maint. Maint. Maint.
30†
Maint. Maint. Mom.
31††
Maint. Maint. Mom.
* Key out in both positions.
** Key out in all three positions.
*** Key out in center and CW positions.
† Key out in center and
CCW positions.
†† Key out in CCW only.
REPLACEMENT KEYS
One key per listing.
Key
Combination
Key
Code
Catalog
Listing
BA 110 30PA101-AML
BB 109 30PA102-AML
BC 108 30PA103-AML
BD 107 30PA104-AML
BE 106 30PA105-AML
BF 105 30PA106-AML
BG 104 30PA107-AML
BH 103 30PA108-AML
BJ 102 30PA109-AML
BK 101 30PA110-AML
BL 111 30PA111-AML
BM 112 30PA112-AML
BN 113 30PA113-AML
BP 114 30PA114-AML
BQ 115 30PA115-AML
BR 116 30PA116-AML
BS 117 30PA117-AML
BT 118 30PA118-AML
BV 119 30PA119-AML
BW 120 30PA120-AML
Note: These keys fit the 5-bit keylocks in
the Order Guide. To order replacement
keys for our old style 4-bit key combinations, see below.
ORDER GUIDE FOR OLD STYLE AML27 REPLACEMENT KEYS
One key per listing.
Key
Comb.
Key
Code
Catalog
Listing
AA 601 30PA3-AML
AB 602 30PA8-AML
AC 604 30PA9-AML
AD 607 30PA10-AML
AE 608 30PA11-AML
Specify different Key Combinations to
acquire different keys, i.e.;
AML27ABK2AA21BB and
AML27ABK2AA21BK have different keys.
AML27ABK2AA21BB and
AML27ABK3BC25BB have identical interchangeable keys.
Example: AML27ABK2AC28BB
Square housing; black bezel and button; .110
× .020 terminals; 2-pole double-throw; silver
contacts; 3-position maintained and key
code ‘‘BB’’.
CIRCUITRY
2-Position Switches:
Key Turned
Normal to Right
Position* (CW)
1 Pole
2 Pole
Key
Comb.
Key
Code
Catalog
Listing
AF 610 30PA12-AML
AG 612 30PA13-AML
AH 614 30PA14-AML
AJ 615 30PA15-AML
AK 616 30PA16-AML
3-Position Switches (Available in 2-pole only.)
Key
Turned
to Left
(CCW)
Normal
Position*
Key
Turned to
Right (CW)
2 Pole
* Circuit remains the same with key in or out.
28 and 29 operating actions
should be used
with Key Combinations BA,
BB, BG or BK.
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML31/32 Series
Power Duty Pushbutton
34 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
INCANDESCENT, NEON, OR NON-LIGHTED DISPLAY
Buttons ordered separately.
FEATURES
1 UL recognized, CSA certified.
1 AML31 lamp circuit independent of
switch circuit.
AML31 Series: 2-pole.
AML32 Series: 2-pole.
CONTACT ARRANGEMENT
2 poles (Form X)
AML31 ORDER GUIDE
AML31 accepts one incandescent lamp which can be furnished installed or ordered separately.
AML31 E B A 4 AC
Housing Bezel Incandescent Terminal Circuitry
Type Color Lamp Type Type Codes
Standard Bezel: B A 4 2-Pole, Single-Throw
AML31E Rect. Non-Lighted Black No Lamp Installed .187 × .020 Normally-Open, Form X:
AML31F Rect. 1 Lamp Ckt. (Solder or
Quick-Connect
AD AC
B
6 V Lamp*
C
14 V Lamp*
E
28 V Lamp*
Alt.
Action
Mom.
ActionFull Guard Bezel:
AML31K Rect. Non-Lighted
AML31L Rect. 1 Lamp Ckt.
* Lamps will be installed per each lamp circuit specified in the Housing Type.
Example: AML31EBA4AC
Rectangular pushbutton switch housing,
non-lighted; black bezel; .187 × .020 terminals; momentary action; 2-pole, singlethrow, normally open, Form X.
AML32 ORDER GUIDE
AML32 has neon lamp wired to 125 or 250 VAC resistor.
AML32 F B C 7 AC
Housing Bezel Neon Lamp Terminal Type Circuitry
Type Color Voltage/Color Lamp Circuit Codes
Standard Bezel: B Red 4 2-Pole, Single-Throw
Normally-Open, Form X:AML32F Rect. 1 Neon Lamp Black B 125 VAC .187 × .020
C 250 VAC (Solder or
Quick-Connect)
with isolated
lamp circuit
7
.187 × .020
with integral
lamp circuit
AD
Alt.
Action
AC
Mom.
Action
Full Guard Bezel:
AML32L Rect. 1 Neon Lamp Clear
K 125 VAC
L 250 VAC
Green
M 125 VAC
P 250 VAC
Example: AML32FBC7AC
Rectangular pushbutton switch housing;
black bezel; 250 volt, red neon lamp; .187
× .020 terminals with integral lamp circuit; momentary action; 2-pole, singlethrow, normally open, Form X.
Isolated neon circuit Integral neon circuit
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML33/35 Series
Power Duty Paddle
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 35
INCANDESCENT, NEON, OR NON-LIGHTED DISPLAY
Colored housing covers ordered separately.
CONTACT ARRANGEMENT
1 or 2 poles: Form A
Electrical Data Page 20
Paddle Covers Page 48
Lamps Page 59
Mounting Dimensions Page 61
FEATURES
1 Toggle type paddle operators
permanently installed in rectangular
housings.
1 2-position maintained action.
1 AML33 lamp circuit independent of
switch circuit.
1 UL recognized, CSA certified.
AML33 Series: 2-pole only.
AML35 Series: 1-pole and
2-pole.
AML33 ORDER GUIDE
AML33 accepts one incandescent lamp which can be furnished installed or ordered separately.
AML33 E B A 4 AA 01
Housing Operator/Bezel Incandescent Terminal Circuitry Operating
Type Color Lamp Type Type Codes Action
AML33 E B A 4 Silver Contacts:
AA
1-Pole
(One Form A
Single-throw,
Normally-Open)
Rectangular Black/Black No Lamp .187 × .020
(Solder or
Quick-Connect)
Non-Lighted
AML33 F
Rectangular
1 Lamp Ckt.
Installed
B
6 V Lamp*
C
14 V Lamp*
E
28 V Lamp*
AC
2-Pole
(Two Form A)
01
Maint. Maint.
ON OFF
*Lamps will be installed per each lamp circuit specified in the Housing Type.
AML35 ORDER GUIDE
AML35 has neon lamp wired to 125 or 250 VAC resistor.
AML35 F B B 4 AA 01
Housing Operator/Bezel Neon Lamp Terminal Type/ Circuitry Operating
Type Color Voltage Lamp Circuit † Codes Action
AML35 F
Rectangular
1 Neon Lamp
B
Black/Black
Red
B
125 VAC
C
250 VAC
Green
M
125 VAC
P
250 VAC
4
.187 × .020
(Solder or
Quick-Connect)
With Isolated
Lamp Circuit
7
.187 × .020
With Integral Lamp
Circuit (Available
with 2-Pole
devices only
Silver Contacts:
AA
(One Form A
Single-Throw)
Available only
with isolated
lamp circuit,
term. type 4.
AC
2-Pole
(Two Form A)
01
Maint. Maint.
ON OFF
1 The ‘‘MICRO SWITCH’’ identification is
shown on this side of the switch housing.
† Refer to next page for neon lamp circuit
schematics.
Example: AML35FBB4AA01
Rectangular paddle switch housing;
black paddle and bezel; 125 VAC neon
lamp; .187 × .020 terminals with isolated
lamp circuit; 1-Pole Form A Single-Throw;
with circuit ON in one extreme position
and OFF in the other (maintained).
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML34/36 Series
Power Duty Rocker
36 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
INCANDESCENT, NEON, OR NON-LIGHTED DISPLAY
Rocker operators ordered separately.
FEATURES
1 Same circuitry, and electrical rating as
power duty paddle switches.
1 Neon lamp circuitry can be isolated or
integral on 2-pole switches; isolatedonly on 1-pole switches (see
schematics).
1 UL recognized, CSA certified.
1 AML34 lamp circuit independent of
switch circuit.
AML34 Series: 2-pole only.
AML36 Series: 1-pole and
2-pole.AML34 ORDER GUIDE
AML34 accepts one incandescent lamp which can be furnished installed or ordered separately.
AML34 E B A 4 AA 01
Housing Bezel Incandescent Terminal Circuitry Operating
Type Color Lamp Type Type Codes Action
AML34 E B A 4 Silver Contacts:
AA
1-Pole
(One Form A
Single-Throw)
Rectangular Black No Lamp .187 × .020
(Solder or
Quick-Connect)
Non. Illum.
AML34 F
Rectangular
1 Lamp Ckt.
Installed
B
6 V Lamp*
C
14 V Lamp*
E
28 V Lamp*
AC
2-Pole
(Two Form A)
01
Maint. Maint.
ON OFF
*Lamps will be installed per each lamp circuit specified in the Housing Type.
AML36 ORDER GUIDE
AML36 has neon lamp wired to 125 or 250 VAC resistor.
AML36 F B B 4 AA 01
Housing Bezel Neon Lamp Terminal Type/ Circuitry Operating
Type Color Voltage Lamp Circuit Codes Action
AML36 F
Rectangular
1 Neon Lamp
B
Black
Red
B
125 VAC
C
250 VAC
Green
M
125 VAC
P
250 VAC
4
.187 × .020
(Solder or
Quick-Connect)
With Isolated
Lamp Circuit
7
.187 × .020
(Solder or
Quick-Connect)
With Integral Lamp
Circuit
Silver Contacts:
AA
(One Form A
Single-Throw)
Not available with
terminal type 7
AC
2-Pole
(Two Form A)
01
Maint. Maint.
ON OFF
1 The ‘‘MICRO SWITCH’’ identification is
shown on this side of the switch housing.
Example: AML36FBB4AA01
Rectangular rocker switch housing; black
bezel; 125 VAC neon lamp; .187 × .020
terminals with isolated lamp circuit; 1Pole Form A single-throw; with circuit ON
in one extreme position and OFF in the
other.
Integral neon circuit Isolated neon circuit
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML41/42/43 Series
Lighted Indicators
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 37
To order lamps see page 59.
FEATURES
1 Pushbutton style indicators match
display of lighted switches. Choice of
incandescent, LED, or neon
illumination.
1 Lens style indicators use a special
cap-like button which covers the
bezel to present a larger display area,
without affecting family appearance.
Up to 3-lamp split screen capability.
Incandescent illumination.
AML41 AML41
(Use AML51 push- (Use AML51-J/-K/-L
buttons only. lens buttons only.
Page 43.) Page 43.)
AML41 INCANDESCENT DISPLAY INDICATORS ORDER GUIDE
AML41 C B A 2
Housing Type Incand.
Pushbutton Lens Bezel Lamp Terminal
Style: Style: Color Type Type
AML41 C AML41 J B A 2
Square
1 lamp ckt.
AML41 D
Square
2 lamp ckts.
AML41 F
Rectangular
1 lamp ckt.
AML41 G
Rectangular
2 lamp ckts.
Rectangular
1 lamp ckt.
AML41 K
Rectangular
2 lamp ckts.
AML41 L
Rectangular
3 lamp ckts.
Black No lamp
installed
B
6 V Lamp*
C
14 V Lamp*
E
28 V Lamp*
.110 × .020
(Solder or QuickConnect)
3
.025 × .025
(Printed
Circuit
or Push-On)
* Lamps will be installed per each lamp circuit specified in the Housing Type.
Examples:
AML41CBA2
Square (pushbutton style) indicator
housing with one lamp circuit; black bezel; .110 × .020 termination.
AML41JBA2
Rectangular (lens style) indicator housing with one lamp circuit; black bezel; .110
× .020 termination.
AML42C AML42S
(Use AML52-C/-A
pushbuttons only.
Page 44.)
AML43 neon display indicators are identical to AML32 power switches, except
button is furnished assembled (locked in
depressed position) and there is no provision for switching. Button is nonremovable. Other button colors are available.
Example:
AML43FBB40R
Rectangular device with black bezel; 125
volt red neon lamp .187 × .020 termination.
NOTE: Add L to neon indicator catalog
listing if legend is desired and submit Legend Sheet FO-63504.
AML42 LED DISPLAY INDICATORS ORDER GUIDE
LEDs are not replaceable.
AML42 S B C 2
Housing Bezel LED Color/ Terminal Type/
Type Color Voltage Diode Protection
AML42 C B Red 2 8
Square Black B V* .110 × .020 .110 × .020
1 LED C 5 V (Solder or Q.C.) w/diode to
D 10 V protect LED
AML42 S E 15 V 3
Compact F 24 V .025 × .025 9
1 LED Yellow Green (Printed Circuit .025 × .025
H V* R V* or Push-On) w/diode to
J 5 V S 5 V protect LED
K 10 V T 10 V
L 15 V W 15 V
M 24 V X 24 V
* See LED application data, page 59, for these
devices without current-limiting resistor.Example: AML42SBC2
Compact indicator with black bezel; 5 volt
red LED; .110 × .020 termination.
AML43 NEON DISPLAY INDICATORS ORDER GUIDE
AML43 F B B 4 OR
Housing Bezel Neon Lamp Terminal Button
Type** Color Color/Voltage Type Color
AML43F
Rect.
B
Black
Red
B 125 V
C 250 V
Clear
K 125 V
L 250 V
Green
M 125 V
P 250 V
4
.187 × .020
(solder
or Q.C.)
OR Red
OY Yellow
OG Green
OW White
OK Black
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Maual Switches AML45/59 Series
Solid State LED Annunciators
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 41
AML59 CAP ASSEMBLIES
The cap assembly consists of: black cap,
color filter(s), and optional film legend;
furnished unassembled. It snaps onto
housing, flush with the housing bezel.
Filters, assembled with their matte finish
facing the LED’s, efficiently diffuse the illumination. They are color-tinted to complement the red, yellow, and green LED’s.
NOTE: Cap assembly should not be subjected to the temperature and chemical
atmosphere associated with wave soldering. These parts should be installed after
soldering and cleanup.
Catalog listings for AML59 cap assemblies are derived from the ordering guide
below. The ordering guide for AML45 LED
housings is on page 39.
CUSTOM LEGENDS
A 2:1 drawing in black ink is required for
satisfactory reproduction of custom film
legends. As an alternative, you may submit an office copy of a page from a typographic supplier catalog such as Chartpak, Letraset, and Zipatone. MICRO
SWITCH can also furnish graphic legends from the ‘‘Henry Dreyfus Symbol
Source Book.’’ (Custom legends require
a one-time start-up charge.)
1 Viewing area inside cap:
X J 1.04 min.; Y J .272 min.
2 Customers ordering film legends from
commercial photographic or typesetting sources should specify that the
film be precision cut, per the following
dimensions, to insure proper retention
and alignment on the face of the annunciator: A J .007 max.; B J 1.1 ±
.010; C J .300 ± .003.
STANDARD LEGENDS
AML59 Legend Sheet (see page 42) provides ordering information for negative
and positive standard film legends in the
type style (14-point Helvetica condensed
bold) shown below. Use separate legend
sheet for each AML59 catalog listing and
attach it (them) to your purchase order.
AML59 ORDER GUIDE
AML59-R K 10 R
Filter ColorCap Cap Legend
Style Color Type Full Screen Split Screen
AML59-R
Full Screen
AML59-S
Split Screen
K
Black
10
No Legend
20
Negative
Film
Legend
21
Positive
Film
Legend
R
Red
Y
Yellow
G
Green
R
Red
Y
Yellow
G
Green
R
Red
Y
Yellow
G
Green
Examples:
AML59-RK10R
Full screen style, black cap, no legend,
and red filter.
AML59-SK20RY
Split screen style, black cap, negative film
legend, red and yellow color filters.
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML59 Series
Legend Sheet
42 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML51 Series
Buttons/Lens for Switches and Indicators
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 43
AML51 PUSHBUTTON ORDER GUIDE
For Incandescent or non-lighted display switches and pushbutton style indicators.
AML51-C 10 R —
For AML11, 21, 31 switches and AML41 indicators: Display Full Color or 2nd
Pushbutton Style Legend/Type 1st Color Split Color Split
AML51-C AML51-F AML51-G
AML51-A AML51-H AML51-Nu
AML51-B* AML51-E* AML51-M*
AML51-R*
For AML41D indicators only:
AML51-D
R
Red
Y
Yellow
G
Green
B
Blue
W
White
K***
Black
L***
Gray
A**
Amber
R
Red
Y
Yellow
G
Green
B
Blue
W
White
K***
Black
L***
Gray
A**
Amber
Transmitted Color
10 No legend
20 With legend
on cap.
Transmitted Color
(Clear cap and
color insert)
11 No legend
21 With legend
on insert
Dead Front
(Smoky gray cap
and color insert)
30 No legend
40 With legend
on insert
Projected Color
(White cap and
color insert)
50 No legend
60 With legend
on cap
*Available with transmitted color (10 or 20) only.
Example: AML51-C10R
Square full color button; with transmitted color,
no legend: red.
**Available with transmitted color and dead front only.
***Black and gray not recommended for lighted display.
uAML51-N buttons not available with Display/Legend Types
10 and 20.
Note: Dimensions include the .060 in bezel.
AML51 LENS ORDER GUIDE
For incandescent display AML41J, K, and L lens style indicators only.
AML51-J 10 R
Full Color
Display/Legend or 1st 2nd 3rd
Lens style Type Color Split Color Split Color Split
AML51-J
AML51-K
AML51-L
Transmitted Color R R R
10 No legend Red Red Red
20 With legend
Y Y Y
Transmitted Color Yellow Yellow Yellow
(Clear cap and
color insert) G G G
11 No legend Green Green Green
21 With legend
B B B
Dead Front Blue Blue Blue
(Smoky gray cap
and color insert) W W W
30 No legend White White White
40 With legend
A** A** A**
Projected Color Amber Amber Amber
(White cap and
color insert)
50 No legend
60 With legend
**Not available with projected color.
AML51 lens buttons provide added display area by snapping onto and covering
the bezel of AML41J, K, and L indicators.
They do not fit other indicators or switches.
Example: AML51-J10R
Rectangular lens type button; full color;
transmitted color, no lenged; red.
HOW TO ORDER BUTTON LEGENDS
When specifying legended buttons, submit a legend order sheet to cover each
listing. To insure proper legend orientation, AML housings (when viewed from
the panel front) should have the ‘‘MICRO
SWITCH’’ identification facing UP on
square devices and UP or to the LEFT on
rectangular.
Button legend order sheets are shown on
the following pages. Reproduce them on
your office copier.
Legend Sheet Form No.
AML51 Pushbuttons FO-63394
AML51 Lens buttons FO-63395
AML52 Pushbuttons FO-63504
AML53 Paddle switch covers FO-63567
AML55 Paddle switch covers FO-63565
AML54 Rockers FO-63566
AML56 Rockers FO-63564
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML51/52 Series
Buttons for Switches and Indicators
44 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
AML52 BUTTON ORDER GUIDE
For AML12, AML22 (w/o light pipe), AML32, AML42 LED display.
AML52-N 10 R
Button Display/Legend Button
Type Type Color
For LED Devices
AML52-C
AML52-A*
For AML32 Neon Devices
AML52-N
Transmitted Color
10
No Legend
20
With Legend
R
Red
Y
Yellow
G
Green
B
Blue
W
White
K
Black
A
Amber
L
Gray
Examples:
AML52-N10R
Rectangular full screen; for use on neon
power switch with transmitted color, no
legend; red button.
AML52-C10K
Square full screen; for use with LED device; transmitted color, no legend; black
button.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML52 Series
Pushbutton Legend Sheet
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 45
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML51 Series
Pushbutton Legend Sheet
46 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML51 Series
Lens Legend Sheet
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 47
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML53/55 Series
Covers for Paddle Switches
48 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
Colored covers simply snap into the top
of paddle switch housings.
COLOR DISPLAY OPTIONS
Transmitted color — Color is displayed
whether lamp is On or Off. Choice of
1-piece covers (types 10 or 20) or covers
with clear cap and colored translucent insert (types 11 or 12).
Dead front hidden color/hidden legend —
Cover appears black with lamp Off. Legend and color appear when illuminated
(types 30 or 40).
Projected color — Translucent white cover with transparent colored insert (types
50 or 60). White cover appears colored
when illuminated.
AML53 PADDLE SWITCH COVER ORDER GUIDE
For AML13, AML23, and AML33 incandescent or non-lighted display.
AML53-T 10 R G
Cover Color
Paddle 1⁄2 cover, Other side of
Switch Display/Legend or one side of two-piece cover
Cover Type Type two-piece cover (see note)
AML53-E
1⁄2 Cover
AML53-T
Two-Piece Cover
Transmitted Color R
Red
Y
Yellow
G
Green
B
Blue
W
White
K*
Black
L*
Gray
A**
Amber
R
Red
Y
Yellow
G
Green
B
Blue
W
White
K*
Black
L*
Gray
A**
Amber
10 No legend
20 With legend on
cap
Transmitted Color
(Clear cap and
color insert)
11 No legend
21 With legend on
insert
Dead Front
(Smoky gray cap
and color insert)
30 No legend
40 With legend on
insert
Projected Color
(White cap and
color insert)
50 No legend
60 With legend on
cap
Note: Only one color code letter is necessary when ordering 1⁄2 covers.
Example: AML53-T10RG
Two-piece cover; with transmitted color,
no legend; red and green.
*Not for lighted display.
**Not available with projected color.
AML55 PADDLE SWITCH COVER ORDER GUIDE
For AML35 neon display.
AML55-N 10 R Y
Paddle Switch Display/Legend Lens Cover
Cover Type Type Color Color
AML55-N
Full Neon Cover,
with colored lens
Transmitted Color
10
No Legend
20
With Legend
T
Clear
R
Red
R
Red
Y
Yellow
G
Green
B
Blue
W
White
K
Black
L
Gray
A
Amber
AML55-N covers have a colored lenticular
lens window which extends over the neon
lamp.
Example: AML55-N10RY
Full neon paddle switch cover; with transmitted color, no legend; red lens and yellow cover.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML55 Series
Covers for Paddle Switches
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 49
HOW TO ORDER LEGENDS
FOR PADDLE SWITCH COVERS
When specifying legended paddle switch
covers, submit a legend order sheet to
cover each catalog listing. These forms
identify the maximum number of lines per
area and the maximum characters per
line, based on the type size you request.
To insure proper legend orientation, paddle switch housings (when viewed from
the panel front) should have the ‘‘MICRO
SWITCH’’ identification facing UP or to
the LEFT.
Legend order sheets for covers are
shown on the following pages. Reproduce them on your office copier or request a pad of them from the 800 number.:
Legend Sheet Form No.
AML53 Covers FO-63567
AML55 Covers FO-63565
AML55 PADDLE SWITCH COVER ORDER GUIDE
For AML15 and AML25 LED display. See notes below
AML55-T 10 Y R
Cover Color – See notes below
Paddle 1/2-cover,
Switch Display/Legend or LED side of Other side of
Cover Type Type two-piece covers* two piece covers
AML55-E
1/2 Cover
(For one LED)*
AML55-T
Two-Piece Cover
(For one LED)
AML55-H
Two-Piece Cover
(For two LED’s)
Transmitted Color
10 No Legend
20 With Legend
R R
Red Red
Y
Yellow
G
Green
B
Blue
W
White
K
Black
L
Gray
Y
Yellow
G
Green
B
Blue
W
White
K
Black
L
Gray
AML55-E, -T, and -H covers have an open
window which allows LED’s to be flush
with the cover surface.
* Notes:
1 Only one color code letter is necessary
for AML55-E 1/2 covers.
2 To order a 1/2-cover without the LED
‘‘window,’’ specify an AML53-E listing
from the previous page.
Example: AML55-T10YR
Two-piece cover; with LED window in one
side, transmitted color, no legend; yellow
(LED side) and red (non-LED side).
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML53 Series
Paddle Operator Legend Sheet
50 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML55 Series
Paddle Legend Sheet
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 51
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML54/56 Series
Rocker Switch Operators
52 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
COLOR DISPLAY OPTIONS
Rocker operators are assembled to the
switches by simply snapping them into
recesses in the switch operator sockets.
Transmitted color — Color is displayed
whether lamp is On or Off. Choice of 1piece rockers (types 10 or 20) or rockers
with clear cap and colored translucent insert (types 11 or 12).
Dead front hidden color/hidden legend —
Rocker appears black with lamp Off. Legend and color appear when illuminated
(types 30 or 40).
Projected color — Translucent white
rocker with transparent colored insert
(types 50 or 60). White rocker appears
colored when illuminated.
AML54 ROCKER OPERATOR ORDER GUIDE
For AML14, AML24, AML34 incandescent or non-lighted display.
AML54-F 10 R
Rocker Color – See Note Below
Rocker
Operator Type
Display/Legend
Type
Full rocker,
1/2 rocker,
or one side of
two-piece rockers
Other side
of two-piece
rockers
AML54-F
Full Rocker
AML54-E
1/2 Rocker
AML54-T
Two-Piece Rocker
Transmitted Color
10 No legend
20 With legend on
cap
Transmitted Color
(Clear cap and
color insert) †
11 No legend
21 With legend on
insert
Dead Front †
(Smoky gray cap
and color insert)
30 No legend
40 With legend on
insert
Projected Color †
(White cap and
color insert)
50 No legend
60 With legend on
cap
R
Red
Y
Yellow
G
Green
B
Blue
W
White
K*
Black
L*
Gray
A**
Amber
R
Red
Y
Yellow
G
Green
B
Blue
W
White
K*
Black
L*
Gray
A**
Amber
*Not for lighted display.
**Not available with projected color or dead front.
†Not available for use with AML34 power switches.
Example: AML54-F10R
Full rocker; with transmitted color, no legend; red.
NOTE: AML54-F10 and AML54-F20 are
one-piece, one-color full rockers. Thus
only one color code letter is necessary
when ordering. Include a two letter
code for all other AML54-E (and AML54T) catalog listings.
AML56 ROCKER OPERATOR ORDER GUIDE
For AML36 neon display.
AML56-N 10 R Y
Rocker Display/Legend Lens Rocker
Operator Type Type Color Color
AML56-N Transmitted Color T R
10 Clear Red
No Legend R Y
Red Yellow
20 Y G
With Legend Yellow Green
B
Full Rocker
with
Colored Lens
Blue
W
White
K
Black
AML56-N rockers have a colored lenticular lens window which extends over the
neon lamp.
Example: AML56-N10RY
Full rocker; with transmitted color, no legend; yellow rocker and red lens.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML56 Series
Rocker Switch Operators
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 53
HOW TO ORDER ROCKER LEGENDS
When specifying legended rockers, submit a legend order sheet to cover each
catalog listing. These forms identify the
maximum number of lines per area and
the maximum characters per line, based
on the type size you request. To insure
proper legend orientation, rocker switch
housings (when viewed from the panel
front) should have the ‘‘MICRO SWITCH’’
identification facing UP or to the LEFT.
Rocker legend order sheets are shown on
the following pages. Reproduce them on
your office copier.
Legend Sheet Form No.
AML54 Rockers FO-63566
AML56 Rockers FO-63564
AML56 ORDER GUIDE
For AML16 and AML26 LED display.
AML56-T 10 R B
Rocker Color – See Notes Below
1/2-rocker
Rocker Display/Legend or LED side of Other side of
Operator Type Type two-piece rockers two piece rockers
AML56-E
1/2-Rocker*
(For one LED)
AML56-T
Two-Piece Rocker
(For one LED)
AML56-H
Two-Piece Rocker
(For two LED’s)
Transmitted Color
10 No Legend
20 With Legend
R R
Red Red
Y
Yellow
G
Green
B
Blue
W
White
K
Black
L
Gray
Y
Yellow
G
Green
B
Blue
W
White
K
Black
L
Gray
Example: AML56-T10RB
Two-piece rocker; with LED window in
one side, transmitted color, no legend;
red (LED side) and blue (non-LED side).
* Notes:
1 Only one color code letter is necessary
for AML56-E 1/2-rockers. AML56-E, -T,
and -H rockers have an open window
which allows LEDs to be flush with the
rocker surface.
2 To order a 1/2-rocker without the LED
‘‘window,’’ specify an AML54-E listing
from the previous page.
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML54 Series
Rocker Legend Sheet
54 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML56 Series
Rocker Legend Sheet
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 55
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML61 Series
Mounting Hardware
56 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
FOR STRIP AND MATRIX MOUNT ASSEMBLIES FEATURES
1 Enables subpanel mounting of
devices in factory assembled metal
cans which are welded together in
strips or matrices. Assures accurate
alignment and enables pre-wiring.
1 L-shaped mounting brackets conform
to various panel thicknesses, using
spacers.
1 Simplifies panel fabrication, since
only one large cutout is required.
1 Facilitates printed circuit board
mounting. Operating force is
transmitted to mounting hardware,
rather than P.C. board.
1 For custom matrices contact the
MICRO SWITCH Application Center.
1 Mounting dimensions page 65.AML61 MOUNTING HARDWARE ORDER GUIDE
(For standard strip mount assemblies)
AML61 B A 5 A
Mounting Bracket Number Mounting Bracket
Type Orientation of Cans Location
Square cans:
AML61 B
(Plain finish)
AML61 J
(Black finish)
A
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9*
10*
11*
12*
*A, C, D & E
orientation only.Rect. cans: B
AML61 E
(Plain finish)
AML61 K C D
(Black finish)
A G
B K
C L
D P
E T
F
U
NO
BRACKETS
1To order one rectangular can with mounting brackets on short sides, specify AML61EB1 or AML61KB1 .
Example: AML61EC5A
Five rectangular cans, plain finish (unpainted), long sides abutting; type A
mounting brackets on long sides, located
flush with switch or indicator bezel. (Type
T bracket brings top of annunciator bezel
flush with top of .160 in./4,1 mm panel.)
This strip has Type F brackets for P.C.
board mounting.
NON-STANDARD ASSEMBLIES
Use the order form on the following page
to specify non-standard AML61 strip or
matrix assemblies. You may reproduce it
on your office copier, or order pads from
the 800 number. Request FO-63558.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML71/75 Series
Barriers/Panel Seal Accessories
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 57
AML71 BARRIERS
Drawing shows two switches, slot mounted. From left to right: one center barrier, a
second switch, plus another end barrier
to complete the arrangement.
When mounting an individual unit, an end
barrier is attached to each side of the
housing. The center barrier is used in a
slot mount array.
FEATURES
1 Barriers separate individually
mounted switches and indicators —
help prevent inadvertent actuation of
two pushbutton switches with a single
push.
1 Front of panel mounting simplifies
installation.
AML71 BARRIER ORDER GUIDE (See notes)
Barriers shown in order guide are black.
Barrier Length Type Catalog Listing
Short Center AML71SCB
(For use with square devices and short side
of rectangular devices.) End AML71SEB
Long Center AML71LCB
(For use with long side of rectangular
devices.) End AML71LEB
Notes:
Not for use with AML61 mounting hardware or any full guard bezel products.
Not for use with AML41J, K, or L lens type indicators; or AML45 annunciators.
AML75 PANEL SEAL FEATURES
1 AML75 panel seals fit pushbutton
switches and indicators.
1 Provides protection from
contamination from accidental
beverage spills, dust, and dirt.
1 Easy to install, without tools
1 No effect on display color, light
intensity, or legend quality.
1 Replace seal or change lamps without
removing switch from panel.
1 For .19-inch standard height square or
rectangular pushbuttons.
1 Mounting dimensions page 66.
The design complements AML’s functional appearance, creating a pleasing
framed effect around the button. It consists of a matte black plastic base which
press-fits between the panel and switch
bezel, and a transparent flexible seal
which snaps into the base. PK 8521, shipped with each order, provides installation
instructions.
Button colors and legends can be viewed
without distortion whether lighted or unlighted. Seals can be conveniently replaced or removed for relamping, without
removing the switch from panel.
Operating temperature range is 32° to
131°F (0° to 55°C).
AML75 PANEL SEAL ORDER GUIDE
For Use With:
Square .19N Rectangular .19N
Description high pushbuttons high pushbuttons Rockers
Base & Seal AML75ABC AML75BBC AML75RBC
Base Only AML75ABN AML75BBN —
Seal Only AML75ANC AML75BNC —
Notes:
Multiple units should not be mounted in a
single slot, since this would create an unsealed space between each unit. AML75
seals are not for use with barriers, full
guard bezels, AML61 mounting hardware, AML45 annunciators, or AML41J, K,
or L lens type indicators.
MATERIAL
Base: Polypropylene
Cap: Polyvinyl Chloride
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML76/78 Series
Switch Guard/Panel Plugs, Dummy Housings
58 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
FEATURES
1 Button cannot be operated when
switch guard cover is closed,
preventing accidental operation
1 Wire lock-down feature further
prevents unintentional actuation of the
switch.
1 Lamps can be replaced with the
switch guard attached, without
special tools, saving maintenance
time
1 Can be used with alternate or
momentary action square or
rectangular .19 inch standard height
AML buttons
1 Shock resistant construction, for long,
maintenance-free life
AML76 switch guard protects square
and rectangular .19-inch standard
height pushbuttons from inadvertent
actuation. It is for use with standard bezel type switches only.
See page 66 for mounting dimensions.
The switch guard cover is clear, polycarbonate thermoplastic through which the
button is easily visible. The word ‘‘lift’’ is
molded onto the top front edge of the
guard. The bracket is bright-finished
stainless steel.
The switch guard may be assembled to
the AML pushbutton before the switch is
installed in a panel. Or, the guard can be
assembled to a pushbutton already
mounted in a panel, providing the wiring
is sufficiently slack to raise the switch bezel above the panel; and if there is sufficient clearance with adjacent units. PK
8522 contains installation instructions
and is shipped with each order.
AML switch guards may be mounted in
horizontal or vertical matrices. A wire
lock-down feature, using .020-inch diameter locking wire, may be used as an additional protection.
SWITCH GUARD ORDER GUIDE
Guard Type* Catalog Listing
Square AML76C10T01P
Rectangular AML76F10T01P
* The word ‘‘LIFT’’ is molded into the cover. If other
languages are desired contact the 800 number.
Note: Switch guard is not designed for use with
AML61 mounting hardware, AML71 barriers, or full
guard bezel switches.
CONNECTOR BLOCK
AML79CC
This connector block can be used with
square 1 and 2 pole AML21 switches with
.110 × .020 terminals to enable plug-in
wiring.
AML78 PANEL PLUGS
Plastic panel plugs (shown above) enable the user to provide for future needs
by punching extra panel holes. Finished
in matte black, they are the same height
as the standard AML bezel when snapped in place from the panel front.
Panel plugs are only for use in individual
holes or with AML61 mounting hardware
in multi-station strips. (Use dummy housings in strip cutouts without AML61
mounting hardware.)
PANEL PLUG ORDER GUIDE
Plug Type Catalog Listing
Square AML78CB
Rectangular AML78FB
AML78 DUMMY HOUSINGS
Dummy housings can be used to provide
for expansion needs in strip cutouts without AML61 mounting hardware. They
have mounting clips, but there is no provision for switching or illumination.
DUMMY HOUSING ORDER GUIDE
Catalog
Dummy Housing Type* Listing
Square AML78C100
(Pushbutton style)
Rectangular AML78F100
(Pushbutton style)
Rectangular AML78J100
(Lens indicator style)
* Order AML51 Buttons/lenses for use with dummy
housings.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches AML91 Series
Lamps, Soldering Recommendations, Receptacles
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 59
AML91 LAMP ORDER GUIDE
Lamp Industry Catalog
Type Lamp No. Voltage Listing
86 6.3 AML91LA86Incandescent
T-1-3/4 73 14.0 AML91LA73
wedge base 85 28.0 AML91LA85
LAMP DATA
The following data was compiled from
manufacturer’s specifications, for reference only.
INCANDESCENT LAMPS
Industry Life
Lamp No. Volts Amps Watts MSCP A/C Volts
86 6.3 .200 1.25 .49 20,000 hours
5.5 .185 1.12 .246 106,200 hours
5.0 .177 .89 .185 290,000 hours
73 14.0 .080 1.12 .30 15,000 hours
12.0 .077 1.00 .23 36,450 hours
85 28.0 .04 1.12 .30 7,000 hours
24.0 .037 .89 .177 41,860 hours
Neon Lamps
25,000 hours (half life)
INTEGRAL LEDs
Peak Inverse Voltage
w/o Diode w/Diode
LEDs Furnished
Permanently
Installed in
These Products Vf If VPD Protection Protection
AML12, 15, 16, 2.4 V 20 mA .7 V 5 V 34 V
22, 25, 26, 42
AML45 2.4 V 20 mA .7 V 4 V 33 V
100,000 hours (half life).
AML92 SERIES LEDs
For use with these AML switches and indicators equipped with lamp sockets:
Pushbutton switches: AML11 (Square
Only)*, AML21 (rectangular and square),
and AML31.
Paddle switches: AML31/23/33
Rocker switches: AML14/24/34
Indicators: AML41
* Rectangular solid state with one or two lamp circuits
cannot be used with LED catalog listings ending in
‘‘L’’.
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
VF Fwd. Voltage (typ.)
Type Yellow Green Red White
IF Fwd.
Current
VR Rev.
Voltage
Quad Chip 8.6 8.6 7.8 — 15 mA 16 V
Six Chip 4 V 4 V 4 V 4 V 50 mA 5.6 V
TEMPERATURE RANGE
(Quad Chip or Six Chip)
Operating: –20 to 60°C (–4 to 140°F)
Storage: –30 to 100°C (–22 to 212°F)
AML92 ORDER GUIDE
LED Color Quad Chip Six Chip
Red AML92ERY AML92ERL
Green AML92EGY AML92EGL
Yellow AML92EYY AML92EYL
White — AML92EWL*
* For use with white or yellow buttons.
SOLDERING RECOMMENDATIONS
All terminals are solder plated. Proper soldering and cleaning procedures must be
followed to maintain the reliability of AML
products during installation. An instruction sheet which outlines these procedures is included with AML shipments.
You may also obtain a copy from your
MICRO SWITCH Sales Office. Request
PK 8518.
As a general guide, the following information may be used:
Use a 280°C (538°F) solder iron tip, up to
6 seconds duration, with a 60-40 rosin
core solder. This allows the terminal to
heat quickly on the exterior of the housing
only, and greatly reduces the chance of
flux migrating inside the housing.
LED APPLICATION INFORMATION
For those devices without internal current
limiting resistors, suitable external control
of the LED current must be provided. It is
recommended that a minimum of 5 VDC
open circuit voltage with an appropriate
series resistance be used to drive LED devices. This minimizes the effect of temperature (current variation) on forward voltage of the LED.
Resistor values can be determined by
supply voltage or current for LED:
RS J
E – Vf
If WHERE: RS J Series Resistance
E J Supply Voltage
Vf J Forward Voltage of LED
If J Circuit Current
If a diode is added in series for reverse polarity protection then:
RS J
E – Vf – VPD
If WHERE: VPD Forward Voltage of
Protection Diode
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML Series
Miniature Manual Line
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 67
FEATURES
1 Breadth of line offers complete
selection of pushbuttons (including
encoding options), rockers, paddles
and indicators to accommodate
different functions and promote
operator efficiency.
1 Printed wiring board (PWB) or panel
mounted switches, plus multi-unit
strip mounting, and single level
termination for cost-effective
installation.
1 Tactile feedback imparts a definite feel
of switching action.
1 Coordinated appearance enhances
panel harmony.
1 Illumination by long-life LED’s and
incandescent lamps—for lighted
display versatility.
1 Solid state, electronic control and
power duty switching—for electrical
versatility.
1 Temperature range: –18° to 65°C (0°
to 149°F).
DESIGN FREEDOM
Rocker and paddle switches have been
added to the MICRO SWITCH MML Miniature Manual Line. They complement AML
pushbuttons and indicators, providing
you flexibility and design freedom to answer all your miniature manual control requirements. You can choose the actuator
option that matches the switch function
and natural habit pattern reflex of the operator. You no longer need to compromise quality, appearance, or human factors considerations, because of size
constraints.
The MML pushbutton and indicator offering has also been expanded to include
new square forms which are small
enough to fit in the tightest places.
MOUNTING FLEXIBILITY
Printed wiring board (PWB) mounted
switches can be arranged in individual
panel openings, multi-unit strips or matrices, in a common panel cutout. Optional support brackets provide added rigidity
for stand-alone PWB mounted devices.
Units with bezels and mounting clips can
be snap-in mounted from the panel front.
Single level PWB or solder/quick-connect
termination throughout makes wiring faster, easier, and more economical. Housings are designed to accommodate
washing, before and after wave soldering, to help prevent contamination during
printed wiring board installation.
LIGHTED DISPLAY OPTIONS
Pushbuttons and indicators can be fullface illuminated by LED’s or incandescent lamps for high visibility of colors and
legends. Inherently rugged, long-life
LED’s reduce service and maintenance
costs. Also, their low drive and inrush current (30 mA or less) reduces costs of drive
circuitry.
Rockers can be furnished with colored
lenses for illumination by LED’s or incandescent lamps.
CONTROL VERSATILITY
Solid state pushbutton switches with Hall
effect integrated circuits interface directly
with microprocessors and other logic level devices. Time-proven for billions of cycles, Hall effect IC’s provide the ultimate
in reliability.
Electronic control pushbutton, rocker,
and paddle switches, with gold or silver
contacts, handle up to 1 amp; power duty
switches, up to 6 amps.
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML Series
Miniature Manual Line
68 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
MML ENHANCES PANEL HARMONY
The attractive clean line design of the total
MML offering is coordinated to work in
harmony and enhance the visual qualities
of your product. MML will help make a
good first impression with your customers by blending with other panel components. And also work hard over the long
run to maintain operator satisfaction.
HOW TO ORDER
To specify MML catalog listings, refer to
the order guides. They are based on a
modular cataloging system which gives
you the flexibility to choose the combination of feature options that best answers
the requirements of your application.
ORDER GUIDES
Solid State Switches
MML11 Pushbutton Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Electronic Control Switches
MML21 Pushbutton Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
MML23 Paddle Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
MML24 Rocker Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Power Duty Switches
MML31 Pushbutton Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Indicators
MML41 Indicators/LED or Incandescent Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
MML46 Indicators/LED or Incandescent Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
MML44 Indicators/LED Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Lenses and Buttons
MML51 Lenses/Incandescent or Non-lighted Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
MML52 Lenses/LED or Neon Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Mounting Hardware
MML61 Strip Mounting Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
MML72/73 Bezels and Mounting Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
MML74 PWB Mount Support Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
LED’s, Lamps, Receptacles
MML92/93 LED’s/Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87/90
MML91/93 Incandescent Lamps/Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89/90
MML medical application. Intranvaneous fluid flow controller automatically dispenses fluids for medications, therapy, and nutrition.
MML communications application. Mobile radio control keeps businesses in touch with employees on the road.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML Series
Miniature Manual Line
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 69
MML CHARACTERISTICS
MML 10 Series MML 20 Series MML 30 Series MML 40 Series
Mechanical Lifetime* N/A
Pushbuttons–Momentary 1,000,000 250,000 100,000 --Pushbuttons–Alternate 100,000 100,000 100,000 --Rockers 100,000 250,000 100,000 --Paddles 100,000 250,000 100,000 --Electrical Lifetime*** N/A
Pushbuttons–Momentary 1,000,000 25,000 25,000 --Pushbuttons–Alternate 100,000 25,000 25,000 --Rockers 100,000 25,000 25,000 --Paddles 100,000 25,000 25,000 --Agency Ratings
UL File E53576 File E12252 File E12252 File E58932
CSA File L R4442 File LR4442 File LR4442 File LR4442
*95% Survival
**Lifetime at Full Rated Load
MML ELECTRICAL DATA
MML10 SERIES
Electrical Characteristics Integrated Circuit Function 5-24 VDC Sinking
Supply Current (Max.) 7 mA (Released)
8 mA (Operated no load)
Output Voltage (Operated) 0.3 Volt (Sinking 10 mA)
Output Leakage Current 5.0 µA
Max. (Released)
Switching Time Max.
Rise 10% to 90% 1.5 µ sec (Sinking 10 mA)
Fall 90% to 10% 0.5 µ sec (Sinking 10 mA)
Rated Output Current 10 mA Sinking
Absolute Maximum
Ratings
Supply Voltage (Vs) –28 to +28 VDC
Voltage Externally Applied –0.5 Volt min.
to Output +28 Volts max.
(Off condition)
Loads to Output 20 mA (Sinking)
Storage Temperature –40° to +85°C
(–40° to +185°F)
Operating Temperature –18° to +65°C
(0° to +149°F)
and supply voltage of 4.5
to 5.5 VDC
As with all solid state components, performance can be expected to deteriorate as rating limits are approached;
however, they will not be damaged unless the limits are exceeded.
MML20 SERIES
Electrical Rating
(silver contacts)
Standard buttons
Up to 1 amp, 125 VAC
1 piece plunger/lens cap buttons:
Black—Up to 1 amp, 125 VAC
All others—Up to 0.5 amp, 125 VAC
Electrical Rating
Gold Contacts
All button styles:
Up to 0.25 amp, 30 VDC
UL rating—0.10 amp, 30 VDC
One pole Form C
MML30 SERIES
MML31:
Electrical Rating
Silver Contacts
6A @ 125 VAC, 250 VAC; 2A @ 30 VDC;
1A @ 125 VDC ‘‘L’’; 1/10 hp @ 125 VAC
Contact Arrangement 1 or 2 poles Form X
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML Series
Miniature Manual Line
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 91
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
PANEL CUTOUTS FOR PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES AND INDICATORS/RECTANGULAR TYPE
INDIVIDUAL SNAP-IN PANEL MOUNT
1,27 — 2,39
.050 — .094
Panel Thickness
PANEL PUNCH FOR MML SERIES
A panel punch is manufactured by Greenlee-Textron Tool Co., Rockford, IL
(815-926-3011).
INDIVIDUAL PRINTED WIRING BOARD (PWB) MOUNT
Pushbutton Plunger Thru Panel Housing Thru Panel Indicator Lens Thru Panel
MULTI-UNIT PRINTED WIRING BOARD (PWB) MOUNT
Horizontal Mount
Establish tooling holes on X coordinate and use these holes to establish
relationship between PWB and Panel
Terminals x
0,20 0,76
.008 .030
Recommended hole size in PWB 1,17
.046
Switches must be fixtured to insure proper panel cutout alignment
N = Number of switches
X = N-1 x +
15,24 15,11
.600 .595
Y =
10,16
.400
Example: N = 5 Switches
X = 5-1 x +15,24 15,11
.600 .595
X = 76,07
2.995
Matrix Mount Vertical Mount
N = Number of Switches
NX = Number of Rows
NY = Number of Columns
N = NX–1 x +
15,24 15,11
.600 .595
Y = NY x
10,16
.400
N = Number of Switches
Y = N x 10,16
.400
X = 15,11
.595
Example: N = 4
Y = 4 x 10,16
.400
Y = 40,64
1,600
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML Series
Miniature Manual Line
92 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
PANEL CUTOUTS FOR PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES AND INDICATORS/SQUARE TYPE
Individual Snap-in
Panel Mount Individual Printed Wiring Board PWB Mount
Pushbutton Plunger Thru Panel Housing Thru Panel Indicator Lens Thru Panel
See page 91 for panel punch manufacturer.
MULTI-UNIT PRINTED WIRING BOARD (PWB) MOUNT
Horizontal Mounting
Establish tooling holes on X coordinate and use these holes to establish
relationship between PWB and Panel
Terminals x
0,20 0,76
.008 .030
Recommended hole size in PWB 1,17
.046
Switches must be fixtured to insure proper panel cutout alignment
Formula:
N = Number of switches
X = N x
10,16
.400
Y =
10,16
.400
Example: N = 5 Switches
X = 5 x 10,16
.400
X = 50,80
2.00
Matrix Mounting Vertical Mounting
N = Number of Switches
NX = Number of Rows
NY = Number of Columns
Formula: X = N x10,16
.400
Y = N x 10,16
.400
N = Number of Switches
Formula: Y = N x 10,16
.400
X = 10,16
.400
Example: N = 4
Y = 4 x 10,16
.400
Y = 40,64
1.600
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML Series
Miniature Manual Line
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 93
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD MOUNT PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES/RECTANGULAR TYPE
MML11 Switches PWB Pin Locations
PWB Receptacle Installed (LED or Incandescent Lamp)
MML21 Switches PWB Pin Locations
PWB Receptacle Installed (LED or Incandescent Lamp)
Notes:
Micro Switch Identification This Side
2 – Linear measure mm/IN. or mm
IN.
MML31 Switches
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML Series
Miniature Manual Line
94 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD MOUNT INDICATORS/RECTANGULAR TYPE
MML41 Indicators
PWB Receptacle Installed (LED or Incandescent Lamp)
Notes:
Micro Switch Identification This Side
2 – Linear measure mm/IN. or mm
IN.
MML44 Indicators
MML46 Indicators
PWB Receptacle Installed (LED or Incandescent Lamp)
PWB Pad Location For Receptacle (LED or Incandescent Lamp)
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML Series
Miniature Manual Line
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 95
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
PANEL MOUNT PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES/RECTANUGLAR TYPE
MML21 Switches
Solder Receptacle Installed (LED or Incandescent Lamp)
Notes:
Micro Switch Identification This Side
2 – Linear measure mm/IN. or mm
IN.
Rotate 45° counter clockwise for removal
from switch or indicator
MML31 Switches Terminal Detail
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML Series
Miniature Manual Line
96 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
PANEL MOUNT INDICATORS/RECTANGULAR TYPE
MML41 Indicators
Solder Receptacle Installed (LED or Incandescent Lamp)
MML43 Indicators Terminal Detail
Notes:
Micro Switch Identification This Side
2 – Linear measure mm/IN. or mm
IN.
MML44 Indicators
MML46 Indicators
Solder Receptacle Installed (LED or Incandescent Lamp)
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML Series
Miniature Manual Line
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 97
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD MOUNT PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES AND INDICATORS/SQUARE TYPE
MML21 Switches
PWB Receptacle Installed (LED or Incandescent Lamp)
MML46 Indicators
PWB Receptacle Installed (LED or Incandescent Lamp)
NOTES
MICRO SWITCH IDENTIFICATION THIS SIDE
MML41: 2,0/.08
MML46: 1,0/.04
3–LINEAR MEASURE mm/IN OR mm
IN
PANEL MOUNT PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES/SQUARE TYPE
MML21 Switches Termination Detail
NOTE:
To install LED or lamp, use MML93L receptacle shown on page 90.
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML Series
Miniature Manual Line
98 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
LENSES
Rectangular
Pushbutton Lens
Rectangular
Indicator Lens
Square
Pushbutton Lens
Square
Indicator Lens
PWB SUPPORT BRACKETS
Rectangular Square
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML Series
Miniature Manual Line
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 99
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
PANEL CUTOUTS FOR PWB MOUNT PADDLE AND ROCKER SWITCHES
Actuator Housing Umbrella Rocker 2-Pole 2-Pole
Thru Panel Thru Panel Thru Panel MML33, 34 Actuator MML33, 34
Thru Panel Housing Thru Panel
See page 91 for panel punch manufacturer.
PRINTED WIRING BOARD MOUNT PADDLE AND ROCKER SWITCHES
MML23 Paddle Switches
See MML24 drawing below for PWB receptacle dimensions
MML24 Rocker Switches
With PWB Receptacle Installed (LED or Incandescent Lamp)
MML24 Rocker (Umbrella Type) Switches
Notes:
Micro Switch Identification This Side
2 – Linear measure mm/IN. or mm
IN.
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML Series
Miniature Manual Line
100 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
PANEL MOUNT PADDLE AND ROCKER SWITCHES
MML23 Paddle Switches
Notes:
Micro Switch Identification This Side
2 – Linear measure mm/IN. or mm
IN.
MML24 Rocker Switches
NOTE:
To install LED or lamp, use MML93R receptacle shown on page 89.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML Series
Miniature Manual Line
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 101
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
HORIZONTAL MATRIX MOUNT/RECTANGULAR TYPE
Printed Wiring Board
Panel Mounting Detail Mounting Detail
Recommended Panel Cutout
10 127,00/5.000 124,56/4.904 10 188,14/7.407 180,64/7.112
9 114,30/4.500 111,86/4.404 9 170,36/6.707 162,86/6.412
8 101,60/4.000 99,16/3.904 8 152,58/6.007 145,08/5.712
7 88,90/3.500 86,46/3.404 7 134,80/5.307 127,30/5.012
6 76,20/3.000 73,76/2.904 6 117,02/4.607 109,52/4.312
5 63,50/2.500 61,06/2.404 5 99,24/3.907 91,74/3.612
4 50,80/2.000 48,36/1.904 4 81,46/3.207 73,96/2.912
3 38,10/1.500 35,66/1.404 3 63,68/2.507 56,18/2.212
2 25,40/1.000 22,96/ .904 2 45,90/1.807 38.40/1.512
1 12,45/ 0.49 10,26/0.404 N/A N/A N/A
NO. OF NO. OF
STRIPS W X STATIONS Y Z
Notes:
1 – Linear measure mm/IN. or mm
IN.
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML Series
Miniature Manual Line
102 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
VERTICAL MATRIX MOUNT/RECTANGULAR TYPE
Printed Wiring Board
Panel Mounting Detail Mounting Detail
Recommended Panel Cutout
RECOMMENDED DIMENSIONS
10 177,80/7.000 175,26/6.900 10 137,34/5.407 129,69/5.106
9 160,02/6.300 157,48/6.200 9 124,64/4.907 116,99/4.606
8 142,24/5.600 139,70/5.500 8 111,94/4.407 104,29/4.106
7 124,46/4.900 121,92/4.800 7 99,24/3.907 91,59/3.606
6 106,68/4.200 104,14/4.100 6 86,54/3.407 78,80/3.106
5 88,90/3.500 86,36/3.400 5 73,84/2.907 66,19/2.606
4 71,12/2.800 68,58/2.700 4 61,14/2.407 53,49/2.106
3 53,34/2.100 50,80/2.000 3 48,44/1.907 40,79/1.606
2 35,56/1.400 33,02/1.300 2 35,74/1.407 28,09/1.106
1 17,78/ .700 15,24/ .600 1 23,04/ .907 15,39/ .606
NO. OF NO. OF
STRIPS W X STATIONS Y Z
Notes:
1 – Linear measure mm/IN. or mm
IN.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML Series
Miniature Manual Line
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 103
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
MATRIX MOUNT/SQUARE TYPE
Printed Wiring Board
Panel Mounting Detail Mounting Detail
RECOMMENDED DIMENSIONS
10 127,00/5.000 124,56/4.904 10 137,16/5.400 129,84/5.112
9 114,30/4.500 111,86/4.404 9 124,46/4.900 117,14/4.612
8 101,60/4.000 99,16/3.904 8 111,76/4.400 104,44/4.112
7 88,90/3.500 86,46/3.404 7 99,06/3.900 91,74/3.612
6 76,20/3.000 73,76/2.904 6 86,36/3.400 79,04/3.112
5 63,50/2.500 61,06/2.404 5 73,66/2.900 66,34/2.612
4 50,80/2.000 48,36/1.904 4 60,96/2.400 53,64/2.112
3 38,10/1.500 35,66/1.404 3 48,26/1.900 40,94/1.612
2 25,40/1.000 22,96/ .904 2 35,56/1.400 28,24/1.112
1 12,70/ .500 10,26/ .404 1 22,86/ .900 15,54/ .612
NO. OF NO. OF
STRIPS W X STATIONS Y Z
Notes:
1 – Linear measure mm/IN. or mm
IN.
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML11 Series
Solid State Pushbutton
70 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
LED, INCANDESCENT, OR NON-LIGHTED DISPLAY
PWB Mount Panel Mount
FEATURES
1 Hall effect reliability
1 Provides low voltage signals that
interface with nearly all DC logic
1 Accepts one LED or incandescent
lamp
1 Printed wiring board or snap-in panel
mounting
1 UL recognized, CSA certified
1 Bezels and mounting clips, LEDs and
legended lenses can be furnished
installed or ordered separately
Example: MML11KA3AAK
Solid state pushbutton housing (black),
no bezel; PWB terminals; momentary action; 5 VDC, current sinking output, black
plunger.
Example: MML11KK3AAKRSDR
As above, except furnished with black bezel; mounting clips (long sides); red LED,
and red lens installed.
MML11 ORDER GUIDE
Catalog listing codes for switch,
less assembled display options
MML11K A 3 AA
Housing Type
(Rectangular) Mounting Terminals Circuitry/Action
MML11K
Black housing
A No bezel (PWB
mounting)
K Black bezel, mtg.
clip/long sides
3 Printed wiring board AA 5-24 VDC sinking
mom. action
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML11 Series
Solid State Pushbutton Switches
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 71
Electrical Data Page 69
Strip and matrix mounting Page 85
Mounting dimensions Page 93
PWB pin locations Page 93
LED/receptacle Page 87/88
Lamp/LED Page 89/90
Current Sinking Output
A permanent magnet plunger moves adjacent to the Hall effect integrated circuit
to give a digital, current sinking (normally
high and normally low) output.
Order display options assembled to switch by adding codes below
K RS DR
Leave this space blank,
if legend not desired
Plunger
LED
(Stanley Type) Lens Legend
K Black XX No LED
RS Red*
YS Yellow*
GS Green*
* Permanently installed.
For LED display:
DR Red
DY Yellow
DG Green
For incandescent or nonlighted display:
LR Red
LY Yellow
LG Green
LW White
LK Black
20 With Legend
Use Legend Order Sheet FO-74024
to cover each catalog listing (see
page 83).
CUSTOMER INSTALLATION:
LED
1. Order LED and receptacle, page 87.
2. Installation instructions, page 88.
Incandescent Lamp
1. Order lamp/PWB receptacle or lamp/solder
receptacle, page 89.
2. Installation instructions, page 90.
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML21 Series
Electronic Control Pushbutton
72 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
LED, INCANDESCENT, OR NON-LIGHTED DISPLAY
PWB Mount Panel Mount
(Standard plunger) (Standard plunger)
PWB Mount
(One-piece plunger)
FEATURES
1 Silver or gold contacts
1 Choice of rectangular or square
housings
1 Accepts one LED or incandescent
lamp
1 Printed wiring board or snap-in panel
mounting
1 Bezels and mounting clips, LEDs and
legended lenses can be furnished
installed or ordered separately
1 UL recognized, CSA certified
Example: MML21KK3AAK
Electronic control pushbutton switch with
standard plunger; rectangular housing
(black); bezel (black); mounting clips on
long sides, PWB terminals; 1-pole, momentary action, silver contacts, black
plunger.
Example: MML21KK3AAKRSDR
As above, except furnished with red LED
and red lens installed.
MML21KK3AAHRSXX20 as above, legended.
MML21 STANDARD PLUNGER SWITCHES ORDER GUIDE
Catalog listing codes for switch, less assembled display options
MML21K K 3 AA
Housing Type Mounting Terminals Circuitry/Action (Each pole is double throw)
Rectangular Square Rectangular Square
MML21K
Rectangular Black Housing
MML21H
Square Black Housing
A No bezel (PWB
mounting)
K Black bezel, mtg.
clip/long sides
A No bezel (PWB
mounting)
R Black bezel
& mtg. clip
3 Printed
Wiring
Board
2 Solder
Silver Contacts:
AA 1 pole,
mom. action
AB 1 pole,
alt. action
AC 2 pole,
mom. action
AD 2 pole,
alt. action
Gold Contacts:
BA 1 pole,
mom. action
BB 1 pole,
alt. action
BC 2 pole,
mom. action
BD 2 pole,
alt. action
Silver contacts:
AA 1-pole,
mom. action
AB 1-pole,
alt. action
Gold contacts
BA 1-pole,
mom. action
BB 1-pole,
alt. action
MML21 ONE PIECE LENS/PLUNGER SWITCHES ORDER GUIDE Catalog listing codes for switch, less assembled display options
MML21H K 3 AA
Housing Type Mounting Terminals Circuitry/Action (Each pole is double throw)
Rectangular Square Rectangular Square
MML21K
Rectangular Black Housing
MML21H
Square Black Housing
A No bezel (PWB
mounting)
K Black bezel, mtg.
clip/long sides
A No bezel (PWB
Mounting)
R Black bezel
& mtg. clip
3 Printed
Wiring
Board
2 Solder
Silver Contacts:
AA 1 pole,
mom. action
AB 1 pole,
alt. action
AC 2 pole,
mom. action
AD 2 pole,
alt. action
Gold Contacts:
BA 1 pole,
mom. action
BB 1 pole,
alt. action
BC 2 pole,
mom. action
BD 2 pole,
alt. action
Silver contacts:
AA 1-pole,
mom. action
AB 1-pole,
alt. action
Gold contacts
BA 1-pole,
mom. action
BB 1-pole,
alt. action
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML21 Series
Electronic Control Pushbutton Switches
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 73
Electrical Data Page 69
Bezels Page 86
Strip and matrix mounting Page 85
PWB pin locations Page 93
Order display options assembled to switch by adding codes below
K RS DR
Plunger Type LED* Lens Legend
K Black
W White
XX No Led
RS Red
YS Yellow
GS Green
XX No Lens
For LED Display
DR Red
DY Yellow
DG Green
For Incandescent
or Unlighted Display
LR Red
LY Yellow
LG Green
LW White
LK Black
20
With Legend (Leave
Blank if no legend
needed
Use Legend Order Sheet
FO-74024 to cover each
catalog listing. (See page
83.)
CUSTOMER INSTALLATION:
LED
1. Order LED and receptacle, page 87.
2. Installation instructions, page 88.
Incandescent Lamp
1. Order lamp/PWB receptacle or lamp/solder
receptacle, page 89.
2. Installation instructions, page 90.
Order display options assembled to switch by adding codes below
H RS
Button Color (One Piece Plunger) LED* Legend
For LED Display
H Red
L Yellow
N Green
For Incandescent or non-light display
R Red
Y Yellow
G Green
Z Black
XX No LED
RS Red
YS Yellow
GS Green
XX20
With Legend (Leave Blank if no
legend needed
Use Legend Order Sheet FO-74024 to
cover each catalog listing. (See page
83.)
*Notes:
1. When an LED is specified in a rectangular MML21 listing, MICRO SWITCH will
permanently install it in the housing.
2. MICRO SWITCH does not permanently install an LED in a square MML21
listing. To install an LED in a square housing, order a MML93L or MML93G
receptacle and a MML92 LED (see pages 88 and 90).
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML23/24 Series
Electronic Control Paddle
74 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
NON-LIGHTED DISPLAY
PWB Mount Panel Mount
FEATURES
1 Printed circuit board or snap-in panel
mounting
1 Bezels and mounting clips can be
furnished installed or ordered
separately
1 UL recognized, CSA certified
Example: MML23KA3AA01K
Electronic control paddle switch with
black housing; printed wiring board
mounting; printed wiring board terminals;
1 pole, silver contacts; 2-position, maintained action; one circuit ON in each position; black paddle.
MML23 ORDER GUIDE
MML23K A 3 AA
Housing Type Mounting Terminals Circuitry
MML23K
Black housing
A No bezel (PWB mounting)
K Black bezel, mtg. clip/long sides
3 Printed wiring board
2 Solder
Insert code letters
from Circuitry Chart
Electronic Control Rocker Switches MML24
LED, INCANDESCENT, OR NON-LIGHTED DISPLAY
PWB Mount Panel Mount PWB Mount
(Lighted rocker)
PWB Mount
(Umbrella rocker)
FEATURES
1 Accepts one or two LEDs or
incandescent lamps which are
ordered separately
1 Printed wiring board mounting or
snap-in panel mounting
1 Bezels and mounting clips can be
furnished installed or ordered
separately
1 UL recognized, CSA certified
MML24 ORDER GUIDE (Catalog listing for switch, less assembled display options)
MML24K A 3 AA
Housing Type Mounting Terminals Circuitry
MML24K
Black housing
A No bezel (PWB mounting)
K Black bezel, mtg. clip/long sides
3 Printed wiring board
2 Solder
Insert code letters
from Circuitry Chart
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML23/24 Series
Electronic Control Paddle
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 75
Electrical Data Page 69
Bezels Page 86
Strip and matrix mounting Page 85
Mounting dimensions Page 99/100
PWB pin locations Page 99
Rockers and paddles are permanently installed.
CIRCUITRY
2-Position 3-Position
Silver Gold
Contacts Contacts
AA BA
AC BC
The ‘‘MICRO SWITCH’’ identification is shown on this side of the switch housings.
Order display options assembled to switch by adding codes below.
OPERATING ACTION
2-Position 01 Maint. None Maint.
02 Mom. None Maint.
03 Maint. None Mom.
3-Position 04 Maint. Maint. Maint.
05 Mom. Maint. Mom.
07 Mom. Maint. Maint.
01 K
Action Paddle
Insert code
numbers from
Operating
Action Chart
K Black
Example: MML24KA3AA01HDRXX
Electronic control rocker switch with
black housing, printed wiring board
terminals; 1 pole, silver contacts; 2position, maintained action; one circuit ON in each position; black rocker, red lens for LED display in Side 1
and no lens in Side 2.
Note: Umbrella rockers are available with PWB terminals only.
01 H DRXX
Leave blank,
if legend not
desired
Action Rocker Lens Legend
Insert code
numbers
from
Operating
Action
Chart
K Black rocker, non-lighted
H Black rocker, one lens*
F White rocker, one lens*
* Lighted switches with solder terminals
require MML93R receptacle to install
lamps or LEDs. See Page 90.
Side 1 Side 2
XX None XX None
LED Incand.
display: display:
DR Red LR Red
DY Yellow LY Yellow
DG Green LG Green
LW White
LED Incand.
display: display:
DR Red LR Red
DY Yellow LY Yellow
DG Green LG Green
LW White
20 With legend
Use legend order
sheet FO-74193
to cover each
catalog listing
(see page 84).
CUSTOMER INSTALLATION:
LED
1. Order LED and receptacle, page 87.
2. Installation instructions, page 88.
Incandescent Lamp
1. Order lamp/PWB receptacle or lamp/solder
receptacle, page 89.
2. Installation instructions, page 90.
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML31 Series
Power Duty Pushbutton
76 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
NON-LIGHTED DISPLAY
PWB Mount Panel Mount
FEATURES
1 Printed circuit board or snap-in panel
mounting
1 Bezels and mounting clips, and
legended lenses can be furnished
installed or ordered separately
1 UL recognized, CSA certified.
Example: MML31KK2AAK
Power duty pushbutton switch housing
(black); bezel (black) and mounting clips;
solder terminals; 1 pole, momentary action; black plunger.
Example: MML31KK2AAKLR
As above, except furnished with red lens.
MML31 ORDER GUIDE
Catalog listing codes for switch,
less assembled display options
MML31K K 2 AA
Housing Type
(Rectangular)
Mounting Terminals Circuitry/Action
(Each pole is single-throw, normally
open)
MML31K
Black
housing,
non-lighted
A No bezel (PWB mounting)
K Black bezel, mtg. clip/long sides
3 Printed wiring board
2 Solder/Quick-connect
AA 1 pole, mom. action
AB 1 pole, alt. action
AC 2 poles, mom. action
AD 2 poles, alt. action
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML31 Series
Power Duty Pushbutton
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 77
Electrical data Page 69
Bezels Page 86
Strip and matrix mounting Page 85
Mounting dimensions Page 99/100
PWB pin locations Page 99
Order display options assembled to
switch by adding codes below
K LR
Leave this space blank,
if legend not desired
Plunger Lens Legend
K Black LR Red
LY Yellow
LG Green
LW White
LK Black
20 With Legend
Use Legend Order Sheet
FO-74024 to cover each
catalog listing (see page
83).
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML41/46 Series
Indicators/Pushbutton Style
78 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
LED OR INCANDESCENT DISPLAY
PWB Mount Panel Mount
FEATURES
1 Accepts one LED or incandescent
lamp
MML41indicators resemble a pushbutton
switch with the button in the ‘‘down’’ position.
MML41 ORDER GUIDE
Catalog listing codes for indicator, less assembled display options
MML41K A 3 K
Housing Type (Rectangular) Mounting Support Posts/Terminals Plunger
MML41K
Black housing
A No bezel (PWB mounting only)
K Black bezel, mtg. clip/long sides
3 PWB* (‘‘A’’ mtg. only)
2 Solder
0 None
For panel mount and
strip/matrix mount
K Black
Indicators/Flush Mount MML46
LED OR INCANDESCENT DISPLAY
PWB Mount Panel Mount PWB Mount Panel Mount
FEATURES
1 Accepts one or two LEDs or
incandescent lamps
1 Bezels and mounting clips, LEDs and
legended lenses can be furnished
installed or ordered separately
MML46 ORDER GUIDE
Catalog listing codes for indicator, less assembled display options
MML46K A 3
Housing Type Mounting Support Posts
Rectangular*
(1 or 2 LEDs or
incand. lamps)
MML46K
Black housing
Square*
(1 LED or
incand. lamp)
MML46H
Black housing
Rectangular:
A No bezel (PWB mounting only)
K Black bezel, mtg. clip/long sides
Square:
A No bezel (PWB mounting
only)
R Black bezel, mounting clips
3 PWB (‘‘A’’
mtg. only)
2 Solder**
0 None
For snap-in
and strip/
matrix mount
** Rectangular
housings only.
* Notes:
1. When an LED is specified in a rectangular MML46 listing, MICRO SWITCH will permanently
install it in the housing.
2. MICRO SWITCH does not permanently install an LED in a square MML46 listing. To install
an LED in a square housing, order a MML93L or MML93G receptacle and a MML92 LED
(see pages 88 and 90).
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML44 Series
Indicators
80 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
LED DISPLAY
PWB Mount Panel Mount
FEATURES
1 Accepts one LED only
1 Bezels and mounting clips, and
legended lenses can be furnished
installed or ordered separately
Example: MML44KAA
Indicator housing (black) which will accommodate one LED, no bezel
Example: MML44KA3RSDR
As above, except furnished with red LED
(PWB terminals) and lens installed.
MML44 ORDER GUIDE
Catalog listing codes for indicator, less assembled display options
MML44K A 3 RS
Housing Type
(Rectangular) Mounting Terminals LED
(Stanley type)
MML44K
Black housing
A No bezel (PWB mounting)
K Black bezel, mtg. clip/long sides
M Black bezel, mtg. clip/short sides
A None
2 Solder
3 Printed wiring
board*
XX No
RS Red
YS Yellow
GS Green
*Use only if
assembled LED is
specified.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML44 Series
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 81
Bezels Page 86
LEDs Page 88
Lenses Page 82
Strip mounting Page 85
Mounting dimensions Page 92/94
PWB pin locations Page 93/93
Order display options assembled to
indicator by adding codes below
DR
Leave this space blank
if legend not desired
Lens Legend
DR Red
DY Yellow
DG Green
DC Clear
20 With legend
Use Legend Order Sheet FO-74024 to cover each
catalog listing.
CUSTOMER
INSTALLATION:
LED
1. Order LED and
receptacle, page 87.
2. Installation instructions,
page 88.
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML51 Series
Button Lenses/Incandescent or Non-lighted Display
82 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
MML51 ORDER GUIDE
For standard plunger MML pushbuttons.
MML51E 20 R
Lens Type Display/Legend Type Color
Rectangular Lenses:
MML51E
Switch lens*
MML51G
Indicator lens
*Use MML51E with MML41
rectangular pushbutton style
indicators.
Transmitted Color:
10 No legend
20 With legend
R Red
Y Yellow
G Green
W White
K Black
(Opaque)
Example: MML51E20R
Incandescent or non-lighted display
switch lens; red transmitted color, with
legend.
LEGENDING
Use the MML Legend Order Sheets
on pages 83 and 84 to specify
legending.
Button Lenses/LED or Neon Display MML52
MML52 ORDER GUIDE
For standard plunger MML pushbuttons.
MML52G 10 Y
Lens Type Display/Legend Type Color/
Illumination
Rectangular Lenses:
MML52E
Switch lens, LED display
MML52G*
Indicator lens
LED display
* Use MML52E with MML41
rectangular pushbutton style
indicators.
Transmitted Color:
10 No legend
20 With legend
LED Display:
R Red
Y Yellow
G Green
C Clear
Example: MML52G10Y
LED display indicator lens; yellow
transmitted color, no legend.
HOW TO INSTALL LENSES
Keytabs on two sides of the lenses mate
with matching button slots.
Rectangular lenses have tabs on the
long sides. Seat a long side before
snapping in place.
HOW TO INSTALL LENSES
1. Seat lens. 2. Snap in place.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML61 Series
Strip Mounting Frames
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 85
MML61 ORDER GUIDE
MML61K 5
Orientation/Color No. of Stations
For Rectangular* Housings:
MML61K
Horizontal strip, black
MML61G
Vertical strip, black
For Square Housings
MML61J
Black
* * .4N x .6N housings only.
1 One
2 Two
3 Three
4 Four
5 Five
6 Six
7 Seven
8 Eight
9 Nine
10 Ten
Note: Switches and indicators are ordered as
separate items.
FEATURES
1 Provides back of panel or printed
wiring board mounting in a multi-unit
strip of switches/indicators.
1 Devices can be pre-wired prior to
installation.
1 Holes at each end of frame will accept
No. 4 screws.
Example: MML61K5
Black 5-station strip mounting frame, horizontal orientation.
Refer to pages 101, 102 and 103 for
mounting dimensions.
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML72 Series
Bezels/Mounting Clips
86 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
1. Slip mounting clip over top of switch/
indicator housing.
2. Snap bezel onto mounting clip.
Recommended panel thickness for
panel mounted units is .050 to .094 in.
(1,27 to 2,39 mm).
MML72 ORDER GUIDE
(Incl. bezel & mounting clips)
MML72EE K
Type Color
For Rectangular* Housings:
MML72EE*
Switch: Mtg. clips on long sides
* Use this type with MML41 rectangular pushbutton
style indicators.
K Black
Example: MML72EEK
Black switch bezel, mounting clips on
long sides.
TO ORDER MOUNTING CLIPS
SEPARATELY
For Rectangular Housings:
MML73EA (long sides)
MML73EB (short sides)
For Square Housings:
MML73BA
PWB Mount Support Bracket MML74 Series
These metal frames with PWB support
terminals provide added rigidity for standalone PWB mounted switches and indicators. They are not for use with MML57 buttons.
See page 98 for mounting dimensions.
MML74 ORDER GUIDE
Catalog
Listing For Use With:
MML74E Rectangular .4N x .6N housings
MML74B Square housings
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML91/93 Series
Incandescent Lamp Assemblies
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 89
MML91 LAMP/PWB RECEPTACLE ORDER GUIDE
Catalog Listing
Lamp Use To Incl. Lamp & Industry
Type Illuminate Voltage PWB Receptacle Lamp No.
T-1 1 Rectangular 5 MML91C 715
(unbased) button lens 10 MML91BC 7218
14 MML91CC 8111
28 MML91DC 6838
T-1 2 Square 5 MML91E 7715
(bi-pin) button lens 10 MML91BE 8095
and MML24 14 MML91CE 8098
rocker lens 28 MML91DE 7839
Notes:
1 To order PWB receptacle separately, specify MML93H.
2 To order PWB receptacle separately, specify MML93G.
MML91 LAMP/SOLDER RECEPTACLE ORDER GUIDE
Catalog Listing
Lamp Use To Incl. Lamp & Industry
Type Illuminate Voltage Solder Receptacle Lamp No.
T–1 3 Rectangular 5 MML91D 7715
(bi-pin) button lens 10 MML91BD 8095
14 MML91CD 8098
28 MML91DD 7839
Catalog Listing 4
Lamp Use To T-1 (Unbased) Industry
Type Illuminate Voltage Solder Receptacle Lamp Only Lamp No.
T-1 Square 5 MML93L MML91A 715
(unbased) button lens 10 MML93L MML91BA 7218
14 MML93L MML91CA 8111
28 MML93L MML91DA 6838
T-1 MML24 5 MML93R MML91A 715
(unbased) rocker lens 10 MML93R MML91BA 7218
14 MML93R MML91CA 8111
28 MML93R MML91DA 6838
Notes:
3 To order solder receptacles separately, specify MML93J.
4 Order solder receptacles and T-1 lamp listings for complete assembly.
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML93 Series
LED/Incandescent Lamp Receptacles
90 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
User installed. Certain MML switches
and indicators will accept incandescent
lamps, where specified in the order
guides.
These lamps are ordered separately and
installed by the user, per the procedures
described below.
LAMP INSTALLATION
1. With Printed Wiring Board
Receptacle for MML93G and
MML93H only.
Use PWB receptacles to permit
lamps to be added or replaced from
behind the printed wiring board,
without soldering.
These receptacles are for use with
rectangular pushbuttons, square
pushbuttons and MML24 rocker lens
only.
Printed wiring boards are not
supplied.
1. Insert the PWB receptacle/
incandescent lamp assembly
through a hole in the printed wiring
board.
2. A 1⁄8–turn applied clockwise to the
receptacle locks it in the printed
wiring board and establishes the
electrical connection.
2. With Solder Terminal Receptacle
for MML93J bi-pin only
This receptacle attaches directly to
the rear of panel-mounted units. It
enables lamps to be added or
replaced without rewiring.
This receptacle is for use with all
rectangular pushbuttons and MML41
or MML46 rectangular indicators
only.
1. Insert solder terminal receptacle into
hole in base of panel mount unit.
2. A 1⁄8–turn clockwise applied to the
receptacle locks it in the base.
3. With Solder Terminal Receptacles
for MML93L/93R Unbased Only or
T-1 LED.
Use the receptacles shown at right to
install T–1 LEDs or T–1 unbased lamps
in panel-mounted MML21 square
pushbutton switches and MML24
rocker switches.
Procedure:
1. Assemble LEDs or lamps to
receptacles (leads first).
2. Snap receptacle into slots in housing
base.
3. Solder directly to leads.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML92 Series
LEDs
88 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
Factory installed. Certain MML switches
and indicators can be furnished with
LEDs permanently factory installed,
where specified in the order guides.
User installed. LEDs can also be ordered
separately and installed in these products
by the user, per the procedures described below.
LED INSTALLATION
1. With Printed Wiring Board
Receptacle. (MML93K)
PWB receptacle enables T-1 3⁄4 or T-1
LEDs to be added or replaced from behind the printed wiring board, without
soldering. LEDs and receptacles are
ordered separately. See page 87.
Printed wiring boards are not supplied. 1. Insert the LED/PWB receptacle assembly through a hole in the printed
wiring board.
2. A 1⁄8–turn applied clockwise to the receptacle locks it in the printed wiring
board and establishes the electrical
connection.
2. With Solder Terminal Receptacle.
(MML93J)
This receptacle attaches directly to the
rear of panel-mounted units. It enables
incandescent lamps to be added or replaced without rewiring. LEDs and receptacles are ordered separately.
This receptacle is for use with all rectangular pushbuttons and MML41 or
MML46 rectangular indicators only. 1. Insert solder terminal receptacle into
hole in base of panel mount unit.
2. A 1⁄8–turn clockwise applied to the receptacle locks it in the base.
3. By Soldering To Printed Wiring
Board.
In this procedure, the housing is
mounted on the printed wiring board
after the T-1 3⁄4 LED has been seated.
This procedure can be used with any
MML having PWB terminals.
1. Assemble stand-off spacer to LED terminals and seat on printed wiring
board.
2. Seat housing on printed wiring board,
with LED projecting into hole at the
base of the housing.
4. By Soldering to Printed Wiring Board
or Leadwire (MML44 indicators
only).
T-1 3⁄4 LEDs are added to MML44 indicators via a procedure which is unique
to this product. The LED is inserted
from the top of the housing with the
leadwires protruding through the
housing base.
1. Assemble LED to MML44 indicator,
with the LED terminals protruding
through assembly slot in the middle of
housing base.
2. Use pencil eraser to snap LED securely
in place.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML92/93 Series
LEDs
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 87
LED APPLICATION INFORMATION
To insure stable conditions, suitable external control of the LED current must be
provided. It is recommended that a minimum of 5 VDC open circuit voltage with
an appropriate series resistance be used
to drive LED devices. This minimizes current variation and its effect on temperature and forward voltage of the LED.
Maximum drive current is 30 mA. Reverse
voltage breakdown of the LED’s is 4 volts
(min.).
Resistor values can be determined by
supply voltage or current for LED:
RS =
E – Vf
If WHERE: RS = Series Resistance
E = Supply Voltage
Vf = Forward Voltage
of LED
If = Circuit Current
MML92 ORDER GUIDE
LEDs should be the same color as the lenses they illuminate. They are packed 10 per listing, including stand-off spacers for use
when solder terminating to a printed wiring board, per procedure 3 on page 88.
Forward LED
LED Use To Catalog LED Characteristics Manufacturers’
Type Illuminate Listing Color Typ. @ 20mA Max. Part Numbers
Stanley:T–13⁄4 Rectangular
button lens MML92ERS
MML92EGS
MML92EYS
Red
Green
Yellow
1.7 V
2.1 V
2.1 V
2.0 V
2.5 V
2.5 V
ESBR5633
ESBG5633
ESAY5633
Hewlett Packard:
MML92ERH
MML92EGH
MML92EYH
Red
Green
Yellow
2.2 V
2.3 V
2.2 V
3.0 V
3.0 V
3.0 V
HLMP-3366
HLMP-3568
HLMP-3466
Stanley:T–1 Square button
lens, MML24
rocker lens
rectangular
button lens
MML92HRS
MML92HGS
MML92HYS
Red
Green
Yellow
1.7 V
2.1 V
2.2 V
2.0 V
2.5 V
2.5 V
ESBR3901
ESPY3901
ESAY3901
Hewlett Packard:
MML92HRH
MML92HGH
MML92HYH
Red
Green
Yellow
2.2 V*
2.3 V*
2.2 V
3.0 V
3.0 V
3.0 V
HLMP-1340
HLMP-1540
HLMP-1440
Long lead: Anode (+). Short lead: Cathode (−).
* @ 25 mA.
MML93 LED PWB RECEPTACLE ORDER GUIDE
LED
Type Use to Illuminate
Catalog
Listing
T-13⁄4 Rectangular button lens or umbrella button
lens MML93K
T-1 Square button lens or MML24 rocker lens MML93G
MML93 LED SOLDER TERMINAL ORDER GUIDE
LED
Type Use to Illuminate
Catalog
Listing
T-1 Square button MML93L
T-1 MML24 rocker lens MML93R
T-1 Rectangular button MML93J
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML91/93 Series
Incandescent Lamp Assemblies
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 89
MML91 LAMP/PWB RECEPTACLE ORDER GUIDE
Catalog Listing
Lamp Use To Incl. Lamp & Industry
Type Illuminate Voltage PWB Receptacle Lamp No.
T-1 1 Rectangular 5 MML91C 715
(unbased) button lens 10 MML91BC 7218
14 MML91CC 8111
28 MML91DC 6838
T-1 2 Square 5 MML91E 7715
(bi-pin) button lens 10 MML91BE 8095
and MML24 14 MML91CE 8098
rocker lens 28 MML91DE 7839
Notes:
1 To order PWB receptacle separately, specify MML93H.
2 To order PWB receptacle separately, specify MML93G.
MML91 LAMP/SOLDER RECEPTACLE ORDER GUIDE
Catalog Listing
Lamp Use To Incl. Lamp & Industry
Type Illuminate Voltage Solder Receptacle Lamp No.
T–1 3 Rectangular 5 MML91D 7715
(bi-pin) button lens 10 MML91BD 8095
14 MML91CD 8098
28 MML91DD 7839
Catalog Listing 4
Lamp Use To T-1 (Unbased) Industry
Type Illuminate Voltage Solder Receptacle Lamp Only Lamp No.
T-1 Square 5 MML93L MML91A 715
(unbased) button lens 10 MML93L MML91BA 7218
14 MML93L MML91CA 8111
28 MML93L MML91DA 6838
T-1 MML24 5 MML93R MML91A 715
(unbased) rocker lens 10 MML93R MML91BA 7218
14 MML93R MML91CA 8111
28 MML93R MML91DA 6838
Notes:
3 To order solder receptacles separately, specify MML93J.
4 Order solder receptacles and T-1 lamp listings for complete assembly.
M
anuals
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches MML93 Series
LED/Incandescent Lamp Receptacles
90 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
User installed. Certain MML switches
and indicators will accept incandescent
lamps, where specified in the order
guides.
These lamps are ordered separately and
installed by the user, per the procedures
described below.
LAMP INSTALLATION
1. With Printed Wiring Board
Receptacle for MML93G and
MML93H only.
Use PWB receptacles to permit
lamps to be added or replaced from
behind the printed wiring board,
without soldering.
These receptacles are for use with
rectangular pushbuttons, square
pushbuttons and MML24 rocker lens
only.
Printed wiring boards are not
supplied.
1. Insert the PWB receptacle/
incandescent lamp assembly
through a hole in the printed wiring
board.
2. A 1⁄8–turn applied clockwise to the
receptacle locks it in the printed
wiring board and establishes the
electrical connection.
2. With Solder Terminal Receptacle
for MML93J bi-pin only
This receptacle attaches directly to
the rear of panel-mounted units. It
enables lamps to be added or
replaced without rewiring.
This receptacle is for use with all
rectangular pushbuttons and MML41
or MML46 rectangular indicators
only.
1. Insert solder terminal receptacle into
hole in base of panel mount unit.
2. A 1⁄8–turn clockwise applied to the
receptacle locks it in the base.
3. With Solder Terminal Receptacles
for MML93L/93R Unbased Only or
T-1 LED.
Use the receptacles shown at right to
install T–1 LEDs or T–1 unbased lamps
in panel-mounted MML21 square
pushbutton switches and MML24
rocker switches.
Procedure:
1. Assemble LEDs or lamps to
receptacles (leads first).
2. Snap receptacle into slots in housing
base.
3. Solder directly to leads.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches PB Series
Pushbutton Switches
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 125
FEATURES
1 Compact size
1 Up to 4-poles
1 Sealed versions
TOUCH FEEDBACK SWITCHES
SHORT TRAVEL SWITCHES
PANEL SEALED SWITCHES
ORDER GUIDE
Momentary and alternate action switches.
No. of SPDT Circuits
2 2 4 4
Button Mom. Alt. Mom. Alt.
Color Action Action Action Action
Black 2PB11-T2 82PB19-T2 — 84PB19-T2
2PB732-T2 — 4PB714-T2 —
(M8805/23-001) (M8805/23-003)
Red 2PB12-T2 82PB21-T2 — —
2PB717-T2 — 4PB717-T2 —
(M8805/23-002) (M8805/23-004)
Green 2PB273-T2 82PB22-T2 — —
ORDER GUIDE
Momentary action switches.
Button No. of SPDT Circuits
Color 2 3
Black 2PB7 3PB7
These switches resemble the touch-feedback design, but have a flexible leaf actuator for lower operating force and shorter button travel.
An elastomer seal is bonded between actuating plunger and button collar. An Oring seals the button assembly to the panel front.
Two-piece design enables button to be
mounted separately. After switch unit is
wired, it snaps into place from behind
panel.
ORDER GUIDE
Momentary action switches.
No. of SPDT CircuitsButton Collar
Color Type 1 2
Black Hex 1PB4 2PB4
Black Round 1PB42 —
Red Round 1PB43 2PB43
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
(Except 15PB and 700PB)
30 VDC: 5 amps, res., sea level or 50,000
ft.; 3 amps, ind., sea level; 2.5 amps
ind., 50,000 ft; 24 amps, max. inrush.
UL and CSA rating for basic switches: 5
amps, 125 or 250 VAC.
P
ush
b utto
ns Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches PB Series
Pushbutton Switches
126 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
WATERTIGHT SWITCH ORDER GUIDE
Momentary action switches.
Has knurled chrome-finished facenut.
Button No. of SPDT Circuits
Color 2
Black 2PB901-T2
Facenut-to-panel, button-to-facenut, and
bushing-to-facenut, sealing helps prevent entry of water from behind panel, up
and over bushing wall. Switch units potted in corrosion resistant metal enclosure. Meets submergence requirements
of MIL-STD-108 (up to 10 PSI water pressure for one hour).
HERMETICALLY SEALED
SWITCHES These pushbuttons are equipped with
HM hermetically sealed switch units,
which have metal-to-metal fusion around
the cover, actuator base, and mounting
holes. Terminals are sealed glass-tometal.
Vapor-proof construction enables use in
damp locations without condensation on
contacts. External parts corrosion resistant per MIL-S-8805. Meets explosionproof requirements of MIL-S-8805.
ORDER GUIDE
Momentary action switches.
No. of SPDT Circuits
2 4
Button
Color
Black 702PB1 704PB1
MINIATURE SIZE SWITCHES
1PB5 15PB2
ORDER GUIDE
Momentary action switches.
No. of SPDT Circuits
Button 1 2
Steel* 1PB5 —
White Plastic — 15PB2
* Steel button enables use under hinged plates or paddle levers, in addition to manual operation.
ELECTRICAL RATINGS — 700PB
and 15PB
700PB (With hermetically sealed switch
units):
28 VDC and 115 VAC, 400 HZ: 3 amps,
ind., 5 amps, res.
15PB:
30 VDC and 115 VAC: 2 amps, ind., 5
amps. res.; 1.0 amp, lamp load.
1PB5
250 VAC: 5 amps.
30 VDC: 5 amps, res., sea level or 50,000
ft.; 3 amps, ind., sea level; 2.5 amps ind.,
50,000 ft.; 24 amps, max. inrush.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches PB Series
Pushbutton Switches
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 127
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
Touch Feedback Switches Panel Sealed Switches
2-Pole 4-Pole
Dim. ‘‘A’’ Mom. 16,8/.66 30,0/1.18
(max.) Alt. Act. 17,3/.68 30,5/1.20
Dim. ‘‘B’’ Mom. 26,7/1.05 26,7/1.05
Alt. Act. 33,0/1.34 33,0/1.34
Short Travel Switches
2-Pole 3-Pole
Dim. ‘‘A’’ (max.) 17,0/.67 23,8/.94
1-Pole 2-Pole
Dim. ‘‘A’’ (max.) 11,7/.46 17,0/.67
Key:
0,0 J mm
0.00 J inches
P
ush
b utto
ns Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches PB Series
Pushbutton Switches
128 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
Watertight Switch Miniature Size Switches
Hermetically Sealed Switches
Mounting hardware includes:
hexnut, lockwasher, and
keying washer.
2-Pole 4-Pole
Dim. ‘‘A’’ (max.) 16,8/.66 30,0/1.18
Key:
0,0 J mm
0.00 J inches
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches Series 2
Pushbutton Switches and Indicators
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 111
FEATURES
1 Easy-to-assemble modules provide
thousands of display/control
combinations
1 Up to 4 incandescent lamps
1 1, 2, 3, or 4-section display
1 Transmitted or projected color
1 Integral hold-in coil option provides
remote released contacts. Pull-in coils
(flange mount only) enable remote
actuation
1 Switch guard accessory.
CHANGE LAMPS OR FILTERS
FROM PANEL FRONT
Without tool. Remove display screen/
lampholder assembly from 2C200 operator-indicator (or 2F200 indicator). Unit is
keyed to maintain proper orientation
when replacing. Use only flange base
T-13⁄4 lamps with 2C200 and 2F200 devices.
LAMPS AND FILTERS
Order lamps and filters for projected color
from page 117.
BARRIER MOUNT
Display screen
(page 115)
Housing
(next page)
Mounting barrier
(next page)
Switch unit
(page 114)
Mounting barriers attach to either the long
or short sides of the housing. They have
spring clips which grip the panel. Mounting barriers also separate display screens
to protect against inadvertent operation.
Multiple units can be attached together in
a strip and snapped into a panel slot; or
they can be mounted individually.
FLANGE MOUNT
Display screen
(page 115)
Housing
(page 113)
Switch
unit
(page 114)
Flange mount units have mounting clips
ready-attached to the housing. They can
be individually installed or replaced; and
enable use of an overlay panel, if desired.
Groupings can be separated by optional
spacing barriers.
MODULES ASSEMBLE EASILY
All modules are ordered as separate
items which snap together for easy assembly.
P
ush
b utto
ns Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches Series 2
Pushbuttons Switches and Indicators
112 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
Barriers on long sides
Barriers on short sides
BARRIER MOUNT MODULES
Barrier mount assemblies are identical in
panel appearance. Operator-indicator
housings have spring clips for attaching
switch modules. This feature is not provided with indicator housings.
Barriers are necessary for mounting.
They can be specified for attachment to
the long or short side of the housing, as
stated in the order guides.
BARRIER MOUNT HOUSING ORDER GUIDE
See ‘‘Application Data’’ for typical bailing circuits for coil-equipped modules.
Tool Not RequiredBarriers
Attach On:
No. of
Lamp Sockets Operator-Indicator Indicator Only
Long Sides
of Housing
2 (A & C) 2C207
4 (A-D) 2C209
Short Sides
of Housing
2 (A & C) 2C201
4 (A-D) 2C203 2F203
MOUNTING BARRIER ORDER GUIDE
For strip mounting, specify one more barrier than the number of units in the group.
Catalog ListingsMounting Barrier For Panel
Type Thickness Gray Black
Attach to
Long Sides .06-.19 in. (1,52-4,83 mm) 2B2 2B4
Attach to
Short Sides .06-.19 in. (1,52-4,83 mm) 2B1 2B3
Note: Panels .19 in. (1,52 mm) thick require the .06-.19 in. (1,52-4,83 mm) type barriers.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches Series 2
Pushbutton Switches and Indicators
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 113
Flanges on long sides
FLANGE MOUNT MODULES
Flange mount assemblies are identical in
panel appearance. Operator-indicator
housings have spring clips for switch
modules attachment (not provided with
indicator housings).
Barriers are not required, since the panel
mounting clips are ready-attached to
flange sides of the housings. However,
spacing barriers can be used for colorcoding. They also aid in preventing inadvertent operation of two screens with one
push.
Mounting dimensions on page 120.
FLANGE MOUNT HOUSING ORDER GUIDE
See ‘‘Application Data’’ for typical bailing circuits for coil-equipped modules.
Tool Not Required
Flanges On:
No. of Lamp
Sockets
OperatorIndicator Indicator Only
Long Sides of
Housing
2 (A & C) 2C204
4 (A-D) 2C206 2F206
SPACING BARRIER ORDER GUIDE
For .06-31 in. (1,5-7,9 mm) thick panels.
Catalog ListingsSpacing Barrier
Type Gray Black
For Long Flange Housing 2B9 2B18
P
ush
b utto
ns Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches Series 2
Pushbutton Switches and Indicators
114 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
SWITCH MODULES
Interchangeable type 2D switch modules
attach to spring clips on the bottom of operator-indicator housings. There is a wide
selection of circuitry, electrical ratings,
operating actions and terminations.
For mounting dimensions, see page 121.
ELECTRICAL RATING
Silver contacts:
30 VDC: 5 amps res. sea level or 50,000 ft,
3 amps ind. sea level, 2.5 amps 50,000 ft.
Max. inrush, 24 amps.
UL and CSA rating for basic switch: 5
amps, 125 or 250 VAC.
Gold contacts:
30 VDC: 0.5 amp ind.,1amp res., sea level
and 50,000 ft. Max. inrush, 2 amps.
SM SUBMINIATURE MULTI-SPDT SWITCH MODULES
Momentary action Alternate action
SM switch modules offer a choice of two
momentary action styles, one with a pronounced touch-feedback, the other with
low operating force for rapid repeat actuation. Also available with alternateaction and combination momentary/
alternate action modules. Extra length
turret solder terminals.
SM SWITCH MODULE ORDER GUIDE
Momentary Action Alternate Action
Touch-Feedback Type Low Force TypeNo. of
SPDT Circuits Silver Contacts Silver Contacts
1 2D100 2D118
2 2D2 2D26
4 2D9 2D33
V3 COMPACT SPDT/DPDT SWITCH MODULES
V3 switch modules have screw terminals
with lockwashers. Quick-connect terminals (not shown) are also available. When
used with short-flange operator indicators, add spacing barriers to prevent
interference.
ELECTRICAL RATING
30 VDC: 10 amps ind.* sea level, 6 amps
ind.,* 50,000 ft. Motor load, 6 amps.** UL
and CSA rating for basic switch: 10 amps,
1⁄3 Hp, 125 or 250 VAC; 1⁄2 amp, 125 VDC;
1⁄4 amp, 250 VDC.
* Inductive currents in accordance with AN3179.
** Motor load rating based on starting current.
V3 SWITCH MODULE ORDER GUIDE
No. of SPDT
Circuits Momentary Action
1 2D70
2 2D72
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches Series 2
Pushbutton Switches and Indicators
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 115
ONE-PIECE DISPLAY
SCREEN OPTIONS
Single-section
These translucent solid color display
screens are single-section/one piece
construction
SINGLE-SECTION/
ONE-PIECE SCREENS ORDER GUIDE
Colors Standard
Red 2A1
Yellow 2A2
Green 2A3
White 2A5
THREE-PIECE DISPLAY
SCREEN OPTIONS
Single-section
These screens have transparent colored
or colorless caps, transparent colorless
legend inserts and translucent colored
bases.
SINGLE-SECTION/THREE-PIECE
SCREENS ORDER GUIDE
Colorless
Color Caps
Red 2A81
Yellow 2A82
Green 2A85
White 2A70
Amber 2A114
NOTE:
Add –L to catalog listing if button is to be
legended.
Silicone rubber baffles prevent light spillage
from one section to another. Screen caps and
legend inserts are transparent colorless. Bases
are translucent colored.
For more information on 2, 3, and 4-section display screens, contact the MICRO SWITCH Application Center.
P
ush
b utto
ns Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches Series 2
Pushbutton Switches and Indicators
116 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches Series 2
Pushbutton Switches and Indicators
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 117
LEGEND INFORMATION
Honeywell MICRO SWITCH Division provides legend service on the inserts supplied with three-piece screens only. To
specify your needs, add -L to the catalog
listings (example: 2A81-L) and use Legend Order Sheet (Form FO-62308),
shown on facing page. Reproduce it on
your office copier.
On any one insert, only one size of type is
provided in either black or white. After legending, the insert is assembled to the display screen. The type face used is ‘‘Modified Gothic’’.
LAMPS
T-13⁄4 incandescent lamps are available
from MICRO SWITCH in 28 volt versions.
Use of neon lamps is not recommended.
Light output is approximately 30% of an
incandescent lamp. Also, a neon lamp
will not illuminate blue or green filters or
display screens due to the absence of
these colors from the neon light spectrum.
LAMP POLICY
The 28 volt lamps are offered as a convenience to customers. Honeywell MICRO
SWITCH Division does not extend any
warranty as to such lamps, and cannot
guarantee to provide lamps from specific
manufacturers. Any technical or quality
questions regarding such lamps should
be directed to the lamp manufacturer.
COLOR FILTERS FOR PROJECTED
COLOR
Projected color is achieved by using
white buttons and color filters over clear
lamps. When lamps are lighted, white
button takes on color projected by the filters.
Filters used with type 2C200 and 2F200
housings (no-tool relamping) slip over
lamp sockets in lampholder.
MIL-S-22885 ASSEMBLED DEVICES
Pushbutton switches and indicators can
be ordered as assembled devices from a
single MIL-S-22885 part number. Designated Series 2W, they are available for
flange mounting and have the no-tool relamping feature. For ordering information, refer to MICRO SWITCH Catalog 80.
SCREEN/LEGEND COLORS
The chart below shows recommended
display screen and legend color combinations for optimum legibility.
Legend Lettering
Screen
Color Black White
Red x
Green x
Yellow x
Amber x x
White x
LAMP ORDER GUIDE
Rating Life/Voltage†
Catalog Base Type Life in Expected
Listing Style No. Volts Amps Hours Volts Life (Hrs.)
2E1 Flange 327 28 .040 1000 24.0 7,500
26.0 2,800
30.0 400
† These are experimental continuous life test results supplied by a lamp manufacturer for reference only. Intermittent operation may reduce these figures as much as 50%. Ratings are based on median values of current and life.
Wattage should not exceed 2.4 watts (2 lamps) per switch, for continuous illumination.
FILTER ORDER GUIDE
Filter Style Red Green Amber White*
For Type 2C200 and 2G12 2G14 2G16 2G17
2F200 Housings
* Has blue tint to compensate for high yellow content of incandescent lamps at low voltages. Push
b utto
ns Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches Series 2
Pushbutton Switches and Indicators
118 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
SWITCH GUARD ACCESSORY
A hinged cover on the switch guard helps
avoid inadvertent operation of the display
screen. It is installed in place of the transparent slide-on cap furnished with threepiece screen. Note: When used with pullin coil devices, specify the 2C200 operator-indicator housings which have the
no-tool relamping feature.
Barrier mount assembly with guard installed. (Can also be used with all flange
mount units.)
Guard requires a ‘‘lift-to-push’’ response
to operate switch normally.
Order Catalog Listing 2H20
Key:
0,0 = mm
0.00 = inches
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches Series 2
Pushbutton Switches and Indicators
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 119
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
Long barrier operator-indicators Short barrier operator-indicators
Short barrier indicators Long barrier indicators Mounting barriers
Short Long
0,0 = mm
Key:
0.00 = inches.
A Panel Thickness
1,5/.06 1,5-4,81/.06-.19
4,6/.18 4,8-7,9/.19-.31
Length Of Panel Cutout*
Number of Units
Type of Indicator or
Operator-Indicator 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Short mm 36,09 68,00 99,87 131,72 163,60 195,48 227,36
Barrier in. 1.421 2.677 3.932 5.186 6.441 7.696 8.951
Long mm 30,00 55,78 81,58 106,34 133,12 159,90 184,68
Barrier in. 1.181 2.196 3.212 4.226 5.241 6.256 7.271
*Nominal dimensions, ±0,25 mm/0.10 in. (In 5% of
the cases, the cutout will be undersized for the buildup of assembled units and will require enlargement.
P
ush
b utto
ns Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches Series 2
Pushbutton Switches and Indicators
120 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
Long flange
operator-indicators
Long flange indicators Spacing barriers
Short Long
0,0 = mm
Key: 0.00 = inches.
Length Of Panel Cutout*
Add 4,19 mm/.165 in. to length for each optional spacing barrier used.
Number of Units
Type of Indicator or
Operator-Indicator 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Long mm 27,94 55,75 83,57 111,36 139,17 166,98 194,77
Flange in. 1.1 2.195 3.290 4.384 5.479 6.574 7.668
*Nominal dimensions, ±0,25 mm/0.10 in. (In 5% of
the cases, the cutout will be undersized for the buildup of assembled units and will require enlargement.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches Series 2
Pushbutton Switches and Indicators
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 121
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
SM Switch Modules
V3 Switch Modules
P
ush
b utto
ns Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches DM Series
Pushbutton Switches
122 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
FEATURES
1 Attractive, rugged snap-in panel
mount design — easy installation.
1 Snap-on or integral pushbuttons.
1 Choice of momentary, alternate,
push-pull and pull-to-cheat operation.
1 Quick-connect terminals.
1 Expected mechanical life: 1 million
operations, 95% survival.
1 Temperature range:
–35° to +180°F (–37° to 82°C)
1 UL recognized, (E12252) CSA
certified (LR4442).
Three different styles of snap-on buttons
can be used with the DM switches shown
above. There is a choice of momentary or
alternate-action, and single or doublepole circuitry.
ELECTRICAL RATING
UL and CSA rating: 10 amps, 1/2 Hp, 125,
250 or 277 VAC.
SWITCHES WITH SNAP-ON BUTTONS
With button ‘‘A’’ With button ‘‘B’’
SPDT DPDT
SWITCH ORDER GUIDE
Switches have gray faceplates. Buttons
are not included.
Momentary
Circuitry Action
SPDT 3DM1
DPDT 4DM1
Order buttons separately or readyinstalled on switches from the order guide
below.
SPDT
DPDT
SWITCH/BUTTON ORDER GUIDE
Switches have gray faceplates.
Momentary Action Alternate Action
Button
Style
Button
Color
Button
Only
3DM1 (SPDT)
and Button
4DM1 (DPDT)
and Button
2003DM1 (SPDT)
and Button
A
Black 31PA1 13DM1-A1 14DM1-A1
Red 13DM1-A2 14DM1-A2
B
Black 31PA3 13DM1-B1 14DM1-B1
Red 31PA4 13DM1-B2 — 2013DM1-B2
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches Series 4
Pushbutton Switches and Indicators
104 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
Bezel on all sides Barriers on short sides Barriers on long sides
Barrier on one short side Barriers on one long side
FEATURES
1 Provides distinctive color display
whether lighted or unlighted.
1 Convenient front panel mounting and
relamping, without tools.
1 Matching indicators.
1 Locked button option discourages
tampering.
1 Choice of transmitted color, projected
color, or dead front display.
1 UL recognized, CSA certified.
MOUNTING
Snap-in mounting. Switch or indicator is
easily inserted into the cutout. Mounting
clips grip the panel. No tools are needed.
Housings with a full bezel can be front
panel or sub-panel mounted, individually
or in strips.
Barrier type housings are normally
mounted top-of-panel in strips, but can also be individually mounted. Barriers can
be on either the short or long housing
sides.
The drawing shows how housings with a
barrier on one side are used in a strip of
two or more units. The first has a barrier
on two sides, while all other units have a
barrier on one side, and butt against each
other.
Barriers on Barriers on
both sides. one side.
Incandescent Housing
Button Lamp
RELAMPING
1. Lamps and legends can be changed
from panel front. When button is removed, lamp is extracted from its
socket and retained in button.
2. Ease of lamp replacement. After the inoperative lamp is automatically removed with the button, the new lamp is
inserted without the use of tools.
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
5-amp silver contacts —
5 amps res., 3 amps ind., 30 VDC.
UL code L-4: 5 amps, 250 VAC
10-amp silver contacts —
UL code L-285; 10 amps, 1⁄6 Hp, 125
or 250 VAC.
Gold contacts —
1 amp res., 0.5 amp, ind., 30 VDC
UL code L-22: 1 amp, 125 VAC
Gold alloy contacts —
0.1 amp, res., 30 VDC;
1 amp, 125 VAC.
LOCKED BUTTON OPTION
Series 4 can be furnished with a locked
button option for use in areas accessible
to the public, where tampering and vandalism are problems. The housing has a
special mounting clip with built-in button
retainer. This mounting clip must be removed from behind panel to allow button
removal. Button movement during switch
operation is unaffected by locked button
feature. (These units cannot be relamped
from front of panel.)
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches Series 4
Pushbutton Switches and Indicators
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 105
SWITCH HOUSING ORDER GUIDE
Order buttons separately from page 116.
4A11B AA 11
Switching Element
TerminalsSwitch Housing Style Incandescent
(Black) Electrical Data Action .110 QC PC* Illumination
11
No lamp,
has lamp socket for T-31⁄4
wedge base lamps.
21
#161 12-volt
T-31⁄4 lamp.
31
#656 or 152
28-volt
T-31⁄4 lamp
91
Unlighted,
no lamp socket.
4A11B
Bezel: all sides
Mtg. clips: long sides
4A12B
Bezel: all sides
Mtg. clips: short sides
4A31B
Barriers: long sides
Mtg. clips: long sides
4A32B
Barriers: long sides
Mtg. clips: short sides
4A33B
Barrier: one long side
Mtg. clips: long sides
4A34B
Barrier: one long side
Mtg. clips: short sides
4A21B
Barriers: short sides
Mtg. clips: long sides
4A22B
Barriers: short sides
Mtg. clips: short sides
4A23B
Barrier: one short side
Mtg. clips: long sides
4A24B
Barrier: one short side
Mtg. clips: short sides
With Housing Provision
for Locked Button
4A13B
Bezel: all sides
Mtg. clips: long sides
4A25B
Barriers: short sides
Mtg. clips: long sides
4A26B
Barrier: one short side
Mtg. clips: long sides
4A35
Barriers: long sides
Mtg. clips: long sides
4A36
Barrier: one long side
Mtg. clips: long sides
1-Pole
(SPDT),
5 a. silver contacts
Momentary
Alt. Action
AA
BA
AD
BD
2-Pole
(DPDT),
5 a. silver contacts
Momentary
Alt. Action
EA
FA
ED
FD
1-Pole
(SPDT),
gold contacts
Momentary
Alt. Action
CA
DA
CD
CD
2-Pole
(DPDT),
gold contacts
Momentary
Alt. Action
GA
HA
GD
HD
1-Pole
(SPDT),
10 a. silver contacts
Momentary
Alt. Action
LA
MA
2-Pole
(DPDT),
10 a. silver contacts
Momentary
Alt. Action
NA
PA
1-Pole
(SPDT),
gold alloy contacts
Momentary
Alt. Action
QA
RA
2-Pole
(DPDT),
gold alloy contacts
Momentary
Alt. Action
TA
VA
Example:
4A11BAA11
Black switch housing with a bezel on all
sides, mounting clips on long sides, 1pole momentary-action 5-amp silver contacts, 110N quick-connect/solder terminals, and a T-31⁄4 lamp socket.
MOUNTING CLIP ORIENTATION
Mounting clips on the long sides of the
housing are specified when individually
mounted or when the long sides of strip
mounting housings parallel the long
sides of the panel cutout slot. The most
secure mounting is achieved when the
mounting clips are on the long sides.
Mounting clips on the short sides of the
housing are specified when short sides of
strip mounted housings parallel the long
sides of the panel cutout slot.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches Series 4
Pushbutton Switches and Indicators
106 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
HOW TO ORDER ASSEMBLED
SWITCHES OR INDICATORS
With lamp assembled:
To order a lamp assembled, enter the appropriate ILLUMINATION Code Number,
as shown in the lamp chart on the next
page. Example: 4A11BBA12 is furnished
with a 6-volt lamp installed.
With button assembled:
To order a button assembled in the housing, add the code letters for BUTTON
TYPE, DISPLAY COLOR, and LEGEND
(page 60) to the housing listing. Example:
4A11BBA12AGN is furnished with a green
transmitted-color unlegended button assembled in the housing (and with a 6-volt
lamp installed).
INDICATOR ORDER GUIDE
Order buttons separately from page 107.
4C11B 11
Indicator Housing Style (Black)
Terminals Incandescent
Description .110 Q.C. P.C. Illumination
11
No lamp, has
lamp socket for T-31⁄4
wedge base lamps.
21
#161 12-volt
T-31⁄4 lamp.
31
#656 or 152
28-volt
T-31⁄4 lamp
91
Unlighted,
no lamp socket.
Bezel: all sides 4C11B 4D11B
Mtg. clips: long sides
Bezel: all sides 4C12B 4D12B
Barriers: short sides
Barriers: short sides 4C21B 4D21B
Mtg. clips: long sides
Barriers: short sides 4C22B 4D22B
Mtg. clips: short sides
Barrier: one short side 4C23B 4D23B
Mtg. clips: long sides
Barrier: one short side 4C24B 4D24B
Mtg. clips: short sides
Barriers: long sides 4C31B 4D31B
Mtg. clips: long sides
Barriers: long sides 4C32B 4D32B
Mtg. clips: short sides
Barrier: one long side 4C33B 4D33B
Mtg. clips: long sides
Barrier: one long side 4C34B 4D34B
Mtg. clips: short sides
With Housing Provision
for Locked Button
Bezel: all sides 4C13B 4D13B
Mtg. clips: long sides
Barriers: short side 4C25B 4D25B
Mtg. clips: long sides
Barrier: one short side 4C26B 4D26B
Mtg. clips: long sides
Barriers: long sides 4C35B 4D35B
Mtg. clips: long sides
Barrier: one long side 4C36B 4D36B
Mtg. clips: long sides
Example:
4C11B11
Black indicator housing with a bezel on all
sides, mounting clips on long sides, 110N
quick-connect/solder terminals, and a
socket for a T-31⁄4 lamp.
MOUNTING CLIP ORIENTATION
Mounting clips on the long sides of the
housing are specified when individually
mounted or when the long sides of strip
mounted housings parallel the long sides
of the panel cutout slot. The most secure
mounting is achieved when the mounting
clips are on the long sides.
Mounting clips on the short sides of the
housing are specified when short sides of
strip mounted housings parallel the long
sides of the panel cutout slot.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches Series 4
Pushbutton Switches and Indicators
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 107
BUTTON ORDER GUIDE
4B1 A G N
Button Legend
With Button Display (Legend Order Sheet must accompany
Metal Shell* Type Color all orders for legended buttons)
A
Transmitted color.
5 sides lighted.
1-piece translucent button.
B
Projected color
5 sides lighted.
Translucent white button
& color insert.
C
Dead front,
5 sides lighted.
Transparent black button
& translucent color insert
D
Dead front,
Only face lighted.
Transparent black button
& translucent color insert.
E
Transmitted color.
5 sides lighted.
Transparent colorless
button &
translucent color insert.
U, N, or K type only.
F
Transmitted color.
Only face lighted.
Transparent colorless
button & color insert.
U, N or K type only.
G
Same as type ‘‘A’’
except .250N higher
B
Std. Blue
G
Std. Green
R
Std. Red
S
Transparent Black
(Unlighted
applications only)
Y
Std. Yellow
W
Std. White
(Do not use with
Type B button)
A
Std. Amber
(For use with Type A
or G button only)
U
No legend, button
(incl. insert) unassembled.
(For customer who does own legending.)
Use with any button except 4B1A—
N
No legend, button assembled.
(For applications not requiring legends.)
Use with any button.
L
Legend on button only, button assembled.
(For customer who prefers to have
MICRO SWITCH provide legending.)
Use with any button except E and F.
K
Legend on insert only, button assembled.
(for C, D, E and F button types.)
J
Legends on both button and insert,
button assembled.
Use with C & D button types
4B2
Both button and metal
shell provided.
Button With
Metal Shell,
With
Provision for
Locked Button*
4B3
Both button and metal
shell provided.
Button
Without
Metal Shell
4B1
Button only.
(without metal shell).
For replacement
purposes only.
*To be ordered with switch.
LEGENDING
Pad printed legends
Use Legend Order Sheet FO-63039 (see
page 110) to specify pad printed legends.
Reproduce it on your office copier. Legends are oversprayed for maximum durability.
Film legends
Film legends are not supplied by MICRO
SWITCH. However, this service is readily
available from commercial sources or
may be provided through your in-house
capabilities. The film should be polyester
to withstand lamp heat and must be precision cut, per the dimensions shown on
the next page, to insure proper alignment.
The film fits into a small undercut on the
face of the button insert. The film is held
securely when the outer button and insert
are snapped together. (Note: It is difficult
to disassemble for legend changes without damaging the parts.)
Button and insert should be snapped together prior to being assembled to the
button shell.
Button
Button and metal shell
Example:
4B1AGN
Green (transmitted color) unlegended
button. (If the button shell is also desired,
substitute 4B2 for 4B1.) Note: legended button should be assembled as shown above, with button notch
keyed to lamp removal slot in shell. This
will reduce possibility of lamp droppage
when button is removed from the housing. Buttons are legended in this manner.
P
ush
b utto
ns Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches Series 4
Pushbutton Switches and Indicators
108 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
LAMP ORDER GUIDE
Catalog Illum.
Listing Code Incandescent Lamp Description
4Z221 21 #161 12-volt (T-31⁄4)
4Z231 31 #656 or #152 28-volt (T-31⁄4)
REPLACEMENT PARTS
MOUNTING CLIPS ORDER GUIDE
Catalog
Listing Description
4Z31 For long sides
4Z32 For short sides
* Each housing requires tqo long or short mounting
clips.
LAMP DATA
Following data was compiled from manufacturers’ specifications and is provided for
reference only.
Illum. Industry Design
Code Lamp No. Volts Incandescent Lamp Specifications
21 161 14 Socket volts 14.0 12.0 11.0
Amps .19 .17 .16
MSCP 1.0 .60 .4
Life (hrs. avg.) 4,000 25,000 26,500
31 656 28 Socket volts 28.0 27.0 26.0
or Amps .06 .057 .054
152 MSCP .65 .52 .49
Life (hrs. avg.) 5,000 7,500 10,000
METAL SHELL ORDER GUIDE
Catalog
Listing Description
4Z41 For type 4B1 buttons
4Z42 For type 4B3 buttons
MOUNTING CENTERS FOR STRIP MOUNT
PANEL CUTOUT FOR INDIVIDUAL
MOUNT (any housing style)
PANEL CUTOUT FOR STRIP MOUNT
+0,38 +.015
Dimensions −0,00 −.000Housing
Style Width Length
Short
Sides
Abutting
Full Bezel 79 N (20,1 mm) [No. of units x 1.03 N (26,2 mm)] - .05 N (1,4 mm)
Short Barrier 79 N (20,1 mm) [No. of units x 1.09 N (27,8 mm)] - .12 N (3,0 mm)
Long
Sides
Abutting
Full Bezel .98 N (24,8 mm) [No. of units x .84 N (21,3 mm)] - .05 N (1,4 mm)
Long Barrier .98 N (24,8 mm) [No. of units x .91 N (23,1 mm)] - .12 N (3,0 mm)
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches Series 4
Pushbutton Switches and Indicators
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 109
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (For reference only)
Terminal View
.110 QC terminal Printed circuit
terminal
Quick-connect terminals are .110 N (2,8 mm) wide
by .020 N (0,5 mm) thick. The slot is .130N (3,3 mm)
long by .048 N (1,2 mm). Printed circuit terminals
are: Lamp — .025 (0,6 mm) by .020 N (0,5 mm):
Switch — .025 N (0,6 mm) square.
All terminals are plated to permit soldering.
Panel thickness: .040-.200 in. (1,02-5,08 mm)
Key:
0,0 = mm
0.00 = inches
For proper legend orientation, Series 4 switch when viewed from front of panel, should
have terminals1and 3 up for Figures1& 3 and to the right for Figures 2 and 4. (Figures1-4
on Legend Order Sheet next page.)
Type A Button Type B Button Type C & E Buttons Type D & F Buttons
(5 sides lighted) (5 sides lighted) (5 sides lighted) (Only face lighted)
Transparent Button Transparent Button
Translucent Translucent Type C-Black Type D-Black
Colored Button White Button Type-E Colorless Type F-Colorless
Type G Button
(5 sides lighted)
Translucent Transparent Translucent Opaque Black Insert
Colored Button Colored Insert Colored Insert With Translucent
±.005/0,13
Colored Face
*Thickness: .004 N to .007 N/0,1 to 0,18 (Film furnished by customer)
P
ush
b utto
ns Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches Series 4
Pushbutton Switches and Indicators
110 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches SLP1 Series
Low-Profile Pushbutton Panels
8 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
FEATURES/BENEFITS
1 Designed and manufactured to meet the specific
needs of your application – including these
feature options:
– Custom layout.
– Wide selection of button sizes and colors – capable of replacement from the panel front.
– Full-face lighted buttons.
– Legend service on buttons.
– Can be furnished wired-only or with built-in interface electronics.
– Provision for including lighted message displays.
– Termination direct to PC board.
– Custom enclosures available.
1 Tactile feedback of switching action.
1 Low-cost installation – complete assembly is
furnished ready to attach with mounting screws.
Mass termination to plug-in connector saves
wiring time.
1 Low energy contacts – compatible with
microprocessors and other low level logic
circuitry.
1 Advanced construction and manufacturing
processes reflect the MICRO SWITCH
commitment to high quality, reliability, and
performance.
These low-profile pushbutton panels
combine the latest advancements in conductive rubber switching technology and
pushbuttons in a custom package, tailored to your requirements. They meet
the needs for reliable manual switching in
applications that do not normally require
high speed thruput.
Featuring .100 inch (2,4 mm) high buttons
and a .505 inch (12,8 mm) panel frame
depth, their low profile easily adapts to
your system’s styling and package size
requirements. Your design can include a
provision for digital readouts, CRTs, LCDs
and other solid state lighted message displays, encoders, microprocessors, etc. –
which can be either assembled by you or
MICRO SWITCH.
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
1 Marine Control Panels
1 Instrumentation
1 Banking Machines
1 Office Copiers
1 Test Equipment
1 Vending Machines
1 Medical Monitoring and Diagnostic
Devices
1 Telecommunications Equipment
1 Hand-Held Controllers
1 Programmable Controllers
1 Security Entrance Control
1 Industrial Controls
SPECIFICATIONS
Environmental
Operating Temperature –40°C to 65°C (–40° to 149°F)
Storage Temperature –40°C to 70°C (–40° to 158°F)
Altitude –100 to 50,000 ft.
Vibration MIL-STD-202F, Method 204, Condition A – frequency to 500
cycles: .06 in. double amplitude or 10 G’s and a frequency
range of 10 to 500 cycles.
Shock MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B, Condition A – 50 G’s, 1/2 sine, 11
millisecond pulse.
Sulphur Atmosphere Withstands a sulphur atmosphere at 80% RH. 60°C (140°F) for
10 days
Steady State Humidity MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B, Condition B – 90-95% RH at 40°C
for 96 hours. Insulation resistance will not be less than 10
megohmns min.
Mechanical
Travel (nominal) 1,3 mm (.05 in.)
Operating Force (typical) 125 grams (4.4 oz. approx.)
Operating Life 10 x 106 operations, 95% survival.
Force deflection (nominal) Peak force, 125 grams (4.4 oz. approx.); Drop-off force, 60
grams (2.1 oz. approx.) (See force deflection curve chart.)
Electrical
Contact Rating 30 mA @ 12 VDC, .500 sec. contact duration
Closed Circuit Resistance 500 ohms max. over life.
Open Circuit Resistance 10 megohmns min.
Contact Disturbance Time 10 millisec. max. at 2 lbs. (8,9 Newtons) full overtravel force,
when mechanically actuated at 4 in. (10,6 mm) sec. plunger
velocity.
Capacitance Less than 20 picofarads per station.
Circuitry X-Y or common bus.
LED Vf Forward Voltage: 5V
If Forward Current: 30 mA typ.
Vr Reverse Voltage: 4V
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches SLP1 Series
Low-Profile Pushbutton Panels
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 9
SLP1 ORDER GUIDE (All possible combinations may not be available.)
SLP1 3 2 A 12 27—
Button Color1
SLP Series Circuitry Lighting Legend Matrix Unlighted Lighted
SLP1 2-XY
3-Common
Bus
0-Unlighted
1-Red LEDs
2-Green LEDs
3-Yellow LEDs
4-Combination
of LEDs
A-No Legend
B-Legended
Black ink2
C-Legended
White ink2
D-Legended
Black and
White ink2
4-1×4
12-3×4
16-4×4
20-4×5
-10 Gray -25 Red
-11 White -26 Yellow
-12 Red -27 Green
-13 Yellow -28 White
-14 Green -29 Clear
-15 Green (matches
lighted green)
-16 Blue
-18 Black
1 Factory will assign non-standard LED and button colors and combinations. Complete SLP Custom Order Sheet.
2 SLP Custom Order Sheet must accompany order.
Example:
SLP132A12-27 Common bus circuitry, green LEDS, no legend, 3×4 with green buttons.
INDIVIDUAL BUTTON CATALOGING
SLP51 A 20 G—
Open Color
Button Style Field Legending Unlighted Lighted
SLP51-Unlighted
SLP52-Lighted
A 10-No legend
20-Legended
Black ink1
21-Legended
White ink2
–R Red
–G Green
–U Green (matches
lighted green)
–Y Yellow
–B Blue
–WWhite
–K Black
–A Gray
–R Red
–U Green
–Y Yellow
–W White
1 SLP Custom Order Sheet must accompany order.
Example: SLP51A20-G
Green unlighted button legended
with black ink.
CONSTRUCTION
The top switching layer is a conductive
rubber boot sheet (see cutaway drawing). When force is applied to a button,
contact is made between the boot and the
bottom circuit layer on a printed circuit
board. The boots impart an excellent tactile feedback (see force deflection curve
chart).
A molded plastic housing, with panel
slots for buttons and mounting holes in
each corner, is placed over all components and ultrasonically welded to the
printed circuit board. Interface circuitry
can be easily added to the PCB by the user or furnished built-in.
CUTAWAY VIEW
ILLUMINATION
Full face button lighting is provided by
red, green, and yellow LEDs. (LED colors
should be the same as the button they illuminate.) The standard SLP1 offering is for
use under general office lighting conditions, which is usually about 80 foot candles. (LEDs with less brightness can be
provided.)
TERMINATION
A header type connector provides termination directly from the printed circuit
board. Products shown here have
straight exit headers (see mounting dimension drawings). Right angle exit
header connectors can also be furnished.
Connector pins are .025 inch (0,64mm)
square, on .100 inch (2,54 mm) centers,
by .318 inch long. Suitable for use with
vast array connector manufacturers’
standard products.
Force Deflection Curve
P
ush
b utto
n P
anels
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches SLP1 Series
Low-Profile Pushbutton Panels
10 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
1 X 4 PANEL
Note: Connector pins are .418 in./10,6 mm long.
LIGHTED
With C, Bus Sw. Cktry.
Station Switch LED Pins:
No.s Pins: Pos. Neg.
1 3-8 1-5
2 4-8 2-5
3 6-8 10-5
4 7-8 9-5
NON-LIGHTED
Station Switch
No. Pins
1 1-5
2 2-5
3 3-5
4 4-5
3 X 4 PANEL
Note: Connector pins are .418 in./10,6 mm long.
LIGHTED
With X-Y Sw. Cktry. With C. Bus Cktry.
Station Switch LED Pins: Switch LED Pins:
Nos. Pins: Pos. Neg. Pins: Pos. Neg.
1 6-7 1-8 9-10 1-12
2 6-9 15-8 9-14 21-12
3 6-10 19-8 9-20 25-12
4 11-7 2-8 9-7 2-12
5 11-9 16-8 9-11 22-12
6 11-10 20-8 9-18 26-12
7 12-7 3-8 9-6 3-12
8 12-9 13-8 9-13 19-12
9 12-10 17-8 9-17 23-12
10 14-7 4-8 9-8 4-12
11 14-9 5-8 9-15 5-12
12 14-10 18-8 9-16 24-12
NON-LIGHTED
With X-Y
Station Cktry. With C. Bus Ckty.
Nos. Switch Pins: Switch Pins:
1 4-5 4-13
2 4-6 8-13
3 4-7 12-13
4 3-5 3-13
5 3-6 7-13
6 3-7 11-13
7 2-5 2-13
8 2-6 6-13
9 2-7 10-13
10 1-5 1-13
11 1-6 5-13
12 1-7 9-13
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches SLP1 Series
Low-Profile Pushbutton Panels
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 11
4 x 4 PANEL
Note: Connector pins are .418 in./10,6 mm long.
LIGHTED
With X-Y Sw. Cktry. With C. Bus Sw. Cktry.
Station Switch LED Pins: Switch LED Pins:
Nos. Pins: Pos. Neg. Pins: Pos. Neg.
1 15-9 2-10 3-27 2-5
2 15-12 5-10 11-27 10-5
3 15-13 21-10 24-27 31-5
4 15-16 26-10 28-27 34-5
5 18-9 1-10 4-27 1-5
6 18-12 7-10 9-27 13-5
7 18-13 6-10 23-27 12-5
8 18-16 25-10 25-27 33-5
9 17-9 3-10 6-27 7-5
10 17-12 14-10 16-27 18-5
11 17-13 24-10 26-27 22-5
12 17-16 22-10 21-27 32-5
13 20-9 4-10 17-27 8-5
14 20-12 11-10 20-27 15-5
15 20-13 8-10 19-27 14-5
16 20-16 19-10 30-27 29-5
NON-LIGHTED
With X-Y
Station Cktry. With C. Bus Cktry.
Nos. Switch Pins: Switch Pins:
1 3-2 4-17
2 3-6 8-17
3 3-7 12-17
4 3-8 16-17
5 5-2 3-17
6 5-6 7-17
7 5-7 11-17
8 5-8 15-17
9 4-2 2-17
10 4-6 6-17
11 4-7 10-17
12 4-8 14-17
13 1-2 1-17
14 1-6 5-17
15 1-7 9-17
16 1-8 13-17
5 X 4 PANEL
Note: Connector pins are .418 in./10,6 mm long.
NOTE:
In addition to the recessed mounting hole style shown, units can be
furnished with straight thru-holes for rear panel mounting or blind holes
for front panel mounting (see drawings below).
Rear Panel Mount Front Panel Mount
LIGHTED 5 x 4 PANEL
With X-Y Sw. Cktry. With C. Bus Cktry.
Station Switch LED Pins: Switch LED Pins:
Nos. Pins: Pos. Neg. Pins: Pos. Neg.
1 15-7 3-23 3-38 7-28
2 15-8 2-23 8-38 2-28
3 15-13 1-23 22-38 1-28
4 14-21 29-23 32-38 41-28
5 15-26 30-23 37-38 33-28
6 19-7 4-23 4-38 10-28
7 19-8 9-23 15-38 11-28
8 19-13 18-23 21-38 19-28
9 19-21 25-23 31-38 30-28
10 19-26 28-23 40-38 29-28
11 17-7 5-23 5-38 9-28
12 17-8 11-23 17-38 13-28
13 17-13 16-23 24-38 20-28
14 17-21 20-23 36-38 25-28
15 17-26 27-23 42-38 34-28
16 14-7 6-23 6-38 12-28
17 14-8 10-23 18-38 14-28
18 14-13 12-23 23-38 16-28
19 14-21 22-23 35-38 26-28
20 14-26 24-23 39-38 27-28
NON-LIGHTED
With X-Y
Station Cktry. With C. Bus Cktry.
Nos. Switch Pins: Switch Pins:
1 4-5 4-21
2 4-6 8-21
3 4-7 12-21
4 4-8 16-21
5 4-9 20-21
6 3-5 3-21
7 3-6 7-21
8 3-7 11-21
9 3-8 15-21
10 3-9 19-21
11 2-5 2-21
12 2-6 6-21
13 2-7 10-21
14 2-8 14-21
15 2-9 18-21
16 1-5 1-21
17 1-6 5-21
18 1-7 9-21
19 1-8 13-21
20 1-9 17-21
P
ush
b utto
n P
anels
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches SLP1 Series
Custom Low-Profile Pushbutton Panels
12 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
MODULAR SWITCH DESIGN
PROVIDES CUSTOM FLEXIBILITY
This new modular switch design incorporates the same basic construction features as the MICRO SWITCH SLP pushbutton panel, plus gives you the flexibility
of specifying any switch matrix configuration.
Standard buttons are .583-inch square.
Other button sizes can be furnished to
suit your application needs.
The modular switch construction features
good ergonomics with positive tactile
feedback which imparts a good feel of the
switching action, and compatibility with
microprocessors and other low-level logic circuitry.
The addition of a polyurethane sheet, enables the SLP modular switch to meet water spray and dust sections of NEMA 12.
HOW TO SPECIFY CUSTOM ARRAYS
Use the SLP Custom Order Sheet to
specify your desired button layout, button
colors, LED colors (unless buttons are to
be unlighted), and legend sizes and colors (unless the buttons are to be unlegended).
A copy of the order sheet is on the next
two pages. Reproduce it on your office
copier or request copies of form
FO-64419.
Note: To enhance the display when the
buttons are to be lighted by LEDs, the buttons should be either the same color as
the LEDs or white buttons.
APPLICATION ASSISTANCE
Our field engineer/factory team will be
happy to work with you every step of the
way—through concept, design, and
manufacturing—to help insure your custom package has a quality appearance
and performs just the way you want it.
Contact the 800 number.
PANEL SEAL ACCESSORY
SLP 3 × 4 array with panel seal.
Elastomer silicon seals fit over SLP panels to help protect their circuitry and behind panel components from contaminants that might enter through the switch.
See photo. The seal is positioned between rear mounted units and the user’s
mounting panel. When properly installed,
it meets NEMA 13, providing a degree of
protection against dust, spraying of water, oil, detergent, and non-corrosive coolant. (Installation instructions furnished
with seals.)
Silicon has good natural resistance to ultraviolet light and no UV inhibitors are required. This material has been thoroughly
evaluated for chemical resistance. For
further information, contact the 800 number. Use of the seal does not lessen operating life.
Note:
SLP panels with thru-hole mounting are
recommended for use with the panel seal.
Sealing is most effective when mounting
screws are torqued to 6±1.5 in./lbs.
ORDER GUIDE – PANEL SEALS
Array Catalog Listing
1×4 SLP61-4
3×4 SLP61-12
4×4 SLP61-16
5×4 SLP61-20
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches SLP1 Series
Low-Profile Pushbutton Panels
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 13
P
ush
b utto
n P
anels
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches SLP1 Series
Low-Profile Pushbutton Panels
14 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches SLP1 Series
Low-Profile Pushbutton Panels
For application help: call 1-800-537-6945. Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control 15
P
ush
b utto
n P
anels
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches SN/SD Series
Hall Effect Keyboards/Modules
16 Honeywell 1 MICRO SWITCH Sensing and Control For application help: call 1-800-537-6945.
SD HALL EFFECT KEYBOARDS
MICRO SWITCH SD Series Hall effect
keyboards meet high performance, custom design, full-travel keyboard needs.
They’re unsurpassed for switch speed,
reliability and accuracy. Modular construction allows flexibility in keyboard layout and size.
Hall effect keyboards are offered in standard profile and low profile, sealed or unsealed, in standard arrays, and in custom
arrays tailored to fit the user’s specific application. Hall effect keyboards are capable of handling very high throughput applications.
A sealed version of the Hall effect keyboard (101SD29-2E-S-H) designed for
harsh duty industrial environments meets
NEMA 4 and 13 water/moisture resistance standards.
Request Product Sheets:
26SD – 84-02506
32SD – 84-02502
63SD – 84-02504
101SD – 84-02501
12/16SD – 84-02607
SN/SD HALL EFFECT KEYSWITCH
MODULES
SN and SD Series keyswitch modules are
ideal for building custom arrays, such as
keyboards, control/switch panels, and
switch matrices. Lighted display options
are available.
SN modules are available in types that
can be either snap-in panel mounted or
mounted directly to printed circuit boards
without additional mounting or support
hardware. Request Product Sheet 8402508.
SD modules have a lower profile than SN.
They securely mount in a metal grid plate
which provides support and enhances
good keytop alignment between stations
and rows. Request Product Sheet 8402505.
SD Grid Plate Mount
SN PC Board Mount
SN Snap-in Panel Mount
For further information on Hall effect
keyboards, keytops, and modules, contact your nearest MICRO SWITCH sales
office. Or call 1-800-537-6945.
Courtesy of Steven Engineering , Inc. ! 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 ! Main Office: (650) 588-9200 ! Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200 ! www.stevenengineering.com
Manual Switches
Sealed Toggle Switches NT Series/Flat Base
FEATURES
• Completely sealed
switching chamber
• IP67/IP68
• NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 13
• 2- or 3-position maintained
and momentary action
• Flat base with quick
connect terminals – mating
connectors are available
• Spring-loaded actuating
mechanism provides
excellent tactile feedback
GENERAL INFORMATION
Honeywell NT Series toggle switches meet the need for a rugged, costeffective toggle switch. Quality construction features include a seal between
the toggle lever and bushing, and between the cover and case. These
switches can be used where panels are subject to splashes, hosedowns, or
outdoor environments. Complete sealing of the switching chamber enables
NT toggles to comply with UL 508, paragraph 13.3 hosedown test. They will
also withstand exposure to heavy accumulations of early morning dew that
may condense on the control panel in cabs of vehicles left outdoors
overnight. The “Easy Start” threaded bushing enables quick alignment of the
mounting nut to decrease the chance of cross threading. The panel stand-off
with O-ring feature available on some listings eliminates the need for behindthe-panel hardware, provides a uniform panel height, and provides a panelto-cover seal.
• UL recognized, File
E12252, Vol. 1, Section 44
• CSA certified, CE certified
• Optional panel stand-off
with O-ring panel seal
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
• Industrial equipment
• Military and commercial
aviation
• Construction equipment
• Test instruments UL AND CSA ELECTRICAL RATINGS
• Agricultural machinery Rating Code Electrical rating
L192
10 amps, 125, 250, 277 Vac; ¼ Hp, 125 Vac; ½ Hp, 250, 277 Vac;
3 amps, 125 Vac “L”
L191
15 amps, 125, 250, 277 Vac; ½ Hp, 125 Vac; 1 Hp, 250, 277 Vac;
5 amps, 125 Vac “L”
• Process control
• Medical instrumentation
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
Elect.
Rating
Code
28 Volts DC 115 Vdc
250
Vdc
115 Vac,
60 Hz & 400 Hz
230
Vac
Ind. Res. Lamp Res. Res. Ind. Res. Lamp Res
1 12 20 5 0.75 0.5 10 15 3 6
2 10 15 4 0.75 0.5 7 15 2 6
3 15 20 7 0.75 0.5 15 15 4 6
4 10 18 5 0.75 0.5 8 11 2 6
WARNING
PERSONAL INJURY
DO NOT USE these
products as safety or
emergency stop devices or
in any other application
where failure of the product
could result in personal
injury.
Failure to comply with
these instructions could
result in death or serious
injury.
Sensing and Control
WARNING
MISUSE OF DOCUMENTATION
• The information presented in this product sheet is for reference only. Do
not use this document as a product installation guide.
• Complete installation, operation, and maintenance information is provided
in the instructions supplied with each product.
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or
serious injury.
Manual Switches
Sealed Toggle Switches NT Series/Flat Base
NT 2-POSITION ORDER GUIDE
Circuits Made with Toggle At:
No. of
poles Keyway Position
Opposite
Keyway
UL
Rating
Code
Elect. Rating
Code
Catalog Listing
Toggle Q-C
1 OFF 2-3 L191 1 31NT91-2
1-2 2-3 L191 1 31NT91-3
OFF** 2-3 L192 2 31NT91-4
1-2** OFF L192 2 31NT91-6
1-2** 2-3 L192 2 31NT91-8
2 OFF 2-3, 5-6 L191 3 32NT91-2
1-2, 4-5 2-3, 5-6 L191 3 32NT91-3
OFF** 2-3, 5-6 L192 4 32NT91-4
1-2, 4-5** OFF L192 4 32NT91-6
1-2, 4-5** 2-3, 5-6 L192 4 32NT91-8
** These positions are momentary. All others are maintained.
NT 2-POSITION ORDER GUIDE • PANEL STAND-OFF FEATURE
Circuits Made with Toggle At:
No. of
poles Keyway Position
Opposite
Keyway
UL
Rating
Code
Elect. Rating
Code
Catalog Listing
Toggle Q-C
1 OFF 2-3 L191 1
631NT91-2
631NT91-3
631NT91-4
631NT91-6
631NT91-8
2 OFF 2-3, 5-6 L191 3 632NT91-2
1-2, 4-5 2-3, 5-6 L191 3 632NT91-3 632NT91-4
1-2, 4-5** OFF L192 4 632NT91-6 632NT91-8
** These positions are momentary. All others are maintained. Pick up Keyway Position / Opposite Keyway, etc from standard listings above
that do not have the panel stand-off feature.
MATING CONNECTORS ORDER GUIDE
Description Catalog listing
2-pole connector 19PA168-NT
1-pole connector, same package size as 2-pole connector 19PA169-NT
2 Honeywell • Sensing and Control
Manual Switches
Sealed Toggle Switches NT Series/Flat Base
NT 3-POSITION ORDER GUIDE
Circuits made with toggle at:
No. of
poles Keyway Position Center Position Opposite Keyway
UL
Rating
Code
Elect. Rating
Code
Catalog Listing
Toggle Q-C
1 1-2 OFF 2-3 L191 1 31NT91-1
1-2** OFF 2-3 L192 2 31NT91-5
1-2** OFF 2-3** L192 2 31NT91-7
NONE*** OFF 2-3 L191 1 31NT91-21
NONE*** 1-2 2-3 L191 1 31NT91-31
NONE*** 1-2 2-3** L192 2 31NT91-51
1-2** OFF NONE*** L192 2 31NT91-61
2 1-2, 4-5 OFF 2-3, 5-6 L191 3 32NT91-1
1-2, 4-5** OFF 2-3, 5-6 L192 4 32NT91-5
1-2, 4-5** OFF 2-3, 5-6** L192 4 32NT91-7
NONE*** OFF 2-3, 5-6 L191 3 32NT91-21
NONE*** 1-2, 4-5 2-3, 5-6 L191